Home

505 PLC WorkShop User Guide

1. 7AR AA EH amp _ Add Hardware Remove Hardware GSD Filename SIEMS8064 GSE II Vendor SIEMENS Model IM 178 4 Add Slave Close 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for any additional slave devices you wish to add to the con figuration Click Close when finished 4 Configurethe device by selectingit from the Network Tree or by double clicking the devicefromwithin the Master tab The Slave tab forthe selected device appears Station Type Slave DF 1 0 State Offline Device File SIEM8064 GSE Status Offline Slave Parameters Slave Status 2 PROFIBUS Address Enabled Station Name Disabled Modules Module WO Address _ End Slave Config 219 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration 5 By default the configurator assigns the next available consecutive Profibus address to the device This address as well as the displayed name of the device can be changed in the Slave Tab 6 Enable or disable the slave by selecting Enabled or Disabled from the Slave Status group box 7 Click Apply or OK to keep the changes or if online to write the changes to the master 8 See Configuring and Addressing Profibus I O Modules to learn how to assign and address Profibus I O Configuring and Addressing Profibus I O Modules Before entering your I O configuration be aware of the following
2. j Add Hardware Remove Hardware GSD Filename SIEM8064 GSE Vendor SIEMENS Model IM 178 4 ce wish to add Click Open to add the device Name _ DRO200A7 GSD _ DRO300A7 GSD _ 1058020 GSD _ 1078020 GSD Date modified 3 2 1999 8 53 AM 4 12 2000 4 53 PM 2 8 1999 5 05 PM 2 8 1999 5 05 PM 2 8 1999 5 04 PM m 210 T 5 Click Add Hardware and browse for the device master file for the device you GSD File GSD File GSD File GSD File GSD File PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration NOTE Device manufacturers often supply more than one device master file for a single device to support multiple languages These files have different file extensions that identify the lan guage for which the file was written These extension include but are not limited to GSE English GSF French GSG German GSI Italian GSP Por tuguese and GSS Spanish The GSD extension represents a default or language neu tral file When adding a device master file this GSD extension is selected by default when you browse for your file Selecting the Files of type drop down menu allows you to specify a language specific device mastet file 6 When adding one or more GSD files to the Hardware Directory the configurator scans the file for unsupported or unrecognized information a
3. Vendor SIEMENS Model IM 178 4 Add Slave Close Add Hardware allows you to add additional slave devices by loading their GSD file into the directory See Device Master Files for more information Remove Hardware removes the selected device from the Hardware Directory and de letes the stored GSD file Add Slave adds the selected device to the configuration This device will appear in the Network Tree as well as the Master Tab Using the Profibus Configurator Using the Profibus Configurator Your objective in creating a configuration with the Profibus Configurator is to define mod ule types for each slave and assign starting I O addresses to each module Once you accomplish that you can program Profibus I O modules just as you would 505 I O The tables below provides the information you need in order to configure your slave de vices in the Profibus Configurator 205 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration CREATING A NEW PROFIBUS NETWORK Open or create a pro You can modify an existing program file con gram file in WorkShop figuration if appropriate or create a new file The PLC Type selected for the program file will act as the Profibus master Add device files Add slave device description files GSD that represent each slave device on the network to the Hardware Directory to begin network con figuration Modify bus parame
4. Another computer Use the Browse button for searching for and selecting another computer Once chosen click OK to accept the selection 657 658 Chapter 14 Index 2 20 Offset 373 387 5 575 72 185 339 340 342 Complete Restart 340 Connecting Online 72 Global Memory 185 Partial Restart 339 Port Configuration 72 Power Up Restart 339 Required Applications 342 VME Memory 185 A ABS 483 Absolute Value 483 Access Level 41 42 324 326 331 332 Activity Audit 614 Activity Audit Setup Dialog 614 ADD 481 Addition 481 Address 198 220 297 299 537 Forms Table 537 Profibus 199 220 Trace 299 Used 297 Address Trace 299 Address Network Mode 68 661 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index 20 Offset Analog Alarms Addresses 145 addressing Smart Connect modules 238 Alarm Title 370 Always Show Logic Toolbars 144 Analog Alarms 92 177 367 369 377 387 Alarm Title 370 Analog Alarm Editor 367 Clamp Setpoint Low High 374 Copy 369 Data Element Types 377 Deadband 375 Deviation Orange Alarm 376 Deviation Yellow Alarm 375 High Process Variable Range 372 Low Process Variable Range 372 Monitor Broken Transmitter Alarm 376 Monitor Deviation 375 Monitor Low Low High High 373 Monitor Low High 373 Monitor Rate of Change 376 Monitor Remote Setpoint 374 Offset 387 Output is Bipolar 387 Parameters 370 Paste 369 Printing 92 Process Variable Address 372 Process Variable Alarm High 374 Process
5. WXOR 487 V V Flag Address 370 385 X V Memoty 178 XSUB 520 Valid Address Types 537 Validate and Enter 272 Variable Memory 178 W WAND 485 Website 24 While 607 Windows 31 WOR 486 Word And 485 Word Exclusive Or 487 Word Or 486 Word Rotate 480 Word Shift Register 181 479 Word to Table 503 Word To Table And 504 Word to Table Exclusive Or 506 Word to Table Or 505 Workgroups 639 WROT 480 WTOT 503 WTTA 504 WTTO 505 WTTXO 506 682
6. 22 2 2 20 0 0 0 eee cence eee eee eee e eens 539 Convert BCD To Binary BUDBIN 4 etes eid A a 541 Convert Binary To BCD BINBGDY 2022 205 i2 5 Jee da biee ysenoeaataddsaraauedeustehees 542 Call Subroutine CALI oon eese ae ite e ale AM eee AM 543 Correlated Data Table CDT 6 suo eod evasit bh sec A pets aoe heed M CLE 546 Deaton Error A P 548 Fall Through Shift Register Input FTSR IN o oooocococococococcococococococonicnooos 549 Fall Through Shift Register Output FTSR OUD o ooooocococcococcocococconcnconinoo 552 Dor extADOIR NES o dde taces tuba ses ue CORR URE Te PMO scd 555 Go To Label GOTO LABEI ni tinid 557 If Functions F TIF THEN ELSE ENDIP 0 0 02 0 02 000202c0 cece ee eee 559 Integer Math IMATH 020 020 0222 cece eee e ce e eee ec ec ee sere e eee Ir irirIil 561 Wea ea CLEA ENG scat erect A IN 564 Real ate ser Math MATH uestem bes ees Guts E ann tende ues Ratchet tg 566 Pack Data PACK TO E ROM ee pue Lecce teeth ropes o Rx Ec At 572 pack Analog Alarm Data AA od 578 Pack Toop Data PACK BOOP oo costas a e lt 581 Pack Ramp Soak Data A cease oda lee tit EE 584 Pet Scan Watchdog BET WI ssl ii 589 PHC A A aha DATE EE 590 Return from SF Program Subroutine RETURN 0 0 0 0 00 0020eceee eee 593 Stato Values SCALE stessu o dak a 594 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents Seqvicntial Data Table SDT o ea e CMS 596 o A A A PSEC Ree ae 599 Synchronous Shin Register si ed
7. e Security Auditing can be configured for each specific feature on an individual or group basis Audit information will be logged to the Event Viewer in the Se curity Log section e A link to the Event Viewer will be provided allowing quick access to the Se curity Log The event viewer can also be accessed under Administrative Tools in Control Panel Launching the Security Configurator The configuration application may be launched from either the Start menu in Windows or from within the WorkShop client 3 Accessories 3 zenOn 5 50 Soft Works 33 505 softsho gt EX PLC WorkShop 32 For Modicon 3 snagit 6 gt EX sos workshop Y FTLogger bx FTTrend FTTrend Manual km Security 651 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server The Security Configurator application will launch and if the user is not in the client at the same time the Security Server Location dialog may open Both are shown below When launched from the Start menu the Security Server Location dialog will prompt the uset to select the machine that the server will run on Security Server Location Select the computer running FasTrak security server Local C Remote Location 652 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server or FTSecCfg File Edit view He
8. 2 J Ahardware key was not found Verify the key is attached to your parallel port and click Retry This software may also run in Demo mode without a key Demo Exit If you see this message check to see that the FasTrak K EY is e Connected to a USB or parallel port e If connected to a parallel port connected before printers or other devices e See Attaching the FasTrak K EY for more information After you have checked the key s installation load PLC WorkShop from the icon If PLC WorkShop continues to not detect the FasTrak K EY please call FasTrak Customer Sup port at 262 238 8088 immediately When 505 WorkShop has loaded completely the 505 WorkShop window appeats 56 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Main Window Main Window Main Window The PLC WorkShop window is the starting point for all your work The key features of the window are designated with arrows on the sample illustrated below Definitions of each fea ture ate next followed by more detailed information E 505 WorkShop EXAMPLE File Edit View Program Diagnostics PLC Utilities Options Window Help o s u e w a BH fr oo 0 8 Eh 7 BCBI BIBC CALL CDT ELSE ENIF EXIT FIN FOUTI GOTO IF IIF IMAT LBL LLAG MATH PACK PECKA PEKL PECKA PH Relay T C Drum Compare BitOps Math Logic Move Control Special continuously toggles Cl and CZ lon and off EXPANDER EXPA
9. Immediate I O Read Write IORW The Immediate I O Read Write IORW instruction allows you to perform an immediate read or write to a discrete or word I O module on the local base For inputs the data trans fer is directly from the I O modules into the image register For outputs the data transfer is directly from the image register to the I O modules When the instruction has power the IORW instruction is executed The IORW supports these features e The data transfer takes place when the instruction is executed in RLL e For inputs X and WX the status of the specified number of points is copied from the I O module to the image register e For outputs Y and WY the status of the specified number of points is copied from the image register to the I O module e Output status follows input status unless an error occurs e For inputs when the module is not preset or does not match I O configuration the specified input points in the image register are cleared to zero and the output turns off e For outputs when the module is not present or does not match I O con figuration the status of the specified output points in the image register is not copied to the I O module and the output turn off NOTE When the IORW copies Y values from the image register to a module the current state of the Y points in the image reg ister ate written to the module IF you want these Ys to be controlled by an MCR or a JMP the MCR or JMP mus
10. Network Mode Description Rows 3 4 T as Iv Inline XRef exclude CRs to 0 Tag Rows 2 ES Ex iv v SFP Range from to SE Dini See Fe Descnpions iv M SFS Range from to Instruction Width 15 TAS Network Address Marker Print Left Column One Width 40 reete Multiple E Column Two Width 40 ue Save as Defaults Restore Defaults Ladder Font Select the All check box to print the entire range of the item selected To print a selection clear the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box If you selected to print ladder logic the ladder reference numbering can be either PLC memory address mode or network address mode The selected radio button below lad der range determines which mode is printed The Network Address or PLC Memory Address is printed on the top left or right of ladder and can be disabled to not print at all The selection is made in the Network Address Marker field When selecting Networks Addresses per Page as Single or Multiple use the following information When ptinting Single Networks addresses per Page each network begins on a new page When printing Multiple Networks Addresses per Page as many net works addresses that can fit on a single page will be printed However if the network is not the first network on the page and the network is broken across more than one page but can fit on a page and if it would start a new page then the network begins on a
11. Output Table the starting address for the output table Valid descriptors are in teger addresses addresses containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 or teal addresses addresses containing a real value such as 33 642 V120 V100 2 or WY55 Table Length the length of each table and must be a value greater than zero Valid descriptors are integer addresses or values any integer value or address con taining an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 NOTE When used in a compiled Special Function program or sub routine Input Table and Output Table must be static tables the table s base address must be a V K G VMS or VMM address and Table Length must be specified as a value 546 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Correlated Data Table CDT CDT Statement Operation e When CDT is executed the CDT compares the value of an input The element specified in Input is compared to a pre existing table of values having a starting ad dress specified in Input Table The first value in the input table that is greater than or equal to the input is located A value in a second pre existing table starting ad dress specified in Output Table that correlates with the selected value in the input table is written to an output address specified in Output The input table must be in ascending order That is the lowest value is located in the lowest memory location and the hig
12. PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays Password Mode Access Level Password Aliases Use Aliases Edit Aliases Close Help The controls within the Password Aliases group box are enabled only when either FasTrak Security or NT Authentication Security are in use When these controls are clicked a valid security administrator password must be entered The Use Aliases Check Box When attaching to a PLC which contains a password the Enter Password dialog requires the correct PLC password before granting access to the PLC e Ifthe Use Aliasescheck box is not selected the actual password stored in the PLC must be entered e If this check box is selected the PLC password alias associated with the PLC s ac tual password must be entered instead The Edit Aliases Button The list of PLC passwords and the aliases with which they are associated can be accessed by clicking the Edit Aliases button Clicking this button displays the PLC Password Ali ases dialog below 335 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays THE PLC PASSWORD ALIASES DIALOG Click the Edit Aliasesbutton above to display the PLC Password Aliases dialog below The list box contains the PLC password and PLC password alias pairs already entered PLC Password Aliases Passwords Aliases New Lm THE NEW BUTTON Click the
13. RLL Instructions Control Instructions network as the MCRE Make user that the contact that controls the MCRE is not con trolled by the MCR Return From Subroutine RTN The Return from Subroutine RTN instruction ends the execution of a RLL subroutine and returns program execution to the network following the GTS instruction A RLL subroutine is executed until a RTN instruction is encountered When an active RTN is reached in the subroutine execution is returned to the first instruction following the GTS instruction in the RLL program The RTN instruction can be either unconditional ot conditional The conditional RTN can be used within a subroutine to satisfy a condition that requires termination of the subroutine The unconditional RTN must be use d as the last instruction in a subroutine NOTE RTN requires no parameters Go to Subroutine GTS The Go to Subroutine GTS allows you to write RLL programs preceded by a subroutine number and call them to be used where they are needed A reference number is entered to designate the subroutine number When power is passed to the input of the GTS instruction the RLL program calls the sub routine indicated by the reference number If there is no power flow to the GTS instruction the subroutine is not called When online it is important to create the sub routine and all of the instructions required to define a subroutine END RTN SBR GTS PGTS PGTSZ BEFORE placing the pro
14. The PPX 505 CP2572 module directly supports 10BaseT UTP cabling If your existing network does not use UTP but the cabling medium is IEEE 802 3 compliant you can pur chase a transceiver that connects the media to the AUI port on the module Consult the SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP2572 User Manual order number PPX 505 8132 1 or the CTI 2572 Ethernet TCP IP Adapter Installation and Operation Guide order number 062 00146 for information about how to connect cables to the 10bT or AUI port of your module Consult the Siemens IK 10 cat alog for information about how to purchase a Siemens transceiver if you need to use it with the AUI port Testing the Connection with PING Once the board has been configured you can test the settings by using a DOS command line utility called PING comes with the TCP IP stack The program sends several test messages to the IP address that you specify on the command line For example PING 201 98 1 8 will test the connection to 505 TCP IP 1 shown above There should be four successful replies to the PING command If PING is not successful there is a prob lem with the network settings or the 505 TCP IP board configuration If PING does not work 505 WorkShop will not be able to connect to the PLC After PING has successful replies you can configure a TCP IP connection in 505 Work Shop and open an online window TCP IP Communication Settings To configure your interface b
15. e A variable count with any readable word The value of the count is determined by the contents of this work when the MOVE executes The count range is 0 32767 where O means that no elements are moved Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Constant 0 32767 TS Word Constant Form A direct or indirect Constant 2048 2047 IS Blank Constant W otd Form A Blank Constant 0 TD Word Address 65535 Blank Constant Word Form A Indirect address Form B Direct Address Word Constant Form A Blank Constant 0 65535 Form A Constant 0 32767 Move Word MOVW The Move Word MOVW instruction copies up to 256 contiguous words from one lo cation to another The starting address for the words to be moved is specified by A and the starting memory location for their destination is specified by B All words are copied in a single scan 492 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions When power is passed to the input of the MOVW the instruction is executed The op eration of the MOVW is described as follows e A table of up to 256 N words having a starting memory location specified by A are copied e Ifaconstant value is specified in A then the constant is copied to all destination locations e The words are copied to a destination beginning at the memory location des ignated by B e The output is turned on when the instruction is executed Par
16. 2020202eeeeeeee ecco 271 Validate and Pat e on MEE EI sat 272 a A G pe a iaie a 273 ia A a e A Lis on a beet E 273 O 215 a ssa nae aeee A sd RU e eee Lia 275 Search and Replace fice tessa cs vote e ect oneal 278 Search and Replace Address 278 Search and Replace abel spss fy ele ea fea 279 Dar A EE 285 Using the Data is AAA e e D EDT LUE 285 A AE TAE TEE E 287 11 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents C stomizine the isp ays a ul cea tell tea ie a ptr 289 AAO A IS O 289 av A te ee Sene eur ch wan S Matas ac bL cd igne 291 o Ee Eee RTE ee ES eT POE e EON RE Rei Oot EO LA E 292 Cleat Forced Element Las so de 292 Complete C ross erre tdo ata edi 294 Ladder Network Cross Ra ts des Lt 296 Address US o AMARE ee awh Ee 297 Displaying Addresses Used ace me nte stil tinca 237 Creating an Address Used Listing dece ocn oatetia ease dn cher enhn arbi ida ud 207 SCI SIAC Che d ed A ehe ON 299 Tracing an VAC A cat ia te Cei eccL M SLLSE 299 Invoking Address Ts dta ots ss 299 Inicie Aures oae E LLL D AM EAE ELLA 300 Bonis TTE 301 Displaying Processor Faults 5 sei cotto Ore chiede Onda Mee oie dde us 304 CTI2500 Fror Codes AAA A 305 Startup Erots MEET 305 Fatal Error COGS ay seere aeea A E EEA 305 CTI 2500 User Switch Settings AAA ck a G 309 SW1 Battery Switch 2 2 2 2 2 2c cece cence eee eee eee eee eee 309 SW2 SW4 Serial Port Baud Rate rd id Sea as 309 SWo Serial Port Electrical Interface oreet ee
17. The password security feature is disabled in WorkShop by default The security ad ministrator can turn this feature on by checking Enable password security When this box is checked users are requested to enter their passwords either once each time Work Shop is started or each time they attempt to enter a password protected section of the application The current security mode is indicated in the status bar at the bottom of the WorkShop window as seen in the example below Security Enabled appears when security is en abled Security Disabled appears when security is disabled 32 01 Security Enabled Path None Mode Offline Inactive Passwords Timeout in N Minutes Once users enter their passwords they can operate PLC WorkShop indefinitely within their access privileges However if PLC WorkShop runs unattended for a designated number of minutes without user interaction the password under which the application is running can time out Click Inactive passwords time out after N mins to activate this feature Enter the number of minutes PLC WorkShop may remain inactive before the current password times out The default number of minutes is 30 but the valid range is 1 999 630 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security FasTrak Authentication Security Request User Password Once password security is enabled PLC WorkShop requests users to enter their passwords at various times to
18. e Selecting Latest Version of State allows you to choose a version with a pat ticular repository file state e Selecting Labeled Version allows you to choose a version with a particular label 2 In the To box type the directory in which to place the working copy or click Browse to locate the directoty 120 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak NOTE Ifa working directory has been set it appears in the text box If a working directory has not been set the text box ap pears as blank 2 Select the Overwrite working copies check box to automatically overwrite any files located within the directory assigned in the To box during the Get operation 3 Select the Make Writable check box to remove the read only status from the pro gram file NOTE Making working copies writable is not recommended for files you wish to keep under version control Do not select this option if you plan on checking out and editing the file 5 Click OK when finished A version of the file is placed in the selected directory NOTE If the path selected in the To text box is the same as the path of the active program file the active file will be over written even if the Overwrite working copies check box is not selected If you proceed to overwrite the active program file the program will exit and any existing changes will be lost You must open the program again to continue Checking Ou
19. function programs or subroutines to be copied Copy Special Function Program s from 1 to E Cancel Change the values in the from and to boxes if necessary and click the OK button e Paste Paste the copied special function programs or subroutines to the SFP or SFS slots starting at the selected slot When you click the Paste button a dialog box appears showing the line numbers where the special function programs or sub routines will be pasted Paste Special Function Program s from tl to Cancel Change the from boxes if necessary The slots where the special function programs or subroutines will be pasted must be empty NOTE Special function programs and subroutines can only be cop ied and pasted offline e Delete Delete the highlighted special function programs or subroutines e Password Protect Special Function Subroutines with a password in CTI 2500 Series programs e Import Export The selected Special Function program or subroutine can be saved to or loaded from a file 262 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming SF Program and Subroutine Editor Insert a New Row You can insert a new row to a Special Function Program similar to inserting a new network In the active logic program window use the mouse or keyboard to place the cursor on an existing row in the Special Function Program To enter a new row using the mouse 2 1 Click the Lal Append Row button on t
20. 129 512 referenced in the instruction box and turns the output on If the input stays on the instruction will continue to execute for every scan with the following exceptions User program error 13 is logged in STW200 if the fast loop is not configured and no power is passed to the output User program error 14 is logged in STW200 if the fast loop is disabled and no power is passed to the output Otherwise the result of the fast loop execution is made available to the next element of the current rung Programming fast loops is accomplished in the same manner as loops 1 128 using the PID Loop Editor See PID Loops for complete information on programming loops New Task TASK The Start New RLL Task TASK instruction is used to delimit the main RLL task and the cyclic RLL task The TASK instruction is described as follows e The Task instruction indicates the RLL instruction which follow it comprise an RLL task segment where Task Number 1 for segments of the main RLL task 2 designates segments of the cyclic RLL task and 8 designates segments of the interrupt task e Task 1 is assumed when the first rung does not contain a TASK instruction A task can consist of multiple segments each preceded by a TASK instruction The segments do not have to be contiguous Terminate an RLL task with another TASK instruction or with the END instruction e Task 2 is executed with a higher priority than Task 1 Therefore normal
21. 2 ET 200M IM153 1 DPV1 Station Type Slave DP 140 State Offline 3 L SCIM SC DP stave a A gt 4JL SC16D0 aDP Device File SIE_8029 GSE Status Offline 5 LOADER INDEX HYDRAU 6 LOADER HEAT EXCHANG 7 SOUTH KETTLE FLUID CC 8 NORTH KETTLE FLUID Ct Slave Parameters Slave Status 9 NORTH VACUUM COOLIN PROFIBUS Address 30 Pee 10 SOUTH VACUUM COOLIL ME 2 nable 11 SOUTH KETTLE HYD UN tation Name Disabled 12 NORTH KETTLE HYD Ut 13 NORTH GRID HEAT EXC Modules 14 SOUTH GRID HEAT EXC Module 1 0 Address X y WX WY Insert Module 15 SPARE 1 Config for Slot Oo D 0 0 0 Delete Module 16 SPARE 2 ConfigforSlt2 0 0 0 0 0 17 NORTH VACUUM COOLI Goto Module 18 SOUTH VACUUM COOLII 3 Config for Slot3 0 0 0 13 DOWNCOMING HEAT E gt 4 Config for Slot4 0 8 0 0 0 20 SOUTH PROBE HEAT E gt i Eey WY 21 NORTH PROBE HEAT Es 5 Contig for Slot5 0 8 0 0 0 y 22 SOUTH VACUUM PUMP 6 Config for Slot6 0 8 0 0 0 Unify 23 NORTH VACUUM PUMP 24 SOUTH KETTLE HEAT E 7 Config for Slot 0 8 0 0 0 Compact 25 SPARE 8 Digital SC 0 8 8 0 0 26 MELT HVAC BLOWER Restore 3 Analog SC 0 1 27 NORTH KETTLE HEAT E 28 Eurotherm 2400 29 L SC 32D1 a DP Expand Definition End Slave Config 31 L 5C 32D1 aDP 32 L SC 32D1 aDP y gt 227 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 P
22. 3 Click OK in the Font dialog box to save your changes or click Cancel to cancel changes Result The Print Cross reference dialog box appears NOTE The print selection options are stored when saving a program Print Data Window The contents of the Data Window can be printed by clicking Print from the Data menu or by right clicking the Data Window and selecting Print from the shortcut menu 101 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Print to a Text File 1 To print to a text file click Output To Text File from the File menu Result The Print Output to Text File dialog box appears See Printing Logic Pro gramsfor dialog box selections 2 Once selections are made click OK 3 Enter a file name to save to and click OK Print Output to Text File Logic and SFs Selected Items Category L Logic and SFs loops Ladder 1 6 Inline XRef ex CRs 0 0 Alarms SF Programs 1 1023 SF Subroutines 1 1023 Alarms Reaist Analog Alarms 1 128 E PLC Configuration 505 Channel Base 1 0 1 15 Documentation Profibus DP Slave 1 112 Config Memory Registers Cross Reference V Memoru 1 2048 Page Setup Print Setup Cancel Iv Iv Iv Loops lv PLC Configuration PID Loops 1 64 Iv Iv Iv 102 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Editing Editing Editing Features 505 WorkShop uses a number of timesav
23. 483 481 501 499 501 500 502 527 527 439 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Integer Math License Time Set Time Event Driven Drum Timer Timer On Delay Unlock Memory Up Counter Up Down Counter Word And Word Exclusive Or Word Or Word Rotate Word Shift Register Word to Table Word to Table And Word to Table Exclusive Or Word to Table Or Integer Math Integral Introduction IORW IP Address JMP JMPE Jump Jump End 526 440 442 428 429 429 531 430 432 485 487 486 480 479 503 504 506 505 561 405 29 524 156 160 670 K K Memory 178 Key 35 44 Key Error 45 L L Memoty 177 300 Label 517 557 Ladder 177 245 247 313 314 319 345 Editor 246 Header 345 Memory 177 Mode 313 314 Programming 247 Status 245 319 LAG 564 Laptop 46 Launching WorkShop 56 LBL 517 LDA 528 LDC 530 LEAD 564 Lead Lag 564 LEQ 469 LESS 467 Less Than 467 Less Than or Equal To 469 License 35 44 License Agreement Limited Editing Mode Limiting Coefficient Load Addtess Load Constant Load Only Loading By Parts Online Program LOCK Lock Auto Manual Lock Cascade Lock Memory Lock Setpoint Logic Finding Logic Font Logic Mode Logic Status Logical Not Contact Loop Gain Loop Mode Loop Output Address Loop Title Loop Tuning Low Process Vatiable Range 44 214 223 391 528 530 43 64 68 68 68 64 317 530 392 3
24. Clearing a Base I O Configuration C cuo onerati rth c eee LE 189 ProtbussDP Conlsumtioloio cera eus eco as e to o ADU EA Lue 190 Using the Profibus DP Confiptitdtot td casos peus 190 Profibus Configuration carga e al pL eu 191 Using the Profibus Configurator ooooooccccocococococococcccocococonenenininoos 205 Find odit Gere rcp eA E ReaD PT 241 Chapter 6 Prosratimile A id ERR UU OE 243 Online Versus Offline Programming o eid eL end 245 Using the Ladder Editot e 246 Proc a dd e de EEES 247 Programming Ladder cri eros ol 247 Inserta New De a beads dl eed 247 Inserta New RO E O Adee EE a 248 Ladder ore cR 249 SF Program and Subroutine Editof e a 257 Using the SF Program and Subroutine Editot uuu 257 Special Functions Dialog Doria elsa trae 260 Tnserea NeW ROW AL noon ace cos ond aa aed tees up toad ue ober efe 263 10 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents Entering Special Function Program Instructions 2 2 2 20225 263 Password Protected Subroutities eee tenete 264 Importing and Exporting Special Function Programs and Subroutines 266 Batido e e eise D CO nee 268 AA A A Slade TR 268 or PUER 268 1 T e ee it AS irae RUG Bs rut CLE d 268 Paste With Rewite AA ti ttun tee seers teak le 269 Boc ee ine 210 Deleter areren O E TUE ET Ty eR 270 AA A sissies eects fie eases AE 271 Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus 22
25. Complete Restar Diagnostics Program Source EEPROM options Mora Changing Ladder Mode Without S memory configured the LADDERS field is the only option for changing pro gram mode Freeze Freeze places the controller in PROGRAM FREEZE mode All outputs are frozen in their current states However intelligent I O modules still can update outputs To select PRO GRAM FREEZE mode click Freeze on the PLC Operations dialog box The following message appears Stop the PLC with outputs frozen Select either YES or NO Prog Off Prog_Off places the controller in PROGRAM OFF mode Discrete outputs are set to zero and all word outputs are frozen However intelligent I O modules still can update out puts To select PROGRAM OFF mode click Prog Off on the PLC Operations dialog box The following message appeats 314 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays Stop the PLC with outputs cleared Select either YES or NO Run A Warning When you elect to go to PROGRAM OFF mode you te ceive the message Stop the PLC with outputs cleared Select either YES or NO Intelligent I O modules e g the 386 ATM module the Programmable BASIC module the Servo Axis module or the High Speed Pulse Input module can update outputs even when the controller is in PROGRAM mode if your code permits If an intelligent I O module writes directly to an image reg
26. Controller Memory Types When you assign a number to a shift register be sure that you do not use that number for any other shift register type For example do not configure SHRB11 and SHRW11 Assigning the same number for more than one shift register could cause unpredictable operation by the controller which could re sult in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Do not assign the same reference number to more than one shift register instruction This memory type consists of one byte per shift register This byte is used to save the pre vious state of the instruction input Drum Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for the operation of the various drum types including the following e Drum DRUM e Maskable Event Drum e Discrete MDRMD e Event Drum EDRUM e MegaEDRUM e Maskable Event Drum Word MDRMW 182 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Controller Memory Types When you assign a number to a drum type in struction be sure that you do not use that number for any other drum type instruction For example if you configure a Maskable Event Drum Word 1 MDRMW1 do not configure an Event Drum 1 EDRUM1 Assigning the same reference number to more than one drum type instruction could cause unpredictable operation by the con troller which could result in death ot serious injury to personnel and or damag
27. Copy Paste Clear Delete Insert Append and Select All e View Menu Ladder Editor Special Function Editor PID Loops Alarms Doc umentation Window Symbol Library and Data Window are all view only e Program Menu New Network Select Instruction and Validate and Enter e Configuration Editing Memory configuration editing set PLC Scan Time 505 I O Edit Profibus I O Edit Watchdog Timer Edit and Time of Day edit e Utilities Menu Diagnostics on bases Task Codes per scan Port Lockout Clear U Memory and Password 43 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 2 Installation FasTrak KEY FasTrak KEY Attaching the FasTrak KEY The WorkShop software is copy protected with a device called the FasTrak KEY which is included in your shipment The FasTrak KEY will be used for one of two purposes de pending on your licensing agreement with FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Single user keyed license Under this agreement each FasTrak K EY represents one single user license The FasTrak KEY must be attached to your computer be fore you launch WorkShop Otherwise if a FasTrak KEY is not detected WorkShop will run in Demo mode with limited functionality Multi user key on install only site license Under this agreement one FasTrak KEY is issued for your company This key allows a certain number of installations of WorkShop based on your site license agreement The FasTrak KEY must be at tached to your computer
28. Floating point values are only compatible with the CTI 2500 family of proc essors and a CPU firmware of V6 18 or later for all data types INT Memory location of UINT and FLOAT the the value being following word address types compared WX WY K V STW W TCP TCC DCC DSP DSC DCP and constants for FLOAT data type only the following Real address types ate also available WX WY K V and Real constants Constants and Real Constants available only for the B parameter 464 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Compare Instructions Notes e Integers that are compared with floating point values are converted to floating point values before the comparison is executed e The values of the A and B parameters are displayed when Ladder Status is enabled See Ladder Status Online on page 379 for more information on Ladder Status Input When the input is enabled the EQU instruction is executed When the input is disabled the EQU instruction is not executed Output The output is enabled when the EQU operation is TRUE A B Not Equal To NEQ A lt gt B INT When the input is energized the NEQ instruction compares two integers two unsigned in tegers or two floating point values and energizes the output if and only if the values are not equal 465 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Compare Instructions Dat
29. I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration In these scenarios the Profibus Configurator is placed into limited editing mode Limited editing mode affects many areas of the Profibus Configurator See the table below for spe cific editing restrictions Master Tab The user is unable to add or remove any slave de vice Bus Parameters The user is unable to modify bus parameters Tab Slave Tab The user is unable to add or remove any I O mod ule Parameters Tab The user is unable to add or change parameters WorkShop will provide a warning message stating that your configuration has been placed in limited editing mode To ensure that you have full editing capabilities after merging your configuration from COM Profibus please see Migrating from COM Profibus to the Pro fibus Configurator Limited editing mode does not affect online operation of the Profibus devices on the net work Instead it only restricts the editing or updating of the Profibus configuration in your WorkShop program If you do not anticipate any changes needing to be made to the con figuration you need not be concerned about the effects of limited editing mode on your processes However if you plan to make changes to the configuration and you no longer have access to the files needed to merge a fully editable configuration you will need to rec reate your configuration using the Profibus Configurator Profibus Operations Profibus Operations allows you to chang
30. In the active logic program window use the mouse or keyboard to place the cursor on an existing row in the network To enter a new row using the mouse pal 1 Click gt new row on the Toolbar Notice that the new row attaches to the pointer Place the pointer in the position where you want the new row to appear Click the left mouse button and the new row is inserted Repeat Step 3 to insert additional rows aoe Po Remove the new row from the pointer by clicking the arrow on the Instruction Bar To insert a new row using the keyboard 1 Press the INSERT key to enable the Ins cursor mode The status toolbar indicates which cursor mode is currently enabled e When Overtype mode is enabled OVR is displayed in the far right side of the Status toolbar 248 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Programming Ladder e When Ins mode is enabled OVR is vot displayed in the far right side of the Status toolbar 3 Use the arrow keys to position the parameter cursor red or highlighted box in the last row of the network 4 Press ENTER and the new row appears as the last row 5 Repeat Step 3 to enter additional networks Ladder Instructions Entering Instructions Using the Mouse and Instruction Bar 1 Move the pointer to the Instruction bar 2 Click the instruction you want to use If the instruction you want to use is not dis played click the appropriate instruction group to display the
31. Integer V100 1 V100 1 V100 V100 V100 2 V100 V101 V102 V100 3 V100 V102 V1 04 For loop and analog alarm variables the two types of indexing are equivalent LPV1 1 LPV1 1 LPV1 LPV1 1 LPV1 1 LPV1 LPV1 2 LPV1 2 LPV2 LPV1 2 LPV1 2 LPV2 LPV1 3 LPV1 3 LPV3 LPV1 3 LPV1 3 LPV3 NOTE WorkShop does not support multiple subscripts such as Z n m or Z n m Equivalent expressions are Z n m 1 and Z n m 1 respectively 571 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Data PACK TO FROM Pack Data PACK TO FROM The Pack Data statement moves discrete and or word data to or from a table You can ac cess the image register directly by using the PACK statement PACK is primarily intended for use in consolidating data so that it can be efficiently transmitted to a host computer To From T able Table Address NO Of Points Data Start Address E dit Delete Cancel Help e To From Table specifies whether you are writing data to or from the table e Table Address specifies the address of the table to or from which data are written or read Valid descriptors are integer addresses addresses containing an in teger value such as V100 V100 2 or WXT7 if reading from the table or writeable integer addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 if wr
32. Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the soft ware waits for a response from the PLC before returning a time out error Any whole number between 5 and 25 can be used e Retries Specifies the number of times the software will try to re establish com munications with the PLC after a time out error Any whole number between 0 and 10 can be used Use 0 for no retties 159 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Communication IP Addresses 1 From the IP Addresses section of the TCP IP Setup dialog box click the ADD but ton to enter a new IP address or select an existing IP address and click the Modify button to change the IP information Result The IP Addresses dialog box appears TCP IP Path IP Address Path Description Cancel mooo NOTE 505 WorkShop allows 1 000 different IP Addresses and Path Descriptions Enter the IP Address for the associated Interface Board An IP Address is a 32 bit value that is divided into four 8 bit fields each separated by a period For example 192 3 2 1 isan IP Address Each computer on a network has a unique IP Ad dress You should consult your network administrator for the correct IP Addresses for your computer and board Enter the IP Address Path Description A Path Description is a 32 character al phanumetic description for the IP Address Click OK or press ENTER to accept the settings Click Cancel to disregard changes an
33. Tags May be checked or cleared when importing documentation Not shown for other import operations Address documentation tags Descriptions May be checked or cleared when importing documentation Not shown for other import operations Address documentation comments Desc Comments May be checked or cleared when importing documentation Not shown for other import operations Address documentation description comments Headers May be checked or cleared when importing documentation from 505 WorkShop documentation fss or Documentation to delimited text file txt csv Not shown for other import operations Network headers V Registers Available only when importing V amp K register values Check the box to import V registers K Registers Available only when importing V amp K register values Check the box to import K registers Size Available only when importing V amp K register values Select the size 16 ot 32 bit of the data values Format Available only when importing V amp K register values Select the format of the data values Signed Dec Float Hex Octal Binary ASCII Exporting Documentation Use the following procedure to export documentation RAMP SOAK steps or V and K register values 1 Click Export from the File menu 75 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Export Components Selection TISOFT Network Header Description files M To Fil
34. The battery switch can be used to disconnect the battery You may want to temporarily dis connect the battery to clear memory or to preserve the battery when storing the unit The battery is connected when the switch is in the closed position and disconnected when the switch is in the open position SW2 SW4 Serial Port Baud Rate Switches 2 through 4 are used to set the baud rate for the serial port as indicated in the fol lowing table Switch Position 309 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming CTI 2500 User Switch Settings Switch Position Baud Rate vic Poston SW5 Serial Port Electrical Interface This switch selects whether the RS 232 electrical interface or RS 422 electrical interface is used For typical programming applications you should select RS 232 The open position selects RS 232 The closed position selects RS 422 SW6 Program Port Selection This switch selects whether only TCP port 4452 can be used for programming or whether TCP port 1505 can also be used The open position selects port 4452 only The closed po sition allows both 4452 and 1505 NOTE The setting applies to the local Ethernet port only and does not affect programming via Special Function modules such as the 2572 A ot 2572 When possible you should use port 4452 only This setting allows you to block other users from concurrently modifying the program by enabling port lockout while you are program
35. W TCP TCC DCC DSP DSC DCP and constants for FLOAT data type only the following Real address types ate also available WX WY K V and Real constants Constants and Real Constants available only for the B parameter Notes e Integers that are compared with floating point values are converted to floating point values before the comparison is executed e The values of the A and B parameters are displayed when Ladder Status is enabled See Ladder Status Online on page 379 for more information on Ladder Status Input When the input is enabled the GEQ instruction is executed When the input is disabled the GEQ instruction is not executed Output The output is enabled when the GEQ operation is TRUE A gt B 473 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Compare Instructions Compare CMP The Compare instruction CMP compares a signed integer value in A with a signed integer value in B Based upon the comparison the coil or relay addresses may be turned on or off If the input is ON then the compare instruction will be executed on every scan The CMP instruction works as follows e The value in A is compared against the value in B A and B are not affected e If A B LT is turned on 1 GT is turned off 0 there is no power flow e If A gt B GT is turned on LT is turned off and there is no power flow e If A B GT and LT are turned off and the output is tur
36. You can open as many logic program windows as your computer s memory permits For example you may wish to copy patt of a logic program to another program This saves you programming time by not having to retype similar logic statements for each program To copy a part of one logic program to another use the following procedure 1 Open both programs offline 2 Arrange the logic program windows by clicking Tile or Cascade from the Window menu 3 Select the data you want to copy to the other program 4 Click Copy from the toolbar or from the Edit menu 5 Move the pointer to the place you want to insert the data in the other program Click Paste from the toolbar or from the Edit menu 59 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Main Window Status Line The Status Line spans the bottom of the 505 WorkShop window Information about the menu item or button under the mouse cursor appears at the left end of the status bar The right side of the Status Line displays the information listed below Security Indicates whether the security system is en abled or disabled See Security Setup for details PLC Path Describes the active program s connection to the PLC Logic Mode Indicates whether you are programming on line or offline When the indicator CAP is shown the caps lock mode is active Characters typed will be CAPITALS unless the SHIFT key is pressed When the indicator OVR is shown th
37. acter field using a FORTRAN G12 5 format THE VALUES ARE WX5 V104 e Time entries are used to print out a variable in time format The variable is printed out as hh mm ss Time entries are indicated by following the address of the var iable EL or EXP with TIME as follows THE TIME IS NOW STW141 TIME e Date entries are used to print out a variable in date format The variable is printed out as yy mm dd Date entries ate indicated by following the address of the vat iable EL or EXP with DATE as follows THE DATE IS NOW STW141 DATE e Variable text entries ate used to print out text stored in either V or K memory Var iable text entries are indicated by following the address of the text EL or EXP to be printed with a percent sign Y and the number of characters to be printed If the number is coded as zero PRINT assumes that the first word of the indicated variable contains the number of characters to print BOILER V250 16 DESCRIPTION V102 0 e BOILER V250 16 causes the 16 characters in V Memory locations V250 V257 to be printed Each word contains two 8 bit characters e DESCRIPTION V102 0 causes the number of characters specified in V102 to be printed If V102 contains 5 then the characters in V103 V105 are printed e Use variable text entties to embed control characters such as form feeds and 591 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Printing PRINT carriage returns
38. database from the list and click OK to return to the Browse for Repository dialog box If you still cannot find the database you ate looking for see you system ad ministrator or consult the FTVersionTrak manual 6 Select the Login to Server Manually check box to force a manual login to the server Use this option if a different user usually logs in automatically and the login needs to be changed 7 Select the repository you want to add the file to from the list of Available Re positories and click OK If the desired repository does not appear in the list click the Find button to search for all repositories available in the selected database If you still cannot find the repository you ate looking for see your system ad ministrator or consult the FTVersionTrak manual 505 WorkShop Login Server Authentication windows Authentication Y Username HOMA me Password 118 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak 8 Select the preferred authentication type from the Authentication combo box Windows Authentication This option utilizes the local Microsoft Windows user accounts to log on to the server If this option is selected the user currently logged in to Windows will appear in the Username text box No password is nec essary and the login information cannot be edited SQL Authentication This option uses the login information located on the server it
39. e The drum advances to the next step immediately if the Jog input transitions from off to on and the Enable Reset input is also on 440 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums Vaties Instruction reference number Refer with con to controller user manual for number figured supported The assigned instruction memory number must conform to the re quirements of drum memory Step to which the drum returns when reset SEC CNT 0 32 767 Time base Amount of time in sec onds for one count EVENT X Y C B Discrete point that starts countdown of a step and that advances the drum to the next step when count equals Zeto Y C B or Coils controlled by drum CO rep blank resents no coil 0 32767 Specifies time that drum temains at step Actual time step equals CNT x SEC CNT in seconds Mask controls coils turned on 1 or off 0 Do not use the same reference PRESET number more than once for any of the drum types It can cause un predictable machine operation 441 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums MegaEDRUM MEDRM START JOG USE STEP ENABLE RESET COIL COUNT CUR STEP CUR CNT The Mega Time Event Driven Drum MegaEDRUM instruction is only compatible with the CTI 2500 family of processors It requires a CPU firmware of V6 18 or later It is sim ilar to the EDRUM instruction b
40. fore and or after a tuning session Ensure that your process is designed to handle the results of loop tuning The PID algorithm consists of three components the Proportional the Integral Reset and the Derivative Rate Each component impacts the output to address the varied char acteristics of the process variable The PID expression is 403 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning Output P Gain Error I Gain Error dt D Gain Error d dt where Error Setpoint Process Variable P Gain Proportional Gain I Gain Integral Gain D Gain Derivative Gain The Proportional Component Temperature control with PID has two regions of operation the proportional band and the saturated region The proportional band is the region above and below the setpoint where the controller output is less than 100 The heat or cooling output is time proportioned as determined by the PID output The proportional gain value determines the proportional band A typical proportional band might be around 30 F for a given machinery temperature con trol as shown below For example with a setpoint of 300 F a proportional band of 30 F would equate to the region between 270 F and 330 F where the controller would be in the proportional band Outside of this region on either side is the saturated region where the controller output would be 100 which equates to 1
41. full Status Bit 1 is automatically reserved as a second status bit and turns on whenever the shift register is empty Use the same status bits for FTSR IN that you use for the FTSR OUT FTSR IN sets Status Bit 1 when the register is empty PTSR IN clears this bit If the shift register is empty status bit Status Bit is off and Status Bit 1 is on When the FTSR IN executes the following actions occur e The word currently in memory location A is shifted into the location specified by the Index e The Count and the index are each incremented by one e Status Bit 1 turns off Each time the FTSR IN executes another wotds moves into the next available location the Index and the Count increment by one When the Index equals the length it resets to zero after the next execution by the FTSR IN When the shift register is full another word cannot be shifted in until one is shifted out by the FTSR OUT statement Also when the 550 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Fall Through Shift Register Input FTSR IN shift register is full Status Bit turns on If you attempt to shift in another word an error generates error 87 Use FTSR OUT to remove words from the shift register before all locations are full Use FTSR IN to shift more words into the shift register before all words are removed WN AA V100 Register start Register length 3 Status bit in V1 Shift register status
42. ister point its write takes precedence even when PGMFRZ PGMOFF is in effect This could cause un expected control action resulting in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Do not wtite directly to output image register points from an intelligent I O module Instead write to a control relay or V memoty location and have your RLL program copy this location to the output point Run places the controller in RUN mode beginning execution of the ladder program To se lect PROGRAM RUN mode click RUN on the PLC Operations dialog box The following message appeats Run PLC Select either YES or NO Changing Loop Mode NOTE Your loop card cannot be in PROGRAM mode while the dis ctete CPU is in RUN mode When you select Loop Mode you have the following options available 315 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays Prog places the loop card in PROGRAM mode and control blocks are neither running nor being queued for running To select LOOP PROGRAM mode click Prog on the PLC Op erations dialog box The following message appeats Set the loop processor to program mode Select either YES or NO Halt places the loop card in HOLD mode enabled control blocks are being queued to run but are not running Upon returning to RUN mode execution resumes where it was halted To select LOOP HALT mode click Halt on the PLC Operations dialog box
43. lt SF STATEMENT gt lt SF STATEMENT gt lt SF STATEMENT gt ENDSWITCH SWITCH Block Format Upon execution of the initial SWITCH statement the Condition expression is evaluated and compared to the declared values in each CASE statement defined in the SWITCH block If a matching CASE statement is found program execution unconditionally ad vances to the next instruction after the matched CASE statement similar to a LABEL instruction until a BREAK statement is encountered Upon encountering a BREAK state ment the execution sequence will jump to the next instruction after the corresponding ENDSWITCH statement If a corresponding BREAK statement is omitted program ex ecution will fall through to the next CASE statement If a matching CASE statement is not found program execution jumps to the next in struction after a DEFAULT statement if any If a matching CASE statement is not found and no DEFAULT statement exists in the SWITCH block program execution jumps to the next instruction after the corresponding ENDSWITCH statement NOTE The constant value in each CASE statement in a SWITCH block must be unique SWITCH blocks may be nested to 7 levels for a total of 8 nested levels 600 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Switch Functions This instruction is compatible with CTI 2500 Se ries controllers only Attempting to run a program with this instruction on a Simatic 505 series con t
44. ming Some Ethernet programming interfaces such as APTNET use a fixed program port of 1505 and cannot use port 4452 If you are using one of these you may choose to use both 4452 and 1505 as local programming ports If you choose this option the CTI 2500 con troller cannot prevent concurrent network programming 310 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming CTI 2500 User Switch Settings SW7 SW11 Reserved Switches 7 through 11 are reserved for future use SW12 Firmware Update Switch 12 is used to enter the firmware update state When the switch is open the con troller will start up in the normal operating mode When the switch is closed the controller will start up in the firmware update mode 311 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays Displaying Processor Status You can display the status of your processor while online or offline To display the processor status 1 Click PLC Status from the PLC Utilities menu ALT U P 2 Either the PLC Status for online or offline is displayed 3 Click Close to close the PLC Status box and return to the active logic program PLC Status PLC Type SIMATIC 545 Communications Path Communications Port TCP IP1 System Memory KBytes Ladder Memory Bytes Total 132 Configured 15384 Configured 70 Used Remaining 122 Remaining Program
45. played The items selected are copied without warning Paste To access the paste feature 1 Move the pointer to the location in your program where you want to paste the con tents of the clipboard 2 Click e on the toolbar click Paste on the Edit menu or press CRTL V 105 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Editing Paste With Rewire Paste With Rewire provides you with anumber of timesaving editing features These include e Paste multiple copies e Paste with address offset e Include tags and descriptions in the paste e The ability to Rewire change address on an individual basis NOTE The Paste With Rewire feature is available offline only To access the rewire feature 1 Move the pointer to the desired location 2 Paste clipboard contents into the new location by clicking Paste with Rewire from the Edit menu The Paste With Rewire dialog box appears 3 Choose the appropriate options 4 Click OK Paste with Rewire Clipboard Contents Total Netws Lines 2 Clipboard Addresses Rewire to Cancel C3 C4 Paste Copies E Offset All by Include Descpts 106 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Editing NOTE When pasting clipboard contents are inserted before ex isting items For example if you are pasting a network and the cursor is positioned at Network 002 click paste and the clipboard contents become Netwo
46. program on disk is password protected Yes No password Yes Disk password is written to con troller if controller supports password Only if controller supports password Selected program on disk must have 5 0 format or greater There is no pass wotd for selected program on disk or in the con troller Full ac cess to controller and se lected program on disk is allowed Full ac cess to controller is allowed Some reads and no writes ate al lowed to selected program on disk PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays M C ll pur Controles Allowed to Allowed to Comments No Password Password Password 4 User gives con troller password User does not give a password User gives disk and con troller password 328 Yes Con troller password is written to disk No Con troller is password protected Yes Se lected program on disk password is re tained Yes Con troller password is re tained No Con troller is password protected Yes Con troller password is re tained Full ac cess to controller and to se lected program on disk is allowed Partial to full access to con troller is allowed depending on access level Full access 1s allowed to selected program on disk Full ac cess to selected program on disk and to con
47. the word is not moved e After the word is placed into the table the value contained by the index is in cremented by one e If both Enable and Reset remain on one word is moved each scan e Ifthe Enable turns off while the Reset is on the index holds its cutrent value and the word is not moved If the Reset turns off the index resets to 0 e The WIOT output remains on until a word is placed in the last position in the table It then turns off e The WIOT must be reset after the output turns off in order to be executed again 503 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant WS TD Word Wotd Address Wotd Address Wotd Address Constant Only To Table And WTTA The Word to Table AND WTTA instruction ANDs each bit in a source word with the corresponding bit of a designated word in a table The results are placed in a destination table If set to 0 both bits ate 1 a 1 is stored in the destination table Otherwise the resultant bit is The WTTA instruction is described below The Reset must be on for the instruction to be executed When the Enable turns on each bit of the source word WS and of the specified word in the table TS is compared The index IN indicates which word in the table is ANDed The value contained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 where AN is the length of the table
48. troller is allowed PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays Mode Controller N Password Password Password o 7 User gives disk password Yes Yes User gives con troller password Yes Yes 329 Allowed to Allowed to No Con troller is password protected No Se lected program on disk is password protected No Con troller is password protected Yes Se lected program on disk password is written to con troller and enabled Comments Partial to full access to con troller is allowed depending on access level Full access is allowed to selected program on disk Full ac cess to controller is allowed Some reads and no writes are al lowed to selected program on disk PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays Save Allowed to Disk Mode Controller gives no password To invoke Password from Online or Offline Open Allowed to Comments PLC Partial to full access to con troller is allowed depending on access level Some reads and no writes ate al lowed to selected program on disk 1 Click Password from the PLC Utilities menu ALT U W 2 The Password dialog box is displayed in the format shown below 330 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Dis
49. 32 x 32 pinning chart Note how the values in the Mask Addr column change from one chart to the next When the 16 x 16 pinning chart is resized to 32 x 32 the values in the Mask Addr column are au tomatically calculated to reflect the additional addresses required in the 32 x 32 pinning chatt z x Ix a Sai III I e ma zl d za Figure 8 A 16 x 16 Pinning Chart Mask Addr V1 1 V16 1 455 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums ES lt l lt lt lt lt lt lt ji ln nm e x xl sias 5 S x E E s 9 Sl 3 a ES E E ES ES ES Es ES ES ES ES ES Sy A SA 51 _ 1 j 2 4 m G ES 7 5 5 as 2 Ea 1 mum c 3 LESER 10 u e 12 13 14 15 7 H Ea pp Y Ba eS eal EX En EE unt mum __ 32 ll Figure 9 A32 x 32 Pinning Chart Mask Addr lt 1 1 V63 1 The values in the Mask Addr column are included for reference only Although there is no reason to manually change these values if the values are changed it will have no impact on the operation of the pinning chart Entering Values in the Pinning Chart You can enter the EVENT COUNT USE STEP and MASK values by typing in the ap propriate cells EVENT USE STEP and MASK values must be 1 or
50. 548 555 549 552 557 559 559 679 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index SmarTune Special Functions IMATH 561 LABEL 557 LAG 564 LEAD 564 MATH 566 NEXT 555 PACK FROM 575 PACK TO 572 PACKAA 578 PACKLOOP 581 PACKRS 584 PETWD 589 PRINT 590 RETURN 593 SCALE 594 SDT 596 SSR 602 SWITCH 599 THEN 559 UNSCALE 605 WHILE 607 Special Function Program Call 508 Special Function Subroutine 509 Special Func 146 177 257 260 263 265 266 tions 346 375 391 Analog Alarms 375 Columns 146 Dialog 260 Editing 263 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Special Memory Technical Specifications Editor 257 Supported Hardware 31 Exporting 266 Supported PLCs 172 Header 346 Swap RBCs 323 Importing 266 Switch 599 Insert Row 263 Switches 309 Instruction Width 146 Synchronous 224 PID Loops 391 Synchronous Shift Register 602 Special Memory 177 Syntax Check 318 Special Memory 177 System Part Number 318 Specifications 32 System Requirements 41 SQRT 483 T Square Root 483 T Memoty 177 Square Root of Process Variable 373 387 Table Complement 501 SSI 518 Table Move Memoty 180 SSR 602 Table to Table And 499 Starting WorkShop 56 Table to Table Exclusive Or 501 Startup Errors 305 Table to Table Or 500 Status 319 Table to Word 502 Status Line 57 60 Table Update 294 Status Word Memory 178 Tags 145 351 358 STFE 497 TAND 499 STFN 498 Target Rotation Time 197 223 Sticky Cursor 145 TASK 522 SUB 48
51. Before the SSR operation begins all five register addresses are 0 and the Status Bit C17 is ON When a word is moved into the Register Start address making its value 7988 SSR executes one time The word 7988 shifts to the next step in the register V101 and the Register Start address resets to zero Because the register is not empty the Status Bit is turned OFF When a second word is moved into the Register Start address its value becomes 6655 The SSR operation executes again shifting the word 7988 to V102 and shifting the word 6655 to V101 The Register Start address is reset to zero and the Status Bit remains OFF 603 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Synchronous Shift Register SSR Register start V100 Status bt C17 Register length 5 Shift register status before first word is moved in e The application program moves a word into the SSR from WY37 Shift register status after application program moves first word in SSR has not executed yet ES e The application program moves a word into V100 e The register start address V100 now contains the value 7988 Word source SSR executes one time WY37 e The word 7988 shifts to V101 e Register start address V100 is reset to 0 V100 0 e The Status Bit C17 is tumed of Shift register status after application program moves second word in Another word source WY200 is used e Register start address V100 contains
52. CALL Subroutine Statement Execution e CALL Subroutine statement in an interpreted Special Function program or subroutine The subroutine parameters are evaluated by the SF interpreter If the subroutine does not exist or is not enabled an error is logged in the program s Error Status Address and the subroutine is not executed Otherwise if the sub routine has been compiled its compiled code is executed to completion as part of the call statement It cannot be interrupted by a higher priority cyclic program loop or analog alarm executing from the same queue If the subroutine has not been compiled it is executed by the SF interpreter and can be interrupted be tween statements by a higher priority process in its queue e CALL Subroutine statement in a compiled Special Function program or subroutine The subroutine parameters are evaluated by the compiled SF pro gram or subroutine If the subroutine does not exist is not compiled or is not enabled an error is logged in the program s Error Status Address and the sub routine is not executed Otherwise the subroutine s compiled code is executed to completion and cannot be interrupted by a higher priority process in its queue 544 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Call Subroutine CALL NOTE Subroutines can only be nested to a limit of four levels Ex ceeding the limit of for nested levels will result in an error and the Special Function program and
53. Case check box is selected searching for drum will not find DRUM 5 Click OK to begin the search Addresses tags and descriptions that are found will be located displayed and highlighted in the Documentation Window After a Keyword search a message window appears with the following search options 505 WorkShop The keyword CONVEYOR was found in the documentation of address V5 Description REVERSE LOOPING CONVEYOR Go To this address Find Next or Find Previous match Find Next Find Prev e Go To Click Go To to go to the address at which the keyword was found e Find Next Click Find Next to look for the next occurrence of the keyword e Find Prev Click Find Prev to reverse the search direction to look for previous occurrences of the keyword 277 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Search and Replace Address Search and Replace Address Search and Replace Address You can use the Replace command on the Edit menu to search for a specified address and replace them with another address The following logic windows support Search and Re place by address e SF programs e SF subroutines e Ladder Editor e Alarms e PID Loops Use the following steps to conduct a Search and Replace Address 1 Click Replace from the Edit menu or press CTRL R and the Replace dialog box appeats Replace Find What S Replace With Cancel Where Ladder He From Netw
54. Click amp on the toolbar Click Paste from the Edit menu Press CTRL V NOTE When pasting clipboatd contents are inserted before existing items For example if you are pasting a network and the cut sor is positioned at Network 2 click paste and the clipboard contents become Network 2 The previous Network 2 be comes Netwotk 3 Paste With Rewire Paste With Rewire allows you to past the contents of the clipboard and change the ele ments address at the same time To access the rewire feature Pe os Move the cursor to the desired location Paste clipboard contents into the new location Click Paste with Rewire from the Edit menu Choose the appropriate options You can select the number of copies you wish to copy and or you can select to offset each address by a certain value If the addresses you select have descriptions or tags associated with them you can choose to paste those also NOTE When pasting with rewire valid addresses for instructions are not checked until you Validate and Enter Logic Click OK 269 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Editing Logic NOTE When pasting with rewire clipboard contents are inserted be fore existing items For example if you are pasting a network and the cursor is positioned at Network 2 click paste and the clipboard contents become Network 2 The previous Network 2 becomes Network 3 Clear Use Clear to clear an item without removin
55. Compare TCMP The Time Comparte instruction TCMP compares current time in the real time clock with values in the designated V memory locations When power is passed to the input the TCMP instruction is executed It compares the cur rent hours minutes and seconds in the real time clock to the values in the designated memory location TM If a match occurs the output of the instruction is turned on If the time represented by the memory location is less than the real time value in the clock the bit designated by LT is turned on If the time represented by the memory locations is greater than the real time value in the clock the bit designated by GT is turned on TCMP Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 TM Word Address V W G LT Bit Addr Blank Y C B Blank GT Bit Addr Blank Y C B Blank The TM parameter uses 3 words to represent the actual time These are defined as follows e TM Hour BCD 0000 0023 e TM 1 Minute BCD 0000 0059 e TM 2 Second BCD 0000 0059 Text Box Description TEXT The Text box allows you to place textual information such as copyright software version or other text into your RLL program The instruction forms a single network and takes no action The Text Box s sole purpose is for documentation The text box can hold up to five lines of 40 characters each Characters allowed in the text box are A through Z 0 through 9 space and printable speci
56. DP slave s diagnostic buffer to user memoty RSD RD SLAVE DIAG Function Instruction reference number The number entered in dicates the addtess of the PROFIBUS DP slave whose diagnostic is to be read Numbers can be repeated Starting memory location for the destination writeable word 1 256 Maximum number of words to be read The diagnostic buffer whose address in user memory is specified by A is formatted as shown below 532 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Special Instructions Status as follows 0 Transfer successful 1 Transfer successful A previous di A agnostic was signaled and not read 2 Transfer failed The specified slave has not signaled a diagnostic S 1 NOTE The length byte 1 of word A indicates the actual diagnostic length as signaled by the PROFIBUS DP slave If the size N 1 2 of the destination buffer s diagnostic area is less than the actual diagnostic length the diagnostic is truncated by the transfer RSD Operation e When the input is on the RSD box executes If the input remains on the op eration executes on every scan The operation of RSD is as follows e Ifthe PROFIBUS DP I O subsystem is stopped or if the indicated slave has not signaled a diagnostic since the last execution of an RSD instruction for the slave the destination buffer s status byte is set equal to 2 and the length is set equal to 0 e Ift
57. Data menu to choose between 16 and 32 bit data formats Diagnostics PLC Utilities Options Window Load Template pe Save Template 1 B Size gt Signed Dec Display Strings Float 5 Hex Octal Binary Status Off ASCII E r UITONEEANC E DT TIGE 3A mc c a lil 289 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Data Window When an address is entered into the Data Window the address value will be displayed in the selected format which becomes the default format for the Data Window The default format is displayed in the WorkShop status bar at the bottom of the WorkShop window whenever the Data Window is active c vic JUL MIA ILM TASAR ve qunm 13 vi3 MOOML SUCTION PRES 4 59192E 039 F32 Offline 14 via AMBIENT TEMP 9 36733E 039 F32 Offline 15 v15 400 ML DISCHARGE Pri 6 887606 039 F32 Offline Security Disabled Path None Mode Offiine Format F32 J NUM OVR The default format displayed in the status bar changes whenever another format is selected except when using the real dot notation V1 or LPV or a discrete address X1 C1 Y1 In those instances the default format remains unchanged o oae 290 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Data Window Forcing an Element As a troubleshooting tool discrete I O addresses word I O addresses and control relays can be forced The force attribute bit provides a single bit
58. E a a 379 A E R S A NES 381 PID Do c mentati r sbios e ss EE Anette 382 Programming PID LOOPS AMA I h EE ni a dene pr M 383 PID Loop Edito eer a e lcd da cla lu as 383 a AA A eaten 385 A Le Pe Ke Eel MD ha Oa eS ONT Ec 386 Process Variable Address di Serre e etidm 386 Low Process Variable Range sat ddascna cosilla odds 386 16 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents High Process Variable Bange user es Mindset ihe eS Louie Ma 386 Process Variable Bi pO At co noces e one reta 387 20 Offset of Process Variables eddie 387 Square Root of Process Variable sot 4 ai risas 387 Lo p Output Address AA saepe aod tater EOE ERREG 387 Output is Bipolaire nana AS ES 387 20 Offset on Outputs o aaah ot O tan DS EU 387 E A A osten 388 val atin GAG hand al nd we 388 Monitor Low Low High High tl sce UD S cae ets 388 Montoro rl ira nea 388 Process Variable Alarm Tow 9 i rondar idas 388 Process Variable Alarm AAA 389 Process Variable Alarm High cete oeste 389 Process Variable Alarm Biche ted ho ocean sacdel ic cc 389 Remote Setpoint whedon cota oases E al teint deest 389 Clamp Setpoint T4939 s aecccsedea een tecta inco ibt Menos ie VU DP SEA raten tS AES 389 Clamp Setpoint Higli isi a uote eerte ties sieut 389 O Lee 390 E AAA A Panisiicusisa tet 390 Rate Derivative LS 390 o REI Rp II 390 Derivative Gain Limiting s iuo e ye E Bt ep aly 390 do o eee ee ee tier O Oe Ce a 391 17 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Ta
59. E mj 2500 C300 E 33 2 ET 200M IM153 1 DPV1 E 3 L SCIM SC DP E 4 L SC16DO aDP E 5 LOADER INDEX HYDRAU E 6 LOADER HEAT EXCHANG E 7 SOUTH KETTLE FLUID CC E 8 NORTH KETTLE FLUID Ct El 3 NORTH VACUUM COOLIN E 10 SOUTH VACUUM COOLIL Ez 11 SOUTH KETTLE HYD Ut E 12 NORTH KETTLE HYD Ut E 13 NORTH GRID HEAT EXC E 14 SOUTH GRID HEAT EXC E 15 SPARE El 16 SPARE El 17 NORTH VACUUM COOL 18 SOUTH VACUUM COOLII 19 DOWNCOMING HEAT E gt 20 SOUTH PROBE HEAT E gt 21 NORTH PROBE HEAT Es 22 SOUTH VACUUM PUMP 23 NORTH VACUUM PUMP 24 SOUTH KETTLE HEAT E 25 SPARE 26 MELT HVAC BLOWER 27 NORTH KETTLE HEAT E 28 Eurotherm 2400 29 L SC 32D1 aDP 31 L SC 32D1 aDP EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEREEEEE EB E E EJ EB E E EB EE o E EB EB 8 E Help 32 L SC 32D1 aDP y xj Station Type Slave DPI O State Offline Device File SIE 8029 GSE Status Offline Slave Parameters Slave Status 130 PROFIBUS Address Enabled Station Name Disabled Modules Module Config for Slotl Config for Slot2 1 0 Address X Insert Module Delete Module Go to Module Config for Slot3 Config for Slot4 Config for Slot5 Config for Slot amp Config for Slot Digital SC Analog SC End Slave Config Compact Restore Expand Definition SmartConnect y Cancel Apply cOoccococooocosolx NOTE If the Smart Connect
60. ENDWHILE instruction The two statements are used to create a structured loop that allows the user to repeat a sequence of actions ideally under conditions where an exact number of iterations may not be known Unlike the FOR loop which allows the user to specify the number of iterations the WHILE loop only allows the user to specify a condition that terminates the loop when the condition is no longer true Each WHILE instruction must be followed somewhere in the program by exactly one ENDWHILE instruction and an ENDWHILE instruction cannot be encountered before a corresponding WHILE instruction Condition Cancel Condition this statement determines whether or not the WHILE loop continues to iterate or terminates to the next statement Valid descriptors for this field are boolean IMATH expressions WHILE ENDWHILE Operation Upon first pass of the execution loop the Condition statement is evaluated If this value is true program execution advances to the first instruction after the WHILE statement If this value is false program execution advances to the first instruction after the END WHILE statement The ENDWHILE statement unconditionally jumps back toits corresponding WHILE instruc tion 607 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions While End While WHILE ENDWHILE This instruction is compatible with CTI 2500 Series controllers only Attempting to run a pro gram with this in
61. Edit Documentation window will automatically appear when you move off the address Enter a tag description and comment and press OK to save the documentation This al lows you to document undocumented addresses as you program without leaving the ladder editor To use this feature 1 Click Program Setup from the Options menu or press ALT O P 2 Click the Logic Windows tab 3 In the Options for box click Ladder 358 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documenting in Ladder 4 Select the Assign Tags check box 5 Click OK Assign Addresses The Assign Addresses option allows you to assign addresses descriptions and comments to tags as you use them in your ladder program For example if you enter the tag NEW_ TAG and NEW_TAG doesn t exist the Edit Documentation window will automatically appear with the tag filled in You can enter the address description comment and press OK to save the documentation This allows you to assign addresses to tags as you program without leaving the ladder editor To access the Assign Address feature 1 Click Program Setup from the Options menu or press ALT O P 2 Select the Logic Windows tab 3 In the Options for box click Ladder 4 Select the Assign Addresses check box 5 Click OK Editing Documentation in Ladder Editor You can automatically assign documentation and edit existing documentation by pressing CTRL L on an address in your la
62. Enter the security administrator name and password then click OK If the two passwords match the Security Administration dialog appeats 623 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security Choosing a Security Type Choosing a Security Type PLC WorkShop offers two unique security systems for use If the computer on which PLC WorkShop is installed is running under Windows NT 2000 XP or Vista PLC WorkShop determines if the user currently logged in to the operating system is an administrator or be longs to the Administrator group To activate the security feature of PLC WorkShop select the Options Security V Ad ministrator Options menu item PLC Utilities Window Help Program Setup Application Setup witch To Network Display Activity Audit Setup A AAA DT Security User Options Administrator Options gt If PLC WorkShop is running under Windows 95 98 or ME the Password Required di alog appears This dialog allows the user to become the first security administrator Administrator Password Required E Please enter pour security administrator name and password Name Password oOo Verify password 3 Cancel If the user belongs to the Administrator group then the fields above are filled in and the di alog is used to verify the user s password Clicking OK launches the Security Type Selection dialog 624 PLC WorkShop
63. If 0 lt IN lt N the word in ANDed If N lt IN or N lt 0 the word is not ANDed Each pair of bits is ANDed and the resultant bit is placed in the destination table TD If both bits are 1 the resultant bit is set to 1 Otherwise the resultant bit is set to 0 After a word in the table is compared the value contained by in the index is incremented by one If both Enable and Reset remain on the source wotd and a wotd in the table are ANDed each scan If the Enable turns off while the Reset is on the index holds its current value and the AND does not occur If the Reset turns off the index resets to 0 The WTTA output remains on until the last word in the table has been ANDed with the soutce word It then turns off The WITA must be reset after the output turns off in order to be executed again 504 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions WITA Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant WS Word Address TS Word Address TD Word Address Word Address Constant Only Word to Table Or WTTO The Word To Table OR WTTO instruction ORs each bit in a source word with the cor responding bit of a designated word in a table The results are placed in a destination table If either bit is 1 a 1 is stored in the destination table Otherwise the resultant bit is set to 0 The WTTO instruction is described below e The Reset must be on for the ins
64. Memory amp I O Configuration Controller Memory Types The controller writes data related to the Special Function program to the first 7 words You can read this data and or write over it if you choose You can use all 16 words just as you would use Variable Memory except no data is saved when the program has completed Variable Memory A block of memory within the controller may be allocated for user operations This mem ory type is called Variable Memory V Memoty For example you can do a math operation and store the result in V Memory You can enter values directly into V Memory with a pro gramming unit Constant Memory A block of memory within the controller may be allocated for constants unchanging data This memory type is called Constant Memory K Memory You can use a programming unit to load a table of data into K Memory and read the table during run time whenever you need the data for an operation Status Word Memory A block of memory within the controller is allocated for storing status information relating to controller operations This information is stored in one or more status words STW1 STW2 and so on These status words can be used in the RLL program to signal and or cor rect alarm conditions Timer Counter Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for the operation of the timer counter group of RLL instructions including the following e Timer TMR TMRE e Discrete Control Alarm
65. Message Cancel e Port the ASCII communications port number Legal port numbers are 1 3 e Message the message to be printed Element addresses and expressions ate sep arated by a space Embedded spaces or assignment operator within expressions ate not accepted NOTE The CTI 2500 Series of processors supports the PRINT in struction differently than Simatic 505 See the CTT 2500 Controller Programming Reference Manual for more information PRINT Operation When the PRINT statement executes the message is sent to the port specified The maximum message lengthis 1019 characters with characters counted in entries as follows a Each text character 1 character Each variable entry 6 characters 590 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Printing PRINT Each variable text entry 6 characters Carriage Return amp Linefeed 2 characters Text entries contain ASCII text to be printed The following examples illustrate how text is displayed using the Print statement e Text entries are enclosed in quotation marks END OF SHIFT REPORT e Variable entries print the contents of variables in either integer or real format Var iables must be separated by spaces Real numbers are indicated by following the address with a period Integers are printed right justified in a six character field with a floating minus sign Real numbers ate printed right justified in a twelve char
66. Mn proportional to the ratio between Step Change and PV span accomplish this change Step Change is specified in engineering units of the PV Ifa PV span is 0 60 degrees and Step Change is 5 de grees then Mn would be changed by about 2667 5 60 32000 Due to round off error the actual value might be slightly different This example is based on a Mn span of 0 32000 If a 20 offset on output is selected for a loop a Mn change of about 2133 Mn span of 25600 would be accomplished See the preceding table for possible warnings and errors associated with Step Change Wait Time The SmarTune sample algorithm looks fora PV to change by Step Change or to quit changing Wait Time is required to determine when a PV has quit changing Ifa PV value does not change by a Noise Band amount within a Wait Time period then it has stopped changing 414 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning PIN PIN and PIN Variable are provided to force a two step procedure to be followed before a loop is tuned To use this feature PIN and PIN Variable must both be set If PIN is a zero or PIN Variable is a null then SmarTune activation is a one step procedure dependent only on Start Variable If both are specified PIN Variable must equal PIN or a SmarTune ses sion will not be started or queued Automatic Download If Automatic Download is true a loop tuning session is accomplished with minimum ad di
67. Modicon Index IEC 61158 3 Instructions TEC 61158 3 207 Bit Pick 477 IF 559 Bit Set 478 IIF 559 Bit Shift Register 478 Image Register Memory 177 Call Subroutine 515 IMATH 561 Coil 423 IMC 475 Coil Not 424 Immediate Closed Coil 425 Compare 474 Immediate Coil 424 CTI 2500 Custom Function 535 Immediate I O Read Write 524 Date Compare 525 Import 74 112 266 Date Set 525 Inactive Password Timeout 630 Discrete Control Alarm Timer 433 Indexed Matrix Compare 475 Discrete Miscible Event Drum 457 Input Offset for Smart Connect modules 236 Divide 482 Insert 103 111 247 248 263 271 End 511 Installing 44 161 637 End Conditional 512 FasTrak KEY 44 Entering 249 PROFIBUS FMS Communications Proc 161 Equal To 464 essor External Subroutine Call 520 Security Server 637 Force Role Swap 534 WorkShop 41 Go to Subroutine 514 Instruction Bar 57 58 Greater Than 470 Instructions 249 421 426 439 440 442 457 458 464 465 467 469 470 472 Greater Than or Equal To 472 474 478 480 487 489 506 508 509 511 518 520 522 524 528 meca ese Sot E 530 535 Immediate Coil 424 Absolute Value 485 Immediate I O Read Write 524 Addition 481 Indexed Matrix Compare 475 BCD to Binary 485 Jump 512 Binary to BCD 484 Jump End 513 Bit Clear 477 Label 517 668 Less Than Less Than or Equal To Load Address Load Constant Lock Memory Logical Not Contact Maskable Event Drum Word Master Control Relay Master Control Relay End Motor Contro
68. O address on and off You can also create tables of addresses store them on a disk and transfer them to the PLC at a latet time With a logic program open click Data Window from the View menu or click the E tool bar icon The Data Window dialog box appears Click Program Setup from the Optionsmenu or the context menu to change which columns are displayed in the Data Window See Program Setup for more information Multiple data windows for a single logic program can be open at one time The program as sociated with the open data window is displayed after the name of the window TEMPLATE1 wdt CONVEYER1 Offline SEE Fe aan A E Enable Disable Offline 42DISC BLEED SP VS PV Offline SFPGM1 EXECUTING Offline ISFPGM2 EXECUTING Offline 812GAS SD Offline SFPGM4 EXECUTING Offline SFPGMS EXECUTING Offline SFPGM amp EXECUTING Offline SFPGM EXECUTING Offline 3 4 D VALVE CONTROL Offline Offline Offline Offline SFPGM12 EXECUTING Offline SFPGM13 EXECUTING Offline SFPGM14 EXECUTING Offline SFPGM15 EXECUTING Offline oj S w N CFP Sh41E FEYECIITING Offline 285 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Data Window When a data window is selected the Data menu appears in the WorkShop Menu Bar Most data window actions can be performed using the Data menu or the Diagnostics menu or by right clicking the Data Window and selecting a comm
69. OK or press ENTER Insert Insert C Network Row C Column 111 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Editing Logic Editor Offline Network Address Adds a new network before the current net work ot address where the cursor is positioned Adds a new tow is before the row where the cursor is positioned If box instructions pre vent insertion an error message appears Adds a new column before the column where the cursor is positioned If box instructions prevent insertion an error message appeats Logic Editor Online Insert is accessed in the same manner online as offline However only a network or col umn can be inserted while working online Network With the cursor positioned at a network Insert places a new network before the current network Column A new column is inserted before the column where the cut sor is positioned If box instructions prevent insertion an error message appears Merge Memory Merge allows you to merge externally developed subroutine programs into User Memory For example you can merge compiled C Pascal assembly language and other programs into U Memotry Follow these steps to prepare the external subroutine for use in the controller 112 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Editing Compile assemble the subroutines and header to create object modules Link the object modules for
70. PLC Password PLC Password Alias pair highlight the pair in the list box and click the Edit button Alternately double click a PLC Password PLC Password Alias pair in the list box The PLC password and PLC password alias selected from the list box appear in the Edit PLC Password Alias dialog below Edit PLC Password Alias PLC Password Enter the actual Password written to the PLC Password Verify password PLC Password Alias Enter the Alias for the PLC Password above Alias Verify alias Cancel This dialog operates much like the Enter New PLC Password Alias dialog The Pass wotd and Verify passwotd entries must match just as the Alias and Verify alias entries must match 337 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays NOTE If the PLC password remains the same but the alias changes the original alias is replaced by the new alias The PLC pass wotd is now associated with a new alias However if the alias remains unchanged and the password changes the alias becomes associated with the new PLC password and is no longer associated with the original PLC password The Delete Button Any or all PLC Password PLC Password Alias pairs may be permanently removed from the list stored on the PC Highlight one or more items from the list box in the PLC Password Aliases dialog and click the Delete button A confirmation message states the selected item s will
71. Page Setup 166 Parallel Port 35 44 46 Parameterized Go to Subroutine 518 Parameterized Go to Subroutine 0 520 Partial Restart 339 Password 264 324 325 331 333 632 634 Password Security 621 630 631 Password Timeout 630 Paste 103 105 268 354 355 369 Paste With Rewire 103 106 269 Performing Syntax Check 318 Pet Scan Watchdog 589 PETWD 589 PGTS 184 518 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index PGTS Discrete Parameter Area Pin out PGTS Discrete Parameter Area 184 PGTS Word Parameter Area 184 PGTSZ 520 PID 521 522 PID 91 177 313 315 382 383 385 394 Loops 396 398 402 404 405 417 Data Element Types 417 Deadband 388 Delete 396 Detivative 405 Derivative Gain Limiting 390 Deviation Orange Alarm 393 Deviation Yellow Alarm 393 Directory 383 Documenting 382 Error Operation 392 Freeze Bias 390 High Process Variable Range 386 Integral 405 Limiting Coefficient 391 Lock Auto Manual 392 Lock Cascade 392 Lock Setpoint 391 Loop Gain 390 Loop Mode 313 315 Loop Output Address 387 Loop Title 383 Low Process Variable Range 386 Monitor Broken Transmitter Alarm 394 674 Monitor Deviation 393 Monitor Low Low High High 388 Monitor Low High 388 Monitor Rate of Change 394 PID Algorithm 384 Printing 91 Process Variable Address 386 Process Variable Alarm High 389 Process Variable Alarm High High 389 Process Variable Alarm Low 389 Process Variable Alarm Low Low 388 Process Variable Bipolar 387 Proportional 404
72. Scan dialog box is displayed in the following format Only numbers for the channels you have configured are displayed for example if you have four channels the number goes to 4 Type in the number of task codes for each scan Click the Write button to enter the numbers Click Close to exit the Task Codes Per Scan dialog box and return to the active logic program Task Codes Per Scan Channel 1 Diagnostics on Base Diagnostics on Base is used to run diagnostics on one or all the I O bases To invoke the operation 1 Click Diagnostics on Bases from the PLC Utilities menu or press ALT U D The Diagnostics on Base dialog box is displayed 2 To run base diagnostics on one base e Enter a channel and base in the Current Channel and Current Base boxes e Click Run Current and the data will be displayed in the dialog box 3 To locate the Dual Media base 322 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays e Enter a channel and base in the Current Channel and Current Base boxes e Click Next DM and the data will be displayed in the dialog box 4 To change the active and standby roles of RBCs on a particular base e Enter a channel and base in the Current Channel and Current Base boxes e Click Swap RBCs 5 To run base diagnostics on all bases e Click Run All and the data will be displayed in the dialog box 6 Click Close to exit the Diagnosti
73. Security User Security Setup Introduction to User Security Setup Once the security administrator adds users their initial passwords and access privileges the User Options item of the Security Setup menu as illustrated earlier is enabled Users can select this menu item to change their passwords through the User Security Setup di alog box If the security administrator elects to request user passwords once at startup the Switch User radio button is enabled Otherwise if passwords are requested at password control points this radio button is disabled Changing the User s Password Users may change their own passwords Security administrators may also change their pass words Click the Change user password radio button and the dialog controls are set as illustrated to the left User Security Options Change user password C User Name Enter current password Enter new password Verify new password Help Cancel Enter the user name and current password Then enter and verify the uset s new password and click OK If the entered user name is in the list of users previously added by the security ad ministrator the Enter current password text box is compared to the password already associated with that user 634 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security FasTrak Authentication Security If the Enter current password matches the existing password for th
74. Setup dialog box ap peats Program Setup Documentation Window Update Times Colors Logic Windows Data and D Simulator Window Options for m Individual Program Settings Iv Show Grid Iv Show All Headers Sticky Cursor Update Cross Ref Table Logic Font Cancel Save as Defs Restore Defs 2 Click a tab to display various setup selections The following table describes each feature in the Program Setup dialog box Logic Windows Tab General Options Show Grid Displays the ladder grid when selected Show All Displays ladder network and SF headers when selected Headers 144 Sticky Cur sot Update Cross Ref Table Logic Font PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Program Setup When selected the current ladder instruction is saved as the cursor You have to manually select the pointer cursor when you ate done editing the current instruction If not selected the cursor changes back to the pointer after inserting an in struction When selected the Cross Reference table automatically up dates whenever ladder is edited Changes the font displayed in the active program Any active Windows font can be selected To change the font Click Font and the Font dialog box is displayed Choose a font font style and font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box Click OK in the Font dialog box to save your changes and return to
75. Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops PID Loop Data Element Types Data Element Type Data Type NOTE Addresses that use a notation ate real types 448 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions 420 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Relay Instructions Relay Instructions Normal Contact STR When the referenced address of a Normal Contact is ON the contact is closed and passes power When the referenced address is OFF the Normal contact is open and does not pass powet C1 ls Patameter Type Valid Parameter Types STR Bit Address XY C V K WX WY STW B W TCP TCC DCC DSP DSC DCP Normally Closed Contact When the referenced address of a Normally Closed contact is ON the Normally Closed contact is open and does not pass power When the referenced address is OFF the Nor mally Closed contact is closed and passes power C1 He Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types STRN Bit Address X Y y V K WX WY STW B W TCP TCC DCC DSP DSC DCP Normally Open Immediate Contact When the discrete point of an I O module of a Normal Open Immediate Contact is ON the contact is closed and passes power When the referenced address is OFF the Normally Open Immediate contact is open and does not pass power 421 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Relay Instructions X1 Sik NOTE Only the power flow for an immediate X contact is updated The val
76. Slice controls how responsive SmarTune is to tuning session requests In crease this value if SmarTune is taking an excessive amount of time to start a tuning session Remember that as this value is increased PLC scan time will increase Calculation Time Slice determines how much teal time it will take to calculate tuning pa rameters It is possible a calculation might take 20 seconds or more of PLC time If a PLC has a scan time of 10 milliseconds and Calculation Time Slice is 2 milliseconds then a 20 second calculation would take about 120 seconds in real time 10ms 2ms 2ms 20s 120s The above formula is an algebraic simplification of Xs 2ms 12ms 20s where X is real time in seconds This value should be increased if a SmarTune session takes an excessive amount of time with a status of calculating see Status Variable Re member that as this value is increased PLC scan time will increase while a SmarTune session is calculating 416 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops PID Loop Data Element Types PID Loop Data Element Types Data Element Type Data Type E on omeen V Flags 16 Lu In teger C Flags 32 bits In teger LRSF RAMP SOAK Status Flags 16 bits In E LERR Error EO AE O E Dams ioios AC LRCA Rate of Change Alarm Limit in Engineering Units Minute ISPH Setpoint High Limit High Setpoint High Limit s Setpoint Low Limit A 417 PLC WorkShop for
77. Special Fn None PV Alarm Lo Lo Monitor Dev No v PY Alarm Low Dev Yellow Alarm E 00 0 PV Alarm High Dev Orange Alarm E 00 0 PV Alarm Hi Hi Monitor Change No v Monitor Remote SP Rate of Change Alarm 0 0 Remote SP Monitor Broken mit No y Clamp SP Low Clamp SP High Analog Alarm Alarm Title VFlag Adar Sample Rate PY Addr Low PV Range High P Range PY Bipolar 20 Offset on PV Sq Root of PV 1 ho 1 0 NONE 0 0 fig z o 4 d z o 4 Modify Doc MV Enable i To delete an Analog Alarm 1 Click Alarm from the View menu or press ALT V A The Analog Alarm Di rectory dialog box appears The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Alarm number 1 512 depending on the processor type Alarm Title and Enable Disable state NOTE To view or edit documentation of a selected address click Modify Doc 2 Select the Alarm you want to delete and then click Delete 505 WorkShop 9 tp The selected Analog Alarm s will be deleted Do you want to continue Yes No 3 Click Yes 368 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 8 Analog Alarms Copy and Paste Alarms Copy and Paste Alarms To Copy and Paste Alarms 1 Click Alarm from the View menu or press ALT V A 2 The Analog Alarm Directory dialog box appears The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Alarm number 1 512 depending on the processor type Alarm Title and En able Disable state Analog Alarm Dire
78. TD oooooccncncoconncncnonononoconononoo 489 Move Image Register to Word MIR W o oooococococococcccococococococcncooos 490 Move Byte Word Element MOVE iic ues 491 Move Wotd MOV W sat iaa 492 Move Word From Table MWET iate tee ias 493 Move Word to Table MW TD dub 494 21 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents Move Word with Indes MWD a doce 495 Move Word to Image Register MWIR 2 2 2 22220eeeeeeee eee 496 Search Table for Equal S TEE 2 2 ss jedbt tend sntencn sd asse dashes sepia 497 Search Table for Not Equal STEN 000 eta 498 Table to Table And TAND eiii ienaa aa p aaria aE ENEAS 499 Tableto Table Or C FOR carios AER 500 Table to Table Exclusive Or TXOR iie oec te DG 501 Table Complement TCPL sl ally Ast des 501 Table to Word TOWN ads 502 Wo td t Table NV EGET eae task ts dado oie Us 503 Word To Table And WE LO uiii ac daa 504 Word to Table Or WT TO sport ld oasis 505 Word to Table Exclusive Or WE TRON osito 506 Control Inst E OBS os occ sas isnt os eda hee ro dateien Eso dnas 508 Special Function Program Call SFPGM uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuus 508 Special Function Subtroaut ne SPSUD Y wrens rs e neos 509 End END M 511 inl ott otal ENDO i dd yee E ERE 512 Jamp GMB TRU e e 512 Jump End MPS m sca s3 oot oko ti 515 Master Control Relay MIO 8 son ees derent Sede sie odo tt 513 Master Control Relay End MORE o e
79. The Math group button remains selected until another group button is pressed Inserting an Instruction Bar Item in a Program 1 Click an instruction group button on the upper half of the Instruction Bar Result Instructions for that group appear on the lower half of the bar 2 Click the button showing the item you want to insert in the program Result The item attaches to the pointer when you move to the ladder editing area 3 Move the pointer to the item insertion point on the ladder editing area and click the left mouse button Result The instruction is dropped into place 58 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Main Window 4 Repeat Step 3 each time you want to add the same item 5 Click on the arrow button in the middle of the Instruction Bar to return the pointer to an arrow Menu Bar The menu bar located just below the title bar identifies the names of the available 505 WorkShop functions To display the menu options for each function click on the function name The menu options displayed may change depending upon the operation in progress 505 WorkShop EXAMPLE File Edit View Program Diagnostics PLC Utilities Options Window Help The Restore Down button appears on the Menu Bar when a program window is max imized Use the Restore Down button to control the size of the program window Multiple Program Windows 505 WorkShop displays more than one logic program window at a time
80. The fol lowing message appears Set the loop processor to halt mode Select either YES or NO Run places the loop card in the RUN mode enabled control blocks are being queued and are running To select LOOP RUN mode click Run on the PLC Operations dialog box The following message appeats Set the loop processor to run mode Select either YES or NO The loop mode can either follow that of the discrete CPU or be in RUN mode in dependent of the ladder program To invoke this option select the LOCKED or UNLOCKED field e Unlock frees the loop card for selection of RUN operating mode independent of the ladder CPU e Lock locks the loop card to follow the operating mode selected for ladders To select LOOP LOCK UNLOCK mode When the PLC is in locked mode click Unlock When the PLC is in unlocked mode click Lock The following message appears Lock or Unlock loop processor from ladder operation mode Select either YES or NO Run Controller Diagnostics Use Diagnostics to run diagnostics on your controller To execute Diagnostics 1 Click Diagnostics on the PLC Operations dialog box The message Execute Diagnostics appears 316 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays 2 Click YES or NO Programming EEPROMS To perform the following EEPROM tasks your controller must be in PROGRAM mode 1 Copy the contents of RAM to EEPROM 2 Copy the content
81. Us Gal A ai Fast PLC Connection a run by pel E Open an existing program ES Save the active program 61 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Main Window 62 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Main Window m Puts the PLC in program mode mj Puts the PLC in tun mode Y Enter and validate the active program 63 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Logic Programs Working With Logic Programs 505 WorkShop provides you with anumberof different ways of editing programs These in clude e Connecting to a PLC to view logic stored in the PLC e Creating a new program offline e Loading a file online e Loading a file offline e Attaching documentation to an online program Before you can perform any editing you must first open a logic program Creating a New Logic Program New programs are created in offline mode only To create a new logic program and begin programming 1 Click New from the File menu click the Li toolbar icon or press CTRL N The PLC Type Setup dialog box appears PLC Type Setup PLC Type SIMATIC 555 Revision 1104 Cancel Address Documentation Path Advanced 64 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs 2 Select the PLC Type and Revision corresponding to the PLC to be used
82. User Name Password Cancel Upon entering a valid user name and password and the security administrator has given this user privileges to this feature the user is granted access to the save feature After sav ing the user immediately returns to the program makes another change then selects the 631 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security FasTrak Authentication Security File Save menu item again Even though the user was just granted access to the Save fea ture the Password Required dialog reappears requesting the user name and password Once At Startup Alternately user name and password can be requested once when WorkShop is started or after selecting Switch user in the User Security Setup dialog illustrated later in this doc ument Upon entering a valid user name and password the new user can access each password controlled feature to which the security administrator has granted privileges without having to re enter the user name and password The advantage of this selection is that users enter their names and passwords once at startup and are not required to re enter them each time they choose a password con trolled feature The disadvantage of this selection is that one user can start WorkShop with a correct name and password but another operator can continue to use the application with all the original user s access privileges Adding Users Click t
83. Variable Alarm High High 374 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Analog SC Clear Process Variable Alarm Low Process Variable Alarm Low Low Process Variable Bipolar Rate of Change Alarm Remote Setpoint Sample Rate Special Function Special Memory Square Root of Process Variable V Flag Address Analog SC Application Setup Assign Addresses Assign IP Address Assign Tags Asynchronous Audit Setup Authentication Server Automatic Loop Tuning Automatically Insert Rung B Backup Files Base Diagnostics Baud Rate BCD to Binary BCDBIN Binaty to BCD BINBCD 374 373 372 376 374 371 375 177 373 370 229 238 148 145 358 359 156 145 224 627 636 402 148 148 322 151 194 485 541 484 542 662 Bit Clear 477 Bit Pick 477 Bit Set 478 Bit Shift Register 181 478 BITC 477 BITP 477 BITS 478 Break 599 Bus Parameters 194 223 C Cable 49 CALL 543 Call Subroutine 515 543 CAMP 159 Case 599 CBD 484 CDB 485 CDT 546 Centralized Security Server 642 CFUNC 535 Changing PLC Types 174 Choosing a Security Type 624 Clamp Setpoint Low High 374 389 Clear 103 108 109 189 270 292 341 Base 189 Forced Element 292 Logic Editor 109 Memory 341 CMP Coil Coil Not Colors Column Width COM Ports COM Profibus Comment 474 423 424 147 145 49 150 194 214 145 353 609 Comments for Smart Connect modules 236 Communications 49 143 150 152
84. Y returns 1 if X is greater than Y and zero otherwise Greater Than or Equal The expression X gt Y returns 1 if X is greater than or equal to Y and zero otherwise Modulo arithmetic The expression X mod Y returns the remainder of X after division by Y The expression NOT X returns 1 if X is equal to zero and returns zero otherwise Logical AND The expression X AND Y returns 1 if both X and Y ate non zero and zero otherwise Logical OR The expression X OR Y returns 1 if either X ot Y is non zero and zero otherwise MEN Bit by bit AND of two words Bit by bit OR of two words Bit by bit exclusive OR of two words Parentheses constants subscript variables and the following set of intrinsic functions are allowed in the expressions 567 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Real Integer Math MATH CEIL CEIL X returns the smallest integer that is greater than or equal to X FLOOR FLOOR X returns the largest integer that is less than or equal to X Each time the MATH statement is executed the calculations within the statement are made The MATH computations are executed using the rules of precedence for arithmetic operations listed in the table below Functions within a group are equivalent in precedence Execution takes place from left to right for all operators except exponentiation For ex ample in the operation X Y Z X is multiplied by Y and the result is divided by Z A subex
85. You can display the values of your addressees in the PLC by using Status Status can be dis played for Ladder networks Status is an online feature only Status will continue to update when you scroll and cursor within the program To display Ladder status 319 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays 1 Click Ladder Status from the Diagnostics menu orpress ALT D L Ifacheck mark is displayed before the Ladder Status menu item then Ladder Status is enabled 2 Ladder status is indicated by the following features e Contacts and Coils when on are displayed in Red e Addresses in box instructions indicate the current value for each address NOTE Ladder Status mode is automatically exited when an attempt is made to edit a network When the network is validated and entered Status is automatically displayed again 2 Click Ladder Status from the Diagnostics menu to stop displaying status Initiating a Single Scan Using a single scan allows you to view a single execution of your program You must have the controller in program mode in order to execute a single scan To perform a single scan of your program complete the following steps 1 Place the controller in program mode 2 Click Single Scan Setup from the Diagnostics menu ALT D I The Single Scan Setup menu dialog box is displayed If your programmable controller supports the Single Scan pop up task box fo
86. a Network 1 To select a specific network enter that network s number in the Find Network box and then click Find That network is selected and displayed in the Editor window Going to a Network 1 To go to a specific network select the network and then click Goto Network Editing a Single Network Header To edit an individual network header do the following 347 gt PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Ladder Network and SF Header Editor 1 Select a network and then click Edit Header or double click a network 2 In the Header box select the page print out option you want to use e If Paging None is selected there is no page break between the selected net work and the last network printed e If Paging Odd is selected the selected network is printed on the next odd page e If Paging Before is selected the selected network is printed on the next blank page 3 Type the text you want to use for the network header in the empty text box Editing Multiple Network Headers You can edit multiple network headers using the Cut Copy Paste and Delete buttons TO DELETE NETWORK HEADERS 1 Click Delete 2 Enter the range of network headers you want to delete The network headers ate removed from the specified networks TO CUT NETWORK HEADERS 1 Click Cut 2 Enter the range of network headers you want to cut The network headers are removed from the specified networks but rema
87. a larger MegaEDRUM instruction They are not required Figure3 Increasing the number of columns that represent output coils ad dresses 452 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums 16 Enter the next 16 based threshold in the shaded rows to specify a larger MegaEDRUM instruction y 4 k D Figure 4 Increasing the number of rows that represent steps NOTE You must enter all of the 16 based threshold values in the shaded rows and columns up to the number you want If you only enter the starting and the ending col umn row heading such as 16 and 128 the pinning chart will represent only the first 16 columns and rows The remaining columns rows ate ignored even if values have been enteted in the cells fot these col umns rows The numbers between the 16 based threshold values for example 17 18 19 and so on do not have to be entered They are optional ENTER ADDRESSES AND DESCRIPTION COLUMN ADDRESSES OPTIONAL By default the first 16 columns representing output coils addtesses are identified with C1 C16 You can change these values to represent the actual addresses you ate using in your MegaEDRUM instruction For instance if your first output coil ad dress is C101 you could change this value from C1 to C101 You could make similar changes to the other columns 453 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL In
88. acted upon Status Variable This word variable reports on the current state of a session Three bits are used in the word to allow easy use by an RLL program Bit 2 is set when a SmarTune session is completed with or without errors or warnings If bit 3 is also set then an error was detected Similarly if bit 4 is set then a warning condition occurred If only bit 2 is set then a SmarTune ses sion completed with no errors or warnings See the following table for a complete listing Note that entries with X s represent ranges of values PIN Variable PIN Variable and PIN ate provided to force a two step procedure to be followed before a loop is tuned To use this feature PIN Variable and PIN must both be set If PIN Variable is a null or PIN is zero then SmarTune activation is a one step procedure dependent only on Start Variable If both are specified then PIN Variable must equal PIN or a SmarTune session will not be started or queued Previous Mode If Previous Mode is used SmarTune sets it to a value which will switch a loop to its pre session mode when written to a loop s LVF This was conceived for use when Automatic Download has been configured as false but may be used for other purposes If Automatic Download is false a loop is left in manual mode with its output set to Safe Output when a tuning session has completed When Automatic Download is true a loop is switched back to its previous mode and is assigned its previous SP on complet
89. all subroutines below the limit threshold will terminate CONTINUE ON ERROR will not override this condition 545 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Correlated Data Table CDT Correlated Data Table CDT The Correlated Data Table statement compares an input value the input to a table of values the input table and locates a value in the input table that is greater than or equal to the input The CDT then writes the value located in a second table the output table that is correlated with the value located in the input table to an output address the output Input Output Input T able Output T able Table Lenath Cancel Help Input the input address Valid descriptors are integer addresses addresses con taining an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 or real addresses addresses containing a real value such as 33 642 V120 V100 2 or WY55 Output the address to which the output value is written Valid descriptors are writeable integer addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 and writeable real addresses writeable addresses containing a real value such as V120 Input Table the starting address for the input table Valid descriptors are integer addresses addresses containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 or teal addresses addresses containing a real value such as 33 642 V120 V100 2 or WY55
90. at the location designated for notices to Licensee under paragraph 13 below Licensee may change the computer on which Licensee uses the Software to another computer at such location Licensee agrees not to make copies of the Software other than for its own use all of which copies shall be kept in the possession or direct control of Licensee Licensee agrees to place a label on the outside of all copies showing the program name version number if applicable and Licensor s copyright and trademark notices in the same form as they appear on the original licensed copy 5 TRANSFER OR REPRODUCTION Licensee is not licensed to copy rent lease transfer network reproduce display or otherwise distribute the Software except as specifically provided in this Agreement Licensee understands that unauthorized reproduction of copies of the Software and or unauthorized transfer of any copy of the Software is a violation of law and will subject Licensee to suit for damages injunctive relief and attorney s fees Licensee further understands that it is responsible for the acts of its agents and employees Licensee may not transfer any copy of the Software to another person or entity on either a permanent or temporary basis unless Licensee obtains the prior written approval of Licensor which will ordinarily be subject to payment of Licensor s then current license transfer fee Such approval will not unreasonably be withheld if Licensee advises Licensor in writing
91. audits select the Audit option from the Policies drop down menu in the User Manager From this dialog check the Success and Failure buttons next to File and Object Access In Windows 2000 and XP users rights can be modified under Administrative Tools under Local Security Policy While on a domain controller users rights may be modified under Administrative Tools which is under Domain Controller Security Policy From either ap plication right click on the User Rights Assignment to list all user rights To enable security audits click on Audit Policy from within Local Security Policy under Local Policies Double click on the Audit Object Access policy and check both Success and Failure boxes The computer s operating system must have the latest service pack in stalled as this fixes auditing problems with earlier releases The following table may assist a user in determining what rights must be given to a user on the machines involved in FasTrak s NT Authentication Security Remote Server Local Server Ma Client Machine Machine chine Access this com Generate Security puter from the Audits network Generate Security Manage auditing Audits and security log Manage auditing and security log 643 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server NOTE It is mandatory that you reboot the machine for the new user rights to take effect Configuring DCOM
92. before first word is moved in poem a The Count V196 contains O because the shift register is empty v100 O The Index V197 contains O because the next available location is v107 number 0 V200 v108 E a The Register Full Status Bit C99 is off The Register Empty Index points 3 k v100 to location 0 Status Bit C100 is on V200 1 This status is set automatically by the controller the first time that v201 the FTSR is executed v202 Input word in V100 Shift register status after first word is moved in O The input address V100 contains the value 9137 v100 a The Count V196 contains 1 because one location is filled v107 a The Index V197 contains 1 because the next available location is v108 number 1 V201 v100 Index points a The shift register location V200 contains the value 9137 v200 to location 1 U The Register Full Status Bit C99 is off The Register Empty Status Bit C100 is off Shift register status after second word is moved in a The input address V100 contains the value 3391 a The Count V196 contains 2 because two locations are filled a The Index V197 contains 2 because the next available location is number 2 V202 s x points The shift register location V201 contains the value 3391 io locali 2 The Register Full Status Bit C99 is off The Register Empty Status Bit C100 is off Shift register status after third word is moved in Input word in V100 a The in
93. box 2 In the Search type box select whether you are searching for an address tag or de scription Find will try to locate the closest match to the entered search information If you want to find the exact match select the Exact Match check box 3 Click OK and the search item will be located and displayed in the Documentation Window Pop Up Menus The menu items available with the right mouse button are displayed below Modify Doc New Doc Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl Delete Find Ctrl F 357 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documenting in Ladder Documenting in Ladder Overview of Documenting in Ladder In addition to editing and creating new documentation in the Documentation Window you can also edit and create new documentation in the logic program as you enter and edit your logic The Documentation Window can also be used to help you program your logic In the logic editor these features are available e Assign Tags e Assign Addresses e Edit and Create Documentation in Ladder e Look up tags and use them in ladder These items are discussed in the following sections Assign Tags The Assign Tags option allows you to assign tags descriptions and comments to an un documented address that you are currently using in your ladder program For example if you enter an address in an ADD instruction and that address does not have a tag or de scription the
94. compared with floating point values are converted to floating point values before the comparison is executed e The values of the A and B parameters are displayed when Ladder Status is enabled See Ladder Status Online on page 379 for more information on Ladder Status Input When the input is enabled the GTR instruction is executed When the input is disabled the GTR instruction is not executed 471 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Compare Instructions Output The output is enabled when the GTR operation is TRUE A gt B Greater Than or Equal To GEQ A gt B _ INT When the input is energized the GEQ instruction compares two integers two unsigned in tegers or two floating point values and energizes the output if and only if the first value A is greater than or equal to the second value B Data Type not INT integer Identifies the type of labelled located in data being compared top right corner of in the instruction instruction block FLOAT floating point values block UINT unsigned integer Note Floating point values are only compatible with the CTI 2500 family of ptoc essors and a CPU firmware of V6 18 or later 472 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Compare Instructions for all data types INT Memory location of UINT and FLOAT the the value being following word address types compared WX WY K V STW
95. consecutive word is in the least significant half Any readable data element is allowed When a word data element is specified as an IO pa rameter the address of the data element is passed The value of the parameter is contained at this address 520 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions e An XSUB in RLL with no external subroutine causes the user program error bit 6 to be set in STW1 The reason is defined as 6 in STW200 The controller remains in RUN mode Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Program Constant Only 1 32767 or 1 65535 software Number Bit Word Form A Word Form C Bit No Bit of IN Words IO IN PID Loop PID Description The PID instruction schedules a PID fast loop for immediate execution 3 o CALL PID Valid Field Function Values H 0 65535 Instruction reference number for documentation purposes only This number can be repeated A Any read Word that contains a valid fast loop number 129 able word to 512 Any read Valid fast loop number 129 to 512 able constant 521 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions NOTE The PID instruction is only supported in controllers that support loop numbers of 129 or higher PID Operation When the input is on the referenced fast loop executes immediately The loop algorithm executes for the specific fast loop
96. containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WXTT e Scaled Result the memory location of the result after conversion Valid de sctiptors are writeable integer addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 and writeable real addresses writeable addresses containing a teal value such as V120 e Low Limit the lower limit to which Binary Input can be scaled The valid de sctiptor is a real literal constant that is less than or equal to the High Limit value e High Limit the upper limit to which Binary Input can be scaled The valid de sctiptor is a real literal constant that is greater than or equal to the Low Limit value e 20 Offset indicates if Binary Input is 20 offset YES or 0 offset NO e Bipolar indicates if Binary Input is bipolar YES or not NO NOTE You cannot choose both bipolar and 20 offset for an input SCALE Operation Each time the SCALE statement executes an integer located in the Binary Input converts to an integer or real number in engineering units scaled between the High and Low Limits e If the input is a variable that could range from 32000 to 32000 the variable is bipolar Set the Bipolar option to YES 594 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Scaling Values SCALE e If the input is a variable that could range from 0 to 32000 the variable is unipolar Set the option to NO e If the input is a varia
97. dis played on the Slave tab These modules are named Digital SC and Analog SC They are used to define the base I O address from which the Smart Connect modules are offset e Digital SC defines the base addresses for X Y addresses e Analog SC defines the base addresses for WX WY addresses 229 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Station Type Slave DP 140 State Offline Device File SIE 8027 GSE Status Offline Slave Parameters Slave Stat PROFIBUS Address E a Station Name C Disabled Modules Module 140 Address X 1 Config for Slot1 O 2 Config for Slot2 0 3 Config for Slot3 s JD 4 Config for Slot4 0 5 6 co 000 Config fo Digital SC Analog SC Unify Compact Restore Expand Definition 4 rm gt Smart Connect DELETE A SMART CONNECT MODULE To delete a Smart Connect module from a slave that supports Smart Connect modules 1 In the Profibus Configurator click the slave associated with the Smart Connect mod ule you want to delete See Configuring and Addressing Profibus I O Modules for additional information about the Profibus Configurator 230 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration 2 Click Smart Connect to open the Smart Connect Configurator Profibus 1 0 Ei mM 2500 0300 amp 38 2 ET 200M IM153
98. erenced by BB Element BB 0 is the first element in the table The following is a list of valid types for BI e Enter a constant 0 65535 If you leave the field blank or enter a 0 then no in dexing will be done e Enter any readable word see table above The contents of this word should be an unsigned integer 0 65535 that gives the value of the index If an indirect destination address is indexed the controller first resolves the address then it indexes it 529 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Special Instructions Load Constant LDC The Load Data Constant instruction LDC loads a positive integer constant into the des ignated memory location When the input receives power the LDC instruction is executed The data constant des ignated by N is loaded into the memory location specified by A When the function is executed the output is turned on Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant A Word Address N Constant Only Lock Memory LOCK The LOCK instruction works with the UNLCK instruction to provide a means in which multiple application in the TI575 coordinate access to shared resources generally G mem oty data blocks The LOCK can be either Exclusive or Shared An Exclusive lock signals other application programs that the resource is unavailable for reading or writing A shared lock signals other application programs that the resource locatio
99. fT TTT EEEE gt Ted Pp pp b ES EST E p T memory areas ae H LL Ty A 184 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Controller Memory Types User External Subroutine Memory A block of memory within the controller may be allocated for storing externally developed programs written in C Pascal Assembly language etc This memory type is called User Memory U Memoty The size of U Memoty is user configurable Global Memory 575 Only The 575 CPU allocates a 32K word block of memory that allows you to transfer data over the VME back plane This memory type is called Global Memory G Memory Refer to Appendix I in the 505 Programming Reference manual for more information about G Memory VME Memoty 575 Only The 575 controller also allows access to physical VME addresses using the VMM Memory ot VMS Memoty e VMMcotresponds to VME address modifier 39 standard non privileged data ac cess e VMS corresponds to VME address modifier 29 short non privileged access The 575 controller allows you to use a VME address VMM or VMS as a parameter to most word oriented RLL instructions such as ADD SUB or MOVW and so on When a VME address is used and is not recognized by any installed board a VMEbus error occurs If the instruction that used the address was other than MOVE or XSUB with the U Memory headet s E bit set to 1 see Ap pendi
100. following options are available Check In the file or folder to write any edits to FT VersionTrak and create a new version Undo the Check Out to cancel any changes made to the file or folder 122 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak Checking In Files Check in the program file to write changes to the master copy located in the FTVer sionTrak repository After you check the file in other users will be able to Get the modified file view the changes you have made to the file and check out the file to work on it as well To check in the active WorkShop file y 1 Clickthe Y icononthe FTVersionTrak toolbar The CheckIn dialog box appears Check In 575 FSS OK Cancel Use Checkout Comment From C PROGRAM FILESA505 WORKSHOP Browse Keep checked out Delete local copy Compare 2 In the Comment box type a comment for the check in optional If a comment was entered during checkout it will appear by default in the text box Select the Use Checkout Comment check box to use this comment 3 The From box will display the local path that the new version will be written from usually the working directory Click Browse to navigate to a different directory 4 Select the Keep checked out check box to write any changes to the repository but keep the program checked out to you 5 Select the Delete local copy check box to remove the working co
101. from the controller The value of the output signal increases as the value of the error increases Monitor Deviation In the Monitor Change box click Yes to have the controller monitor the deviation loop limits Click No if the controller will not monitor the deviation loop limits Deviation Yellow Alarm In the Dev Yellow Alarm box enter a value in engineering units for the setpoint de viation limit The deviation alarm bands are always centered around the target or setpoint that is the deviation alarm test is actually on the control error This value indicates the max imum allowable error SP PROCESS VARIABLE that sets the yellow alarm deviation alarm The yellow deviation limit must be within the span of the process variable and it must be less than or equal to the orange deviation alarm Deviation Orange Alarm In the Dev Orange Alarm box enter a value in engineering units for the setpoint de viation limit The deviation alarm bands are always centered around the target or setpoint that is the deviation Alarm test is actually on the control error This value indicates the maximum allowable error SP PROCESS VARIABLE that sets the orange alarm deviation alarm The orange deviation limit must be within the span of the process variable and it must be greater than or equal to the yellow deviation alarm 393 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Programming PID Loops Monitor Rate of Change In the Mo
102. group of tokens evaluating to an address or a value where a token is the smallest indivisible unit element address operator constant and parenthesis Valid Program Constant 0 1023 If 0 only the instruction Number Only parameters will be evaluated If 1 1023 the Special Function Subroutine to be called 510 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions Valid Parameter Type Values Function Stop Continue STOP Stop on error terminates the sub on Error CONT routine if an error is detected Con tinue on error allows the subroutine to continue so that the etror is han dled within the subroutine Bit C Y WY The location where error status is Address V ot Blank written if an error is encountered Blank either during parameter evaluation or subroutine execution IN LINE If YES the subroutine is executed immediately in line to the ladder program The result of the execution is available for the next rung of the current scan In line execution is only available for compiled Special Function Subroutines and only within controllers that support PowerMath Constant Form A The parameters to be evaluated If Bit complex the program number is 1 1023 the Word expressions parameters are passed to the Expression Constants specified subroutine End END The END instruction unconditionally terminates the scan The instruction does not have any par
103. header text gt lt delimiter gt Title Print Title Title lt delimiter gt lt Title header text gt lt delimiter gt If a header contains a carriage return double quote characters or commas it is surrounded by double quotes A header with no special characters will be stored without double quotes and read to the end of its line Example The figure below shows an example of exported headers with double quote characters com mas and carriage returns fl TITLE PAGE TXT Notepad Iof x File Edit Format View Help Register Value Text File Format Register values that are exported are saved in the following format When importing reg ister values the software expects the same format Fields are separated by either tab characters or commas at user option 80 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs The first field contains the PLC address of The second field contains the the register value For example the text file line K1251 12 means that the address K1251 contains the value 12 NOTE No information about the size or format of the data values is stored in the file When importing be sure to select the cor rect size and format For example if you export register values as octal and then import them as decimal the results will be incorrect Ramp Soak Text File Format Ramp Soak information that is exported is saved in the following format When importin
104. in progress or queued A SmarTune configuration consists of 33 parameters for each loop which are either value parameters or vatiable parameters These parameters allow you to automate loop tuning as desired For example you can choose whether or not to automatically load the new tuning parameters directly into the referenced loop NOTE SmarTune can only be used for position or temperature loops It is not applicable to velocity loops To access the SmarTune Loop Editor 1 Click PID Loop from the View menu or press ALT V P 2 The PID Loop Directory dialog box appears 3 The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Loop number 1 512 depending on the processor type Loop Title and Enable Disable state 4 Select the loop you want to SmarTune and then click SmarTune The following di alog box appears 402 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning PID SmarTune Loop 1 ix Security r Feature Selection 4 PIN ivi PIN Variable MV Not Used Automatic Download YES Cancel Calculate Derivative NO alculate Derivative Delete r Activation and Status Start Variable Abort Variable v Not Used Ack Variable v Not Used Status Variable V Not Used r PV Safety Limits High Stop 80 0 Engineering Units Low Stop 20 0 Engineering Units Sampling Parameters Max Time 30 0 minutes Wait Time 0 5 minut
105. input is on and the Enable Reset is on the timer begins to time down e Timing begins at the preset value Preset and continues down to zero e Ifthe Start Stop input turns off and the Enable Reset input remains on the timer stops but it saves the current value TCC If the Start Stop input turns on again the timer resumes timing TCC is also saved if the Enable Reset input is on and a loss of power occurs provided the controller battery backup is enabled e Ifthe Enable Reset input is turned off the timer is reset to the preset time spec ified in Preset e The output is turned on when the timer reached zero and it stays on until the timer is reset the Enable Reset input is turned off 428 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums Timer On Delay TMR 1 SEC TIMER PRESET 5 5 OUTPUT STATUS UNPROT E R Timer number Constant Only Varies with configured T C ranges Pest Constant Only Constant Only 0000 0 3276 7 0 3276 7 Do not use the same reference number more than once for timer A Warning counter up down counter and dis crete motor control alarm timer instructions Using the same tef erence number can cause unpredictable operations 001 s Timer IMRE The Timer instruction TMR is used to time events The timer output is turned on after the timer has timed down making this an on delay timer A slow timer
106. is copied to the coil s new addtess As an example of the first option the address of a network s output coil is C1 The net wotk header associated with address C1 is PROCESS 1 INDICATOR LIGHT The seatch and replace operation changes C1 to X44 The output coil of this network is now ad dress X44 Address X44 has no network header associated with it As a result this particular network loses its network header In the second option when the search and replace operation changes the network output coil address from C1 to X44 the network header PROCESS 1 INDICATOR LIGHT is 283 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Search and Replace Address copied from address C1 to address X44 This allows the network to retain its original net work header To select the first option clear the Copy network header check box To select the sec ond option select the Copy network header check box Copy Address Descriptions Check Box The documentation of each address includes the Tag Description and Description Com ment The Description portion of the original address can be copied to the address which replaces it Select the Copy address descriptions check box to copy the original ad dress s Description to the address which replaces it Confirm Each Replacement Check Box Select the Confirm each replacement check box to force the search and replace process to stop and request user confirmation before performing each
107. is not a problem if the program s execution time is small However if the program requires significant execution time this could cause unnecessary loop overruns 259 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming SF Program and Subroutine Editor NOTE Most SF programs and subroutines can be compiled How ever an SF program or subroutine which contains any of the following instructions cannot be compiled The data com pacting instructions PACK PACKLOOP PACKRS and PACKAA the shift register instructions SSR FTSR IN and FTSR OUT the PRINT instruction and the BCD in structions BCDBIN and BINBCD Additionally the CDT and SDT instructions when used in a compiled SF program or subroutine must specify a static table that is the table s base address must be a V K G VMS or VMM address and the table s size must be specified as a constant 10 Save Header changes and return to the SF Programs Subroutines dialog box by click ing OK To disregard changes and return to the SF Programs Subroutines dialog box click Cancel Special Functions Dialog Box Use the Special Functions dialog box to manage special function programs and subroutines To access the Special Functions dialog box click Special Functions from the View menu ot click the f toolbat button Special Functions Programs Subroutines Prog Title Enabled Compiled Title Enabled Compiled Protected YES YES A YES YES S YES Yi Close H
108. location into a shift register The shift register is located in V memory and can be up to 1023 words long The SHRW instruction has the following features e TheEnable Reset inputs must both be on forthe SHRW instruction to be executed e When the Clock transitions from off to on the word currently in memory location A is shifted into the shift register at the memory location specified by B The shift occurs as follows Word B N 1 is discarded Word B N 2 is then copied to word B N 1 word B N 3_ is copied to word B N 2 etc Word B is copied to word B 1 word A is copied to word B e After each shift is completed the output is turned on for one scan e If the Enable tuns off but the Reset remains on all words currently in the SHRW ate tetained but no wotds ate shifted e If the Reset turns off all words in the shift register are cleared to zero The in struction is not executed and there is no power flow at the instruction 479 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Bit Operations Register Varies with configured Shift Register Number ranges PAD Word Addr FomA Constant 1 1023 Do not use the same reference number mote than once for the SHRB and SHRW instructions Assigning the same number can cause unpredictable machine operation Word Rotate WROT The Word Rotate WROT instruction operates on the 4 bit segments of a word rotating them to the righ
109. more words into the shift register before all words are removed FTSR OUT Register start V196 Output V300 Register length 3 Status bit Co9 Shift register status before first word Is moved out O The Count V196 contains 3 because three locations bci are filled v107 a The Index V197 contains 0 because the next available Index points bila location for a word to be moved in is number 0 V200 to location 0 on a The Register Full Status Bit C99 is on v200 The Register Empty Status Bit C100 is off v201 v202 1 This status is set automatically by the controller the first time that the FTSR is executed Output word in V300 Shift register status after first word is moved out o The output address V300 contains the value 9137 maos a The Count V196 contains 2 because two locations vi are filled Index points bed O The Index V197 contains O because the next to location 0 V100 available location for a word to be moved in is v200 number 0 V200 v201 O The Register Full Status Bit C99 is off v202 The Register Empty Status Bit C100 is off Output word in V300 9137 Shift register status after second word is moved out a The output address V300 contains the value 3391 no O The Count V196 contains 1 because one location is filled Index points to location 0 O The Index V197 contains O because the next available location for a word to be moved in is number 0 V200 o T
110. must use the same cor responding values for register start register length and status bit in the two FTSR statements Starting address Register Start determines the memory area in which the shift register is located The first word of user data is located in address Register Start 4 The four words Register Start through Register Start 3 are automatically reserved for the op eration of the shift register e Register Start contains the Count which equals the current number of entries in the shift register e Register Start 1 contains the Index which acts like a pointer to indicate the next available location of the shift register into which a word can be shifted When the Index equals zero the next available location is Register Start 4 when the Index equals one the next available location is Register Start 5 and so on e Register Start 2 contains the length which equals the maximum size of the shift register in words e Register Start 3 contains the Checkword The checkwotd is used internally to in dicate whether the FTSR has been initialized Output is the output address into which the words ate moved The register length Register Length determines the size of the shift register The register length depends upon the mem ory location that you choose and how much memory you allocated if the memory is user configurable Status Bit turns on to indicate that the register is full Status Bit 1 is au tomatically reserv
111. n and words as W n where n number of the parameter e You must enter the parameters consecutively An error will be displayed if you do not e If you do not need to specify parameters it is recommended that you use the GTS instruction instead The GTS instruction uses less L memory e While you can still access any memory location from a subroutine the PGTS al lows you create a generic subroutine that is called by multiple PGTS instruction varying the parameters e If you use an instruction that copies long words into or from the subroutine you need to allocate a parameter for each word of each long word that is copied NOTE Avoid a direct reference in a subroutine to a memory lo cation that is also identified as a parameter in the PGTS instruction If you don t you may create a condition where the value of the parameter and the value in the memory lo cation do not agree PGTS Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Program Number Constant 1 32 IN input Word Bit Form A Word Form C Bit 10 output 519 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions Parameterized Go to Subroutine 0 PGTSZ The PGTSZ instruction operates similarly to the PGTS instruction The PGTSZ calls an RLL subroutine for execution and passes parameters to it Unlike PGTS the PGTSZ clears all discrete I O parameters when the input to the PGTSZ is off When the input is turned on operation
112. name 505Program1 FSS Save as type 505 WorkShop Files fss hue Cancel 2 Select where you want to save the program in the Save in box and type the name the file in the File name box 3 Click Save or press ENTER Result Your file is saved with its new name 4 Ifyou select a file name that already exists in that directory a message appears with options Select from the following options e YES saves the updated program with the current name overwriting the previous version e NO cancels the save procedure NOTE If you are saving documentation to an online program please see Saving Online under Saving Logic Programs on the pre ceding pages Printing Logic Programs Printing Logic Programs 505 WorkShop provides you with a number of print features that allow customization of your printouts These include 87 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs e Tags and Documentation e Cross Reference e Network Address Range e Margins and Starting Page Number Before you can print open a logic program Make certain that you have loaded the correct print drivers for your printer through the Windows Control Panel If you have questions re garding loading print drivers consult your printer s user s manual and the Windows User s Guide To print logic programs and or documentation 1 Click S on the toolbar click Print from the File menu or press CTRL P Result Th
113. nt El Li o A e LLLI Att et 369 A 370 Overview of Analog Alarm Parameters comicos 370 Alam iS A ISI I DUC 370 ni A e ees ae casui iere sni co Ud ac n tisse E eeepc t 370 Sample RAG A coll hash At Se tle ei Se CIR LUE Ced 371 Process Variable Address 2 22 23 an cu a a a 372 Low Process Variable Range ec rocasocinicinans isos doi odes drach 372 High Process Variable Range au teat cal ree ete oed 972 Process Variable Bipolar c 372 O ISE A Les 373 Square Root of Process Van able oe a in tots 373 Monitor Low Low Hist High ts restes dede 373 Montoro Tel acie a tinas 373 Process Variable Alarm Lows Dow nuoc cac tati da 373 Process Variable Alarm DOW it saec eere ees 374 15 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents Process Variable Alarm PGi osa e sa dt 374 Process Variable Alarm High High e a ts a totes 374 Monitor Remote Setpoint sspe dross rain acia 374 Rem te Setpolht AA eris estu aae cM ud Ela a LIA LC 374 Clamp Setpoint AAA scu a nhe nacre sand CHER PES sat 374 os AAA A ord LES eoo rete ud 375 PD Meee aon A E REL Geet 375 ei no AAA oe de ead hee enna E E Ds 375 Monitor Devia otsene is 375 Deviation Yellow o e a de 375 Deviation A Mange Alat nyo cect eal at nt eg wD as 376 Monitor Rate of Chat rass rei asoa e a 376 R te of Change AA O He re 376 Monitor Broken Transmitter Alarm 2 2 2 020e0eeeeeceeeeeeeee ee 376 Analog Alarm Data Element Wye tute ndo estela 377 Chapter 9 PED Los o
114. of C12 is replaced with X4 Any C13 is replaced with X5 and so on as illustrated below C12 is replaced with X4 281 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Search and Replace Address C13 is replaced with X5 C14 is replaced with X6 C15 is replaced with X7 C16 is replaced with X8 C45 is replaced with X37 C46 is replaced with X38 C47 is replaced with X39 Performing Multiple Search and Replace Operations Any or all of the 32 Search for and Replace with ranges can be used to perform multiple seatch and replace operations in one continuous process However once an address is changed during a given process it will not be changed again even when another Search for and Replace with range is set to change the new address For example one search and replace range is set to change C1 to X4 A following search and replace range is set to change X4 to B19 The search and replace process will not per form both changes C1 to X4 then change X4 to B19 Instead the first change C1 to X4 occurs Then the process moves to the next address in the PLC program and determines if it will be replaced Search amp replace in Combo Box The search and replace operation can be performed on 5 isolated sections ofthe PLC program e Ladder e SES Special Function Subroutines e SFP Special Function Programs 282 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Search and Replace Address e Alarms e PID Lo
115. process variable Monitor Remote Setpoint To have the controller monitor the remote setpoint click Yes in the Monitor Remote SP box Click No to have the analog alarm use the current value in the analog alarm variable Remote Setpoint Click NONE in the Remote SP box if there is no remote setpoint Otherwise enter a V K WX or WY address ot a value in the Remote SP box Clamp Setpoint Low In the Clamp SP Low box enter values for the low setpoint If there are no limits enter zero 374 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 8 Analog Alarms Analog Parameters Clamp Setpoint High In the Clamp SP High box enter values for the high setpoint If there are no limits enter Zero Alarm Deadband In the Alarm DB box enter a value in engineering units for the alarm deadband When you specify an alarm deadband the controller can provide histories on all alarms except the rate of change alarm to prevent them from chattering when the process vatiable is near one of the alarm limits Special Function In the Special Fn box enter a SF program number Click NONE if no SF program is to be executed Monitor Deviation In the Monitor Dev box click Yes if the controller will monitor the deviation alarm lim its Click No if the controller will not monitor the deviation alarm limits Deviation Yellow Alarm In the Dev Yellow Alarm box enter a value in engineering units for the setpoint de viation limit The deviat
116. program or creates a new program and adds it to the FTVersionTrak repository by clicking the 3 icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar 3 Other users get the file from the repository by launching FTVersionTrak high lighting the file and clicking Get Version from the Version menu or by clicking the EN toolbat button 4 If multiple programmers will be working on the same programs at the same time see Tips and Strategies for Team Programming These strategies will help everyone in volved use FTVersionTrak in the same way 5 Begin using WorkShop like you normally would by opening editing saving and closingthe program files FTVersionTrak s seamless integration automates the ver sion control process 6 Read the FAQs about FI VersionTrak and Using FI VersionTrak in WorkShop for more information Also see Operation Modes in FT VersionTrak Using FIVersionTrak in WorkShop Using FTVersionTrak in Workshop Certain aspects of the WorkShop environment are different when your WorkShop program is being protected by FTVersionTrak Most differences occur automatically when opening and closing WorkShop files All other version control features can be accessed using the FTVersionTrak toolbar You can change the way FT Version Trak behaves within WorkShop by clicking Ap plication Setup from the Options menu The Application Setup dialog box lists options specifically for FTVersionTrak in the FTVersionTrak Options group box FTVersionTrak O
117. program is placed under the control of the JMP You can make the JMPE conditional by placing a contact on the same network as the JMPE Master Control Relay MCR The Master Control Relay is used to turn off blocks of outputs controlled by segments of RLL programs This is done by clearing the discrete image register points of the controlled outputs to zero Although the MCR controls the coils and discrete outputs of box instruction within its zone of control it does not control the power rail This means that box instructions will continue to operate normally In order to disable a box use an MCR controlled coil output as a normal contact on the same network that contains the box The MCR operates as an output enable instruction with the following features e The MCR must have power flow and not be nested within the zone of control of an MCR not having power flow for discrete outputs in the MCR zone of control to turn on or stay on e The MCR controls the coils and discrete outputs of box instruction in its zone of control Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Constant 1 8 Number Master Control Relay End MCRE MCRE marks the end of the zone of control for the MCR having the same reference number If you do not use the MCRE the remainder of the program is placed under the control of the MCR You can make the MCRE conditional by placing a contact on the same 513 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10
118. replace in Ladder z Copy network headers From Network i Copy address descriptions Cancel Confirm each replacement Danao 6 Skip any errors Help Search for Combo Boxes Each Search for combo box specifies the address type and number from which that seatch and replace operation will be performed The drop lists in these combo boxes con tain prefixes of all valid address and instruction types Enter a number after the address prefix to designate the starting point of the address range to be searched and replaced For example the partial drop list may contain the following address prefixes X Y C V K WX and WY Select address prefix C and enter 12 after it This indicates the starting address of this seatch and replace range is C12 280 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Search and Replace Address Through Boxes associated wtih Search for The numeric values entered in the through boxes located to the right of the Search for boxes specify the address at which the search and replace range ends This value must be greater than or equal to the address number entered in the Search for combo box Continuing the example above entering 47 in the through box indicates this search range starts with address C12 and ends with address C47 Replace with Combo Boxes The Replace with combo box specifies the address type and number which will replace the address range entered in the Search fo
119. replacement Clear this box to allow the search and replace process to proceed without pausing for user confirmation Skip Any Errors Check Box Some replacements may be invalid such as replacing addresses which are beyond con figured limits or selecting instructions which are not available for the PLC type When these errors occur search and replace may be set to stop display the error and request user confirmation before proceeding Alternately search and replace may ignore any errors and continue its process without paus ing for user confirmation Select the Skip any errors check box to allow search and replace to continue past any errors without requesting user confirmation Replace Button When the Search for and Replace with ranges you want to use have been entered click Replace to start the search and replace process Cancel Button Click Cancel to exit the Replace Table dialog box without performing the search and re place process Help Button Click Help to display general help text about the Replace Table dialog box 284 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Data Window Data Window Using the Data Window The Data Window is used to view and change the data values of your program Once you display addresses in the Data Window you can enter specific values If mon itoring data online you can enter a value for a particular address send it directly to the processor and you can force I
120. restrictions e For bit or bit and word modules but not for word only modules the number for the I O address must begin on an 8 point boundary An 8 point boundary is n 8 1 for example 1 9 17 and so on Addresses not starting on an 8 point boundary are changed to do so when you write the values e WorkShop does not flag duplicate I O points Use the Find I O functions under the PLC Configuration dialog box to search for duplicate I O points To edit the I O addtess 1 Launch the Profibus Configurator by clicking PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu The PLC Configuration dialog box appears 220 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Processor Information 4 r Memory Configuration PLC Type CTI 2500 User System Total System Memory Kbytes 3072 Ladder Kb 48 Configured Memory Kbytes 7 Variable Kb Remaining Memory Kbytes 3002 Constant Kb Special Kb Comp Spec Kb 140 Configuration User Sub Rb Global K svo Profius VO revo eno Drums Shift Reg K Table K One Shots K Controls K 1 0 K 2 Click Profibus I O The Profibus I O dialog box appears 3 Select the slave module to be edited from either the Network Tree or the Master tab The Slave Tab appears Station Type Slave DP 1 0 State Offline Device File SIO1801D GSE
121. retrieve the file version information ofa previously saved 505 WorkShop logic program 1 Click Retreive File Version from the File menu 2 Do one of the following e Inthe text box type the full path and name of the logic program whose file version information you want to view and then click Lookup For example type C Program Files FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop 505demo fss 82 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs e Click Browse and then browse to the logic program whose file version in formation you want to view File version information about the selected logic program is displayed in the File Version Information area The information might reflect a range such as v3 00 v4 20 instead of a specific version If an invalid path and or program name is entered an error message is displayed Make sure to specify a valid path and correct program name or browse to the program file you want to use Saving Logic Programs Saving Offline Use the Save Program command to save the active program contents with its existing name To save the active logic program 1 Click a on the Toolbar click Save Program from the File menu or press CTRL S and a previously saved logic program is saved 2 If the program has not been previously saved the Save As dialog box appears Select where the program will be saved in the Save in box and type a name for the program in the File n
122. the THEN section and the be ginning of the ELSE section in an IF THEN ELSE structure Statements between ESLE and ENDIF constitute the ELSE section in the IF statement IF ELSE and ENDIF statements may be nested to any level NOTE Integer IF operations are available only in CPUs that support PowerMath 0003 IF V1 5 0004 PRINT PORT 1 MESSAGE TANK LEVEL IS LOW PRESENT LEVEL IS V1 FT 0005 MATH LKC1 3 00 0006 ELSE 0007 MATH LKC1 1 00 0008 ENDIF 560 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Integer Math IMATH Integer Math IMATH The Integer Math statement executes integer arithmetic computations Equation M Y20 TCC2 2 Equation Entered as an A B format using the operators below Valid de sctiptors for A are writeable integer addresses addresses containing a writeable integer value such as V101 or WY11 and writeable integer bit of word addresses Valid descriptors for B are integer addresses or values any integer value or address containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 or integer bit of wotd addresses or values IMATH Operation The IMATH format is based on the following operators Unary Not The expression NOT X returns the one s complement of X Shift right arithmetic Shift left arithmetic Multiplication Integer division Any remainder left over after the di vision is truncated Modulo arithm
123. the header and subroutines to create the load module The file name must have the extension rec The output must have the header at zero followed by the code and data constants then the variables and finally the stack Select Merge from the File menu and U Memoty from the list Window Result The Merge dialog box appears Type the program name in the File name box or browse to search from valid pro gram names Click Open to merge the program U Memory Merge Look in B 505 WorkShop E Ee File name Files of type S Records rec Cancel 113 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak WorkShop and FTVersionTrak Using WorkShop with FTVersionTrak 505 WorkShop integrates seamlessly with FT VersionTrak FasTrak s powerful file change management software FTVersionTrak safeguards your valuable work in progress preserves previous versions of files and stores files in a safe place If for some reason you lose a file or it becomes cor rupt you can retrieve a previous version of the file from the FTVersionTrak repository FTVersionTrak also details version histories allows electronic signatures organizes files and mote You can be sure no one else is editing a file when you store it in FTVersionTrak because only one person at a time can check out the file making it read only to other users You can view checked out copies of files by get
124. the normal SF scan e Priority Similar to Normal but the Special Function Program runs in a priority time slice The time slices can be configured independently e Cyclic The Special Function Program runs repeatedly while the input to the SFPGM is true The Cycle Time secs parameter controls how frequently the Spe cial Function Program runs Restricted The Special Function Program is called by loops and alarms 6 Ifthe Program Type is Cyclic enter the cycle time in seconds 0 5 6553 5 7 Select the Enable Program check box to allow exaction of the SP program You can also enable and disable the program from within the SF editor by typing SHIFT F2 258 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming SF Program and Subroutine Editor 8 For the 555 1105 1106 and 575 2105 2106 CPUs the compile mode is se lectable When compiled mode is selected the SF program or subroutine is translated to the native instruction set of the CPU s microprocessor The compiled code is then executed whenever the program or subroutine is scheduled for ex ecution The advantages of compiled execution are e Significant execution speed improvement For example a MATH statement that adds two floating point values will execute in less than 10 us when compiled ver sus more than 100 us when executed by the SF interpreter Depending on the program s size and the placement of the target LABEL within the program a GOTO statement
125. the rights granted by this Agreement with respect to the Software and that the use by Licensee of the Software and Documentation will not infringe the rights of others In the event Licensee believes that it has discovered one or more significant programming errors Licensee shall immediately notify Licensor of such fact in writing If such notice is received by Licensor within twelve 12 months from the date hereof Licensor shall within a reasonable time subject to the demands of Licensor s other customers and subject to delays beyond Licensor s control including but not limited to labor trouble illness delays in shipment of materials and bad weather at Licensor s expense correct the programming errors In the event Licensor is unable to correct the programming error within a reasonable time Licensee may elect to terminate this Agreement and receive a refund of the licensee fee paid hereunder For purposes hereof a programming error is significant only if as a result thereof the software does not substantially perform the functions described in the Documentation Licensor does not warrant that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free EXCEPT FOR THE ABOVE EXPRESS WARRANTY LICENSOR MAKES AND LICENSEE RECEIVES NO WARRANTIES EXPRESS IMPLIED STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE AND LICENSOR SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE REMEDY PROVIDED HEREIN IS EXCLUSIVE U
126. the step specified by DSO and advances to the next step based on operation of the timer and or event e When the drum advances a step individual bits of the output word are turned on off based on the fixed mask and the current bit pattern in the configurable mask e The drum output comes on and remains on after the last programmed step has been executed The last programmed step is the last step having an event pro grammed or having a non zero CNT preset value The event must be on and DCC must be zero If the event goes off after DCC reaches zero the drum output re mains on and the MDRMW remains at the last programmed step until the drum is reset e When the Enable Reset turns off the drum output is turned off and the drum re turns to the step specified In DSP e Ifthe Start input turns off and the Enable Reset remains on the drum remains at the current step and DCC holds its current count All bits specified in the con figurable mask maintain the condition specified by the fixed mask e When the drum is at the Preset step the bits specified in the configurable mask follows the states specified by the fixed mask for that step even if the En able Reset input is off You should program the mask with a bit pattern that is a safe state for the Preset step e The drum advances to the next step immediately if the Jog input transitions from off to on and the Enable Reset input is also on The configurable mask is specified for each s
127. they become the Guest user Adding Users for Windows NT In Windows NT users and groups can be created by entering Administrative Tools from Control Panel and selecting User Manager This is shown in the figure below 640 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server Computer Management EE ni xj Action View le EE Tree Computer Management Local users BB System Tools Cicroups al Event Viewer Qy System Information x Performance Logs and Alerts Shared Folders Device Manager Local Users and Groups CI Users CI Groups y Storage 3 Disk Management Disk Defragmenter E Logical Drives Sa Removable Storage e Services and Applications A H A Adding Users for Windows 2000 and XP In Windows 2000 and XP users and groups can be created by entering Administrative Tools from Control Panel and selecting Computer Management Within the Computer Management utility users and groups can be created by right clicking on the corresponding folders under the Local Users and Groups tree item This is shown in the figure below 641 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server E Computer Management DE ES File Action View Window Help es amp m m e Ei Con
128. time required to send the information in the pinning chart to a PLC depends on several factors including the type of communication used the size of the pinning chart and the address types used Word addresses such as V can be transmitted faster than discrete addresses such a C READ FROM PLC TO PINNING CHART Click Read From PLC which is located in row 1 of the pinning chart to populate the pin ning chart with values from the PLC the pinning chart is currently connected to RESET COMMUNICATION WITH SERVER Click Reset which is located in row 1 of the pinning chart to reset communication with the 505 communication setvet Maskable Event Drum Discrete MDRD The Discrete Maskable Event Drum MADRID instruction operates similarly to the event drum but is capable of specifying a configurable mask for each step which allows selection of the coils to be under the control of the fixed mask in each MADRID step When the Drum begins to run it starts at the step specified by the Drum Step Preset which is stored in DST memory The current step is stored in DSC memory The counts per step set in the CNN field is stored in DIP memory The current count is stored in BCC memory The MADRID operates as follows e The drum is enabled when the Enable Reset input is on e When the Enable Reset is on and the Start input turns on the drum beings to run The drum begins at the step specified by DSP and advances to the next step based on oper
129. use in the Value box In the Format drop down box select the appropriate data format Show Forces To show all forced elements complete the following steps 1 With the Data Window open and active click Show Forces from the Data menu The Display All Forces dialog box appears Display All Forces Start Address BT Cancel 2 Enter an address to start the display in the Start Address box and click OK when finished All forced addresses occurring after the Start Address appear in the Data Window Clear a Forced Element To Clear a Forced Element from either Data Window or ladder logic editor complete the following steps 292 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Data Window From the Data Window 1 Select the element you wish to force in the data window 2 Click either Force On or Force Off from the Diagnostics menu or right click the element and select Force On or Force Off from the shortcut menu The force ap pears next to the value of the element in the Data Window From the Ladder Logic 1 Select the element you wish to force in the ladder logic editor 2 Click either Force On or Force Off from the Diagnostics menu 293 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Complete Cross Reference Complete Cross Reference In both online network mode only and offline programming you locate all the uses of an address in a program by viewing the Cross Reference w
130. used by the device receiving the ASCII characters Enter the form feed indicator lt FF gt as follows THERE IS A FORMFEED AFTER THIS lt FF gt e To enter a lt CR gt lt LF gt Carriage return Linefeed press ENTER during text entry THERE IS A CARRIAGE RETURN LINE FEED AFTER THIS e Toprint double quotes precede it with anotherdouble quote THIS QUOTED TEXT IS PRINTED INSIDEDOUBLE QUOTECHAR ACTERS 592 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Return from SF Program Subroutine RETURN Return from SF Program Subroutine RETURN The RETURN statement is used to terminate a Special Function program or subroutine If invoked from a Special Function program the program terminates If invoked from a sub routine control returns to the statement in the Special Function program following the subroutine call The return format has no subfields If there is no RETURN statement the program ter minates after the last statement 593 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Scaling Values SCALE Scaling Values SCALE The Scale statement uses as input an integer input and converts it to engineering units scaled between high and low limits Binary Input Scaled Result Low Limit High Limit 20 Offset Bipolar Cancel Help e Binary Input the memory location of the input Valid field descriptors are in teger addresses addresses
131. user all administrator rights and privileges Click Save Settings The list of existing users is checked to assure the new user name is not a duplicate If the new user name is unique the two password entries are compared Fi nally the new user name is added to the User List box Editing Users There ate two ways to select an existing user to edit Either double click a user name from the User List box or highlight a user name in the User List box and click the Edit User button By default Retain existing password is checked and the password edit boxes are dis abled This allows the security administrator to modify privileges without needing to re enter the user identity information the user name and password To change the user name type an alternate entry in the User Name edit box To change an existing user password uncheck Retain existing password to enable the password edit boxes Enter and verify a new password Both password entries must match in order to save the new password Security administrator rights may be granted to or revoked from the user by checking or un checking Security Administrator Deleting Users To remove a user highlight a name in the User List box and click the Delete User but ton A verification message appears which asks to confirm the deletion Click OK and the uset is temoved 633 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security FasTrak Authentication
132. user has on the local machine may differ than the rights they have on a remote machine Similarly the groups a user belongs to on the local machine may differ than the groups they belong to on a remote machine Domains When a computer is part of a Domain and a user logs onto any computer that s a member of the domain the user name and password they supply is stored on the domain controller vs the local machine There is no re logging when connecting to a remote machine on a do main The rights a user has and the groups they belong to are the same amongst all the machines on the domain This eliminates the need to declare users twice Once on the local machine and once on the remote machine When setting up a server on a domain its important to choose the domain controller machine because this machine holds all the do main users and groups Configuring Users and Groups to the Operating System Configuring users and groups differ depending on the operating system your on Configure users and groups using the instructions for the operating systems listed below Adding Users for Windows 95 98 and ME In Windows 9x and Me users may logon to the system to get their unique user profile but they do not have any rights since the OS is unprotected and they do not belong to any groups A user can be created simply by entering a unique user name and password when logging on to the OS A user may skip the login procedure altogether in which case
133. user is denied access to a secure feature and the Audit Failure box is checked for that feature All security changes in FTSecCfg are accumulated and do not get committed to the server until confirmation upon exit of PTSecCfg Event Viewer The Event viewer is a Windows application for displaying application security and system logs FasTrak uses and writes to this log to hold audits It is launched from within the Se curity Configurator To launch the Event Viewer select the View Event Viewer menu item as shown in the figure below The Event Viewer is also accessible from the Win dows Control Panel under Administrative Tools ih FTSecCfg File Edit BUT v Toolbar 9 wv Status Bar SUS wwUrKSIIULI PLC WorkShop For 55 Performance Seri 655 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server The following window opens Double clicking an entry in the right most pane above will display more information for the item Event Viewer File Action View Help e aa e fa Event Viewer Local 1 731 event s Application BD anfomnaton 11 10 2006 11 48 35 Automatic LiveUpdate SD Information 11 10 2006 11 48 35 Automatic LiveUpdate D Information 11 10 2006 11 47 53 Automatic LiveUpdate Internet Explorer D Information 11 10 2006 8 17 49 AM Automatic LiveUpdate 6 Information 11 10 2006 8 17 49 AM Automatic LiveUpdat
134. when the LESS operation is TRUE A lt B 468 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Compare Instructions Less Than or Equal To LEQ SS BB INT When the input is energized the LEQ instruction compares two integers two unsigned in tegers ot two floating point values and energizes the output if and only if the first is value A less than or equal to the second value B Data Type not INT integer Identifies the type of labelled located in data being compared top right corner of in the instruction instruction block FLOAT floating point values block UINT unsigned integer Note Floating point values are only compatible with the CTI 2500 family of proc essors and a CPU firmware of V6 18 or later for all data types INT Memoty location of UINT and FLOAT the the value being following word address types compared WX WY K V STW W TCP TCC DCC DSP DSC DCP and constants for FLOAT data type only the following Real address types are also available WX WY K V and Real constants Constants and Real Constants available only for the B parameter 469 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Compare Instructions Notes e Integers that are compared with floating point values are converted to floating point values before the comparison is executed e The values of the A and B parameters are displayed when Ladder St
135. y ReEYW P 8 app yw To access the Find Documentation dialog box 1 Open the Documentation window by clicking Documentation Window from the View menu or by clicking the toolbar button i 2 Do one of the following e Click Find from the Edit menu e Click the a toolbar icon e Press CTRL F e Press ALT E F 275 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Finding Logic e Click Find from the right click menu The Documentation Find dialog box appears 5 Documentation Find Find what Search type Address Y Exact Match Cancel 3 In the Find What box type the text to search for For example you could enter C21 Stop Pulse orDrum Wash 1 4 In the Search box select the type of search you want to perform e Address In an address search the program s documentation is searched to find an address that matches or most closely matches the text entered in the Find What box For example if your program does not use a C27 address and you type C21 in the Find What box the search could highlight C20 or C22 Description In a description search the program s documentation is searched to find descriptions that match the text entered in the Find What box If the Exact Match check box is selected the entire description must be entered in the Find What box otherwise only the first few characters are needed Note The Description search is a sequential search that begins with the f
136. 00 heating or cooling 100 Output Pronartinmal Rand 100 Output Output Proportional Gain E rror Proportional Band A temperature controller using only the proportional component of the PID expression may experience a steady state error as shown below This error is induced by thermal load ing on a temperature zone As the thermal loading on a temperature zone increases the magnitude of the steady state error is increased 404 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning Setpoint EN Steady state error Steady State Error Thermal loading is induced by energy losses to the surroundings conduction through the machine as well as the process A proportional only controller can resolve this error only to a limited degree The Integral Component The integral term of the PID expression provides a means to eliminate the error in the pro portional band This term is defined as the Error integrated over time Thus in the case of the steady state error the output would be increased or decreased depending on the sign of the Error over time The amount of the integral adjustmentis determined by the magnitude of the Error and the In tegral gain Excessive Integral gain would cause an oscillation about the setpoint Likewise minimal Integral gain would not reduce the Error ina timely manner and be ineffective The Derivative Component The Derivative term of the PID expre
137. 05 Chapter 6 Programming CTI 2500 Error Codes 010B Abnormal Power Use Partial or Complete Restart Loss to clear this error Indicates power was removed before the controller could com plete an orderly shutdown 010D User Program Flash After clearing this error using Restore Error Partial or Complete Restart you must erase the user program in Indicates that the pro flash reload the program to gram stored in flash RAM then save it to flash could not be used 0113 Scan Watchdog Time The most common cause of the out problem is setting the cyclic mu RLL cycle too small so that This error indicates other scan elements do not get that the actual scan enough time to run time exceeded the watchdog setting 0114 Compiled RLL Check These errors may be caused by sum Error to excessive conductive or ra diated interference affecting the Indicates the com controller memory piled RLL has been corrupted Use Partial or Complete Restart 0134 Compiled SF Check to clear this error Sure Deor If this problem persists ensure This error indicates the system is propertly that one of more com grounded piled SF programs subroutines have been corrupted 306 Operating System Error Indicates that an error has been detected in the operation of the system firmware Diagnostic Error Indicates that a gen eral diagnostic error has occutted Hardware Failure Indicates that a failure in a hardwate
138. 1 WY11 contains BCD 1234 VTT contains binary representation of integer 1234 E a 1 2 f se ii ata ES vc A 0 off fo ofa 1 s o sJo o 4Jo olofol o of of of of 4 so 1 oo A VTT gt B WY11 Binary to BCD Statement Operation Example 542 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Call Subroutine CALL Call Subroutine CALL The call statement calls a Special Function subroutine for execution Up to five parameters may be passed to the subroutine by the Call statement e SFSub the number of the SF subroutine to be called and ranges from 1 to 1023 The valid field descriptor is an integer literal constant e P1 a value or constant to be passed between the SF subroutine that is called and the SF program or subroutine that contains the Call statement Valid descriptors are integer addresses or values any integer value or address containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 or real addresses or values any teal value or address containing a real value such as 33 642 V100 2 or V120 optionally the field can be left blank e P2 P10 an additional value or constant to be passed between the SF subroutine that is called and the SF program or subroutine that contains the Call statement Valid descriptors are identical to P1 This field may be left blank Please note that while CTI 2500 PLCs support up to 10 parameters Simatic 505 PLCs only allow up
139. 1 DPV1 EE 3 L SCIM SC DP 4 JL SC16DO aDP 5 LOADER INDEX HYDRAU 6 LOADER HEAT EXCHANG 7 SOUTH KETTLE FLUID CC Station Type Slave DPI O State Offline Device File SIE_8029 GSE Status Offline Slave Parameters 8 NORTH KETTLE FLUID Cl sieve Status 3 NORTH VACUUM COOLIN PROFIBUS Address 30 Enabled 10 SOUTH VACUUM COOLII RENE dh 11 SOUTH KETTLE HYD UN tation Name Disabled 112 NORTH KETTLE HYD Ur 13 NORTH GRID HEAT EXC Modules Module 170 Address X 14 SOUTH GRID HEAT EXC ne wy 15 SPARE 1 Config for Slott s 0 0 0 0 0 16 SPARE 2 Contig for Slot2 0 0 0 0 0 17 NORTH VACUUM COOLI SOUTH VACUUM COOLIL 3 Config for Slot3 0 0 0 0 19 DOWNCOMING HEAT E gt 4 Contig for Slot4 0 8 0 D 0 20 SOUTH PROBE HEAT E gt E 21 NORTH PROBE HEAT Es 5 Config for Slot 0 8 0 0 22 SOUTH VACUUM PUMP 6 Config for Slot6 0 8 0 0 0 23 NORTH VACUUM PUMP 24 SOUTH KETTLE HEAT E 7 Config for Slot 0 8 0 0 0 25 SPARE 8 Digital SC 0 8 8 D 0 26 MELT HVAC BLOWER 3 Analog SC 0 0 0 0 1 27 NORTH KETTLE HEAT E 28 Eurotherm 2400 End Slave Config L SC32DI aDP LSC 32DI aDP 32 L 5C 32D aDP TAAA AAAA AAA A AA AAAA AA AAAA AAAA EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE NOTE If the SmartConnect button is not enabled then the se lected slave does not support Smart Connect or the slave is associate
140. 1 Task Codes Per Scan 321 SubNet Mask 156 157 TCMP 527 Subroutines 260 264 TCP IP 51 150 157 158 Subtract 481 TCPL 501 Suggestions 34 Technical Specifications 32 Support 34 36 47 680 Technical Support Temporaty Memory TEXT Text Box Description Text File Format THEN Time Compare Time Driven Drum Time Set Time Event Driven Drum Timeout Timer Fast Timer On Delay Retentive On Delay Slow Timer Timer Counter Memory Tisoft Exporting Hot Keys Title Bar Title Page TIWAY TMR TMRF Toolbar TOR Trace Address Transfer Logic 34 35 47 177 527 527 80 81 559 527 439 180 526 440 630 178 428 430 429 429 430 428 178 76 145 254 75 144 255 57 60 364 150 153 154 428 429 58 61 500 299 68 71 681 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Technical Support Using the Data Window Troubleshooting TSET TIOW TXOR U Memory UDC Undo Unforce Unify E INILINK Host Adapter nique Address UNLCK Unlock Unlock Memory UNSCALE nscaling Values E p Down Counter Cc pdate Times USB Used Addtesses User External Subroutine Memory E ser Rights E ser Switch Settings Users E sing the Data Window 34 45 526 502 501 112 432 103 107 291 292 200 222 154 300 531 317 531 605 605 432 147 35 44 45 297 185 636 642 309 653 287 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index V Flag Address XSUB
141. 158 163 164 Cable 49 CP2572 Module 155 158 Ethernet 155 158 Fast PLC 164 File Associated Communications 63 H1 52 PC 55 Profibus FMS 150 Serial Ports 150 Setup 150 153 158 164 TCP IP 150 155 157 158 Testing 158 TIWAY 150 153 154 UNILINK 53 Compact 201 222 Compare 301 474 Compatibility 32 Compatible PLCs 38 663 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index CMP Data Window Complete Restart Configuring I O Connecting to a PLC 340 187 64 65 71 72 164 Constant Forms 537 Constant Memory 178 Control Relay Memory 177 Convert BCD To Binary 541 Convert Binary To BCD 542 Converter 49 Copy 103 105 268 354 355 369 Correlated Data Table 546 Counter 430 CP2572 Module 155 158 Creating a New Program 64 Cross Reference CSV CTI 2500 CTI 2500 Custom Function CTR Customer Support Cut D Data Element Types Data Fill Data Format Data Window Customizing Data Fill 99 294 296 297 76 309 535 430 34 103 104 268 354 417 287 289 292 101 111 147 285 287 289 291 289 287 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Date Compare Documentation Data Format 289 Delete 111 Display Options 144 Forcing an Element 291 Print 101 Using 285 Date Compare 525 Date Set 180 525 DCAT 433 DCMP 525 Deadband 388 Default 599 Delete 103 109 111 270 354 356 396 Data Window 111 Documentation 351 Logic Editor 111 PID Loop 396 Delimited Text File 76 Demo Mode 44 Derivative Gain Limit
142. 20 Offset indicates if the output is 20 offset YES or 0 offset NO If the output is a variable that has a 20 offset ranges from 6400 to 32000 set the option to YES If the output is a variable that has a 0 offset set option to NO e Bipolar indicates if the output is bipolar YES or not NO If the output is a variable that could range from 32000 to 32000 the variable is bipolar Set op tion to YES If the output is a variable that could range from 0 to 32000 the variable is unipolar Set option to NO NOTE The output cannot be both bipolar and 20 offset Operation of UNSCALE Each time the UNSCALE statement executes the Scaled Input value is converted to a scaled integer The high and low limits of the Scaled Input are specified in their respective 605 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Unscaling Values UNSCALE fields These limits fall within the real number range 5 42101070 107 to 9 22337177 10 9 22337177 10 to 2 71050535 10 Range The result is stored in the address specified in Binary Result An error is logged if the scaled value of the input is outside the set ranges and the input is clamped to nearer of either the low limit or the high limit 606 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions While End While WHILE ENDWHILE While End While WHILE ENDWHILE The WHILE instruction is used on conjunction with an
143. 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Print Registers m Selections Print All Include lv Iv V Memory from fi to 2048 Tags iv M KMemory from o to gt MV Descriptions Save as Defaults Restore Defaults Doc Font we 3 coc Select the All check box to print the entire range of items To print a selection clear the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box The tags and descriptions can be individually turned on or off To include with the Reg ister print out select the appropriate check box under Include 1 Click the Doc Font button to change the Tag and Description printout font of the active program Result The Font dialog box appears Font Font style Regular Courier New T Courier1 BT Italic Bold Bold Italic E Ir Decorated035 BT Effects Strikeout Underline Color BH Black Script Westem m PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs 2 Choose a new font font style or font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 3 Click OK in the Font dialog box to save your changes NOTE The print selection options are stored when saving a pro gram Print Documentation Select the Documentation check box from the Print dialog box to print the following e I O Elements X Y WX and WY e Control Relays C e SKP LBL GTS SBR JMP MCR and END e Reg
144. 505 Chapter 6 Programming Editing Logic Validate and Enter While programming in online or offline mode logic must be validated and entered before it can be saved to disk or transferred online To validate and check your logic 1 Press F8 click Y on the toolbat or click Validate and Enter from the Pro gram menu The message Validating and Enter appears on the screen 2 After logic is validated and entered and if necessary problems fixed the logic pro gram can be saved or transferred online 272 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Finding Logic Finding Logic Finding Logic Use the Find dialog box to go to a particular register or bit address a particular PLC instruction type a particular register or bit address used in a particular instruction type a particular network or SF line number a particular network address a particular keyword in a network header To access the Find dialog box click Find from the Edit menu or click the toolbar button a Find Register Address D Instruction Type or Instruction and Number NONE gt Global Ladder SFP and SFS Search Wrap C Search from Beginning of Current Window Search from Current Position Goto C Network SF Line Number C Network Address Header Keyword Search C Find what Cancel Help 273 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Finding Logic To search for a
145. 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documentation Window 1 Click ej on the toolbar or click Paste from the Edit menu The Paste Range di alog box appears Enter the starting address to paste to in the at box Paste Range Paste Addresses Cancel 2 Click OK and the addresses in the clipboard are pasted into the Documentation Win dow starting with the at address Delete To delete an existing address tag description and comment 1 Click Delete from the Edit menu or press ALT E D and the delete dialog box ap peats Delete Range Delete Addresses n far Cancel to C4 2 Enter the starting and ending addresses to be deleted in the from and to boxes 3 Click OK and the selected range of addresses are deleted from the Documentation Window Searching for an Address Tag or Description You can find the documentation associated with a specific address tag or description by using the Find option To find an item do one of the following 356 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documentation Window e From the Edit menu click Find ALT E F e Right click in the logic window and select Find from the shortcut menu e Click Q on the toolbar After you select Find the Find dialog box appears Documentation Find Find what Search type Address Y Exact Match OK Cancel ok 1 Enter the address tag or description you want to find in the Find what
146. 92 530 391 273 273 145 60 319 422 390 313 315 387 383 402 372 386 671 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index License Agreement Memory M MADRID 457 Mailing Address 34 Main Toolbar 61 Main Window 57 Maintenance Agreement 35 Manual 34 Maskable Event Drum Word 458 Master 191 193 197 214 223 Master Control Relay 513 Master Control Relay End 513 MATH 566 MCAT 436 MCR 513 MCRE 513 MDRMW 458 MEDRM 442 Mega Time Event Driven Drum 442 MegaEDRUM 442 Memory 95 112 171 174 177 178 180 182 184 185 341 Clearing 341 Configuration 171 174 Constant Memory 178 Control Relay Memory 77 Drum Memoty 182 Global Memory 85 Image Register Memory 177 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Menu Bar Network Mode K Memory Ladder Memory Merging One Shot Memoty PGTS Discrete Parameter Area PGTS Word Parameter Area Printing Shift Register Memory Special Memory Status Word Memory Table Move Memory Temporary Memory Timer Counter Memory U Memory User External Subroutine Memory Variable Memory VME Memory Menu Bar Menus Merge COM Profibus Merge Memory MIRFT MIRTT MIRW Mnemonics Modem Module Module Parameters Monitor Broken Transmitter Alarm 178 177 112 180 184 184 95 181 177 178 180 177 178 112 185 178 185 57 59 271 193 214 112 489 489 490 250 150 191 192 198 220 201 376 394 672 Monitor Deviation
147. A St 342 Chapter 7 Documentation oi ii ai 343 Ladder Network and SF Header Editot soos 345 Ladder Header AA A a ie ah ote 345 Network Eie AAA NI RR LLL Li ue 345 A A e A ened t Dru 346 Network Header Editot xis a toate Ske 347 Documentation WIRCON Sere ode Sti tc aise Dl M eS 350 Using the Documentation Window 2 1 22 seseeeec seek tees se asn ey delete 350 C stamizme the Displays e LL ecd 351 Editing and Creating New Address Documentation 2 351 Cut Copy Paste and Deleting Documentation ooocococcccccccccccocococoo 354 Searching for an Address Tag or Description 2 2 0222022222 356 SS A E A A 357 Documents Ladder rres iseen ES Tete tid dese cine diana oes 358 Overview of Documenting in Laddet 0 0 ccc cc ccc ec ec ec ee ee nen enees 358 Assign A A Re A 358 HAS OT PMA PCS SCSI ccs soe buie cC uU A Maal LM LA 359 Editing Documentation in Ladder Bditot ee eoe 359 Shared Documentation A LIA SALHRLAIibie dau 359 14 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents Toggling the Display of Documentation Components 360 Edit Tithe Pape Punt OI es ad 364 Chapter 8 Analos ATArmaes e etes 365 Analog Alarm Oo io reee oc DUM Dp caters 367 To access the Analog Alarm Pditoti oo cio IAS 367 Tordelete 10 Analog Aus atacara e e ait ieee dna See ere 368 Copy ANG Paste Alarms costosos ue uUo edidere oae 369 To Copy and Paste A tte
148. ACKRS instruction moving values from a V mem ory table to a Loop Ramp Soak profile changing two of the values in the profile and leaving the remaining values unchanged PACKRS To from Table FROM Table Address V1000 Loop Number 1 No of Steps 2 Starting Step 1 Loop 1 RAMP SOAK Profile before PACKRS is executed Status Setpoint Ramp Rate Soak Time Deadband Bit Unas Units Min Min Units Y1024 Y1025 Y1026 Y1027 Ramp step status bit address Y1024 IEEE floating point representation of 40 0 Step 1 Values IEEE floatng point representation of 5 0 Soak step status bit address Y1025 IEEE floating point representation of 10 0 Step 2 Values IEEE floating point representation of 5 0 Loop 1 RAMP SOAK Profile after PACKRS is executed Status Setpoint Ramp Rate Soak Time Deadband RIS Bit Units Units Min Min Units Y1024 Y1025 Y1026 Y1027 In this example the Ramp Soak profile for Loop 1 is changed after executing the PACKRS instruction The Setpoint value in Step 1 is modified from 30 0 to 40 0 and the Soak Time value in Step 2 is changed from 3 0 to 10 0 All other values in the profile have been left unchanged Figure 25 Example of PACKRS from a Table in V Memory 588 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pet Scan Watchdog PETWD Pet Scan Watchdog PETWD The PETWD Pet Scan Watchdog allows you to extend the scan watchdog limit while per formin
149. CP station and the CP 5412 card in your PC to the PROFIBUS network using the PROFIBUS cables and connectors described in the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS FMS Com munication Processor 505 CP5434 FMS User Manual 162 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup File Associated Communications File Associated Communications When a file is successfully loaded online in WorkShop the communication settings are as sociated with the file so the next time a user wishes to go online with the same file WorkShop will default to these settings Communication settings associations are made by writing a block of data to a binary file called FTRF FasTrak Route Format located in the same folder as WorkShop The next time a user loads a WorkShop program file the associated communication set tings appear in the Open Program dialog box Open Program xs Browse Program File C Sample 505 Program FSS Address Documentation Path C Sample 505 Program FSS Advanced En Program Type Offline Connect to PLC Connection Method TCP IP 505 Simulator Setup V Use File Associated Connection Settings Options Y Transfer Logic to PLC r Cancel Select the Use File Associated Connection Settings check box to accept the connection method associated with the file or click Setup to view or edit Communication Settings NOTE Selecting Force File Associated Communications Set tings
150. CT MODULES The following procedures can be used to determine the addresses of Smart Connect Modules DIGITAL INPUT MODULE e The starting address of each module is an X address with the following address number Base Digital Address Input Offset Byte 8 Input Off set Bit DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULE e The highest numbered digital input offset is located the discrete inputs provided by that module are added and the resulting offset is rounded up to the nearest whole byte This gives the number of X addresses that must be skipped before starting the output addressing e The starting address of each module is a Y address with the following address number Base Digital Address Number of X Addresses Out put Offset Byte 8 Output Offset Bit ANALOG INPUT MODULE e The starting address of each module is a WX address with the following address number Base Analog Address Input Offset Byte 2 ANALOG OUTPUT MODULE e The highest numbered analog input offset is located the analog input bytes pro vided by that module ate added and the result is divided by 2 to convert bytes into words This gives the number of WX addresses that must be skipped before starting the output addressing e The starting address of each module is a WY address with the following address number Base Analog Address Number of WX Addresses Output Offset Byte 2 240 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505
151. Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Find Configured I O Find Configured I O To find configured I O 1 Click PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu The PLC Configuration di alog box appeats PLC Configuration Processor Information Memory Configuration PLC Type SIMATIC 545 User System Total System Memory Kbytes 192 Ladder Kb Configured Memory Kbytes 70 Variable Kb Remaining Memory Kbytes 122 Constant Kb Special Kb 120 Configuration User Sub Kb Profibus 1 0 Find 1 0 TEKI Drums Shift Reg K Table K One Shots K Controls K Bit 1 0 K Word 140 K ES Re m p m TERES o mo ee gt a 32 p 1 i 2 UnderI O Configuration click Find I O The Find I O Address dialog box appears Find I O Address 140 Address Location Cancel Help 3 Enter an X Y WX or WY address and click Find Next 4 Find will first search 505 I O then search PROFIBUS I O When the address is found you can click the Find Next button to find the next location of the address 241 242 Chapter 6 Programming 244 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Online Versus Offline Programming Online Versus Offline Programming Before you begin programming it is important that you understand the differences be tween programming online and programming offline While programming online you are connected to a P
152. Config Load SF Programs Load Profibus Load SF Subroutines LoadV Variables Load PID Loops D Load Analog Alarms Load Word 1 0 Load Forces E Load Documentation Load TCP overwrites ALL Timers and Counters OK Cancel Help 3 To enter a different file name click the Browse button 4 Check the boxes for the parts of the program you wish to load or check the Load Complete Program box to load all parts 5 To set up shared documentation a Enter the shared documentation database file name in the ot click the Browse button to locate an existing file b Click the Advanced button c Click the Next button and enter the refresh rate time lag between updates from other users of the database Valid times are from 1 1440 minutes d Click Next and Finish 6 Click the OK button to load NOTE If your controller is a 575 refer to Connecting Online to a 575 in this chapter for information on selecting Application ID and configuring potts 70 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Transfer Offline Program to Online 505 WorkShop allows you to transfer an existing offline logic file to an online 505 con troller A Warning Editing or modifying a program on line may produce unexpected or hazardous results To transfer an existing offline program to online 1 Click Transfer gt Online from the File menu or press CTRL B Result The Open Progra
153. D PNO Address of master 0 Station does not exist No Slave not ready for data exchange No Configuration data does not agree No Slave has extended diagnostic data No Function not supported in slave No Invalid slave response No Incorrect parameterization Slave parameterized by different Master No Slave has to be parameterized No Diagnostic requested by slave No Watch dog activated No Freeze command received by slave No Sync command received by slave No Slave inactive No Diagnostic data overflow No 4 General Diagnostics Device Diagnostics Identifier Diagnostics Channel Diagnostics Hardware Directory The Hardware Directory displays and organizes the Profibus slave devices available for con figuration Each device in the Hardware Directory is a representation of a device master file GSD that has been added to the directory The information contained in the GSD de termines how and where the device is displayed in the directory To view the Hardware Directory 1 Click PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu The PLC Configuration dialog box appears 2 Click Profibus I O button The Profibus I O window appeats 203 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration E EB E E E EE E EE EE EF EE E 8 8 33 2 ET 200M IMT53 1 DPV1 LSCIMSC DP 8 4 LSC 16DO aDP 5 LOADER INDEX HYDRAU i83 6 LOADER HEAT
154. DERE 109 A O 111 Metge lt AA O IAS 112 WorkShop and FIVersionTtak eese 114 Using WorkShop with FTVersionTrak eeu 114 Getting Started with FT Version ITt k i i t ete a 114 Using PT Version Tra in Work Shops estadio ep ek een eth 115 Opening WorkShop Files otc st Ea ot Oe diet Bie AS ih 130 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents Saving WorkShop Biles iiss a ts o letras Gl 133 Closing WorkShop Files ti ibas anes ts 134 Operation Modes in BL Version Dra scored ebat ono e dspace neds 136 FAQs about PT Version tiki s seh eit iii aril aslo ht el ee 137 Tips and Strategies for Team Programming liuius 139 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup 0 0 0 c ccc cece cece eee e cece ene cecececeeneneees 141 IHtfOGHCHOHd Aaa oe AA SAD O AE RAD E Le ERE A RR a EE Ee 143 PROS TANG Sees esas A O O TEMERE 144 oo cca Nan tt he ce cg lB rn a che chen Ao ntl oad an 148 Bs AAA A Lou MER rg DIN AL xe Dee 150 Setting Up Communications 1 ic 150 Serial or Modem Communication cesta 150 H1 Communications 2 0 00 0 00200 cece 152 BUR US gr 153 WERE di Pare A A 155 Setting Up and Using PROFIBUS EMS o oooocococococccccconcccnccnonooo gt 160 File Associated Communications 1852625 cepi sla prO ee pr PER PIDE Ed PEDU S VERPAIDPQNGU 163 Past PEG Setuti csset ioo I acre Cu ec ditate TL DA E 164 PAte creo HE x M 166 Pinter A o Sl et e dd 166 o AAA cs n ELM AUN h re Git PRSE EU EAE 166 Chapter 5 PLC Memory I O C
155. Diagnostics Slave Status 2 PROFIBUS Address Enabled Station Name C Disabled Modules Module 140 Address X i WX wY Comment Insert Module 1 Config for Slot1 a D 0 0 0 0 ete Medic 2 Config for Slot2 0 0 0 0 0 E 3 Config for Slot3 0 0 0 0 0 4 Config for Slot4 ce 10 8 D D D 5 Config for Slot5 D 8 D D D 6 Digital SC 3 8 8 0 0 Unify 7 Analog SC 20 0 0 2 1 Compact End Slave Config E estore Expand Definition 4 m Smart Connect The following image shows the resulting addresses E Digital Inputs The 2 bits from the 2DI module Slave 2 ID 8027 Display r ee j are rounded up to a full byte 8 discretes They 6 X14 5 X13 7 X15 Digital Outputs The 1 bit from the 1DO module 15 is rounded up to a full byte 8 discretes It starts Y23 at X17 because the base address is 9 there are 8 bytes of inputs preceding it and the offset is 00 0 13 Y2l 14 Y22 Analog Output It is 1 word from the 140 module It starts at WY22 because the base address is 20 there are 2 words of inputs preceding it and the offset is 00 Analog Input It is 2 words from the 2AI module It starts at WX20 because the base address is 20 and the offset is 00 239 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration DETERMINING ADDRESSES OF SMART CONNE
156. E 3 ET 2005 M151 DPV1 BI GES7 134 4G811 0480 2411 SVE Parameters 6ES7 132 4BD01 0440 400 as Sive SIUS PROFIBUS Address s Enabled Station Name C Disabled iS Modules Slot Module 1 0 Address X h 0 CTI 2501 as 841 3 D 0 0 0 1 CTI 2554 4 4CH Hi Spee 16 0 WX WY Comment Insert Module e 0 Poma 4 4 2 CTI 2556 1641 Thermoc 24 D 0 16 End Slave Configurati Unify Compact Restore Expand Definition 4 m D Help Cancel Apo The main features of the Profibus I O window include e Profibus Network Tree The Profibus Network Tree appears at the left of the window It represents a three level tree view of the PROFIBUS network The first level is the master which in this case is the PLC Type selected for the 191 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration program The second level contains slave devices The third level contains the I O modules residing in each slave Clicking on the devices at any level will dis play that device s configuration options in one of the tabs listed below e Master Tab Displays status information for the selected master including all slaves associated with the master Use the Master tab to add slave devices and merge COM Profibus configurations e Bus Parameters Tab Displays and allows edits for bus parameters such as number of repeaters and OLMs as well
157. EDRUM MASK can be changed programmatically in real time because they are held in addresses 444 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums X Y C The first of several consecutive ad Vx x dresses containing zeros and ones that WXx x are used as EVENT flags A value of 1 and WYx x starts the countdown of the step and ad bit address vances to the next step when the types en countdown reaches zero A value of 0 tered in the will cause the drum to remain on the form of a step discrete ad Mesta The total number of required consecutive bitoEsord addresses is specified by the STEPS pa rameter For example if STEPS 32 then 32 consecutive bits ate required The 32 required bits can be held in 32 consecutive C X or Y bit addresses or 2 consecutive V WX ot WY wotd ad dresses 445 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums 0 32767 Similar to the EDRUM CNT parameter specified COUNT specifies how long a drum re using K and mains on a step V word address Unlike the EDRUM instruction the Counts per Step DCP is represented by types the address and implied addresses spec ified in the COUNT parameter Actual time step COUNT x SEC CNT in seconds COUNT is a constant from 0 32767 and is held in consecutive addresses The total number of consecutive addresses is specified by the S
158. ER START A D00002 000006 3 EXPANDER LOCAL STOP 000002 EXPANDER SHUTDOWN RESET D00003 000004 EXPANDER LAMP TEST D00004 EXPANDER LUBE CIL PUMP 1 Expander Guide Yan e Actuator Solenoid Expander Inlet Valve Open Delay Timer witch D00005 2 To view address documentation inline select the Display inline Address Doc umentation check box When the check box is cleated address documentation is shown just above the box 3 To go to a network location where a particular address is used select the network number and click Goto or double click the network number 296 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Address Used Address Used Displaying Addresses Used To show if specific elements are used in your program you can build an element usage list ing The following element types can be shown in the Ladder Element Used Table Creating an Address Used Listing To create an element usage listing both online and offline programming you can track ad dresses in a program by viewing the Address Used listing 1 Click Address Used from the View menu The Address Used window appears If you have more than one program loaded the information displayed is for the pro gram in the active window The Address Used listing uses information from the Cross Reference Table If the Cross Reference Table is not current a warning will appear to build the table NOTE
159. EXCHANG 7 SOUTH KETTLE FLUID C 8 NORTH KETTLE FLUID ct 3 NORTH VACUUM COOLIN 10 SOUTH VACUUM COOLII 3 11 SOUTH KETTLE HYD UN 12 NORTH KETTLE HYD Uh 83 13 NORTH GRID HEAT ad 14 SOUTH GRID HEAT E 15 SPARE i83 16 SPARE 17 NORTH VACUUM COOLI E 18 SOUTH VACUUM COOLI 13 DOWNCOMING HEAT E gt i 20 SOUTH PROBE HEAT E gt 21 NORTH PROBE HEAT E gt 22 SOUTH VACUUM PUMP 23 NORTH VACUUM PUMP 24 SOUTH KETTLE HEAT E 8 25 SPARE 26 MELT HVAC BLOWER 83 27 NORTH KETTLE HEAT E 28 Eurotherm 2400 8 29 L SC 3201 aDP 30 LSC 3201 aDP 31 L SC 3201 aDP EE 32 L SC 3201 a DP je po 22 Addslave ET 200M IM153 1 LSCIM SC DP LSC16D0 aDP LOADER INDEX HY LOADER HEAT Ex SOUTH KETTLE FL NORTH KETTLE FL 3 Whileon the Master Tab click Add Slave The Hardware Directory dialog box ap pears 204 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration 313 SIMODRIVE sensor Gateways General 0 EE 3 3583 PROFIBUS DP 3 CP5614 Sample 80b4 3 IM 178 4 i3 IM 180 DP Slave 313 IMCO1 Network_components 38 SIMEAS Q V2 3g SIPOS MC P 3i SITRAS DPUS6 PU E g 8 m E 5 Ident Systems zy NC RC PLC PROFIBUS PA Switching devices Valves E E E E Add Hardware Remove Hardware GSD Filename SIEM8064 GSE
160. Force Role Swap 534 Freeze Bias 390 Freeze PLC 314 FRS 534 FTSecCfg 651 FISR IN 549 FISR OUT 549 FIVersionTrak 114 117 120 121 123 124 126 128 130 133 134 136 137 139 149 Adding Files 17 Application Setup 48 Checking In Files 123 Checking Out Files 121 Closing WorkShop Files 134 Comparing WorkShop Files 24 Electronic Signatures 128 FAQs 37 Getting Started 114 Getting Versions of a File 119 Launching 129 Opening WorkShop Files 130 Operation Modes 36 Options 148 Saving WorkShop Files 33 Tips and Strategies 139 Toolbar 116 Undo Checkout 124 Using 114115 Viewing History 26 Full Function 42 Functions 31 G GEQ 472 Global Memory 185 Go to Subroutine 514 GOTO 557 Goto Label 557 Greater Than 470 Greater Than or Equal To 472 Grid 144 Groups 653 GSD 203 207 214 218 223 GTR 470 GTS 514 667 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Full Function I O Modules H H1 152 Hardware Directory 203 218 Hardware Failure 307 Hardware Requirements 37 Headers 77 79 144 346 347 353 Editing 351 Exporting 75 Network Header 345 Setup 144 Special Function 346 Text File Format 79 Help 29 34 High Process Variable Range 372 386 Hot Backup 323 Hot Keys 255 362 I I O Address 189 199 220 241 Configuring 187 Finding 241 Profibus 199 220 I O Modules 186 189 192 198 Accessing Configuration 186 Clearing Configuration 89 Configuring 186 Controller Fuctionality 86 Profibus 192 199 PLC WorkShop for
161. I THH olololol olol olo o oroToro o o o Figure 18 Example of PACKAA To Table Operation e Fora FROM Table PACKAA writes the word in the Table Address into the spec ified analog alarm variable e If additional variables are specified the second word in the table is written to the second variable and so on up to eight variables PACKAA To from table Table address Alarm number Parameters S Memory iL 1131112 1 1 alalaaji Ls amo 111 OO 0 0 1 1 HHHHHHSHHHHIHAHHH Figure 19 Example of PACKAA From Table Operation 580 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Loop Data PACKLOOP Pack Loop Data PACKLOOP The PACKLOOP statement moves loop data to or from a table PACKLOOP is primarily intended for use in consolidating loop data to be accessed from an operator interface PACKLOOP To From Table v Table Address Loop Number Parameters Cancel Help e To From Table specifies whether you are writing data to or from the table e Table Address specifies the address of the table to or from which data are moved Valid descriptors are integer addresses addresses containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 if reading from the table or writeable in teger addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 if writing t
162. I O dialog box Once a device master file is added that device can be added and configured to any WorkShop pro gram created or edited on the same machine until the device is removed from the Hardware Directory To add a device master file to the configuration 1 Click PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu The PLC Configuration dialog box appears PLC Configuration _ Es Processor Information Memory Configuration PLC Type CTI 2500 User System Total System Memory Kbytes 3072 Ladder Kb he 48 Configured Memory Kbytes 70 Variable Kb la 4 Remaining Memory Kbytes 3002 Constant Kb fo 0 Special Kb a 4 gt 120 Configuration fo fo 5051 0 Find140_ vu n Drums ZE 3 Shift Reg K la 1 Table K f2 4 One Shots K 1 1 Controls K 32 170 K TA Close 2 Click Profibus I O The Profibus I O window appears 208 E 2 ET 200M IM153 1 DPV1 38 3 L SCIM SC DP 333 4JL SC16DO aDP i3 5 LOADER INDEX HYDRAU 3 B LOADER HEAT EXCHANG 7 SOUTH KETTLE FLUID CC 338 8 NORTH KETTLE FLUID Ct 8 NORTH VACUUM COOLIN 10 SOUTH VACUUM COOLII 11 SOUTH KETTLE HYD UN 12 NORTH KETTLE HYD Ur 13 NORTH GRID HEAT EXC 14 SOUTH GRID HEAT EXC 15 SPARE 3 16 SPARE 3 17 NORTH VACUUM COOL 18 SOUTH VACUUM COOLII 13 DOWNCOMING HEAT E gt 20 SOUTH PROBE HEAT E gt 21 NORTH PROBE HEAT E gt 22 SOUTH VACUUM PUMP 23 NORTH VACUUM PUMP 24 SOUTH KE
163. In the Applications list box scroll down and select FTSecSvr If this item is miss ing it was not properly installed refer to earlier sections in this manual 2 Click the Properties button 3 The Properties dialog window opens Click the Security tab FTSecSvr Properties i 2 x General Location Security Identity Endpoints C Use default access permissions r Use custom access permissions You may edit who can access this application Edit C Use default launch permissions Use custom launch permissions You may edit who can launch this application E dit Use default configuration permissions r C Use custom configuration permissions You may edit who can change the configuration information for this application Edit Cancel Apply 4 Under the Security tab choose the Administrator selected when Configuring User Rights and Audit Policy who will have access permission The following af fects both the areas of Access and Launch For Custom security for Launch and Access Permissions follow these steps e While in the Properties dialog with the Security tab being active click on Edit e Click Add and choose the Administrator 5 Choose the Identity tab and click the This user radio button 645 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server FTSecS
164. In the PV Alarm Lo Lo box enter a real number in engineering units This value must be less than or equal to the low alarm value and greater than or equal to the low range of the process variable 388 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Programming PID Loops Process Variable Alarm Low In the PV Alarm Low box enter a real number in engineering units This value must be less than or equal to the high alarm value of the process variable Process Variable Alarm High In the PV Alarm High box enter a real number in engineering units This value must be less than or equal to the high high alarm value of the process variable Process Variable Alarm High High In the PV Alarm Hi Hi box enter a real number in engineering units This value must be greater than or equal to the high alarm value and less than or equal to the high range of the process variable Remote Setpoint In the Remote SP box enter a V K WX WY or LMN address Click NONE if there is no remote setpoint Clamp Setpoint Low In the Clamp SP Low box enter a value for the low setpoint limit Enter zero if there is no limit Clamp Setpoint High In the Clamp SP High box enter a value for the high setpoint limit Enter zero if there is no limit 389 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Programming PID Loops Loop Gain In the Loop Gain box enter the value for the tuning constant Reset Time In the Reset Time box
165. Information Networks Close PLC Status Offline 312 PLC Status PLC Type SIMATIC 545 Communications Path TCP IP System Memory KBytes Total 192 Configured 70 Remaining 122 Ladder Memory Bytes Configured 16384 Used 44 Remaining 16340 Program Information Networks n a Fatal Mone PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays 505 Simulator Processor Status PLC Good Memory Protect Battery Good r Processor Mode E dit Program Run Operational Status Errors Non fatal None SF Processor Errors Fatal No Errors Y Non fatal No Errors Men Faults PLC Status Online PLC Operations This menu item allows you to view and modity PLC operations while online To access PLC Operations 1 Click PLC Operations from the PLC Utilities menu ALT U O The PLC Op erations dialog box appears When you have S memory configured you receive a display with three fields to change operating mode Use the mouse or arrow keys to select the desired field 313 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays PLC Operations Ladder Mode Close Processor Status Run Freeze Prog or Fun Power Up Restart Loop Mode Partial Restart Processor Status Run Locked Complete Restart Prog Halt Unlock
166. Insert Module allows you to insert I O modules for the selected slave device Delete Module deletes the currently selected module from the configuration Go to Module displays the parameters for the currently selected module X lt gt WX toggles the image register type for the selected module between discrete and wotd inputs To ensure that discrete are toggled to words the discrete must be on a 16 bit boundary Y lt gt WY toggles the image register type for the selected module between discrete and wotd outputs To ensure that discrete are toggled to words the discrete must be on a 16 bit boundary Unify moves all modules for the selected slave into the first module Unification is only allowed if all modules are either discrete or words Only the first address is retained 200 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Compact moves all discrete image register types to word image register types for every module of the selected slave It then unifies all the modules into the first module To en sure that discrete are toggled to words the discrete must be on a 16 bit boundary Only the first address is retained Restore restores modules for the selected slave according to the initial configuration in cluding the image register types Zero addresses are assumed for all but the first address which is kept Expand Definition shows used addresses
167. Je sey 602 U scaling Values UNSCA RE d eaaet aca sits do dde o endete Sessa delle eros does 605 While End While WHILE ENDWHILEB oooococcocccoccnccoccoccccooconcccconcnnon 607 Comment AA ren eu A eat tt a A E TaS 609 Chapter 12 AIM e to toc ic ae Eh o AP UIS oc 611 A o neues dL LLL Du CLAU UD CL f ce 613 Activity Audit Setup Dialog es opos aos a oe coca e DOCU DC 614 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security 619 a A NA 621 Secunty o ce csse Sankt cn ated crn SOLE AM aati 622 NANO SA 623 Cho sing a Security Type AAA II Rae bens tice c OH Ate 624 FasTrak Authentication Security o seen Sarnaneistiaadanadsnsade 626 Introduction to FasTrak Authentication Security 0 0 2 2 2 2 4 626 Pas Trak Security Audit Setup sn iba 627 Secutity Administration AAA nO oe tu ese erent LU S 628 User Security SOLU A e en be 634 NT Authentication Security Server 636 Introduction to FasTrak NT Authentication Security Server 636 Installing to a Local Machine 2o tarta cos ee ens eG 637 Installing to a Remote Machitie cist poe S ed es a fn Ee 638 25 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents Chapter 14 Index Tastallator Dilo et cun e ad 638 Workgroups and Domains ueno arco ise see oe 639 Configuring Users and Groups to the Operating System 640 Configuring User Rights and Audit Policy ss 642 Configuring DCOM for NT Authentication Secur
168. LC which may be running Changing logic in one network may affect logic in another network These changes may create un expected or hazardous results A Warning Editing or modifying a program online may produce unexpected or hazardous results In the online mode PLC Status in Ladder can be displayed However some editing fea tures are not available including Cut and Paste 245 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Using the Ladder Editor Using the Ladder Editor The Ladder Editor is where to begin programming since it allows you to display access and or modify logic in the active logic program You can view existing programs or you can create a new one To view an existing program 1 Open or Import a logic program see open program 2 If there is logic in the program but does not appear click B on the toolbar or click Ladder Editor from the View menu 246 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Programming Ladder Programming Ladder Programming Ladder Several logic program windows can be displayed simultaneously However only one win dow is active at a time In the active logic window the ladder editor allows you to enter and modify ladder logic To make a logic window active using the mouse click within that window To make a logic window active using the keyboard press ALT W and press the number of the cor responding logic window You will notice that the a
169. LC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration NOTE If the Smart Connect button is not enabled then the se lected slave does not support Smart Connect or the slave is associated with a master device file that does not support Smart Connect 3 In the Smart Connect Configurator click Module ET200L SC E x SmartConnect module addresses are zero based offsets from the Analog SC and Digital SC addresses entered on the slave configuration tab Module Input Offset Output Offset MT BES 121 1FA00 0440 1DI AC 00 0 Delete BES 122 1BB 0 0440 2DO DC24V 00 0 6ES7121 1FAQ0 Q4401DI AC Beanstes BES 122 1H400 0840 1D0 relay 00 2 Auto Address Secondary slot BES 124 1FA00 04680 140 10v Secondary slot 4 Inthe Insert Smart Connect Module window click the module you want to add and then click OK 228 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Insert SmartConnect Module xj 6ES 121 1BB00 0440 2D1 DC24V BES 122 1BB 0 0440 2D0 DC24V 6ES7121 1FA00 0440 1D AC BES 122 1FA00 04401D0 AC BES 122 1HA00 0440 1D0 relay BES 122 1H401 0440 1D0 relay BES 123 1FB00 04B0 24 10 6ES 123 1GB00 04B0 241 20m4 BES 123 1JB00 04B0 24 therm BES 123 1JA00 0460 141 Pt100 BES 124 1F400 04B0140 10 BES 124 1GA00 0ABO 140 0 20m After a Smart Connect Module is added pseudo modules or dummy modules ate
170. LC Type Ea Revision 1104 Cancel Address Documentation Path Advanced 2 To access a 545 1101 extended memory offline the extended memory check box must be selected as shown in the following figure PLC Type Setup PLCIwpe siMATICS45 y Revision o Cancel Address Documentation Pah f E 3 Select the approptiate PLC Type Revision and for certain processors PLC Size A detailed explanation of each setup option is described in the following table If shared documentation is to be associated with the new program it must be set up at this stage see Shared Documentation for additional information PLC Type Specifies the type of processor Selection of PLC type determines choices available for remaining setup options in the PLC Type Setup dialog box 173 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration PLC Type Setup Offline Specifies the revision number of the processor PLC Size for Specifies the PLC s memory size Only the valid some PLCs only memory sizes for the PLC selected in PLC Type are displayed 4 ClickOKorpress ENTER to save your settings and return to the active logic program Changing PLC Types The PLC type can be changed even after programming has been initiated Various error or warning messages can occur when changing from one PLC type to another These error messages indicate the block and segment of the error The e
171. LC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning 0101 xxxx Data questionable tuning may not be reliable xxxx xx01 0101 xxxx Data questionable tuning is not reliable XXxx xx10 0101 xxxx Sample interval too large for optimal tuning xxxO O1xx 0101 xxxx Small PV changes Step too small xxxO 10xx 0101 xxxx PV near span low Range marginal xxxO 11xx 0101 xxxx PV near span high Range marginal xxx1 00xx 0101 xxxx Small output change Step too small xxx1 01xx 0101 xxxx Output near span low Range marginal xxx1 10xx 0101 xxxx Output near span high Range marginal xxx1 11xx 0101 xxxx PV changes before output Noisy signal xx1x xxxx 0101 xxxx PV changes inconsistent with output Noisy signal x1 xx xxxx 0101 xxxx Gain clamped to high low limit 1 XXX XXXX 0101 xxxl Reset clamped to high low limit XXXX XXXX 0101 xx1x Rate clamped to high low limit XXXX XXXX 0110 xxxx SmarTune complete with error s XXXX XXXX 0110 0000 Unanticipated error 0000 0000 410 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning 0110 xxxx PIN mismatch xxxx 0001 0110 xxxx Loop would not go to Manual Mode xxxx 0010 0110 xxxx Loop not completely under SmarTune control xxxx 0011 0110 xxxx Smar Tune timeout Maximum time exceeded xxxx 0100 0110 xxxx Not enough free memory xxxx 0101 0110 xxxx Out of required system resources xxxx 0110 0110 xxxx PV
172. LL SFSUB Calls a special function subroutine from RLL SHRB Bit shift register a Word shift ee mc Selectively enable nn disable program segments during scan Compares status of discrete points with a set of spec ified bit patterns a Scan synchronization inhibit STFE Searches for a word in a table equal to a specified wotd STEN Searches for a word in a table not equal to a specified wotd TAND ANDs the corresponding bits in two tables 253 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Programming Ladder Mnemonic Instruction TXOR Does an EXCLUSIVE OR on the corresponding bits in two tables UDC Counts events up or down UNLCK Used together with LOCK and provide a mechanism whereby multiple applications in the 575 system can coordinate access to shared resoutces WAND Does logical bit by bit AND on two words WOR Does logical bit by bit OR on two words WROT Rotates the 4 segment bits of a word WTOT Copies a word into a table WTTA ANDs bits of a wotd with the bits of a word in a table WTTO ORs bits of a word with the bits of a word in a table WTTXO Does an EXCLUSIVE OR on the bits of a word with the bits of a word in a table WXOR Does logical bit by bit EXCLUSIVE OR on two wotds XSUB Calls an externally developed subroutine and passes parameters to it If the TISOFT mode is turned on in the program setup see Ladder options under the LOGIC tab in Program Setup the fol
173. Merge Results GSD Found 1 Match Master 2 Delete NO 3 Mismatch CTI2500R G5D YES 4 New CTSK 672 GSD YES Close The Profibus Merge Results dialog box shows the following information e Address The Profibus addresses affected by the merge from 1 112 or 1 32 for the 545L e Merge Status The Merge Status of each module a Match Allslaves have a Match status when first entered into the Profibus Configurator A slave will retain this status until itis edited ora file is merged thatdoes not contain this slave with identical configuration a Mismatch A slave has a Mismatch status when merging a file that has the same slave number but different configuration as the current network a Delete A slave can only have a Delete status after merging a file that does not contain this slave but exists in the current network 217 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration a New A slave can only have a New status after merging a file that con tains this slave and at the same time is nonexistent in the current network e Filename The file name of the device master file GSD associated with the merged module e GSD Found An indication of whether or not a GSD file was found for the merged module Merged slave devices that are not represented in the Profibus Configurator Hardware Directory with their associated GSD files are subject to l
174. Monitor Low Low High High Monitor Low High Monitor Rate of Change Monitor Remote Setpoint Motor Control Alarm Timer MOVE Move Byte Word Element Move Image Register From Table Move Image Register to Table Move Image Register to Word Move Word Move Wotd From Table Move Wotd to Image Register Move Wotd to Table Move Word with Index MOVW MUL Multiple Program Windows Multiply MWFT MWI MWIR MWTT NEQ Network Header Network Mode 375 393 373 388 373 388 376 394 374 436 491 491 489 489 490 492 493 496 494 495 492 482 59 482 493 495 496 494 465 345 68 Network Tree 192 New 64 351 Documentation 351 Program 64 New Task 522 Next 555 NITP 151 No Operation 525 NOP 525 Normal Contact 421 Normally Closed Contact 421 Normally Closed Immediate Contact 422 Normally Open Immediate Contact 421 NOT 422 Not Equal To 465 NT Authentication 625 636 637 644 Off Delay Coil OFFDC Offline Offset OLM On Delay Coil ONDC One Shot Contact One Shot Memory Online Open Program 462 462 245 387 194 460 460 423 180 84 245 66 71 673 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Network Tree PGTS OS 423 Output 423 424 Output is Bipolar 387 Output Offset for Smart Connect modules 236 P PACK 572 Pack Analog Alarm Data 578 Pack Data 572 Pack Loop Data 581 Pack Ramp Soak Data 584 PACKAA 578 Packed Opcodes 158 PACKLOOP 581 PACKRS 584
175. NDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL LICENSOR BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR OTHER DAMAGES OR LOST PROFITS LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE LICENSE FEE HEREUNDER IS NOT ADEQUATE FOR LICENSOR TO ASSUME OBLIGATIONS TO LICENSEE GREATER THAN THE EXPRESS REMEDY PROVIDED ABOVE 8 GOVERNING LAW The validity and performance of this Agreement shall be governed by Wisconsin law except as to copyright and trademark matters which are governed by United States laws and international treaties This Agreement is deemed entered into in Wisconsin All lawsuits arising out of this Agreement shall be brought in a court of general jurisdiction in Milwaukee Wisconsin Licensor shall be entitled to recover its costs and expenses including attorney s fees incurred in enforcing its rights under this Agreement 9 WAIVER The failure of Licensor to enforce any of the provisions hereof shall not be construed to be a waiver of the right to enforce such provisions at a later time or to enforce any of the other provisions hereof 10 EFFECT OF TERMINATION The expiration or termination of this Agreement shall not affect the obligations of Licensee which by their character are of continuing nature 11 INTEGRATION This Agreement sets forth the entire understanding and agreement of the parties shall be bound by any conditions definitions warranties or representations with respect to any of the terms or conditions hereof other than as expressly provid
176. NDER Program Windows LOCAL STOP LOCAL STOP LAD EXAMPLE_BAKOO3 Offl EXPANDER SHUTDOWN STATUS RESET Status Linc For Help press F1 Security Disabled Path None Mode Offline CAP NUM OVR 7 Window Description The key features of the 505 WorkShop window are defined below More detailed de scriptions follow Window Feature Function Instruction Bats Use to add instructions new tows and new networks addresses to a logic pro gram Use to select 505 WorkShop functions 57 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Main Window Multiple Program Win Displays view and edit windows of mul dows tiple logic programs at the same time limited only by the size of your com puter s memory Status Line Displays information about the operation in progress Title Bar Displays the name of the application But tons in the upper right corners change the window s size and position Main Toolbar Use to quickly access frequently used menu options Instruction Bars Instruction Bars The instruction bars appear along the sides and the top of the WorkShop window when you ate programming ladder logic Instructions are divided into groups To display the instructions for a group click the group button For example to display the math instructions click the Math Logic button The instructions for that button appear and you can move the window anywhere on the screen
177. NES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES Header Display Used S Memory Available 4054 Copy Paste Delete Password Export See Special Functions Dialog for details 2 Select the Special Function Program to create or edit If a Header has already been programmed skip ahead to item number 10 257 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming SF Program and Subroutine Editor 3 Click Header to display the header dialog Special Function Program Header Program Title Continue on Error C Yes No Error Status Address N one Program T ype Normal v V Enable Program Cancel 4 Entera title for the program in the Program Title box The title is optional and can be left blank 5 Select Yes or No in the Continue On Error area to have the program continue or stop when an error occurs 6 Select the Program Type from the drop down list e Normal The Special Function Program runs in the normal way when the input to an SFPGM command in ladder logic transitions from false to true the Special Function Program runs once The Special Function Program does not run again until the input transitions to false and then back to true If the in line parameter of the SFPGM command is set to true the Special Function Program runs im mediately during the RLL scan Otherwise the Special Function Program is queued to run during
178. New button to enter a new PLC Password PLC Password Alias pair The Enter New PLC Password Alias dialog appears New PLC Password Alias PLC Password Enter the actual Password written to the PLC Password Verify password PLC Password Alias Enter the Alias for the PLC Password above Alias Verify alias Cancel 1 In the PLC Password atea enter the actual PLC password in the Password box Verify the password by entering it again in the Verify password box 336 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays 2 Inthe PLC Password Alias area enter the password alias in the Alias edit box Ver ify the alias by entering it again in the Verify alias box When all four edit boxes have been entered click OK The Password and Verify password entries are compared to ensure they match The Alias and Verify alias entries are also com pared to ensure they match Finally the Alias is compared to the password aliases already on file Since each password alias may be associated with only one PLC password aliases cannot be duplicated If the en tered alias is found in the list an error message appears and the entered PLC Password PLC Password Alias pair is not saved But when the entered password and alias are approved this new PLC Password PLC Pass word Alias pair is added to the list and returns to the PLC Password Alias dialog The Edit Button To edit a
179. ORTH KETTLE HEAT E 28 Eurotherm 2400 23 L SC 32D1 aDP E El E E El E HE E E 11 SOUTH KETTLE HYD Ub 38 12 NORTH KETTLE HYD Ut E 23 13 NORTH GRID HEAT EXC E 23 14 SOUTH GRID HEAT EXC 38 15 SPARE E 38 16 SPARE E 23 17 NORTH VACUUM COOLI 38 18 SOUTH VACUUM CDOLII E 23 19 DOWNCOMING HEAT E gt E 8 20 SOUTH PROBE HEAT E gt H 21 NORTH PROBE HEAT Es E 33 22 SOUTH VACUUM PUMP E 23 23 NORTH VACUUM PUMP 38 24 SOUTH KETTLE HEAT E El E BEE E EEHBHEEE E hes I 31 L SC 32DI aDP 32 L SC 32D1 aDP xj EEEE Click Smart Connect to open the Smart Connect Configurator Station Type Slave DP 1 0 State Offline Device File SIE_8029 GSE Status Offline Slave Parameters Slave Status 30 PROFIBUS Address Enabled Station Name C Disabled Modules Module 1 0 Address X Comment Config for Slott O Config for Slot2 Config for Slot3 Config for Slot4 Config for Slot5 Insert Module Delete Module Goto Module Unify Compact Restore Expand Definition SmartConnect Config for Slot6 Config for Slot Digital SC Analog SC 2000000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 End Slave Config 236 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration NOTE If the Smart Connect button is not enabled then the se lected s
180. Only validated and entered logic is considered part of the current program Thus logic that is not entered and val idated will not show in the Address Usage listing See Validate and Enter Logic for more information Address Used Start Address Ii Display ddr 0123455759 Addr 0123455759 Addr 0123455759 voozo40 voozoso vooz060 coooo00 CO00010 _ _ coooozo coo0030 co00040 co00050 co00060 coooo70 co000s0 co00090 cooo0100 coo0110 coo0120 cooo130 cooo140 cooo1so Ccoo0160 coo0170 Not Used Address Used Cross Reference Table Status Current 297 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Address Used 2 Type an address or tag in the Start Address box and then click Display e The area below the Start Address box contains all addresses used in the active program Elements ate displayed in increments of 10 C0 C10 C20 and so on Usage of the points between is shown in the adjacent column from 0 9 C1 under 1 C2 under 2 and so on e The following indicators are used to indicate the memory usage of the address tag Point is not used in the program Asterisk Point is used in the program 3 Use the scroll bar on the right side of the Address Used window to view additional addresses 4 Repeat Steps 2 3 for each address tag you want to find 5 Close the Address Used window NOTE If you have the Update Cross Ref Table check box se lected in the Program Setup dialo
181. Permissions 651 Security 622 634 637 PLC Password Alias 333 Security Audit 627 Security Audit 653 Serial Ports 150 Security Type 624 TCP IP 158 Setup 622 TIWAY 153 154 Status Line 60 UNILINK Host Adapter 154 Switch User 635 SFPGM 508 User Rights 642 SFSUB 509 User Security Setup 634 Shared Documentation 67 358 359 Users 653 Show Forces 292 Workgroups 639 SHRB 181 478 Sequential Data Table 596 SHRW 181 479 Serial Ports 150 Single Scan 320 SET 425 Site License 35 Set Coil 425 Skip 516 Set Immediate Coil 426 SKP 516 SETI 426 Slave 192 198 203 209 218 221 Setup 41 148 150 153 154 157 158 164 166 172 614 622 627 634 637 Slave Parameters 201 Activity Audit 614 Smart Connect modules Application Setup 148 adding 227 Communications 143 150 153 154 157 addressing of 238 240 158 164 configurator 226 678 deleting modifying parameters of parameters of listed SmarTune SMC Software Features Special Calculation On 230 232 235 402 476 55 391 Special Func 541 543 546 548 549 552 555 tion Instruc 557 559 561 564 566 572 578 tions 581 584 589 590 593 594 596 599 602 605 607 609 BCDBIN BINBCD BREAK CALL CASE CDT Comment DEFAULT ELSE ENDIF ENDSWITCH ENDWHILE EXIT FOR FTSR IN FTSR OUT GOTO IF IIF 541 542 599 543 599 546 609 599 559 559 599 607
182. Program Setup Click Cancel to make no font changes and return to Program Setup Logic Windows Tab Ladder Options Show Ad Displays addresses when selected dresses Show Tags Displays tags when selected Show De Displays tag descriptions when selected scriptions Assign Tags Assign Ad dresses Use TI SOFT Keys Column Width When selected a window automatically appears if an address that does not have a tag attached to it is entered in ladder It allows you to assign a tag description and comment to the ad dress When selected a window automatically appears if a tag that does not match any current tags is entered in ladder It al lows you to assign an address description and comment to the tag Allows the use of certain TISOFT function keys to be used in windows Such as coils Y C WY V G W contacts X Y C WX WY V K G W N M gt H I lt O U Ctrl U J U Adjusts the size of the ladder grid Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 7 and 24 145 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Program Setup Description Rows Status Thick ness Determines the number of character rows displayed for each tag Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 4 Determines the number of character rows displayed for each description Click the up or down arrow or type in a value be tween 1 12 Determines the line t
183. RLL ex ecution is interrupted by a cyclic RLL task e Task 8 is executed with a higher priority than Task 1 or Task 2 Therefore both the normal RLL and the cyclic RLL are interrupted by a configured I O interrupt 522 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions e If you specify the cycle time T for a Task 2 task as a readable word you can change the cycle time on a cycle by cycle basis When T 0 the default time of 10 ms is used e When the normal RLL task fails to complete executed within the specified cycle time Bit 1 is set in STW219 and Bit 14 is set in STW1 on the next Task 1 scan When the cyclic RLL task fails to completed execution within the specified cycle time Bit 2 is set in STW219 on the next Task 2 scan When a cyclic task over runs the cycle on which the overrun is detected is skipped e You can display the peak execution times for a task using the Data Window and specifying TPET1 or Task 1 or TPET2 for Task 2 e You can call any subroutine from a task and the normal subroutine nesting rules apply A given subroutine should be called from only one task Subroutines are not re entrant and subroutine execution initiated by a second task TASK Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Task Number Constant Only T Word Const Form A Const 0 32767 523 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Special Instructions Special Instructions
184. Ramp Soak 394 397 398 Ramp Soak for SP 388 Rate Derivative Time 390 Rate of Change Loop 394 Remote Setpoint 389 Reset Time 390 Reverse Acting 393 Sample Rate 386 SmarTune 402 Special Calculation On 391 Special Function 391 Special Memory 177 Square Root of Process Variable 387 V Flag Address 385 Pin out 49 50 RS 232 C 49 RS 422 PING Pinning Chart PLC Configuration Accessing Find I O I O Configuration Printing PLC Operations Complete Restart EEPROM Freeze Halt Ladder Mode Overview Partial Restart Power Up Restart PLC Password Alias PLC Status PLC Type Port Configuration Port Lockout Power Up Restart PRINT Print Alarms Print Cross Reference Print Documentation Print Logic and SFs Print Loops 50 158 449 451 454 456 457 94 175 186 241 175 241 186 94 313 315 317 339 340 340 339 339 333 245 312 38 64 171 172 174 537 72 317 339 590 92 99 97 88 91 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index PING Processor Status Print PLC Configuration 94 Print Registers 95 Printer Setup 166 Printing 87 89 91 92 94 95 97 99 101 102 166 Analog Alarms 92 Cross Reference 99 Data Window 101 Documentation 97 Logic and SFs 88 Logic Programs 87 Page Setup 166 PID Loops 91 PLC Configuration 94 Registers 95 Setup 166 To a Text File 102 Process Variable 372 374 386 389 Address 372 386 Alarm High 374 389 Alarm High High 374 389 Alarm Low 374 389 Alar
185. S Address 2 vi m Station Name C Disabled 192 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration The slave devices in the Network Tree are listed in descending order of Profibus Addtess Changing the Profibus Address in the Slave tab will reorder the devices in the Network Tree to retain descending order of address While a device is being edited an asterisk will appear next to the device name in the Network Tree This asterisk will remain until the configuration is written to either the pro gram file or to the master Master Tab Displays status information for the selected master and all slaves associated with the master It is also used to add slave devices and merge COM Profibus configurations THEN Station Type Master DFP 1 0 State Offline IM e ma 0000 Host Type 2500 0400 Master Bus Parameters PROFIBUS Address 1 Station Name Host Name Slaves Slave Name Enabled Assigned Online Add Slave SLAVE 2 2500 RBC Profibus Enabled Yes Offline 3 ET 2005 IM151 DP Enabled No Offline Merge Delete All Profibus Address This is the address of the Profibus master It will always be 1 Station Name Can be changed to any meaningful name for reference with other Profibus networks Host Name Can be changed to any meaningful name for reference with other Profibus networks Slaves Displays the slave devices that have b
186. Selecting a PLC Type of CTI 2500 and a Revision of C400 gt 8 01 enables the use of ad ditional control relay bits 56 320 instead of 32 768 A CTI 2500 C400 with a firmwate revision of at least 8 01 is required 3 By default documentation is saved with logic data and configuration in the same FSS file However documentation can be shared with other applications and pro grams by saving it in a separate database file Click the Advanced button to display the Shared Address Documentation dialogs and specify the separate database file NOTE Programs cannot be saved in demo mode Fast PLC Connection Connecting to a PLC With 505 WorkShop you can connect to a PLC with a click of the mouse You can then view and edit existing logic in the PLC Prior to connecting the first time you need to set up the PLC connection Refer to Fast PLC Setup for more details NOTE Remember you cannot load a file with Fast PLC Connection To load a file Online use Open Program To connect to a PLC online click 4 on the Toolbar or select Fast PLC Connection from the File menu You are set to begin programming NOTE If your controller is a 575 refer to Connecting Online to a 575 in this chapter for information on selecting Application ID and configuring potts Open an Existing Logic Program Offline or Online You can open an existing logic file to edit or update program information in either online or offline mode Logic programs may conta
187. Shop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Special Instructions When the input to the DSET instruction goes from off to on the date portion of the real time clock is set to the values in the memory locations designated by Date and the output is turned on DSET Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 Date Word Addtess V W G The Data parameter uses 4 words to represent the actual date These are defined as follows e Date Year CDB 0000 0099 e Date 1 Month BCD 0001 0012 e Date 2 Day of Month BCD 0001 0031 e Date 3 Day of Week BCD 0001 0007 Time Set TSET The Time Set TSET instruction sets the time portion of the real time clock to the values contained in designated memory locations When the input to the TSET instruction transitions from off to on the time portion of the real time clock is set to the values contained within the three consecutive V memory lo cations designated by TM and the output is turned on for one scan TSET Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant Only Varies with configured One shot range Word Addtess V W G The TM parameter uses 3 words to represent the actual time These are defined as follows e TM Hour BCD 0000 0023 e TM 1 Minute BCD 0000 0059 e TM 2 Second BCD 0000 0059 526 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Special Instructions Time
188. Status Offline Slave Parameters Slave Status B PROFIBUS Address re Eea Station Name C Disabled Modules Module Comment Insert Module BES 321 1BHO 04 Delete Madule Gi ale 6ES7 322 18F0 0A 6ES7 322 18F0 0A BES 391 7KFO 0A ls 6ES7 391 7KFO 0A Yeo WY 6ES7 332 5HF00 0A Urdy BES 332 5HF00 04 ERES Contig for Slott ema Restore Contig for Slot2 Contig for Slot3 Expand Definition End Slave Config Smartzannect OK Cancel Apply 221 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration 4 Click the I O Address column of the I O module to configure and enter the start ing I O address The remaining I O addresses ate assigned automatically according to the number of points available for the module For example if you entered 19 as the I O address of a module with 8 WX points WorkShop assigns addresses 19WX 26WX to the module This automatic configuration is illustrated when click ing Expand Definition Expanded I O Module Definition Es f CET _ags la i be Em Dinar I Descriptions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Module 4 WX19 WX20 WX21 WX22 WX23 WX24 WX25 WX26 5 After entering the I O addtess click Apply to write the configuration to the con troller online or to the program file offline The Slave tab also allows you to perform the following tasks The X lt gt WX
189. T Authentication Security Server SETTING PERMISSIONS The lower list box in the right pane reflects the access rights and audits for individual per missions based on the highlighted name in the Users and Groups list box When the Allow box is checked the user or group will be given access by the server when requested from the client When the Deny box is checked the user or group will be denied access by the server when requested from the client In cases where a user has conflicting rights on a permission the denied permission will al ways take precedence and the user will not be able to access the feature one such example would be a user is allowed access to a specific permission but a group they belong to is de nied access to the same permission If neither box is checked the user will not be granted access to the feature unless one of the groups they belong to has access to the feature SECURITY AUDITS Security audits for individual features can be performed on user and groups by selecting the Audit Success and or Audit Failure boxes These audits will appear in the security log on the server machine and can be accessed using Microsoft s Event Viewer See the topic entitled Event Viewer or click here for more details on the Event Viewer A Success audit will appear in the security log when a user is given access to a secure feature and the Audit Success box is checked for that feature A Failure audit will appear in the security log when a
190. T or text files Not shown for other export operations Address documentation tags Descriptions Display only when exporting documentation to TISOFT or text files Not shown for other export operations Address documentation comments Desc Comments May be checked or cleared when exporting documentation to text files Display only when exporting documentation to TISOFT Not shown for other export operations Address documentation description comments Headers Display only when exporting documentation to TISOFT or text files Network headers Loop Number Available only when exporting RAMP SOAK information Enter the number of the loop to be exported V Registers Available only when exporting V amp K register values Check the box to export V registers Edit the From and to boxes to select the registers to be exported or leave them at the default values to export all the registers K Registers Available only when exporting V amp K register values Check the box to export K registers Edit the From and to boxes to select the registers to be exported or leave them at the default values to export all the registers Size Available only when exporting V amp K register values Select the size 16 or 32 bit of the data values Format Available only when exporting V amp K register values Select the format of the data values Signed Dec Float Hex Octal Binary ASCII Address Documentation Text File Format Address docume
191. T parameter entered in the form of For example if COIL COUNT 64 a discrete then 64 consecutive bits are required address or a The 64 required bits can be held in 64 bit of wotd i consecutive C or Y bit addresses ot 4 consecutive V ot WY wotd addresses 443 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums Kx x Vx x The first of several consecutive ad and C bit dresses containing zeros and ones that indicate if the corresponding coils are turned OFF or ON in the step The total number of required consecutive ad dresses is specified by the STEPS and COIL COUNT parameters address types entered in the form of a discrete address or a For example if STEPS 32 and COIL bit of word COUNT 64 the bits required for the MASK 2048 32 x 64 2048 The 2048 required bits can be held in 2048 consecutive C bit addresses or in 128 consecutive V or K word addresses If you specify a MASK value of V1 1 a STEPS value of 32 anda COIL COUNT value of 64 the Mask Addresses are assigned in this way e Instep 1 the Mask Address rep resenting Output Coil C1 is V1 1 the Mask Address rep resenting Output Coil C64 is V4 16 In step 2 the Mask Address rep resenting Output Coil C1 is V5 1 the Mask Address rep resenting Output Coil C64 is V8 16 Note Unlike the EDRUM instruction in which the MASK is hard coded into the instruction the values of the Meg a
192. TCC DSP DCP DSC DCC W G VMM VMS Y C V WY B W DCC TCP TCC G PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Address Constant Forms Table Form D MVC VE X Y C V K X Y C V K WX WY WX WY WX WY STW STW B W STW B W B W TCP TCP TCC TCP TCC TCC DCC DCC DSP DCC DSP DSP DSC DSC DCP DSC DCP DCP G B W TCP TCC DCC G Form I X Y WX X Y WX X Y WX WY WY WY 538 Chapter 11 Special Functions 540 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Convert BCD To Binary BCDBIN Convert BCD To Binary BCDBIN The Convert BCD to Binary statement converts binary coded decimal BCD inputs to a bi naty representation of the equivalent integer BCDBIN BCD Input Binary Result Cancel Help e BCD Input the memory location of the BCD word to be converted Valid field descriptors are integer addresses addresses containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 e Binary Result the memory location of the integer value after conversion Valid descriptors ate writeable integer addresses addresses containing a writeable in teger value such as V101 or WY11 BCDBIN Operation When the BCDBIN statement executes the four digits of the BCD value located in the ad dress specified BCD Input A are converted to the binary form of the equivalent integer value The result is stored in the address specif
193. TEPS parameter For example if STEPS 32 then 32 con secutive K or V word addresses are required Note Unlike the EDRUM instruction if the current step DSC is changed during execution the DCC value is reset to the preset COUNT of the new step 446 STEPS 16 128 in multiples of 16 COIL COUNT 16 128 in uim of CUR STEP 16 128 CUR CNT 16 128 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums USE STEP Kx x Vx x and C bit address types entered in the form of a discrete address or bit of word The first of several consecutive ad dresses containing zeros and ones that indicate if the drum skips the step or ex ecutes it The drum skips the step when the value is 0 and executes the step when the value is 1 The total number of required consecutive addresses is specified by the STEPS pa rameter For example if STEPS 32 then 32 con secutive bits are required The 32 required bits can be held in 32 con secutive C bit addresses or 2 consecutive K or V word addresses Note The USE STEP parameter rep resents functionality that is not found in the EDRUM instruction It is important to know how the USE STEP parameter is used in conjunction with the EVENT pa rameter Please see the following EVENT USE STEP Relationship Table for more information Number of steps in drum Number of output coils in drum When Ladder Status is e
194. TTLE HEAT E 25 SPARE 26 MELT HVAC BLOWER 27 NORTH KETTLE HEAT E 3 28 Eurotherm 2400 23 L 5C 32DI a DP 30 L 5C 32D1 aDP 31 L 5C 32D aDP 32 L 5C 32D1 aDP EEEEEEEE E EEEEEEEEEEE EEEE Station Type Master PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration DP 140 State Offline Host Type 2500 C300 Master Bus Parameters PROFIBUS Address fi Station Name Slaves L SSCIM SC DP L SC16DO aDP LOADER INDEX HY LOADER HEAT EX SOUTH KETTLE FL NORTH KETTLE FL Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Host Name Name Enabled Assigned Online 4 ET 200M IM153 1 Goto Slave Merge Delete All 3 Select the Profibus master module from the Network Tree The Master tab is dis played on the right 4 Click Add Slave The Hardware Directory dialog box appears 209 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration 18 SIMODRIVE sensor Gateways El General E 35B3 PROFIBUS DP l CP5614 Sample 80b4 grad C 178 4 38 IM 180 DP Slave IMCO1 Network components EE SIMEAS Q V2 SIPOS MC P 38 SITRAS DPUS6 PU F TdF HMI 1 0 Ident Systems NC RC PLC PROFIBUS PA Switching devices Valves E ee
195. TVersionTrak History of 575 FSS Version Usemame Dae State Comment 21 THOMAS 2800 T homas 11 13 06 2 44PM Initial Added from WorkShop ShowLabels Show Electronic Signatures 2 The History dialog box displays all the version information of the selected file Each version displayed in the History dialog box contains the following information e Version The version number of the listed version e Username The name of the user that created the listed version Date The date and time the listed version was added to the repository State The version state of the file when it was added to the repository e Comment The contents of the optional comment created when the file was checked in 3 The following two optional version histories may be viewed by selecting the ap propriate check boxes at the bottom of the History dialog e Show Labels Select this options to display any associated labels with the re pository file Each label will appear as a separate version of the file with the tag Label substituted for the version number e Show Electronic Signatures Select this option to display any associated electronic signatures with the repository file Each signature will appear as a separate ver sion of the file with the tag Signature substituted for the version number 127 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak 4 The buttons on the r
196. These files are FTSecCfg exe and FTSecSvr exe If running Windows XP FTSecSvr exe can only be installed on the Professional version not on the Home version Regardless of what Operating System the user has they still must install the server FTSecSvr exe locally on the client machine as well as on the remote machine This is true even if the client machine is a non NT type machine By default all checkable items get installed including FTSecSvr exe under NT Security Server and FTSecCfg exe under NT Securityl Configurator If installing to Win9x or Me NT Security Configurator is not listed and therefore FTSecCfg exe does not get installed Installing to a Local Machine If the user wishes to install the Security Server locally this may be achieved by installing from off of CD or from a self extracting executable file available from FasTrak s Website A CD installation requires only that all items for security be checked during the InstallShield process If aclient software application has been previously installed and it supports NT Se curity then re inserting the installation CD or running the self extracting executable and un checking the client during the InstallShield process is all that is required 637 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server Installing to a Remote Machine Installation begins with the installation of the client ie PLC Wor
197. USER GUIDE PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Version 4 80 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc www fast soft com 2014 FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 262 238 8088 Throughout this document PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 will be referred to as PLC WorkShop 505 WorkShop or WorkShop PLC WorkShop is a trademark of FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 is atrademark of Siemens Windows is aregistered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Other product names mentioned herein are used for identifi cation purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Licensor is the owner of all rights including the copyright in and to that certain set of executable computer programs identified in the Registration Form including design and structure thereof the Software together with all manuals and other written or printed technical material provided with the Software to explain its operation and to aid in its use the Documentation Licensee wishes to have the right to use the Software and Licensor is willing to grant such a right to Licensee on the terms and conditions set forth herein 1 GRANT OF LICENSE In consideration of Licensee s payment of the license fee referred to below and Licensee s agreement to abide by the terms and conditions stated herein FasTrak SoftWorks Inc referred to as L
198. Utilities menu Result The PLC Configuration dialog box appears 175 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration PLC Type Setup Offline PLC Configuration Processor Information Memory Configuration PLC Type SIMATIC 545 User System Total System Memory Kbytes 192 Ladder Kb Configured Memory Kbytes 70 Variable Kb Remaining Memory Kbytes 122 Constant Kb Special Kb 170 Configuration User Sub Kb Probus 110 FedVO e Drums Shift Reg K Table K One Shots K Controls K Bit 1 0 K Word 1 0 K ie m T D n ee n gt m 32 p 1 d 2 Enter the appropriate ranges for the selected PLC memory type NOTE Processor type must be selected before configuration The various memory types are described in the pages that follow Memory types are clas sified for RLL programming purposes in the following ways e Writeable This memory type is read write It can be used for both input and out put fields of RLL instructions e Readable This memory type is read only It can be used only for the input fields of RLL instructions e No access RLL instructions has no access to this memory 3 Click Accept to save your settings and return to the active logic program 176 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Controller Memory Types Controller Memory Types Ladder Memo
199. WorkShop Files Edits to WorkShop files protected by FTVersionTrak are not complete until they have been saved and checked in WorkShop automates this process to prevent accidental loss of changes to the program The following process illustrates the various scenarios a user en counters when attempting to save a WorkShop file protected by FTVersionTrak Saving a WorkShop File That Has Not Been Checked Out If you attempt to save a file that is tracked by FTVersionTrak but not checked out then you will be prompted to check out the file 505 WorkShop A 2 Checkout Required C Program Files 505 WorkShop EXAMPLE FSS This file must be checked out before it can be saved You will not lose any changes you have made Vould you like to check out this file e Clicking Yes displays the Check Out dialog box After the file is checked out Work Shop saves the file 133 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak NOTE Depending on the FIVersionTrak Options set in WorkShop avail able by clicking Application Setup from the Options menu you may be prompted to check in the file after it has been saved Otherwise you can check in the file by clicking 4 the Y button on the FIVersionTrak toolbar e If you click No the Save As dialog box appears If the file is not checked out you must save the file with a different filename to keep any changes made to the file Saving a WorkShop Fi
200. a Type not INT integer Identifies the type of labelled located in UINT unsigned integer data being compared in the instruction instruction FLOAT floating point values block top right corner of Note Floating point values ate only compatible with the CTI 2500 family of proc essors and a CPU firmware of V6 18 or later for all data types INT Memory location of UINT and FLOAT the the value being following word address types compared WX WY K V STW W TCP TCC DCC DSP DSC DCP and constants for FLOAT data type only the following Real address types ate also available WX WY K V and Real constants Constants and Real Constants available only for the B parameter Notes e Integers that are compared with floating point values are converted to floating point values before the comparison is executed e The values of the A and B parameters are displayed when Ladder Status is enabled See Ladder Status Online on page 379 for more information on Ladder Status Input When the input is enabled the NEQ instruction is executed When the input is disabled the NEQ instruction is not executed 466 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Compare Instructions Output The output is enabled when the NEQ comparison operation is TRUE A lt gt B Less Than LESS A lt B INT When the input is energized the LESS instruction compares two i
201. ace Y C B Vx x Address of the coil to be turned on WYx x Wx x when the timer reaches zero DCCx x TCPx x and TCCx x bit ad dress types entered in the form of a dis crete address or a bit of wotd Input When the input to the On Delay coil is enabled and the instruction is timing the CTR value TCC address is greater than zero e The time counts down from the PRESET value TCP address to zero e The COIL address is OFF When the input to the On Delay coil is enabled and the instruction has timed the CTR value TCC address equals zero 461 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums e The COIL address in ON When the input to the On Delay Coil is disabled e The CTR value TCC address is set to the PRESET value TCP address e The COIL address is OFF Off Delay Coil OFFDC f Delay Coil INPUT The Off Delay Coil instruction is only compatible with the CTI 2500 family of processors It requires a CPU firmware of V6 18 or later Varies with Instruction reference number Refer to configured the controller s user manual for the memory number supported The assigned instruc tion number must conform to the requirements of TIMER COUNTER memoty PRESET 0 0 3276 7 Preset value from which the timer times down 462 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums STATUS PROT PROT Pro
202. adder logic between the SKP and its as sociated LBL is ignored by the controller Output between the SKP and the LBL are frozen in their current states e All ladder logic within the SJP zone of control is executed normally when the SKP does not have power flow e ForaSKP to LBL function located within the zone of control of an MCR or JMP the SKP or LBL function overrides the MCR or JMP when the SKP has power flow 517 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions e The zone of control for a SKP is limited to the task segment or subroutine in which the SKP is used the matching LBL must be defined after the SKP and be located in the same task segment or subroutine as the SKP e For aJMPE or MCRE contained within a SKP s zone of control the program func tions as if the JMPE or MCRE is located at the end of the program whenever the SKP is active E Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Number Constant NE NE Scan Synchronization Inhibit SSI 560 565 only Prevents Hot Standby Unit HBU from synchronizing with the current PLC preventing it from coming online NOTE SSI requires no parameters Parameterized Go to Subroutine PGTS The PGTS instruction operates similarly to the GTS instruction The PGTS is used to call a section of the RLL program that is preceded by a subroutine number and executes it Un like the GTS the PGTS allows you to pa
203. address e Header Click this button to enter a network header for the current address Net work headers are linked to the network by the output coil e Find New Click this button to find a tag or address or enter a new one Find New Documentation Address or Tag Cancel Type the address or tag in the Address or Tag input box and click the OK but ton If the tag or address is already documented the address and documentation are displayed in the documentation editor If it does not already exist the doc umentation editor is cleared for you to create a new documentation record 353 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documentation Window 505 WorkShop 2 J NewTag was not found Add it as a new Tag to the Documentation database oon e Delete Click this button to delete the current documentation record You can also delete the record by clearing all the fields Cut Copy Paste and Deleting Documentation Overview of Cut Copy Paste and Deleting Documentation Probably the most frequently used editing features are the three related commands Cut Copy and Paste Use these commands to quickly copy documentation to either another lo cation in the same program or another program The list below describes Cut Copy Paste and Deleting Documentation differences Cut Removes the selection from the program and places it on the clipboard Copy Copies the selection and places it o
204. ader box type in the header you want to use 3 Click OK when you ate finished To see ladder headers in the active logic program click Program Setup from the Options menu click the Logic Windows tab and select the Show All Headers check box Ladder Header Header This is an example of a ladder header It is specific to the first network of the ladder and can be up to 16 000 characters Network Header 505 WorkShop provides a simple way to document networks while you ate creating or edit ing your logic program The maximum number of characters you can enter for each header is 16K The network header is tied to the corresponding network output If a XCALL PGSTS OR PGTSZ are the outputs the header is tied to the first occurrence of an X Y or C address To add or modify a network header 1 Double click the Network Header Input icon in the active logic program window The Network Header Input dialog box is displayed The Header box in the top 345 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Ladder Network and SF Header Editor left corner controls the page print out of the particular network header and ladder that is selected e If Paging None is selected there will be no page break between the current net work and last network printed e Paging Odd prints the current selected network on the next odd page e Paging Before prints the current selected network on the next blank page 2 Ty
205. ag will be displayed to the left and right re spectively of the combo box These are referred to as documentation tips and can be turned on and off by checking and un checking these boxes Select addresses descriptions both or neither when the Data I O Simulator Window is displayed The maximum number of data window rows to display De fault is 100 minimum is 10 and maximum is 1000 Time Stamp Select time date and display formats in the Data I O Sim Display ulator Window when online and Include Time Stamp is selected Documentation Window Tab Column Dis Select either Tags or Desctiptions ot both for display in the play Documentation Window Sort Order Select Address Tag or Description order for display in the Documentation Window Update Times Tab Online Data When viewing the Data I O Simulator Window change the Window Up speed at which information is received from the PLC date Online When viewing ladder status change the speed at which in Logic Status formation is received from the PLC Update Colors Tab Item The colors of Ladder Ladder Grid Ladder Background Edited Ladder Background Address Foreground Tags Fore ground Description Foreground Rung Header Foreground File Header Foreground Status Foreground Status Optimize Foreground and Parameter Cursor Foreground can be changed when selected from the Item box 8 Click Restore Defs to return each feature to the last Save as Defaults se
206. al characters Text must be en tered within quotation marks 527 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Special Instructions PROGRAM UHIT 6 CONTROL VERSION 1 3 COPYRIGHT 1994 ABC INC DESCRIPTION CONTROL UHIT 6 OF THE WIDGET Load Address LDA The Load Address instruction LDA copies the logical address of a memory location into a specified memory location a long or double word The LDA instruction can be used to be fore a MOVE instruction when the indirect addressing method is needed When power is passed to the LDA instruction the LDA instruction is executed The LDA instruction wotks as follows e The address of the memory location specified in A is copied to the destination specified by BB e The output is turned on after the instruction is executed unless an error occurs e Ifthe destination location is invalid bits 6 and 11 in STWO41 are set and the STW200 address contains a value of 5 The destination address is not changed e If the input is off the instruction is not executed and power does not pass to the output e The source address should be a direct or indirect address specify any readable word For a direct address LDA copies the logical address for this word into the destination For an indirect address precede the address with the character The long word at this indirect address must contain another address and the LDA copies this second logical addr
207. alarm point referenced to the setpoint SP e Orange deviation alarm point referenced to the SP e Rate of change alarm for a PV changing too rapidly e Broken transmitter for a PV outside the designated valid range w Orange w Yellow 4 Green Product oulpul a i w Yellow i w Orange Mzcellareous adams w Broken tramsmitter w Rate of chamge The high high high low and low low alarms are fixed absolute alarms and may correspond to warnings and shutdown limits for the process equipment itself The yellow and orange deviation alarms move up and down with the setpoint and may refer to specification tol erances around the setpoint A PV alarm deadband is provided to minimize cycles in and out of alarm chattering that generate large numbers of messages when the PV hovers near one of the alarm limits An option is also available to call a Special Function Program to initiate a special function calculation The SF program call can be scheduled on the PV the SP or the output 381 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops PID Documentation PID Documentation 505 WorkShop provides a simple way to document PID Loops while you are creating or editing loops The maximum number of characters you can enter for each header is 16K To document a PID Loop 1 Click PID Loop from the View menu or press ALT V P The PID Loop Di rectory dialog box appears The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Loop numb
208. all but one of your devices operate at a maximum baud rate of 3 Mbps and one device operates at a maximum rate of 1 5 Mbps set the rate to 1500 0 The Baud Rate will also affect the maximum line length See below for more information Number of Repeaters An RS 485 repeater is required when there are more than 32 de vices on a copper line or the line length exceeds the maximum length for the set Baud Rate A repeater must be installed between each node that exceeds the maximum line length see below Number of OLMs An optical link module OLM converts the bus line from electrical copper to optical fiber optic and amplifies the fiber optic signal This device would be used if the bus must be extended over long distances or within environments not suitable for copper cable such as areas of high electromagnetic interference 195 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Line Length CU km This value represents the actual length of copper cable used on a bus segment Please note that as Baud Rate above increases the maximum line length for reliable data transfer decreases in meters 9 6 to 187 5 kbps 500 kbps 400 1 5 Mbps 200 100 3 to 12 Mbps If the maximum line length between nodes on your bus exceeds the above value for the specified baud rate an RS 485 repeater is necessary to extend the maximum line length Baud Rate Maximum ae Length Betw
209. am and or for the selected program on disk Offline you are prompted for a password only for the se lected program on disk The selected program on disk may be in one of two states of password protection e No Password The selected program on disk is not protected Any authorized user may enter an initial password e Disabled Password The selected program on disk is not protected Any au thorized user may change or delete the password The programmable controller may be in one of three states of password protection e No Password The controller program is not protected Any authorized user may enter an initial password e Disabled Password The controller program is not protected The user may change or delete the password Any authorized user may enable the password e Enabled Password The controller program is protected according to the pro tection level assigned to the password see below If a protected operation is attempted from any communications port the operation is denied and an error re sponse is given Only an authorized user may change delete or disable the password 324 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays Three levels of access are available when a password has been entered and enabled in the controller e No Access The controller program cannot be read or modified e Read only Access The controller program can be read but it cannot be modif
210. am file while another user has it checked out Get the latest changes to program files made by other users after they check in their files Set version control options from within WorkShop and perform other version con trol tasks such as viewing version history Performing version control tasks on your programs outside of WorkShop is possible but not recommended View the version control status of any program file such as whether the file is checked out Howdoluse FTVersionTrakwith multiple programmers working on the same pro gram See Tips and Strategies for Team Programming for more information Can I use FTVersionTrak for single user programs Yes We recommend that single user programs utilize FTVersionTrak s version control 138 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak features even if they are not programming in a team environment Using FT VersionT rak is beneficial for single users who want to centralize their programs onto a secure server FTVersionTrak also provides revision tracking and file state transitioning throughout the life of the program which is beneficial to both single user and team programming en vironments Where can I set options for how FTVersionTrak works with WorkShop Select the Options Application Setup menu item in WorkShop to view the available op tions for changing the way FTVersionTrak behaves in WorkShop Do I ever need
211. am is executed the output is turned on e The SF Program does not executed again until the input to the SFPGM in struction transitions from off to on e Ifthe controller changes from PROGRAM to RUN mode while the input to the RLL SFPGM instruction is on the SF program is queued for execution Cyclic Programs When power flow to the RLL SFPGM instruction transitions from off to on the cyclic SF program is placed in the queue for execution The SF Program has the fol lowing features e After the cyclic SF program is executed one time the output is turned on The SF program is automatically re queued for execution based on the programmed cycle time This process continues as long as the input to the RLL SFPGM instruction is on e The output remains on until the input to the RLL SFPGM instruction is turned off e Acyclic SF program is removed from the queue when it completes a scheduled cycle and the SFPGM instruction s input is turned off SFPGM Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types oF Popa Nimes 11023 508 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions Special Function Subroutine SFSUB The Special Function Subroutine SFSUB instruction is used to call a Special Function subroutine for execution The SFSUB instruction can be used anywhere within the RLL program that a box instruction can be used When power flow to the SFSUB instruction transitions from off to on the o
212. ame box Save in Co 505 WorkShop t ex E3 File name 505Programl FSS Save as type 505 WorkShop Files fss y Cancel 83 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs 3 Click Save or press ENTER to save the program 4 If you select a file name that already exists in that directory a message appears with options Select from the following options e YES saves the updated program with the current name overwriting the previous vetsion e INO cancels the save procedure NOTE You must validate logic before saving If you have not done so a message appears stating changes to logic have not been validated or entered Changes cannot be saved until logic has been validated and entered Click the Validate Logic Y toolbar icon or click Validate and Enter Logic from the Program menu Complete necessary changes to logic and try to save the program again Save Save As Online Use the Save or Save As while online to save all the active program contents with its ex isting name or parts of an existing logic program One or more of the following parts can be saved e Ladder e Special Function Programs e Special Function Subroutines e PID Loops e Analog Alarms e Force States e Documentation Tags Descriptions Comments and Headers e I O Configuration e Profibus e V Variables e K Constants e Word I O 84 e U Memory e TCP values PLC WorkSho
213. ameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Constant 0 32767 Number Word Constant Form A Constant 32768 32767 Word Form B Constant Only 1 256 Move Word From Table MWFT The Move Word from Table instruction MWFT copies a word from a table to a V mem ory location A table pointer designates the address of the next word in the table to be copied One word is copied during each scan The MWFT operates as follows e When the Enable Reset is off the table starting address S is loaded into pointer A e When the Enable Reset turns on the box is enabled When the input is turned on the following actions occur A word is copied from the table address specified by the value contained in pointer A to the memory location specified by B After the word is copied table A which holds the address of the next word in the table to be copied is incremented by 1 493 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions e Ifthe Input and the Enable Reset remain on one word is copied every scan As each wotdis copied the table pointeris incremented until N words have been copied e The output is trend on when the last word has been copied e When the instruction is reset all table values remain unchanged and the des tination address B contains the last word copied from the table Constant Varies with Table Move configured range Word Addtess V W G Word Addtess V W G Wor
214. ameters The END instruction should always be used to terminate your program When a controlled executes the END instruction the program scan is terminated Any instruction after the END ate ignored The END instruction must be the only instruction in the network Do not use the END instruction to separate RLL tasks If you use and RLL subroutine place an END instruction between the last network of the main RLL program and the first network of the subroutine 511 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions End Conditional ENDC The ENDC instruction can terminate the program scan under specific conditions Any in struction after the ENDC instruction are not executed When the ENDC instruction is executed the current program scan is terminated ENDC operates in conjunction with an input and is executed only when there is power at the input When the input is off the ENDC instruction is not executed and the program scan is not terminated When the ENDC instruction is active ladder logic following the ENDC is not executed and outputs following the ENDC are frozen An active ENDC functions as an end state ment for MCRs and JMPS that preceded it if it is in their zones of control Outputs between the MCR and JMP and the END remain under the control of the MCR or JMP For an ENDC contained within a SKP zone of control the ENDC is overridden if the SKP receives power flow Jump GMP T
215. ameters at any time without having to use COM Profibus to modify the configuration file and adjust the nec essary information before exporting and merging it into 505 WorkShop again e Assign or modify starting I O addresses for the modules of all PROFIBUS DP slaves used by your 2500 Series or Series 505 CPU e Load bus parameters and slaves e Toggle between operate and stop mode and between synchronous and asyn chronous communications e Enable or disable slaves 190 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Profibus Configuration Profibus Configurator Use the Profibus Configurator to create and manage Profibus DP networks and devices that have a WorkShop compatible PLC as the host of a Profibus master module The Pro fibus Configurator features a Network Tree and tabs as the main navigational elements This section details the features and the functions of the Profibus Configurator For more information about setting up and editing your Profibus network see Using the Profibus Configurator To access the Profibus Configurator 1 Click PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu The PLC Configuration dialog box appears 2 Click Profibus I O The Profibus I O window appears Profibus 1 0 ee Station Type Slave DP 1 0 State Offline Device File CTI2500R GSD Status Offline CTI 2554 4 4CH Hi Speed Co CTI 2556 164 Thermocouple E E
216. and dis crete motor control alarm timer instructions Using the same ref erence number can cause unpredictable operations 438 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums Time Driven Drum DRUM The Drum Instruction DRUM simulates an electromechanical stepper switch or drum It provides 15 output coils and 26 steps which are operated on multiples of the time base setup for the drum Each step controls all 15 output coils When the drum begins to run it starts at the step specified by the Drum Step Preset which is stored in DSP memory The drum current step is stored DSC memoty The counts per step set in the Count Step field is stored in L memory and cannot be changed without reprogramming the DRUM The current count counts remaining for a step is stored in DCC memory The drum has these features e The drum is enabled when the Enable Reset input is ON e When the Enable Reset is on and the Start input turns on the drum begins to run The drum begins at the step specified by DSP and remains at this step until DCC counts down to zero e When DCC for a step reaches zero the drum advances to the next step and the coils are turned on off according to the drum mask for the new step Each 1 in the mask designates that a coil is to be turned on while each 0 designates that a coil is to be turned off e When the Enable Reset turns off the drum output is turned off and th
217. and from the context menu To view or manipulate data in the Data Window 1 Typeanaddress or tagin the address field Press ENTER to accept the address tag NOTE Press CTRL L on the Description or Tag column to dis play the Documentation Window 2 Repeat Step 1 for each value you want to view After entering a value click Next from the Data menu or press F5 to move down one cell and fill in the next ad dress or tag or click Previous from the Data menu or press F6 to move down one cell and fill in the previous address or tag Both Next and Previous may also be selected by right clicking the Data Window and selecting Next or Previous from the context menu 3 Perform a Data Fill to quickly display a preformatted range of addresses by clicking Fill from the Data menu See Data Fill for more information NOTE Each Data Window can accept up to 100 rows of data 4 Create a table of addresses from the Data Window and store it to a file by clicking Save Template from the Data menu The file is saved as a Data Template WDT file To load a saved Data Template click Load Template from the Data menu When a template is loaded the template name is displayed in the title bar as in the example above 5 Click On or Off from the Diagnostics menu or right click and select On or Off from the context menu to set discrete addresses on or off for a single scan 6 ClickForce On or Force Offfromthe Diagnostics menu or right click and s
218. annot cross I O channel boundaries See your controller manual for details e 505 WorkShop does not flag duplicate I O points Accessing I O Configuration 1 Click PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu Result The PLC Configuration dialog box appears 2 Under I O Configuration click 505 I O Result The I O Configuration dialog box appeats 186 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration I O Configuration 1 0 Configuration Channel Base Status Base Enabled Configured Disable Base s Edit Base Close 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 3 NOTE You can enable or disable a base by selecting a base number then clicking Enable or Disable I O Configuring Procedure 1 In the I O Configuration dialog box select the base whose input output you want to configure 2 Click Edit Base Result The Edit I O Base dialog box appears 187 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration I O Configuration Edit 1 0 Base Channel Base Enabled 10 Module Definition Slot l OAdd X cOoOcoooooooooooooo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O00o0o0o0o0o0oooooooooO O00o0oo0o0o0o0ooocooooooooO NOTE If you need to select a different Base number you can do so by clicking Next Base or Prev Base on the Edit I O Base dialog box You can also click Search Base on the Edit I O Base dialog box and enter a different base
219. ariable StartVariable RST AbortVarjable AbortVariable RST Example of Activation Deactivation of Auto Tuning Process These variables could just as easily be manipulated with IF IMATH or MATH statements in an SFPGM or SFSUB Allowed discrete variables include bits in a V memory word e When Start Variable transitions from a false to a true a SmarTune session is ac tivated e When Abort Variable is true a SmarTune session is deactivated 407 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning e If both are true a session is deactivated and Start Variable must transition before a session will be activated e Ifa SmarTune session is already queued or in progress Start Variable transitions are ignored Ack Variable acknowledges thatSmarTune has detected that Start Variable or Abort Variable is true Itis used to synchronize Start Variable and Abort Variable program logic with SmarTune Ifnot used Start Variable and Abort Variable should remain true fora relatively large amount of time What constitutes alarge amount of time depends on program size and time slice assign ments See the discussion for Activation Time Slice for further guidance SmarTune Restart If this discrete variable is true then SmarTune is restarted completely SmarTune will act as if a run program run transition occurred If SmarTune Restart is specified in more than one configuration all are tested for true and
220. as cable length and baud rate e Slave Tab Displays status information for the selected slave device including all I O modules associated with the slave Use the Slave tab to add or remove I O modules and assign addresses e Parameters Tab Displays the slave or I O module parameters currently set for the selected slave device or module e Diagnostics Tab Displays diagnostic information about the selected device or module updated every second when online e Profibus Operations While online click Profibus Ops at the bottom of the window to toggle the operational and sychronization communication modes Network Tree The Network Tree appears on the left side of the Profibus I O window It represents the Profibus network in three levels Master Slaves andModules with the Master being the root level of the tree Selecting any item in the Network Tree displays that item s con figuration properties in the appropriate tab on the right side of the window For example selecting the 2500 RBC slave device from the Network Tree displays that de vice s properties in the Slave Tab Profibus I O me Ei m 2500 C400 iE T 2 2500 RBC Profibus RBC Station Type Slave DPI O State Offline Eevee Device File CTI2500R GSD Status Offline Xi CTI 2554 4 4CH Hi Speed Co kil CTI 2556 1641 Thermocouple E EE 3 ET 2005 1M151 DPV1 SEES Xi 6ES7 134 4GB11 04B0 2411 Parameters 6ES7 132 4BD01 0440 4DO Slave Stat PROFIBU
221. at user the Enter new password and Verify new password ate compared with each other If the two new passwords match then the new password replaces the current Switching the User If the security administrator specifies user passwords are requested only once when Work Shop is started the password entered at startup and the access privileges associated with it is in effect until WorkShop is exited Another password is not requested until Work Shop is restarted However the Switch user name and option allows another user to enter another password without requiring the application be exited and restarted Enter the user name and password of the user who will assume operational control of Work Shop If a valid user name and its matching password are entered the security access privileges are reset to those of the new user User Security Options C Change user password Switch user User Name Enter current password Help Cancel 635 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server NT Authentication Security Server Introduction to FasTrak NT Authentication Security Server The FasTrak NT Authentication Security uses Windows NT security NT Security is a fea ture that is part of the Windows NT Operating System and is also found in Windows 2000 XP and Vista The server must therefore be installed on a machine running Microsoft Win do
222. ations of the timer and or event e When the drum advances a step coils are turned on off according to the fixed mask and the current bit pattern in the configurable mask e The drum output comes on and remains on after the last programmed step has been executed The last programmed step is the last step having an event 457 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums programmed or having a non zero CNT preset value The event must be on and DCC must be zero If the event goes off after DCC reaches zero the drum out put remains on and the MDRMD remains at the last programmed step until the drum is reset e When the Enable Reset turns off the drum output is turned off and the drum re turns to the step specified in DSP e Ifthe start input turns off and Enable Reset remains on the drum remains at the current step DSC and DCC holds its current count All coils specified in the con figurable mask maintain the condition specified by the fixed mask e When the drum is at the preset step the coils specified in the configurable mask follow the states specified by the fixed mask for that step even if the En able Reset input is off Be sure to program the mask with a bit pattern that is a safe state for the preset step e The drum advances to the next step immediately if the Jog input transitions from off to on and the Enable Reset input is also on You can use the MDRMD in applicat
223. atus is enabled See Ladder Status Online on page 379 for more information on Ladder Status Input When the input is enabled the LEQ instruction is executed When the input is disabled the LEQ instruction is not executed Output The output is enabled when the LEQ operation is TRUE A lt B Greater Than GTR A gt B INT When the input is energized the GTR instruction compares two integers two unsigned in tegers or two floating point values and energizes the output if and only if the first value A is greater than or equal to the second value B 470 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Compare Instructions Data Type not INT integer Identifies the type of labelled located in top right corner of instruction block FLOAT floating point values block data being compared UINT unsigned integer f a 8 in the instruction Note Floating point values are only compatible with the CTI 2500 family of proc essors and a CPU firmware of V6 18 or later for all data types INT Memory location of UINT and FLOAT the the value being following word address types compared WX WY K V STW W TCP TCC DCC DSP DSC DCP and constants for FLOAT data type only the following Real address types are also available WX WY K V and Real constants Constants and Real Constants available only for the B parameter Notes e Integers that are
224. available in offline mode only defines the type of processor you are cre ating a logic program for PLC Memory Configuration and I O Configuration allow you to configure your PLC These are available in online and offline mode 171 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration PLC Type Setup Offline PLC Type Setup Offline PLC Type Setup Offline The setup and configuration process begins with PLC Type Setup You must specify what processor you are using before you can configure the processor Valid PLC types ate e Simatic 520 revision 1101 e Simatic 520c revision 1101 and 1102 e Simatic 525 revision 1102 and 1104 e Simatic 530 revision 1102 1104 and 1108 e Simatic 530c revision 1104 1108 and 1112 e Simatic 535 revision 1104 1108 and 1112 e Simatic 560 revision 2120 e Simatic 560 565 revision 2120 e Simatic 560T revision 2820 e Simatic 560 565T revision 2820 e Simatic 545 revision 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 and 1106 e Simatic 555 revision 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 and 1106 e Simatic 575 revision 2102 2103 2104 2105 and 2106 e CTI 2500 revision C100 C200 C300 C400 lt 8 01 and C400 gt 8 01 To set up the PLC 1 Click PLC Type Setup from the PLC Utilities menu Result The PLC Type Setup dialog box appears 172 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration PLC Type Setup Offline PLC Type Setup P
225. baud rate 194 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Station Type Master DP 1 0 State Offline Host Type 2500 C400 Master Bus Parameters Bus Profile Baud Rate Kbits 1500 0 Repeaters OLM Number of Repeaters Line Length CU km Number of OLMs Input Parameters Line Length FO km mL T qui t bit Tsdr min t bit T set t bit Tsdt max t bit 15 T slot init t bit 30 Bap Factor Retry Limit HSA Delta Ttr t bit Correction Factor 1 2 Calculated Parameters and Data Cycle Times dad dtd LN T td t bit 33 Ttr t bit T rdy t bit 11 T id1 t bit 37 Typical Data Cycle Time sec T id2 t bit 150 Maximum Data Cycle Time sec T slot eff t bit 300 Minimum Response Monitoring sec 0 0640 Calculate The Bus Profile Profibus DP sets default parameters on the bus while allowing you to specify parameters such as Baud Rate the number of repeaters and OLMs and bus line length This profile conforms to EN 50170 Volume 2 PROFIBUS standards and in most cases will provide the best performance for your Profibus system The Adjustable profile allows you to configure all bus parameters Each parameter and its function is listed below Baud Rate Kbits This is the transmission rate across the bus Set this value to the high est operable rate for the lowest rate device For example if
226. be parameterized when the response monitoring Ttr factor is taken into account Slave Tab Displays status information for the selected slave device all I O modules associated with the slave and allows you to add or remove I O modules and assign addresses 198 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Station Type Slave DP 1 0 State Offline Device File SIQ1801D GSE Status Offline Slave Parameters r Slave Stat PROFIBUS Address 2 ee es Station Name Disabled Modules tn o Module 140 Address x BES 321 1BHO 04 BES 322 1BF0 04 6ES 322 1BF0 04 6ES 331 7KFO 04 BES 331 7KFO 04 BES 332 5HFOO0 04 6ES 332 5HFOO 04 Insert Module Delete Madule we Go to Module Unify Compact Restore Expand Definition Config for Slot1 Config for Slot2 Config for Slot3 oon o oO 4 N co o ccccococtpoUb olx xb E E BE OE oer ET O O O O O O O O O e End Slave Config Smartizannect OK Cancel Apply The Slave tab contains all the tools necessary to configure and address each Profibus I O module The features of the dialog are detailed below See Configuring and Addressing Profibus I O Modules for more information about these features Profibus Address Can be any value from 2 112 This value differentiates the device from other devices on
227. be permanently deleted When this message is acknowledged the item s are permanently removed from the list 338 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Powering Up Restarting the Controller Powering Up Restarting the Controller Power Up Restart Use Power Up Restart to clear all unforced X Y and non retentive C elements on power up or restart of the controller Retentive control relays are not cleared The WX and WY elements ate not affected A Warning If you execute Power Up Restart with the con troller battery switch set to Off all programs residing in the controller will be cleared Be cer tain to check battery switch position before using Power Up Restart To execute Power Up Restart 1 Click Power Up Restart from the PLC Operations dialog box 2 When you receive the message Execute a PLC power up restart se lect either YES or NO 3 For575 controllers you are also prompted withCoordinate Reset With Other Applications and Coordinate Reset With Entire System Foreachofthese prompts press NO or YES as required foryour process Partial Restart Use a Partial Restart to clear all discrete elements except retentive C and forced elements The word elements and presets are not reset To execute a Partial Power Up Restart 1 Click Partial Restart from the PLC Operations dialog box 2 When you receive the message Execute a Partial restart select either YES or NO 3 For575 contr
228. before you can install WorkShop but can be removed once WorkShop is installed To attach the FasTrak KEY to your computer connect the key to a parallel port LPT1 LPT3 or USB port on your computer following the steps below The FasTrak KEY will not interfere with normal port data transmissions nor will it prevent you from creating backup copies of the software Connecting the FasTrak KEY To attach the FasTrak KEY to your computer 1 Determine which parallel or USB port to connect the FasTrak KEY to 2 Disconnect other security devices or cables attached to that port 3 Connect the FasTrak KEY to the port PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 2 Installation FasTrak KEY 4 Attach other cables to the FasTrak K EY if necessary If the device attached to the FasTrak K EY is a parallel printer make sure the printer is turned on before starting 505 WorkShop NOTE The FasTrak K EY must be the first device attached to the parallel port Other devices ot cables can subsequently be at tached to the FasTrak K EY See Troubleshooting the FasTrak K EY if you are receiving error messages or having any other problems relating to the FasTrak K EY Troubleshooting the FasTrak KEY Following ate etror messages associated with the FasTrak K EY possible causes and so lutions Message 505 WorkShop 2 J Ahardware key was not found Verify the key is attached to your parallel port and click Retry This software may also
229. ber of coils and steps used in the MegaEDRUM instruction 4 Enter Values in the Pinning Chart The values that will be saved to specified ad dresses ate entered in the pinning chart 5 Modify Communication Settings If needed the communication parameters can be modified to reflect how the pinning chart will communicate with the PLC 6 Write and Read Data The information in the pinning chart is sent to the PLC 450 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums Enabling Active Content in Microsoft Excel Your instance of Microsoft Excel may be set up to disable active content when opening documents such as the pinning chart that contain active content This content must be en abled in order for the pinning chart to operate successfully The following is an example of a security warning that may be displayed when you open the pinning chart e Security Warning Some active content has been disabled Options To enable active content click Options in this Security Warning and then click Enable Content in the Microsoft Office Security Options dialog box Note that the exact pro cedure for enabling active content will depend on your version of Windows and your version of Excel In some instances active content may be disabled and no notification is given when opening the pinning chart For more information on enabling active content when opening documents refer to the Micros
230. bers The controller executes this mixed mode operation by converting all integers to real on input and rounding the resulting real to integer if the destination is an integer The MATH statement also accepts mixed data types By default all values are interpreted as integers Designate values as other data types using the table below 569 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Real Integer Math MATH MATH Data Types Integer Default no designation re V100 quited Bit of Word Period followed by a dec V100 1 imal Period Suffix LPV35 OB Prefix 0B1100100 Hexadecimal OH Prefix OH3E8 32 bit Unsigned In U Suffix V105U teger 16 bit Signed In L Suffix 200L teger Supported by CTI 2500 Series CPUs only Supported by PowerMath CPUs only The MATH statement accepts two types of subscripted variables word indexing and ele ment indexing Use word indexing to access the nth word from variable Z using the expression Z n 32 bit Unsigned Ineger Integer V100 1 V100 V100L 1 V100L V100 V100 V100 2 V100 2 V100L 2 V101L V101 V101 V100 3 V100 3 V100L 3 V102L V102 V102 Use element indexing to access the nth element of array Z using the expression Z n The actual variable access depends on the type of array 570 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Real Integer Math MATH 32 bit Unsigned
231. blank to represent 0 5 no other characters are allowed for the EVENT USE STEP and MASK parametets Modity Communication Settings By default the pinning chart is set up to communicate with the 505 Simulator over TCP IP using an address of 127 0 0 1 If you want to connect to an actual PLC over TCP IP or connect to a PLC using a setial cable you need to modify the communication settings recorded in the pinning chart This information is entered in the Communication Type Comm Type table which begins in row 12 of the pinning chart The communication settings in the pinning chart reflect the same settings that are used in 505 WorkShop See Setting Up Communications on page 750 for additional in formation on communication settings Note that only one set of communication settings can be saved in the pinning chart For instance if you changed the communication settings 456 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums for TCP IP and also changed settings for COM2 only the communication settings that are displayed when the pinning chart is saved are retained in the pinning chart Write and Read Data WRITE TO PLC FROM THE PINNING CHART Once all of the required information has been successfully entered in the pinning chart the information in the pinning chart can be written to a PLC This is done by clicking Write to PLC which is located in row 1 of the pinning chart The amount of
232. ble of Contents Special Calculation COLE cesso occ cuneo Dae A ne ed UAI CLE LIU 391 Special Function AAA ee ait an cone hie taut dada heats 391 Loc KE POM 508 are tet saa e e SA Ee A ERARE 391 Lock Auto Manual non cece aoao ec cecccecececececseeteceeee 392 Locke Cate a raid 392 EFIE CBCP OM ans A 392 REV ISG CCN A Lc EIU AU LU CI DA Lotte iE 393 Monitor Deva ts attacca tasa Uere dou tana b poco EAMUS 393 Deviation Yellow Alarm ait cs oie e ets dodo cd te ct Mtem nel t dates iin 393 Deviation Oranse Alati e e te ELI LL dd 393 Monitor Rate of Changes a tt isa 394 Rate Or Ghance LO pi O40 ince anton Iudice cete qaaa aereo edi Les cias de 394 Monitor Broken Transmitter Al s 394 a o AAA A wee Settle as 394 Delenno a PID TOOP a duc wamnsalended uals aE E E a A EErEE 396 E A A E O 397 Overview of Ramo SO ste adn oca tione aet ri Es 397 Controlling the Ramp Soak Operation 398 Ramp Soak BOOE reee ARM aS 398 SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning eoe eurem uitae susct tene LES ode ee ben 402 Overview of SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning eueuuuuuuuu 402 The Proportional Component uisus 404 The Lateral Componente ceu eade tr ac oo 405 The Derivative Gomporleliben cos A is 405 18 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents PID Loop Data Element Ly ped ioo cee e ented cto ce 417 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions 22 20 0 0 0 419 Isclas TSU eLONG Ce CO oss Eun A E ula de f 421 Nottial Contact DR ordinar
233. ble that has a 20 offset ranges from 6400 to 32000 set the 20 Offset option to YES e If the input is a variable that has a 0 offset set the option to NO The result is stoted in the address specified in Scaled Result The specified low and high limits specified determine the range of the converted number The values of the Low Limit and the High Limit may fall within the following range 5 42101070 107 to 9 22337177 10 9 22337177 10 8 to 2 71050535 10 Range An error is logged if the input value is outside the low limit to high limit range and the out put is clamped to the nearer of either the low limit or the high limit 595 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Sequential Data Table SDT Sequential Data Table SDT The Sequential Data Table statement moves words one at a time from an existing table to a destination address A pointer designates the address of the next word in the table to be moved Each time the statement is executed one word moves and replaces the word at the destination address The SDT format is shown below Input Table Dutput Table PTR Table Lenath Restart Bit Cancel Help e Input Table the starting address for the table Valid descriptors are integer ad dresses addresses containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 or teal addresses addresses containing a real value such as 33 642 V120 V100 2 or WY55
234. button is not enabled then the se lected slave does not support Smart Connect or the slave is associated with a master device file that does not support Smart Connect 3 In the Smart Connect Configurator select the module whose parameters you want to modify 233 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration 4 Click the Parameters button ET200L SC E x SmartConnect module addresses are zero based offsets from the Analog SC and Digital SC addresses entered on the slave configuration tab Module Input Offset Output Offset Module ASC 6ES7121 1FA00 04401DI AC 00 0 Delete B 5C amp ES 122 1BB 0 0440 2D0 DC24V 00 0 CSC 6ES7121 1FA00 04401DI AC 00 1 D SC 6ES7 122 1HA00 0440 1D0 relay 00 2 Auto Address Secondary slot G SC Secondary slot Help Cancel NOTE Ifthe Parameters button is not enabled the selected Smart Connect module does not have parameters that can be modified 5 Modify the parameters as required See Smart Connect Module Parameters for additional information 234 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration SmartConnect Module Parameters E xj Parameter Name Output mode range Voltage 10V 2 7 Format representation SIMATIC 55 SMART CONNECT MODULE PARAMETERS Configurable parameters for the selected Smart Connect Modu
235. button toggles the image register type for the selected module be tween discrete and word inputs To ensure that discrete are toggled to words the discrete must be on a 16 bit boundary The Y lt gt WY button toggles the image register type for the selected module be tween discrete and word outputs To ensure that discrete are toggled to words the discrete must be on a 16 bit boundary The Unify button moves all modules for the selected slave into the first module Unification is only allowed if all modules are either discrete or words Only the first address is retained The Compact button moves all discrete image register types to word image reg ister types for every module of the selected slave It then unifies all the modules into the first module To ensure that discrete are toggled to words the discrete must be on a 16 bit boundary Only the first address is retained The Restore button restores modules for the selected slave according to the con figuration including the image register types Zero addresses are assumed for all but the first address which is kept The Smart Connect button allows you to perform actions on Smart Connect mod ules for the selected slave device 222 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Accommodating Additional Profibus Masters In order to take into account the target rotation time of a master not contained in the Pro fib
236. c cessed several ways Cut To use the cut feature 1 Select the instructions networks addresses or special function SF lines you want to cut 2 Cut your selection to the clipboard by either clicking the 4 toolbar button or clicking Cut from the Edit menu Cut Logic Range Network Address Cancel from 11 to The ladder logic or SF rows that have been cut can be pasted NOTE If the start and ending networks addresses or SF lines are known then the cut from and cut to range can be entered di rectly into the Cut Range dialog box If a partial network is selected the Cut Range dialog box is not displayed The items selected are cut without warning 104 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Editing Copy To use the copy feature 1 Select the instructions networks addresses or special function SF lines you want to copy qa 2 Copy your selection to the clipboard by either clicking the LJ toolbar button or clicking Copy from the Edit menu Copy Logic Range C Network Address Cancel from 115 to 15 The range of networks addtesses or SF lines displayed ate copied and placed into the clip board NOTE If the start and ending networks addresses or SF lines are known then the copy from and copy to range can be en tered directly into the Copy Range dialog box If a partial network is selected the Copy Range dialog box is not dis
237. c te didus quieta tscbaba ens een tec ona Stas 464 Edda Teo eenecer Leica A 464 Not Equal NS A II 465 AAA O O a Baia A 467 Less Than or Egual Lo LEQ sr ern ape 508 tert e LIEN asa 469 Greater EA A geneous s5eus 470 Greater Than ort Equal To GE OE tia 472 Compare A E 474 Indexed Matrix Compare IMC o ooocococococcccocococonononcoconocococonononoo 475 Scan Matrix Compare SMO AAA Ei uit era aca ote 476 o AA A LLLI Ads ALE RN EA LOCO LU MUERE ALIE 477 A AA One terin iadnanl ce dE emt foa ente 477 A NS A ACER STE aD une Re emer dai CO ADU 477 20 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents AA A a ee ALE De DEM LES mre Tare 478 Bit shift Resiste SHRB ssie torona a S aE 478 Word Shift Register CSIR Wiss PRU 479 Word Rotate WROT o settee ein atic cma dna te eM 480 Moat aid Logic H5 UFU E ORG side chante ane Reto ed 481 DVO shaadi lino LE O 481 Subtract UB a a REE TOT 481 Multiply MUL cuiii eL etat oe ee 482 unciis ih mH 482 Absolute Value AD a siars cep A EUM A EAD E AA AO REEL 483 Square Root SQRT siot stabat ia tuse sided 483 Bifiaty to BC DY CBD ins ae ey a A oe 484 BCD to Binary DB tent e Rud 485 Word And WAND 5 0 2 1 s2c uterecsatun one Prodi estate teases 485 Wir Oh NVR saeco no A Ar EAE roD tet handed ce 486 Word Exclusive OrQy NOR a ee ce 487 Move Instructions AA A Le nell ucse 489 Move Image Register From Table MIRED o oooooococococcccccccocococonoo 489 Move Image Register to Table MIR
238. cascaded loops in which the outer loop does not require an output address Output is Bipolar In the Output is Bipolar box click YES to use an output range of 32000 32000 20 Offset on Output In the 20 OFFSET ON OUTPUT box click Yes to use a 20 offset on the output 387 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Programming PID Loops If you select No for both Output is Bipolar and 20 Offset on Output then the output range is 0 32000 Ramp Soak for SP In the R S for SPbox click YES to indicate that a ramp soak program for the loop is to be executed Alarm Deadband In the Alarm DB box enter a value in engineering units for the Alarm deadband When you specify an Alarm deadband the controller provides histories on all alarms except the rate of change alarm to prevent chattering when the process variable is near one of the Alarm limits The loop does not exit the alarm condition until the process variable has come inside the alarm limit minus the deadband Monitor Low Low High High In the Monitor Lo Lo Hi Hi box click Yes to have the controller monitor the Low Low High High Loop Click No if the Low Low High High can be entered as values te quiring critical action Monitor Low High In the Monitor Lo Hi box click Yes to have the controller monitor the Low High Alarm Click No if the Low High Loop can be entered as values requiting remedial action Process Variable Alarm Low Low
239. cessor in RUN mode If you enter a call to a subroutine that does not exist unpredictable PLC results may occur Reference Number Subroutine number 1 255 514 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions Call Subroutine SBR The Subroutine SBR instruction is used before a set of RLL instructions the RLL sub routine to be executed only when they are called by the GTS PGTS or PGTSZ instruction When a subroutine is called it executes until either a conditional RTN with power flow or an unconditional RTN is encountered When this occurs RLL execution re turns to the instruction following the calling GTS PGTS or PGTSZ instruction Subroutines have the following features e Place all subroutines at the end of the main RLL program e Separate the main RLL program from the subroutines with an unconditional END instruction e A subroutine must be terminated by an unconditional RTN instruction or a com pile error will be generated An END within a subroutine also generates an errors e The unconditional RTN instruction separates a subroutine from a subsequent sub routine e You can nest subroutines to 32 levels A run time nonfatal errors occurs when you exceed 32 levels bit 7 in STW1 is set indicating a stack overflow e When you pass parameters to the subroutine by calling the subroutine from a PGTS instruction refer to discrete parameters as Bn and word parameters as W
240. ch faster 6 Enter a result file path and name in the Result File box if the results of the compare are to be saved to a file 7 Click OK to start the compare process 302 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Compare NOTE If there is more than one program open the File Program Compate compares the program in the active window When the compare finishes a Compare Results dialog box similar to the following appears Any mismatches between the File and controller or offline program are listed Compare Results Status Compare Complete Comparing Ladder Ladder mismatch in network 1 Ladder mismatch in network 2 Ladder mismatch in network 3 Ladder mismatch in network 4 Ladder mismatch in network 5 Ladder mismatch in network 6 Ladder mismatch in network 7 Ladder mismatch in network 8 Ladder mismatch in network 9 Ladder mismatch in network 10 Ladder mismatch in network 11 Comparing Forced Word 1 0 No mismatches in Forced Word I Os Comparing Forced Bit 0 No mismatches in Forced Bit Os Comparing Forced Control Relays No mismatches in Forced Control Relays Comparing Scan Times No mismatch in Scan Times Comparing Loops No mismatches in Loops Comparing Alarms No mismatches in Alarms Combarina SF Proarams Close 303 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Displaying Processor Faults Displaying Processor Faults You can display the Faults of yo
241. ck the Doc Font button to change the Header font in the active program Result The Font dialog box appears 91 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Font Font style Courier Ne Courier 0 BT Italic Cancel Bold Bold Italic Tr Decorated035 BT Effects Sample Strikeout Underline AaBbYyZz Color HM Black Script Westem v 2 Choose a new font font style or font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 3 Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to cancel changes Result The Print Loops dialog box appears NOTE The print selection options are stored when saving a pro gram Print Alarms Click the Alarms check box from the Print dialog box to print the following e All Alarms e Alarms and Headers To change the Alarms properties click the Alarms button on the Print dialog box The Print Alarms dialog box appears 92 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Print Alarms All Alarms Alarm Range from to fiz v Headers Save as Defaults Restore Defaults Doc Font se ww Select the All Alarms check box to print the entire range of alarms To print a selection clear the All Alarms check box and enter a range in the associated edit box To include loop headers with the printout click the Headers check box 1 Click the Doc Font button t
242. com ponent has been detected System Clock Failure Indicates the system clock cannot be ac cessed L Memoty Invalid Power loss during in progress RLL edit op eration L Memoty Invalid Power loss during L memory resize op eration S Memory Invalid Power loss during in progress S memory edit operation PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming CTI 2500 Error Codes 0300 0400 0600 Error details can be obtained from the system event log If this error persists contact CTI Product Support Error details can be obtained from the system event log Error details can be obtained from the system event log To clear this error you must cycle power to the controller If the problem persists contact CTI Product Support After clearing this error you must reload the RLL After clearing this error you must reload the RLL After clearing this error you must reload the RLL 307 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming CTI 2500 Error Codes System service failure To clear this error you must cycle power to the controller If the problem persists contact CTT Product Support 308 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming CTI 2500 User Switch Settings CTI 2500 User Switch Settings The switchblock containing the user switches is located on the circuit board as shown in the following picture SW1 Battery Switch
243. crete image register The shift register may be up to 1023 bits long The SHRB instruction has the following features e When the Enable Reset is turned on the SHRB instruction is enabled e When the clock transitions from zero to one the following actions occur The last highest numbered bit of the shift register is moved to the output The data in the shift register is shifted one address The status of the Data input 0 or 1 is moved into the lower numbered point as specified in the IR field e When the clock does not transition from zero to one the last bit of the shift reg ister is moved to the output The data is not shifted e The Enable Reset must be kept on as long as the data is be shifted into and kept in the SHRB When the Enable Reset loses power flow the SHRB is cleared and all control relays or image register points comprising the SHRB are cleared to Zzero e Ifthe Enable Reset does not receive power flow the instruction is not executed and the output does not turn on 478 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Bit Operations Register Constant Varies with configured Shift Register Number ranges Bit Ad dress Warning Do not use the same reference number more than once for the SHRB and SHRW instructions Assigning the same number can cause unpredictable machine operation Word Shift Register SHRW The Word Shift Register Instruction SHRW copies words from a memory
244. cs on Bases dialog box and return to the active logic program Diagnostics on Bases Channel Base Message Close Run Current Run All Swap RBCs Next DM Help Current Channel Current Base jo Hot Backup Hot Backup is used to select the status of a hot backup unit Hot Backup is only valid for the 565 controller To execute the function 1 Click Hot Backup from the PLC Utilities menu ALT U H The Hot Backup dialog box is displayed with the status of the Hot Backup 2 Select one of the following three status modes 323 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays e Standby to Offline Puts the standby unit in PROGRAM mode e Standby to Online Puts the standby unit in RUN mode e Switch Switches the roles of the active unit and standby unit 4 Click Close to exit the Hot Backup and return to the active logic program Password The password feature provides protection for areas of memory that are part of the program There ate two passwords one for the selected program on disk and one for the controller They do not have to be the same NOTE You do not need to enter a password to go online However if the selected program on disk is protected you must enter a password to go offline A password value consists of 1 8 alphanumeric digits for example 0 9 or uppercase A Z Online you can be prompted for the password for the controller progr
245. ction 5 Click the left mouse button and the instruction is placed in that location If an in struction cannot be placed in that location an error message is displayed 6 The instruction remains attached to the pointer Click the left mouse button once for each additional instruction you want to insert Click the arrow in the middle of the Instruction Bar or another instruction to remove the instruction from the pointer Using the menu to enter instructions with the keyboard 1 In the active Special Function Program use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the spot you wish to place the instruction 2 Type in the character mnemonic for the instruction or Press ALT P I to open the Selection Instruction dialog box from the Program menu 3 Use the arrow keys to move up and down the Group and Instruction scroll boxes and the Tab key to move between the boxes 4 Highlight desired instruction and press ENTER to insert the instruction 5 Repeat Steps 1 5 for each instruction you want to enter Password Protected Subroutines Special Function subroutines can be protected by a password to ease in sharing proprietary SF programs System integrators and equipment manufacturers may need to provide pro gramming objects in order for equipment to function correctly but may not want to allow the logic in these programs to be altered by the end user By protecting these subroutines with a password they can then be imported and expor
246. ctions Pack Ramp Soak Data PACKRS Soak step with status bit C514 1 2 3 4 5 0 7 8 98 10 11 12 13 14 wodi 1 1 1 1 0 0 00 0 0000001 MSB S 1 Soak step Point Type 000 C control relay Page Number 514 1 512 7 1 Offset 514 1 modulo 512 1 2 Figure 23 PACKRS Long Form Address Example The next example shows an example of the PACKRS instruction moving values from a ramp soak profile to a V memory table PACKRS To from Table TO Table Address V100 Loop Number 2 3 No of Steps Starting Step 2 Loop 2 RAMP SOAK Profile Status Setpoint Ramp Rate Soak Time Deadband Step R S Bit Units Units Min Min Units C32 56 2 cy C512 65 0 C513 C1025 45 0 Table after execution of PACKRS instruction To Table from Loop 2 packing 3 steps starting at step 2 Table in V Memory Soak step status bt address C33 IEEE floating point representation of 6 0 Step 2 Values IEEE floating point representation of 1 5 Ramp step status bit address C512 IEEE floating point representation of 65 0 Step 3 Values IEEE floating point representation of 6 0 Soak step status bt address C513 IEEE floating point representation of 10 0 Step 4 Values IEEE floating point representation of 3 5 Figure 24 Example of PACKRS to a Table in V Memory 587 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Ramp Soak Data PACKRS The following shows an example of the P
247. ctive window comes to the front of all other windows Insert a New Network In the active logic program window you can insert a new network using the mouse or the keyboard To insert a new network using the mouse 4l 1 Click Lal new network button on the Toolbar Notice that the new network at taches to the pointer 2 Bring the pointer into the active logic window Position the pointer where you want the new netwotk 3 Click the left mouse button The new network is inserted For example if the cur sor is positioned in Netwotk 002 the new network becomes Network 002 and existing Netwotk 002 becomes 003 4 Repeat Step 3 to insert additional netwotks 5 Remove the new network from the pointer by clicking the arrow on the Instruction Bar 247 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Programming Ladder To insert a new network using the keyboard 1 Press ALT P and the Program menu drops down 2 Press S or use the down arrow keys to highlight New Network and press ENTER The New Network dialog box appears 3 Enter the number of the network you wish to enter If a network 002 exists and you enter 2 in the Network Number box the existing Network 002 becomes Network 003 and the new network becomes 002 4 Press ENTER and the new network is inserted 5 Repeat Step 3 to enter additional networks Insert a New Row You can insert a new row to a network similar to inserting a new network
248. ctory Loop Mode Offline Analog Alarms Alarm Title En Dis Documentation S Memory Available 3926 1 Select the alarm or alarms you want to copy and then click Copy You can drag to se lect a range of alarms You can also press the CTRL or SHIFT keys to select more than one alarm 2 Move the pointer to the alarm where you want to place the copied alarms and click Paste 369 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 8 Analog Alarms Analog Parameters Analog Parameters Overview of Analog Alarm Parameters Analog Alarm Edit Analog Alarm 1 Monitor Lo Lo H Hi No Alarm DB 0 0 Alarm Title Monitor Lo Hi Special Fn N one VFlag Addr NONE PY Alarm Lo Lo Monitor Dev No v Sample Rate fi 0 PY Alarm Low Dev Yellow Alarm 1 00 0 PY Addr NONE PY Alarm High 100 0 Dev Orange Alarm 100 0 Low PY Range 0 0 PV Alarm Hi Hi E 00 0 Monitor Change No v High P Range fi 00 0 Monitor Remote SP No v Rate of Change Alarm 0 0 PY Bipolar No y Remote SP NONE Monitor Broken mit No v 20 Offset on Py Yes Clamp SP Low 0 0 Sq Root of PV No y Clamp SP High 0 0 Modify Doc Cancel MV Enable Alarm Title An eight character title can be entered for each specific Analog Alarm number The title is optional and can be left blank V Flag Address Enter a C Y V or WY address in the VFlag Addr box If you select NONE no data is written from the V Flags in the analog alar
249. current application Required Applications Application ID Required Applications Optional Applications CPU Mode Locked To Cancel Help The following fields display information about applications Only the IDs listed in the RE QUIRED or OPTIONAL fields are valid for use as G memory parameters in your RLL program e APPLICATION ID displays the ID of the current application e REQUIRED APPLICATIONS displays a listing of the application IDs needed for the current application to complete a process e OPTIONAL APPLICATIONS displays a listing of the application IDs that are not required but may be present e CPU MODE LOCKED TO displays a listing of the application IDs that must tran sition to RUN mode at the same time e CONNECTING ONLINE displays the current application ID configuration After modifying the configuration click OK to enter the new configuration relationships 342 Chapter 7 Documentation 344 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Ladder Network and SF Header Editor Ladder Network and SF Header Editor Ladder Header 505 WorkShop provides a simple way to document ladder while you are creating or editing your program The maximum number of characters you can enter for each header is 16K To add or modify a ladder header 1 Double click the Ladder Header icon in the active logic program window The Lad der Header dialog box is displayed 2 In the He
250. d Address V Constant A Warning Do not use the same reference number more than once for the MWTT and MWFT in struction Assigning the same reference number can cause unpredictable machine op eration Move Word to Table MWTT The Move Word to Table instruction MWTT copies a word from a source in memory to a destination within a table A pointer designates the memory location in the table into which the next word is copied One word is copied per scan The MWTT instruction works as follows e When the Enable Reset is off the table starting address S is loaded into pointer B e When the Enable Reset runs on the box instruction is enabled When the input also turns on the following can occur A word is copied from the memory location specified by A to the table mem ory location specified by the value contained in pointer B 494 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions Pointer B which holds the destination memory location in the table fro the next word is incremented by 1 e If the input remains on one word is copied every scan As each word is copied the table pointer is incremented until N words have been copied e The output is turned on when the last word has been copied e When the instruction is reset all value in the table remain unchanged Constant Varies with Table Move configured range Word Address V W G Word Address V W G Word Address V Con
251. d in the Mask Address Mask Addr column are automatically cal culated They are calculated using the starting Mask address specified in the Parameter Address Table the number of output coils addtesses represented in the pin ning chart and the number of steps represented in the pinning chart In any row the addresses used to store mask values are offset from the address displayed in the Mask Addr column Resizing the pinning chart by adding or subtracting the number 454 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums of columns that represent output coils addresses or by adding or subtracting the number of rows representing rows will cause the values in the Mask Addr column to be re calculated The addresses displayed in the Mask Addr column are recalculated whenever a 16 based threshold value is added to or removed from the pinning chart The values in the E Y lt Mask Addr column ols lal lt ololZ are calculated l3 aja g E 2 5 E Pier olo E E automatically 20 N o o s e v o o vo ERES 0 Dg pog og d gU CLA wp pog d p E E j ESA A T ELS S OG CZ Tg Lg 1g j EE TEHETITE IE gu EN g1g g g gg ggg LANA BED T P j The values in the Mask Addr column reflect the starting Mask Address for each row Figure 7 Mask Addr Column The following figures depict a 16 x 16 pinning chart and a
252. d range Number Only A Do not use the same reference number more than once for timet counter up down counter and discrete motor control alarm timer instructions Using the same reference number can cause un predictable operations 435 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums Use the following table for state changes I n dition Feedback AND PA Alm Output TIAS Action Status us or fee je o1 ee fof 1 ef reset timing A A NOIA NESE E ll follows input Unexpected alarm conditions may occur when the DCAT exists within the zone of control of a JMP or MCR The DCAT output and alarms are under the control of the JMP or MCR Motor Control Alarm Timer MCAT The Motor Control Alarm Timer MCAT instruction is designed for use with a double input double feedback device The MCAT operates similarly to the DCAT instruction but the MCAT provides the ability to operate motor driven devices that drive in opposite direction You can use the MCAT to replace several networks of logic that are required to time the field device s operation and generate alarms in case of failure 436 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums The MCAT timer times down from the preset value specified in Timer which is stored in TCP memory The time current time is stored in TCC memory When the Open input t
253. d return to the TCP IP Setup dialog box NOTE Refer to the 2572 Ethernet TCP IP Module manual for ptopet settings Setting Up and Using PROFIBUS FMS Access FMS Profibus Devices Using 505 WorkShop To access the FMS Profibus network with 505 WorkShop 160 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Communication 1 From the File menu click Fast PLC Setup Select FMS from the Fast PLC Connection Setup dialog box Click OK on the Setup dialog box HN tS From the File menu click Fast PLC Connect FMS communications can also be established via open program Result The FMS Network Access screen appeats 5 Select anode name These ate the node names you configured using the COML S7 software prior to rebooting Using the arrow keys or mouse select an FMS node name and click OK Result 505 WorkShop is online FMS Network Access Path Description Plant Floor Annex Cancel NOTE The 505 WorkShop allows 112 different Station Addresses and Path Descriptions Installing the PROFIBUS FMS Communications Processor The SIMATIC 505 CP5434 FMS Communications Processor module referred to hereafter as the FMS CP module provides the interface required for a SIMATIC 505 pro grammable logic controller system to communicate with other devices over a common PROFIBUS network To install the FMS CP module in a SIMATIC 505 base follow the installation instructions in the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS FMS Communica
254. d using the rules of precedence for arithmetic op erations listed in the table below 562 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Integer Math IMATH Functions within a group are equivalent in precedence Execution takes place from left to tight For example in the operation X Y Z X is multiplied by Y and the result is di vided by Z A subexpression enclosed in parentheses is evaluated before surrounding operators are applied e g in X Y Z the sum of X Y is multiplied by Z Parentheses constants and subscript variables are allowed in the expressions You can use only integers in an IMATH statement Mixed mode operation integer and real numbers is not supported Denote a binary number by the prefix OB e g 0B10111 a hexadecimal number by the prefix 0H e g OH7FFF The programming device checks to see if a statement is valid as you enter the statement and reports an error by placing the cur sor in the field where the error occurs Order of Precedence for IMATH Operators Highest Prec Intrinsic function ABS NOT Negation edence NOT Multiplication Division MOD MOD Addition Subtraction Shift left Shift right lt lt gt gt Relational Operators lt lt gt lt gt Logical AND Logical OR Lowest Prec Assignment edence Supported by PowerMath CPUs only 563 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Function
255. d version of the file you would like to compare Click Compare The Compare Files dialog box appears 125 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak Compare Files Compare To C Ignore leading and trailing white space C Ignore all white space C Ignore case C Ignore line endings The following options apply only to text file comparison and can be ignored when comparing WorkShop files o Ignore leading and trailing white space o Ignore all white space o Ignore case o Ignore line endings 3 Click OK to view the file compare results See the FTVersionTrak documentation for more information on file compare results NOTE Clicking Compare without selecting more than one version will compare the selected version to the working copy Clicking Compare without selecting any version will compare the latest version to the working copy Viewing File History Each WorkShop file that is managed by FT VersionTrak is given its own history As you check out edit and check in your programs the history is updated to reflect these changes Viewing history is the best way to get a clear picture of the changes a program has gone through To view the active WorkShop program s version history 1 Click the O icon in the FTVersionTrak toolbar The History dialog box appears 126 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and F
256. d with a master device file that does not support Smart Connect Insert Module Delete Module iota Module Unity Compact Restore Expand Definition 3 In the Smart Connect Configurator select the module you want to delete 231 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration ET200L SC x SmartConnect module addresses are zero based offsets from the Analog SC and Digital SC addresses entered on the slave configuration tab Module Input Offset Output Offset Comment 6ES7 121 1FA00 08401DI AC 00 0 6ES 122 1BB 0 0440 2DO DC24V BES 121 1FA00 0440 1DI AC Parameters 6ES7 122 1HA00 0440 1DO relay a Secondary slot BES 124 1FA00 0AB0 140 10Y Secondary slot 4 Click Delete The selected module is deleted MODIFY THE PARAMETERS OFA SMART CONNECT MODULE To modify the parameters of a Smart Connect module associated with a slave that supports Smart Connect modules 1 In the Profibus Configurator click the slave associated with the Smart Connect mod ule whose parameters you want to modify See Configuring and Addressing Profibus I O Modules for additional information about the Profibus Configurator 232 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration 2 Click Smart Connect to open the Smart Connect Configurator Profibus 1 0
257. dder program For example if you would like to change the documentation for the address 00001 that is used on a contact move the cursor to that location and press CTRL L The Edit Documentation window automatically appears Enter the tag description and comment and click OK to save the documentation Shared Documentation Address Documentation can be used in two ways 359 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documenting in Ladder e The first is the traditional style Where a temporary DATABASE file is not shared and all edits are buffered until the file is saved If the file is not saved then any edits are lost Upon saving the temporary DATABASE file is copied to the same destination as the logic file e A shared file works differently This file can be shared opened more then once by different programs Edits are not buffered but are immediately saved Upon sav ing a program the Address Documentation DATABASE file does not get saved thus Save As does not affect the file at all A refresh time can be entered that causes the database to reread the file to acquire any new or changed doc umentation Also a shared database can reference a database created for another purpose as long as the fields are map able to our defaults A shared file can be created at user direction but once created is the responsibility of the user to de lete To modify a shared documentation file click Shared Documentation Setup
258. ddress Form B Constant Only 1 16 Move Byte Word Element MOVE The Move Element MOVE instruction copies data bytes word or long words from a source location to a destination location When the input is turned on the MOVE instruction is executed The operation of the MOVE is described as follows e The elements are specified in TS are copied to the destination specified by TD e The output is turned on after the instruction is executed unless an error occurs e When the count is invalid or any reference data element are undefined bits 6 and 11 in STWO1 are set and STW200 contains a value of 5 The contents of the des tination are not changed e You can specify the type of the data element to be moved It can be a byte 8 bits long word 16 bits or long words 32 bits e The source can be specified as a constant value signed integer a direct address or an indirect address You can specify an index for the source address using SI as an index into a table when you want to copy elements of a table to a destination SI designates the relative element in the table reference by TS which is to be copied The element TS 0 is the first element in the table SI can be a Constant 0 65535 You can leave the field blank or enter a 0 for no in dexing You can enter any readable word defined in the table below that gives the element number of the first element to copy If an indirect source address is used the con troller f
259. ddress check box to sort the information in the Documentation Win dow in alphanumeric order according to the Address e Select the Tag check box to sort the information in the Documentation Window in alphanumeric order according to the Tag e Select the Description check box to sort the information in the Documentation Window in alphanumeric order according to the Address Editing and Creating New Address Documentation Use the Edit Documentation dialog box to create or edit PLC address documentation 351 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documentation Window There ate several ways to access this dialog box e To create or edit documentation for an address from ladder logic select the ad dress l3CV9407 Y1471 y T LH and click Modify Doc from the Edit menu or press CTRL L e To edit documentation from the Documentation Window select the address you want to edit and click Modify Doc from the Documentation menu ot double click the address The Documentation menu is visible only when the Doc umentation Window is active e To create new documentation when in the Documentation Window click New Doc from the Documentation menu Edit Documentation Address CE Description Prev Doc Prev Addi Next Addr Next Doc Description Line l Description Line 2 Tag T G Description Comment Description Comment Line 1 Description Comment Line 2 Header Find New C
260. ddress to the Module There are two ways to configure the IP address for your PPX 505 CP2572 module Each procedure has different advantages as outlined below Procedure Pros Cons Autostatt Communications are Must reprogram EEPROM whenever functional any time CPU CP2572 module is replaced GOOD LED is on A CP2572 module programmed in one ap Can re use same ladder plication and installed in another would logic program for mul respond to the wrong IP address unless tiple controllers reprogrammed Cannot swap CP2572 modules without re programming EPROMs through serial port by a PC 156 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Communication Procedure Pros Cons Easy to troubleshoot IP Address is not loaded unless CPU problems by swapping enters RUN mode if power is lost when CP2572 modules CPU is not in RUN mode you must man proper IP address is ually bring CPU back to RUN mode via loaded from ladder logic programming device in CPU s RS 232 program as soon as CPU port to restore Ethernet com enters RUN mode munications If multiple controllers perform the same function you must modify ladder logic program for each one so that it contains a unique IP address The SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP2572 User Man ual order number PPX 505 8132 1 and the CTI 2572 Ethernet TCP IP Adapter Installation and Operation Guide order number 062 00146 describes
261. dit Data Values Online Online Online Online Online Online Offline Offline Offline Offline Offline Edit Documentation Offline Memory Configuration General General General I K K a a a al al amp K el S IK X K X K Security Location Local The selected server machine appears in the status bar in the lower right portion of the ap plication window In the tree control on the left most pane pick PLC WorkShop In the Users and Groups list box two names System and either the administrators group or the current uset will exist by default with access to all features ADDING AND REMOVING USERS AND GROUPS To add or remove individual users or groups use the buttons on the far right of this dialog Add additional usets and or groups by selecting the Add button Remove usets or groups by highlighting the name and selecting the Remove button Users and groups that are not displayed in the list box are automatically denied access to all features The list box is sorted with groups listed first followed by users A group is identified with the two petson icon to the left while the user is identified with the one person icon A combination of around 16 users and groups can be configured for an application 654 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security N
262. during a soak period when the process variable is not within a specified de viation from the SP The loop holds the soak timer when bit 5 is set 1 Hold in progress at current step Unused always returns 0 1 Contains step number loop is currently ex ecuting Step number is zero based Step number contains 0 when ramp soak is on step 1 1 when the ramp soak is on step 2 etc 3 Enter a C Y V or WYaddtess in the R S Flag Address box If you select NONE no data is written from the Loop Ramp Soak Flags Refer to the preceding table for Loop Functions Bits 4 To add a new Ramp Soak step number click Insert 5 To edit the selected Ramp Soak step number click Edit The following dialog box appears Ramp Soak Step Edit Ramp Soak Entry Mode Status Bit Cancel Set Point Ramp Rate units min 6 In the Mode box click Ramp Soak or End 400 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Ramp Soak e A Ramp step changes the loop set point you can enter the set point in the Set Point box linearly from its current value to a new value at a specified rate of change you can enter the rate of change in the Ramp Rate box You can pro gtam a status bit C or Y for each step of the ramp soak This bit is set to 1 when the loop is executing this step It is reset when the loop leaves the step e A Soak step holds the set point constant for a specified period of time you can enter a soak time i
263. e 3 Information 11 10 2006 8 17 01 AM Automatic LiveUpdate 3 ormation 11 10 2006 8 13 35 AM NSCService 3 Information 11 10 2006 8 13 35 AM NSCService Information 11 10 2006 8 12 11 AM MSSQL FTVERSIONTRAK 3 Information 11 10 2006 8 12 11 AM MSSQLSFTVERSIONTRAK d Information 11 10 2006 8 12 11 AM MSSQL FTVERSIONTRAK s i gt From this application the user may view the security log If running the Security Con figurator from a different machine than the security server FTSecSvr then the security server s machine name must be specified in the event viewer to view the security log en tries referring to FasTrak security This can be accomplished by highlighting the Event Viewer in the tree control and then picking the Action menu This is in the figure below a eae a Event Viewer Local Annlicatiom 1 721 event s Connect to another computer a Application ite Security Open Log File 10 200 1 i System Help 10 2001 Internet Explor 11 10 2001 GD Information 11 10 2001 Selecting Connect to another computer launches the following window 656 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server Select Computer Select the computer you want this snap in to manage This snap in will always manage Local computer the computer this console is running on
264. e Internet Explorer 0002DF01 0000 0000 c ComEvents ComSyster ay Glogagent F808DF63 6049 11D1 8 yy Application ID 984FE7E4 23F7 11D3 3 EE HI FE EB E EIE FTSecSvr Properties General Location Security Endpoints Identity General properties of this DCOM application Application Name FTSecSvr Application ID 1ABBCEOS 274B 4782 BAE 8 D5D 7A4E 4E 7F 7 Application T ype Local Server Authentication Level y Local Path Apply 650 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server Security Configurator Introduction to Security Configurator The Security Configuration Application FTSecCfg EXE allows users with ad ministrator rights to configure their centralized server based security This EXE will reside on the same machine and directory as the server Users will also be able to install PTSecCfg on client machines running Windows NT 3 1 or later 2000 XP or Vista so that they can configure their security server remotely The following features are supported e Ability to configure which users and or groups have access to various FasTrak fea tures This includes users and groups from the machine running the server Separate secure features will exist for individual FasTrak applications including pro gramming packages as well as ControlShop applications
265. e Broken Transmitter Alarm If you program the controller to monitor for the broken transmitter condition an alarm oc curs if the raw process variable is outside the valid range designated for the process variable Valid ranges ate e Bipolar 32000 32000 e 0 offset 0 32000 e 20 offset 6400 32000 376 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 8 Analog Alarms Analog Alarm Data Element Types Analog Alarm Data Element Types Data Element Type Data Type AVE V Flags 16 bits In teger C Flags 32 bits In E Em 000000000 CMM Alarm Limit E ALLA Low Low Alatm Limit Real Units Minute Dm Sein fightin 14 Lum epi tea Pasos ash a 377 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 8 Analog Alarms Analog Alarm Data Element Types Data Element Type Data Type ALLA Raw Low Low Alarm Limit NOTE Addresses that use a notation ate teal types 378 Chapter 9 PID Loops 380 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Introduction Introduction Process and batch control capability is provided using the controller s proportional integral derivative PID loop functions When you program a loop you can set the same eight alarm types used by analog alarms and described in Analog Alarms e High high alarm point on the process variable PV e High alarm point on the PV e Low alarm point on the PV e Low low alarm point on the PV e Yellow deviation
266. e Output the output address to which the words are moved Valid descriptors are writeable integer addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 and writeable real addresses writeable addresses containing a real value such as V120 e Table PTR the address of the Table Pointer Valid descriptors are writeable in teger addresses e Table Length the length of the table and must be a value greater than zero Valid descriptors ate integer addresses or values any integer value or address con taining an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 e Restart Bit the address of the restart status bit can be a C or Y Valid de sctiptors are writeable bit elements writeable bit addresses and temporary bit of word addresses that are not part of expressions such as C200 or T15 1 NOTE When using the SDT statement in a compiled Special Func tion program or subroutine a static table must be specified The table s base address must be a V K G VMS or VMM address and the Table Length must be specified as a value 596 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Sequential Data Table SDT SDT Operation Before the SDT is executed the Table Pointer is set to zero by the program Each time the SDT is executed the table pointer is incremented by 1 and the word value in the Table Pointer address is moved to the Output The process is repeated until the number of wotds s
267. e Print dialog box appears Printer SHARP AR M550LI PCLB on NeD0 v Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Iv Loops Alarms PLC Configuration Registers Documentation Cross Reference Selected Items Category Ladder 1 6 Inline lt Ref ex CRs 0 0 SF Programs 1 1023 SF Subroutines 1 1023 Loops PID Loops 1 84 Alarms Analog Alarms 1 128 PLC Configuration 505 Channel Base 1 0 1 15 Profibus DP Slave 1 112 Config Memory Registers W Memory 1 2048 Page Setup Print Setup OK Cancel 2 Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to ptint For each item selected you can choose sort options and the information you want to include for reports The print range of each print item to be printed is displayed under Se lected Items Print Logic and SFs Click the Logic and SFs button to print the following 88 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs e All logic ladder SFS and SFP e Selected logic ladder SFS or SFP e Selected ladder in address or network mode e Selected Special Function lines e Inline Xref e Ladder with Addresses Tags Descriptions or Headers e Multiple or single networks addtesses per page The Print Logic and SFs dialog box determines which items are printed Print Logic and SFs Prnt All Ladder Display Size Include jw M Ladder Range from to oe A Address Mode Column Width 14 E v Grid
268. e Table Address into the specified loop variable e If additional variables are specified the second word in the table is written to the second variable and so on up to eight variables 583 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Ramp Soak Data PACKRS Pack Ramp Soak Data PACKRS The Pack Ramp Soak Data statement moves one or more steps of the ramp soak profile for a given loop to or from a table PACKRS is primarily intended to make the ramp soak profiles accessible to an operator interface and to provide a method for dynamic ramp soak profiling To From T able Table Address Loop Number Number Of Steps Starting Step Cancel Help To From Table specifies whether you are writing data to or from the table Table Address specifies the address of the table to or from which data are moved Valid descriptors are integer addresses addresses containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 if reading from the table or writeable in teger addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 if writing to the table e Loop Number specifies the loop number whose ramp soak profile is involved in the pack operation Valid descriptors are integer addresses or values any integer value or address containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 e Number of Steps specifies the number of ramp soak steps to pack Valid de sctipto
269. e Timer DCAT e Up Down Counter UDC 178 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Controller Memory Types e Counter CTR e Motor Control Alarm e Timer MCAT When you assign a number to a timer counter up down counter or dis Warning ctete motor control alarm timer be sure that you do not use that number for any other timer countet up down countet ot dis crete motor control alarm timer For example if you configure a Timer 6 TMR6 do not configure any other operation such as a countet CTR or a discrete control alarm timer DCAT with the number 6 Assigning the same number more than once could cause unpredictable operation by the controller which could result in death or se tious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Do not use the same reference number more than once for timer counter up down counter and discrete motor control alarm timer instructions NOTE If you use an operator interface to change the time counter values the new values are not changed in the original RLL program If the RLL presets are ever downloaded e g as the result of a complete restart or an edit of the netwotk con taining the Timer Counter instruction the changes made with the operator interface are replaced by the values in the RLL program This memoty type is divided into areas for stoting two types of information This in formation consists of Timer Cou
270. e by using a SF program to change the control flag bits in the Loop V Flag The V Flags contains the operational data for a PID Loop The V Flags corresponds to in dividual bits making up the 16 bit word The bits are defined below PID Loop Function 45 0 0 Loop is in manual mode 1 0 Loop is in auto mode 0 1 Loopis in cascade mode 0O Error is positive 1 Error is negative Pa errs Vai Alm NN 385 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Programming PID Loops Sample Rate In the Sample Rate box enter a time in seconds The sample rate determines how often deviation alarm bits and associated math are eval uated Sample rates are programmable in 0 1 second increments with alarms checked at least once every two seconds The sample rate can be any floating point number between 0 1 1 6772 x 106 seconds Process Variable Address In the PV Addr box enter a V WX WYaddress or click NONE A process variable must be specified for each PID Loop The process variable can be taken from the following e Aword input or output module The programming table uses a WX or WY address e Alocation in V Memory Uses an address in V Memory in the programming table When a special calculation is performed on a process variable the result is stored in V Memory where the Loop accesses it Ifyouselect NONE the PID Loop does not read an address to obtain the process variable Low Process Variable Ran
271. e controller online or offline e Ladder e Forced Word I O e Forced Discrete I O e Forced Control Relays e Sequencer Scan Time e Loops e Alarms e Special Function Programs e Special Function Subroutines e U Memoty e V and K Memory To perform a File Program Compare a program must be open 1 Click File Program Compare from the File menu Result The File Program Compare window appears 301 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Compare File Program Compare Compare File C Program Files 505 WorkShop Star Maximum mismatches per category Ladder Compare Method Ladder Basic Comprehensive Forced Word 1 0 v Loops Forced Discrete 1 0 Iv Alarms Forced Control Relays IV SFPs Sequencer Scan Time M SFSs V and K Memory Ranges Cancel 2 Click Browse to locate the disk file to compare or enter the file name in the Com pare File box 3 Enter the Maximum mismatches per category Maximum mismatches per cat egory allows you to abort the compare process if the number of mismatches exceeds the number entered in the Maximum mismatches per category selection box 4 Select the check boxes that correspond to the items you want to compare For each of the V or K memory address you can also choose the range for the comparison 5 If you are comparing ladder logic select the method The Comprehensive compare provides a better more detailed comparison The Basic compare is mu
272. e controller secondary address Path Description A Path Description is a 32 character alphanumeric description for the controller secondary address 4 Click OK or press ENTER to accept the settings Click Cancel to disregard changes and return to the TIWAY Setup dialog box TCP IP Connect Your PC to Ethernet Your system administrator must determine what type of cable is best suited for your in stallation because it affects your choice of Ethernet card for your PC The PPX 505 CP2572 module directly supports 10BaseT UTP cabling If your existing network does not use UTP but the cabling medium is IEEE 802 3 compliant you can pur chase a transceiver that connects that media to the AUI port on the module If you are installing a new network discuss your cabling requirements with your network ad ministrator or your local Siemens distributor Your Ethernet card purchase should be guided by the type of cabling medium that is best suited for your network There are really only three PC card options 10BaseT UTP 10Base2 Thin Ethernet and AUI Some catds ate combinations The most commonly used are either 10bT or AUI with Fiber Op tics cable 10Base2 is not as widely used and is not recommended as highly because of the potential network problems 10Base5 Thick Ethernet cable which also requires the use of transceivers is sometimes used and can be obtained through your Siemens distributor In order to communicate to a 505 PLC which is c
273. e drum re turns to the step specified in the DSP e Ifthe Start input is turned off but the Enable Reset remains on the drum remains at the current step and DCC holds its current count All coils maintain the con dition specified by the drum mask for this step e When the drum is at the Preset step the output coils follow the states specified by the drum mask for that step even if the Enable Reset input is off Take care to program the mask with a bit pattern that is a safe state for the Preset step Do not use the same reference number more than once for any of the drum types It can cause un predictable machine operation 439 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums Time Event Driven Drum EDRM The Time Event Driven Drum EDRUM instruction simulates an electromechanical stepper switch or drum The EDRUM can be indexed by a timer only an event contact only or a time and event A job input enables you to allow either timer or an event to ad vance the drum a step The EDRUM provides 15 coils and 16 steps which are operated on multiples of the drum time base Each step controls all 15 output coils When the drum begins to run it starts at the step specified by the Drum Step Preset which is stored in DSP memory The drum current step is stored in DSC memory The counts pet step set in the Count Step field is stored in DCP memory The drum current count is stored in DCC m
274. e if the cursor is positioned at an instruction When cleared the instruction is removed however attached branches ate not af fected This option is available if there is a branch to the right of the instruction with the cursor Clearing removes the branch to the right of the cursor This option is available when an in struction is selected Clearing removes instructions from the tow where the cursor is positioned Branches in this row are cleared only if the resulting logic contains branches unconnected to logic at one or both ends This option is available when an in struction is selected Clearing removes instructions and branches from the cut rent column Using Clear in the Logic Editor while online works the same as in offline mode However row and column cannot be cleared while online Delete Delete Use Delete to delete an item and remove the space it occupies Access Delete using the Logic Editor in either offline or online mode Delete can also be accessed from the Data Window To delete 109 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Editing 1 Select the item or items you wish to delete 2 Select Delete from the Edit menu Result The Delete box appears 3 Click the items you want to delete 4 Click OK or press ENTER Delete Range Network C Address from 2 to 2 C C Cancel The following table describes the deletion items De
275. e input for the process variable is from a device such as an orifice meter that requires a square root calculation to determine the correct value to use Monitor Low Low High High Click Yes in the Monitor Lo Lo Hi Hi box to have the controller monitor the Low Low High High Alarm Click Noif the Low Low High High can be entered as values requiring critical action Monitor Low High Click Yes in the Monitor Lo Hi box to have the controller monitor the Low High Alarm Click No if the Low High Alarm can be entered as values requiring remedial action Process Variable Alarm Low Low Enter a real number in engineering units in the PV Alarm Lo Lo box This value must be less than or equal to low alarm value and greater than or equal to low range of the process variable 373 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 8 Analog Alarms Analog Parameters Process Variable Alarm Low Enter a real number in engineering units in the PV Alarm Low box This value must be less than or equal to high alarm value of process vatiable Process Variable Alarm High Enter a real number in engineeting units in the PV Alarm High box This value must be less than or equal to the high high alarm value of the process variable Process Variable Alarm High High Enter real number in engineering units in the PV Alarm Hi Hi box This value must be greater than or equal to the high alarm value and less than or equal to the high range of the
276. e name Include Browse n Delimiter C v 7 LOI 7 7 2 Select the type of export from the Selection list The options are e TISOFT NetworkHeader Description files Export toa file forimport to TI SOFT e Address Documentationto delimited text file txt csv Export address doc umentationto atext file See Address Documentation Text File Format for details e Header Documentation to delimited text file txt csv Export header doc umentation to a text file See Header Documentation Text File Format for details e RAMP SOAK Steps to delimited text file txt csv Export RAMP SOAK information to a text file See Ramp Soak Text File Format for details In formation can only be exported for one loop at a time but information for many loops can be imported in one step e V amp K Register values to delimited text file txt csv Export V and K reg ister values to a text file See Register Value Text File Format for details 3 Type the name of the file to export to in the To File name box or click Browse to browse for the file 4 Under Include select the components to export 5 Under Delimiter select the delimiter tab or comma to use Excel and most other software can import files delimited with either 76 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Fields that can be exported Tags Display only when exporting documentation to TISOF
277. e over write mode is active Characters typed in text fields will overwrite any existing text rather NUM When the indicator NUM is shown the num lock mode is active The keypad will be in terpreted as numbers instead of cursor motion than being inserted EP WII security Disabled Path 505 Simulator Mode Online Program NUM OVR Title Bar The Title Bar spans the top of the 505 WorkShop window Use the Title Bar to 60 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Main Window e Identify the application you are using In this example the application is 505 WorkShop e Move the window Click the title bar with the pointer and drag to the desired lo cation to move the window e Change the size or position of the window The following buttons appear in the corner of the title bar 505 WorkShop EXAMPLE Minimize Left box Click the dash button to reduce win dow to an icon Maximize Middle box Click the window button to enlarge the entire screen Close Right box Click the X button to exit Work Shop Main Toolbar The main toolbar displays a row of icons that represent frequently used options Select the option by clicking on its button saving you the steps of selecting several options from a se ries of menus Notice that when you click on the button its purpose appears on the Status Line at the bottom of the window ns u a w ajo BF sr fo 6B A lies
278. e the operations mode from Operate to Stop or Stop to Operate You can also select from Synchronous to Asynchronous or Asyn chronous to Synchronous To open the Profibus Operations dialog box while online with the controller 1 Click Profibus Ops on the Profibus I O dialog box or click Profibus Operations from the PLC Utilities menu The Profibus Operations dialog box appears 224 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Profibus Operations Operational Mode Status Stop Operate Stop Synchronization Mode Status Unknown Synchronous Asynchronous OPERATIONAL MODE e Operate Places Profibus I O communications in operate mode meaning active communication is being made between the master and slave modules unless master is in a fault state e Stop Places Profibus I O communications in stop mode meaning active com munication is not being made between the master and slaves unless the master is in a fault state SYNCHRONIZATION MODE e Synchronous Synchronizes Profibus communications to the RLL scan e Asynchronous Profibus communications is independent to the RLL scan NOTE If your Profibus communications are in Operate mode mod ifying your existing configuration can affect your ongoing process Unexpected process operation could cause serious injury or death to personnel and or damage to equipment Be prepared for the effect o
279. e to equip ment Do not assign the same reference number to more than one drum type instruction Drum memory is divided into areas for storing the following types of information e Drum Step Preset DSP e Drum Count Preset DCP e Drum Step Current DSC e Drum Count Current DCC When you specify step and counts per step count preset values for a drum type the step preset is stored as a 16 bit word in DSP Memory and the counts per step values are stored as 16 consecutive 16 bit words in DCP Memory except for the DRUM For the DRUM instruction counts per step values are stored in L Memory DCP is not used NOTE If you use an operator interface to change the drum preset values DSP or DCP the new values are not changed in the original RLL program If the RLL presets are ever down loaded e g as the result of a complete restart or an edit of the network containing the drum instruction the changes made with the operator interface are replaced by the values in the RLL program When the instruction is actually operating the current step is stored as a 16 bit word in DSC Memory The current count for this step is stored as a 16 bit word in DCC Memory 183 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Controller Memory Types PGTS Discrete Parameter Area The Parameter Go To Subroutine PGTS discrete parameter area is an area of memory within the controller that is reserved for ho
280. eable integer addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 NOTE Do not write data to the header fields The shift register does not operate correctly if any of these fields is modified by an external action These fields may be redefined in fu ture softwate releases e Output the output address to which the words are moved Valid descriptors are writeable integer addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 e Register Length the length of the table If a constant is used it must be greater than 0 Valid descriptors are integer addresses or values any integer value or ad dress containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 e Status Bit the status bit This can be either a C or Y The bit specified by Status Bit is turned on when the register is full The bit Status Bit 1 is automatically re served as a second status bit The bit specified by Status Bit 1 is automatically reserved as a second status bit The bit specified by Status Bit 1 is turned on when the register is empty Valid descriptors are writeable bit elements writeable 552 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Fall Through Shift Register Output FTSR OUT bit addresses or temporary bit of word addresses that are not part of expressions such as C200 or T15 1 Operation of the FTSR OUT FTSR OUT is used in conjunction with an FTSR IN you
281. eader Display Used S Memory Available 4054 Copy Paste Delete Password Export 260 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming SF Program and Subroutine Editor e Programs The preceding figure shows the Special Function Programs Click Dis play Used to list only the SFs which have been defined Click Display All to show both used and unused SFs e Subroutines This list shows the Special Function Subroutines e Header Click Header to access the Special Function Program dialog box to view and edit the header information for the selected special function program or subroutine Special Function Program Header Program Title Continue on Error C Yes No Error Status Address None Program Type Normal X v Enable Program Cancel Special Function Subroutine Header Subroutine Title V Enable Subroutine DK Cancel EL e Display Used Display All Click this button to toggle between showing a the SFP and SES slots used or not and displaying oz y the slots that are in use e Goto SF Open the Special Function editor for the selected special function pro gram or subroutine e Copy Copy the highlighted special function programs or subroutines so that they can be pasted When you click Copy a dialog box appears listing the special 261 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming SF Program and Subroutine Editor
282. ed as a second status bit and turns on whenever the shift register is empty Use the same status bits for the FTSR OUT that you use for the FTSR IN FTSR IN sets Status Bit when the register is full FTSR OUT clears this bit as the function executes FTSR OUT sets Status Bit 1 when the register is empty FTSR IN clears this bit If the shift register contains one or more words the Count equals the number of current entries The Index points to the next available location of the shift register into which a word can be moved Status Bit 1 is off Status Bit is on if the shift register is full When the FTSR OUT executes the following actions occur e The oldest word in the shift register shifts into memory location Output e The Count decrements by one e The Index is unchanged and continues to point to the next available location into which a word can be moved 553 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Fall Through Shift Register Output FTSR OUT Each time the FTSR OUT executes another word moves out of the shift register and the Count is decremented by one The Index remains unchanged After the shift register is empty the Index and Count contain zero Status Bit turns off and Status Bit 1 turns on If you attempt to shift a word out of an empty shift register an error is generated error 86 Use FTSR OUT to remove words from the shift register before all locations are full Use FTSR IN to shift
283. ed before a corresponding FOR instruction Each FOR NEXT block has a counter that is initialized on entry an incremental value that is applied at each iteration and a terminating conditional statement Counter Address Initial Value Condition Increment Cancel Counter Address the address in which the Initial Value and incremental values upon each iteration are stored Valid descriptors are writeable integer addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 Initial Value the value used to initialize the Counter Address Valid descriptors are integer addresses values any integer value or address containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 or IMATH expressions a Increment this value is added to the value stored in the Counter Address upon each NEXT operation Valid descriptors are integer addresses values any integer value or address containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 or IMATH expressions Condition this statement determines whether or not the FOR loop continues to iterate or terminates to the next statement Valid descriptors for this field are bool ean IMATH expressions 555 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions For Next FOR NEXT FOR NEXT Operation Upon first pass of the execution loop the FOR statement initializes the value within the Counter Address to the Initial Value If this value is tr
284. ed even if a connection to the repository cannot be made As long as the file was checked out by the user at a time when the user could connect to the repository the file remains checked out to the user in disconnected mode The file can be edited as if it were checked out and can be checked in once a connection to the repository can be established iil FAQs about FTVersionTrak What do I need to do to get started 137 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak See Getting Started with FTVersionTrak for more information How does FTVersionTrak s version control work FTVersionTrak integrates seamlessly with WorkShop to track who is editing program files When you want to work on a program and another user isn t working on it the program file is checked out from FTVersionTrak You can also simply view programs in WorkShop without checking them out and get the latest changes from other users When you ate done working on a program you can check the file into FT VersionTrak man ually or allow WorkShop to check in the program file when you close the program Once your changes are checked in to FTVersionTrak other users can get or check out the file and access your changes What can you do with programs under version control Check out and edit program files without worrying about concurrent or over written changes View the latest version of a progr
285. ed in this Agreement This Agreement may only be modified by a writing signed by the party to be charged 12 BINDING EFFECT This Agreement shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of the parties hereto and their respective successors and assigns subject to the limitations on the transfer of Licensee s rights to the Software provided in paragraph 5 above 13 NOTICES All notices shall be in writing and shall be hand delivered or sent by U S mail first class postage prepaid if to Licensor at its address first above written and to Licensee at the address indicated in the Registration Form A party may change its address for notices at any time by notice to the other party in the manner provided herein but each party may have only one address for notices at a time 14 REGISTRATION FORM The Registration Form isa part of this Agreement and is incorporated herein by reference This Agreement will not take effect and Licensee will have no rights whatsoever with respect of the Software unless and until the Registration Form is duly executed and returned to the Licensor and is accepted by Licensor Table of Contents Chapter I Welcome ocn altel eh A AE 27 Introd cense srana iei 29 Using This Mana o ER ae A 29 What is PLEG WorkShop erae ecc Sr cote cette russo Sere 31 Features and BeHelbs ec o uL Lu D AE 31 Techical Specrticationgousc le e ae 32 Customer SUDDORE is a oe eod ec E ea ee aoe S 34 Updating Sottyate License Ke
286. ed the same as the program file appended with _BAKxxx fss where xxx is a sequential number the largest being the most recently saved backup Always Show Logic Toolbars Displays the main Ladder and Special Function toolbars and any other floated or docked Ladder toolbars when selected These toolbars remain visible even when no program is open Automatically insert empty rung after validate Select this option to au tomatically insert an empty rung after validating and entering logic 148 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Application Setup Force File Associated Communications Settings This setting forces the user to connect to the PLC using the communication settings associated with the file See File Associated Communications for more information FTVersionTrakOptions These options only apply when using FT VersionTrak in conjunctionwith WorkShop See Using FTV ersionTrakin WorkShop for more informa tion 149 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Communication Communication Setting Up Communications The Communications Setup allows pre configure of serial ports a modem boatd or net wotk interface boards in your computer that are used for communications with PLCs To access the Communications Setup 1 Click Communications Setup from the File menu Result The Communications Setup dialog box appears Communications Setup x Online Selectio
287. een Nodes in meters The value entered in Line Length CU represents the entire bus segment and affects the Data Cycle Times discussed elsewhere in this section Line Length FO km This value represents the actual length of the fiber optic cable in kilometers Input Parameters T_qui t_bit Quiet time for modulator Represents the time allowed for modulators and repeaters to switch from send to receive T qui must be less than Tsdr_min and T_rdy T_qui is a function of the selected baud rate 196 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration T_set Setup time The time that may elapse between an event and the reaction to this event T_slot_init Preset slot time wait to receive time This is the maximum time the sender of a frame must wait until the station addressed responds regardless of whether it is a mes sage frame or a token frame Retry Limit The maximum number of call retries addressing a slave that does not answer or fails to return correct acknowledgment Slaves which do not respond after this number of retries and flagged as out of order Delta Ttr Delta target rotation time The additional time allowance for other masters on the bus but not part of the Profibus configuration See Accommodating Additional Pro fibus Masters Tsdr_min Minimum station delay time shortest protocol processing time The shortest time that may e
288. een added to the Profibus configuration In formation is shown in the following columns 193 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Slave The slave number which will appear as the Pro fibus Address in the Slave tab This number can be any integer in the range of 2 112 Name The station name of the slave device This name is inherited from the GSD file and can be changed in the Station Name box in the Slave Tab The enable status of the slave device This can be Enabled either Enabled or Disabled This status can be changed in the Slave tab Assigned Refers to assignment of I O addresses within the slave If a starting I O address has not been as signed for one or more modules then No will appear under this column Online Online if the slave is online and communicating Offline otherwise Add Slave Launches the Hardware Directory allowing you to add a slave device to the configuration Delete Slave Deletes the selected slave device from the configuration Go to Slave Displays the configuration options for the selected slave device in the Slave Tab Merge Allows you to merge legacy COM Profibus configuration files into the Profibus Configurator Delete All Completely clears the Profibus configuration Bus Parameters Tab Displays and allows edits for bus parameters such as number of repeaters and OLMs as well as cable length and
289. elect Force OnorForce Off from the context menu to force onoroffdiscrete addresses 7 Click Force Memory from the Diagnostics menu or right click and select Force Memory from the context menu to force word addresses to a specific value and for mat See Forcing an Element for more information 8 Click Clear Force from the Diagnostics menu to clear the force of a selected ad dress or click Clear All Forces to clear all currently forced addresses See Clear a Forced Element for mote information 286 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Data Window 9 Click Show Forces from the Diagnostics menu to display all forced addresses See Show Forces for more information 10 Click Status On or Status Off from the Data menu to toggle data window status updates For more on WorkShop s diagnostics capabilities see Auxiliary PLC Functions and Dis plays Data Fill Use the Fill feature within the Data Window to quickly monitor and evaluate a range of I O values To fill the Data Window 1 Access the Data Window by clicking Data Window from the View menu 2 Select the first row in which data is to be filled 3 Click Fill from the Data menu The Fill dialog box appears Source Start Address Cancel Start Row 2 Apply Destination Help C End Address Count 1 Attributes Increment Format Start Address Enter the first address in the series Start Row Enter the row numbe
290. emory e The drum is enabled when the Enable Reset input is on e When the Enable Reset is on and the Start input turns on the drum begins to run The drum begins at the step specified by DSP and advances to the next step de pending upon operation of the timer and or event e When the drum advances a step coils are turned on or off according to the mask for the new step Each 1 in the mask designates that a coil is to be turned on while each 0 designates that a coil is to be turned off e The drum output turns on and remains on after the last programmed step has been executed The last programmed step is the last step having an event pro grammed or having a non zero Count Step preset value The event must be on and the DCC must be zero If the event turns off after DCC reaches zero the drum output remains on and the EDRUM remains at the last programmed step until the drum is reset e When the Enable Reset turns off the drum output is turned off and the drum re turns to the step specified in DSP e Ifthe Start input turns off and Enable Reset remains on the drum remains at the current step DSC and DCC holds its current count All coils maintain the con dition specified by the drum mask e When the drum is at the preset step the output coils follow the states specified by the drum mask for that step even if the Enable Reset input is off Take care to program the mask with a bit pattern that is a safe step for the Preset step
291. en turns off the CA comes on immediately the next timer the box is executed e The Stop input turns on The OO CO OA and CA are turned off e The Open input turns on after the Close input turns off The OO is turned on The CO is turned off The condition in which both the Close and Open inputs are on simultaneously is treated as a Stop The input remaining on when the other turns off is seen as a transition from off to on and the MCAT enters the appropriate state When the Stop input overlaps an Open or Close input the Stop overrides as long as it is on When the Stop turns off the remaining input is seen as a transition from off to on and drives the MCAT to the corresponding state The condition in which both Feedback signals are on simultaneously is an error condition Both open and Close are turned on and both Open and Closed Outputs are turned off Re 437 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums moving the conflicting feedback signals does not clear the Open and Close Alarms One of the MCAT inputs Open Close or Step must change state in order to clear the error state OUTPUT STOP Alarm Number Constant Only Varies with T C configured ranges time 0000 1 3276 7 CA een petes Bit Address close output Y C B Bit Addtess close output Y C B Warning Do not use the same reference number more than once for timer counter up down counter
292. enter the value for the tuning constant Reset Time integral time Rate Derivative Time In the Rate Deriv Time box enter the value for the tuning constant NOTE It is not always necessary to have full three mode PID con trol of a loop Parts of the PID equation can be eliminated by choosing appropriate values for the gain Kc reset T1 and rate Td thus yielding a P PI PD I and even an ID or a D loop To eliminate integral action set T1 to infinity To eliminate derivative action set Td to zero To elim inate proportional action set Kc to zero Freeze Bias In the Freeze Bias box click YES to have the bias frozen when the output goes out or range Click No to have the bias adjusted when the output goes out of range Derivative Gain Limiting In the Deriv Gain Limiting box click Yes to perform derivative gain limiting Click Noif derivative gain limiting is not to be performed even if a limiting coefficient value is entered in the Limiting Coeff box 390 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Programming PID Loops Limiting Coefficient In the Limiting Coeff box enter a value for the derivative gain limiting coefficient Typ ically the derivative gain limiting coefficient should be in the range of 10 20 In the standard PID algorithm the algorithm responds excessively to process noise if the coefficient of the derivative term rate time sample time is significantly above
293. er 1 64 Loop Title and Enable Disable state 2 Select the PID Loop you want to document 3 Click Documentation The following dialog box appears PID Loop Documentation Entry Header Cancel 4 In the Header box type the documentation you want associated with the PID loop 5 Click OK 382 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Programming PID Loops Programming PID Loops PID Loop Editor The PID Loop Editor gives you the ability to display access and or modify PID Loops To access the PID Loop Editor 1 Click PID Loop from the View menu or press ALT V P The PID Loop Di rectory dialog box appears 2 The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Loop number 1 512 depending on the processor type Loop Title and Enable Disable state PID Loop Directory Loop Mode Offline PID Loops Loop Title En Disabled Enabled Ramp Soak Documentation murum Ex ETE je ie ome IEEE E S Memory Available 3606 3 Select the PID loop you want to edit and then click Edit You can also double click the PID loop The following dialog box appears 383 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Programming PID Loops PID Loop Edit PID Loop Alarm DB Limiting Coeff Loop Title PID Monitor Lo Lo Hi Hi Spec Calc On PID Algorithm Positic Monitor Lo Hi Special Fn VFlag Addr PY Alarm Lo Lo Lock SP Sample Rate PY Alarm Low Lock Auto Ma
294. ere eee ie 513 Return From Subroutine REN asse tia 514 Goto siren te G LS occides dads eh oodd a deos got 514 22 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents Call Sobtomatie SBIR scat cin te octet acest ac e cca see E UM Sit EA 515 Skip SRP E 516 In NE Ho ETT PR 517 Scan Synchronization Inhibit ii 518 Parameterized Go to Subroutine PG TS parodia 518 Parameterized Go to Subroutine 0 PGTSZ 0 0 0 e cece eee eee 520 External Subroutine Call XSUB es Ca 520 PID Coop BID risen A te hatt as 521 Nes Task O E E E A AET 522 Special Inste CH ons A ad a a 524 Immediate I O Read Write TORW 0 0 20 02 00 0c ccc ce cece cece ec ee eee 524 A A kee Melee et LLL d 525 Date Compare Es Ram eR NE RRR Ye Ay TA AA NON un 525 Date ser IDS ED iio etorscis tata A Loot tReet 525 Tine Se LSELDI bm ome Rs A A AA 526 Time Compare EC ME a 27er O or CNS ISAS ORO EEN 527 Text Box Desctiption TEXT 2 ccvocs acsicdcacecsticeneusgeinbeaccigueeeantxeegt 527 Load Address CDA S id uo edu e a a arn al aac tae mors 528 AAA A A RCN RO a 530 Lock Memory LOC ie 530 Unlock Memory ING snes oa 5241 Read Slave DIOSES acts cesses eee shite ot Sth eee Mare 532 Force Role Swap PRS 1 is ts 534 CTI 2500 Custom Function OBUING Locos ese decree is 535 22032 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents Address Constant Forms Table 2 00 00 00 0 c occ cece ccc ccccccccceecceecceeceeecees 537 Chapter 11 Special Functions
295. es 485 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Math and Logic Instructions e The result is stored in the memory location C e If C is not zero the output is turned on when the instruction is executed If C is zero the output is turned off Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Constant 0 32767 Number A Wotd Address FomA 00 A NE UNN Word Constant Form AI Constant 32767 32767 Word Or WOR The Word OR WOR instruction logically ORs a word in memory location A with a word in memory location B bit for bit The result is stored in memory location C When the input is on the instruction is executed If the input remains on the instruction is executed on every scan The WOR has the following properties e The word stored in the memory location specified by A is OR with the word stored in the memory location B The operation is done bit by bit The words in A and B are not affected by the WOR instruction and will retains their original values 486 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Math and Logic Instructions e The result is stored in the memory location C e If C is not zero the output is turned on when the instruction is executed If C is zero the output is turned off Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types pM 032767 Word Address Address FomA A A S Const EI Constant 32767 32767 Wod FomB B Word Excl
296. es Noise Band 0 5 Engineering Units Step Change 7 0 Engineering Units utput Step Multiplier 1 0 r Safe Output Use Prev Output ix r Calculated Value Limits Session Logging Variables Largest Gain 8000000 0 z z Previous Mode M Not Used Smallest Gain 0 0000008 Zi Previous SP Mi Not Used Largest Reset 8000000 0 minutes Previous Output Mi Not Used Smallest Reset 0 0000008 minutes Previous Gain Mi Not Used Largest Rate 8000000 0 minutes Previous Reset M Not Used Smallest Rate Jo 0000008 minutes Previous Rate Mi Not Used r Session Results Variables SmarTune Performance Calculated Gain V Not Used Activation Time Slice ms V Not Used Calculated Reset M Not Used Calculated Time Slice ms V Not Used Calculated Rate IV Not Used SmarT une Restart M Not Used Now enter each appropriate variable for the autotune process The following section de sctibes in general terms each variable and the PID autotune process for a temperature control loop SmarTune should not be used if a process might experience harmful effects as a re sult of arbitrary Mn assignment During a tuning session Mn values ate assigned in such a way as to determine the frequency response of a process The tuning process A Warning may result in process product that does not meet required standards This product may need to be purged be
297. es ee Parameter A Parameter A A Word Address Addte Word Address S FomB B Parameter N Constant Bit EUM 1 16 most significant bit is 1 least significant bit 1s 16 Bit Pick BITP The Bit Pick Instruction BITP examines the status of a specified bit When the input is turned on the BITP instruction is executed The status of bit N of input element A is checked as follows e The output is turned on if the selected bit is 1 e The output is turned off if the selected bit is 0 Parameter Valid Parameter Types Type Reference Constant 0 327767 Number Parameter A Word Ad Form B dress Parameter N Constant Bit Number 1 16 most significant bit is 1 least sig nificant bit is 16 477 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Bit Operations Bit Set BITS The Bit Set Instruction BITS sets a specified bit to one When the input is on the BITS instruction is executed The operations executed is as follows Bit N of word A is set to 1 if power is passed BITS Parameter Valid Parameter Types Type Reference Constant 0 32767 Number Word Ad Form B Parameter A dress Bit Number 1 16 Parameter N Constant most significant bit is 1 least sig nificant bit is 16 Bit Shift Register SHRB The Bit Shift Register SHRB instruction creates a bit shift register using a specified number of control relays or points in the dis
298. es that are not part of expressions such as C200 or T15 1 e Register Length the length of the shift register and the maximum number of elements stored in the register If a constant value is entered it must be greater than zero Valid descriptors are integer addresses or values any integer value or ad dress containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 SSR Operation The Register Start address is empty until an element moves into the address from another source Each time the SSR executes the element currently stored in the Register Start ad dress shifts to Register Start 1 The element in Register Start 1 shifts to Register Start 2 Elements move down the shift register until they reach the Register Length and the Reg ister Start address resets to zero After the register is full shifting in a new word causes the loss of the last word in the register Register Start Register Length 1 The register is considered empty when it contains all zeros The status bit turns on when the register is empty 602 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Synchronous Shift Register SSR NOTE If the register contains the value 0 0 the register is not rec ognized as empty and the status bit does not turn off SSR Statement Example In the example below the Register Start address is V100 and the Register Length is 5 des ignating the register in this operation to be V100 V104
299. es to work with 505 WorkShop Programming Gives a you solid understanding of the 505 WorkShop easy to use programming features 29 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 1 Welcome Introduction Documentation Shows you how to add description to your logic programs Analog Alarms Details the 505 WorkShop easy to use programming of analog alarms PID Loops Details the 505 WorkShop easy to use programming of PID Loops RLL Gives detailed information about the various Instructions RLL PLC instructions Special Gives detailed information about the vatious Function Special Function PLC instructions Instructions Auditing Outlines options for tracking program and setting changes FasTrak Provides instructions for establishing and using a Authentication Password Security Mode and NT Security 30 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 1 Welcome What is PLC WorkShop What is PLC WorkShop PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 is one of the most powerful and exciting pro grammable logic controller PLC programming software packages in the world and is quickly becoming he universal PLC programming solution with its time and money saving features PLC WorkShop is the software of choice for Simatic 505 and CTI 2500 Series processors and the only software on the market to support the full functionality of the CTI 2500 Series PLC System PLC WorkShop is easy to use has built in data acquisition and m
300. esign a program to switch the ac tive controller with the standby controller in hot backup configurations The role swap may be the result of programmed diagnostic processors that detect a switch over convert You can also use the instruction to allow routine maintenance processors The role swap may be initiated by having a switch close in the I O or by using a timer to trigger the swap The FRS instruction depends upon the current power flow the power flow on the pre vious scan and the current state of the controller This instruction will only work in online only If no standby controller is preset the active controller interprets this instruction as a NOP If the active controller with a standby detects an off to on transition on the input it queues a role swap to occur at the beginning of the next scan Upon completing the swap both controllers write the instruction reference number in the assigned memory address This value can be used to indicate why the role swap occurred On each scan the FRS address is compared to the specified memory location The output turns on independent of its input whenever the memory location contents match the in struction reference number Instruction Constant Depends on configured One shot mem Reference ory configuration ST Word V Address 534 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Special Instructions CTI 2500 Custom Function CFUNC The CFUNC Custom FUNC
301. ess into the destination The address that is copied to the des tination is the logical address and NOT the physical address To avoid unpredictable ma chine operation do not use this address as a pointer within an external subroutine 528 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Special Instructions Reference Constant 0 32767 Number only A Word Source address Form A Address Al Blank Word Source Index Form A Blank 32768 32767 BB Word Destination address Form B direct addr Form Addtess A indirect addr Blank Word Destination Index Form A Blank 32768 32767 You can specify the field AI as an index into the source address when you want to copy an address that is in a table AI should designate the relative word in the table referenced by A The element A 0 is the first element in the table The following is a list of valid types for AI e Enter a constant 0 65535 If you leave the field blank or enter a 0 then no in dexing will be done e Enter any readable word see table above The contents of this word should be an unsigned integer 0 65535 that gives the value of the index If an indirect source address is indexed the controller first resolves the address then it in dexes it You can specify the field B1 as an index into the destination address when you want to copy an address into a word in a table BI should designate the relative work in a table ref
302. et does turn off the index resets to 1 e After the entire table has been searched the STFN must be reset in order to ex ecuted again Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant WS Word Address TS Word Address IN Word Address Word Address Constant Table to Table And TAND The Table to Table AND TAND instruction ANDs the corresponding bits in two tables and places the results in a specified third table If both bits are 1 then the resultant bit is set to 1 otherwise the result bit is 0 The TAND has the following properties e When the input turns on a comparison is made between each bit of each word in the first T1 and second T2 tables e Each pair of bits is ANDed and the resultant bit is placed in the third table TD If both bits are 1 then the resultant bit is set to 1 Otherwise the resultant bit is set to 0 499 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant TI Word Address T2 Word Address Word Address Constant Only Table to Table Or TOR The Table to Table OR TOR instruction ORs the corresponding bits in two tables and places the results in a specified third table If either bit is 1 then the resultant bit is set to 1 Otherwise the resultant bit is set to 0 The TOR operation is described as follows e When the input is on a comparison is
303. etic The expression X mod Y returns the remainder of X after division by Y 561 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Integer Math IMATH Subtraction unary minus negation Equal The expression X Y returns 1 if X equals Y and zeto if not Not equal The expression X lt gt Y returns 1 if X is not equal to Y and zero if so Less than The expression X lt Y returns 1 if X is less than Y and zero othetwise lt Less Than or Equal The expression X lt Y returns 1 if X is less than or equal to Y and zero otherwise gt Greater Than The expression X gt Y returns 1 if X is greater than Y and zero otherwise gt Greater Than or Equal The expression X gt Y returns 1 if X is greater than or equal to Y and zero otherwise AND Logical AND The expression X AND Y returns 1 if both X and Y ate non zero and zero otherwise OR Logical OR The expression X OR Y returns 1 if either X ot Y is non zero and zero otherwise Bit by bit AND of two words BE Bit by bit OR of two wotds Bit by bit exclusive OR of two wotds BERE C ON RN Math intrinsic function Absolute Value Supported by PowerMath CPUs only NOTE Non PowerMath CPUs do not support the following op erators lt gt lt lt gt gt AND OR and the ABS intrinsic function Each time the IMATH statement executes the calculations within the statement ate made The IMATH computations are execute
304. for NT Authentication Security The machine that the user wishes to run FTSecSvr FasTrak Security Server on must be configured for proper server client communication Below ate the needed steps for con figuring the server Configuring DCOM on Windows 9x 2000 and NT DCOM enables FasTrak clients such as PLC WorkShop to communicate with remote se curity servers The dialog window shown below is launched by running dcomcnfg exe from a DOS prompt or by clicking on the Windows Start button clicking Run and then typing dcomcnfg exe in the text box Changes made in DCOM ate applied immediately and there is no need to reboot the PC Distributed COM Configuration Properties 2 xJ Applications Default Properties Default Security Default Protocols Applications Defrag NTFS engine DemoServer DrvKit 1 0 Object DriverServer DrvKit 1 0 Object DriverServer 1 DrvKit 1 0 Object DriverServer 2 Event Object Change FL32Mod FTDataw in HTML Application Image Document Internet Explorer Ver 1 0 logagent Logical Disk Manager Administrative Service Logical Disk Manager Remote Client Media Player Microsoft Agent Server 2 0 Microsoft WBEM Active Scripting Event Consumer Provider Microsoft WBEM Server x Properties Cancel Apply 644 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server Instructions for Configuration 1
305. for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security Choosing a Security Type Security Type Selection Enable Password Security o Browse Corte Help Cancel Clicking on Enable Password Security activates security and the user is free to choose from either FasTrak Authentication or NT Authentication e FasTrak Authentication When you select this option the WorkShop ap plication itself regulates user access to password protected areas Management takes place on the local computer only For more on this area of Security click here e NT Authentication When enabled PLC WorkShop requests permission to ac cess password protected areas from the FasTrak Security Server This server is a separate application which can be installed on the local computer or on any other computer running under Windows NT 2000 XP or Vista This server is capable of managing multiple computers from a single central location Click here to go to the chapter on this feature 625 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security FasTrak Authentication Security FasTrak Authentication Security Introduction to FasTrak Authentication Security Access FasTrak Authentication Security by selecting FasTrak Authentication from the Security Type Selection dialog and clicking the Configure button The FasTrak Soft Works Inc Authentication Security Configuration dialog appears FasTra
306. for the selected module beyond the starting ad dress to prevent addressing conflicts Smart Connect allows you to perform actions on SmartConnect modules for the se lected slave device Slave Module Parameters Tab Displays the slave or I O module parameters currently set for the selected slave device or module Station Type Slave DP 1 0 State Stop SLANE Device File SIEMBOOF GSE Status Disabled Slave Comm Fail 0 Lost Tokens 0 Slave Parameters Diagnostics Offset Parameter Name Value 9 2 Enable Wire Break Alarm CH4 5 disable 9 3 Enable Wire Break Alarm CH6 7 disable 15 6 Enable Diagnostics Alarm disable 157 Enable Limit Value Alarm disable 15 0 Integration Time CHO 1 Integration Time 25ms 162 lntegration Time CH2 3 Integration Time 2 5 ms 164 Integration Time CH4 5 Integration Time 2 5 ms 16 6 Integration Time CH5 7 Integration Time 2 5 ms 17 Meas Type Meas Range CH0 1 Channel Not Activated 18 Meas Type Meas Range CH2 3 Channel Not Activated 19 Meas Type Meas Range CH4 5 Channel Not Activated 20 Meas Type Meas Range CH6 Channel Not Activated 21 Upper Limit Value CHO 0 23 Lower Limit Value CHO 0 25 Upper Limit Value CH2 0 27 Lower Limit Value CH2 0 24 Diada hd rdi Ru CIMATIC CR m 201 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration The availability of parameters for any slave device or I O module is determined by t
307. from the Options menu Toggling the Display of Documentation Components Network headers and the tag and description components of address documentation can be displayed in the ladder logic program window You are able to specify which doc umentation components are displayed using either of the following methods Toggling display through Program Setup To specify which documentation components appear in the ladder logic program window click Program Setup from the Options menu 505 WorkShop EXAMPLE File Edit View Program Diagnostics PLC Utilities Mess Window Help jus nal s T o c g amp a ea a M MEA u a BCBI BIBC CALL CDT ELSE ENIF E war LBL LLAG MATH Activity Audit Setup Security gt 1 When the Program Setup dialog box appears click the Logic Windows tab 2 Inthe Options for box click General 360 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documenting in Ladder Program Setup Documentation Window Update Times Colors Logic Windows Data and 1 0 Simulator window Options for EEE Individual Program Settings M Show Grid M Show All Headers Sticky Cursor Update Cross Ref Table Logic Font Application Wide Settings Number of Backup Files Saved 5 Cancel Save as Def Restore Defs 3 Select the Show All Headers check box to display network headers in the ladder logic program window 4 In the Opt
308. g Ramp Soak information the software expects the same format Fields may separated by either tab characters or commas e The first line contains the loop number and flag address Both are labeled For ex ample Loop 11 Flag Address None e The second line contains headers Step Ramp Soak End Status Bit Set Point Ramp Rate Soak Time Dead Band e The lines starting with the third contain information for each step in the format in dicated by the second line For example the text file Loop 11 Flag Address None Step Ramp Soak End Status Bit Set Point Ramp Rate Soak Time Dead Band 1 Soak C501 12 4 2 Ramp C500 100 2 SEO 74 77 describes the following Ramp Soak steps 81 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Ramp Soak Steps PID Loop 11 S Memory Available 3672 R S Flag Address NONE Loop Mode Offline Steps Step R S StatBit SetPoint Ramp Rate Soak Time DeadBand Soak C501 12 Ramp C500 100 2 End A Cancel Insert elete Retrieving Version Information WorkShop 505 is able to provide information about the version of previously saved logic programs This is done using the Retrieve File Version command Enter the file name to retrieve version compatibility information Browse C Program Files FasTrak Softworks Inc 505 WorkShop 505Demo fss Lookup File Yersion Information Created by v3 00 v4 20 Help Close To
309. g an in line Special Function program or subroutine from an RLL program When the PETWD instruction executes the scan watchdog timer is reset at that instance of time during the scan therefore extending the scan watchdog limit beyond the configured scan watchdog limit The PETWD statement has no subfields NOTE PETWD is available only for in line compiled Special Func tion programs or subroutines in CPUs that support PowerMath A Warning The PETWD instruction allows you to place the PETWD instruction in an infinite loop therefore preventing the scan watch dog limit from ever being reached If the PETWD instruction is in an infinite loop the PLC would not issue a scan watchdog FATAL ERROR to shut the process down therefore leaving your process un controlled An uncontrolled process could result in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Ensure that the PETWD instruction is not located in an infinite loop To ensure that the PETWD instruction is not located in an in finite loop within an SF program or subroutine place the PETWD instruction without a label at the beginning of the SF program or subroutine 589 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Printing PRINT Printing PRINT The Print statement sends a message to the ASCII communication ports This statement can be used to print both text and the contents of integer and real variables Pott
310. g box all changes made to logic that are validated and entered are automatically updated in the Address Used Listing 298 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Address Trace Address Trace Tracing an Address The Address Trace is an online or off line ladder scan for a specific address The search ad dress is based on the cursor position The Trace scans for address instances based on the type of instruction where the address is found If the cursor is located on an input instruction then the corresponding address for the output instruction is searched for If the cursor is located on an output instruction then the corresponding address for the input instruction is searched for Each time the Trace function is selected a new addresses search is invoked The address supported by trace are X Y C WX WY K V TCP TCC STW DSP DCP DSC DCC all Gs VMM VMS DRUM MOVE OS TIMER and COUNTER Trace does not work on expression parameters in SFSUB however Invoking Address Trace To create an Address Trace both online and offline Click Address Trace from the View menu The Address Trace window appears If you have more than one program loaded the information displayed is for the program in the ac tive window Address Trace C1 000001 000002 The list box has five columns Each column holds one location The location consists of rung number and item found The list box displays
311. g the PACKRS instruction with a FROM Table specified If the ramp soak profile being modified is in progress when the PACKRS instruction executes then your process could react erratically due to the sudden replacement of values in the profile steps You can use one of the following methods to ensure that the profile update is done when the current profile is not in progress In your program check the state of the profile finished bit bit 4 in LRSF for the corresponding loop Do not execute the PACKRS statement unless the finished bit is set In your program place the loop in the manual mode execute the PACKRS to up date the ramp soak profile then return the loop to automatic mode Remember this causes the ramp soak profile to be restarted at the initial step When stored in a memory table ramp soak profile steps ate six words long and have the following format e Word 1 bit 1 Step type 0 ramp step 1 soak step bit e Word 1 bits 2 16 Word 2 Address of status bit special address format e Words 3 4 Setpoint if ramp step or Soak time if soak step REAL number e Words 5 6 Ramp rate if ramp step or Deadband if soak step REAL number The status bit address points to either an output point Y or a control relay C This ad dress takes a short form for point numbers C1 C512 and Y1 Y1024 Higher point numbers use a long form of address If all bits of the status bit address field are 0 then no statu
312. g the space it occupies To clear an item or items 1 Select the item or items you want to clear by clicking then holding and dragging the pointer over the desired logic 2 Click Clear from the Edit menu or press the DELETE key 3 Click the items you want to clear 4 Click OK or press ENTER and the selected items are cleared Warning Editing or modifying a program online may produce unexpected or hazardous results Delete Use Delete to clear an item and remove the space it occupies To delete 1 Select the item or items you wish to delete Click Delete from the Edit menu The Delete dialog box appears Click the items you want to delete e 4p de Click OK or press ENTER 270 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Editing Logic Insert Use Insert to insert a selected object network row or column at the point of the current cursor position To insert an object 1 Click Insert from the Edit menu The Insert dialog box will appear 2 Click on the object you want to insert 3 Click OK or press ENTER Right Mouse Button Shortcut Menus The menu items available with the right mouse button are as follows Copy Ctrl C Modify address doc Ctrl L Write values to addresses gt Clear Del Delete Insert F3 Append F4 Find Ctrl F Network Cross Reference Address Trace Unique Address Sticky Cursor PLC Operations 271 PLC WorkShop for Siemens
313. ge In the Low PV Range box enter the low value of the process variable You must specify the engineering values that correspond to the lower range of the input span High Process Variable Range In the High PV Range box enter the high value of the process variable You must specify the engineering values that correspond to the upper range of the input span 386 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Programming PID Loops Process Variable Bipolar In the PV Bipolar box click YES to specify analog inputs as bipolar Click No if the an alog inputs are not bipolar Bipolar inputs span have spans of 5 5 volts or 10 10 volts 20 Offset of Process Variable In the 20 Offset on PV box click No for no offset Click Yes for 20 offset A span of 0 5 0 volts 0 20 milliamps is referred to as a span of 0 100 A span of 1 5 0 volts 4 20 milliamps is referred to as a span of 20 100 20 offset on the process variable Square Root of Process Variable In the Sq Root of PV box click Yes if the input for the process variable is from a device such as an orifice meter that requires a square root calculation to determine the correct value to use Loop Output Address In the Loop Output Addr box enter a V or WY address This is the address into which the loop writes the value of the output Click NONE when you do not want the loop to write the output to an address such as with
314. gh the Security Server ET Help Cancel 6 Enter the Connection String in the edit box or click the Select button in the Other Databases group box to display the Data Link Properties wizard dialogs below to assemble the SQL file connection string 615 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 12 Auditing Activity Audit Setup Dialog ES Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Provider s Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Internet Publishing Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAP Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SOL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider Microsoft Project 9 0 OLE DB Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services SQL Native Client OK Cancel Help 7 The activity audit can also be written to the Application Log of the computer run ning the FasTrak Security Server Select the Write activity through the Security Server option button 8 Enter the Machine Name or click the Browse button to select the computer on which the FasTrak Security Server is installed 616 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 12 Auditing Activity Audit Setup Dialog Activity Audit Setup Enable Activity Audit 1 C Write to a database f
315. greater than high stop xxxx 0111 0110 xxxx PV lower than low stop xxxx 1000 0110 xxxx PV change too small xxxx 1001 0110 xxxx Operation aborted xxxx 1010 0110 xxxx Sample interval LTS range error xx01 xxxx allowed range 0 1 ms to 2 hours 0110 xxxx PV LPV or output LMN range error xx10 xxxx range lt 0 00001 0110 xxxx Sample size too small probably would never happen size lt 33 xx11 xxxx increase STEP or decrease NOISE 0110 xxx0 PV output inconsistent 1 Noisy PV output signal O1xx xxxx 0110 xxx0 PV output inconsistent 2 Noisy PV output signal 10xx xxxx 0110 xxx0 PV output inconsistent 3 Noisy PV output signal 11xx xxxx 411 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning 0110 xxx1 PV output inconsistent 4 Noisy PV output signal DOxx xxxx 0110 xxx1 PV output inconsistent 5 Noisy PV output signal O1xx xxxx The following information lists the value parameters used by SmarTune with the default values and the ranges possible for each 412 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning VALUE PARAMETERS Max Time 30 0 minutes 0 71582 minutes maximum is about 49 days Noise Band 0 005 of PV PV range engineering units range Step Change 0 07 of PV PV range engineering units range PIN 0 PIN not re 0 to 32767 quired Automatic TRUE TRUE FALSE Download Calculate De FALSE TRUE FALSE ri
316. gth of the table If 0 lt IN lt N the word is copied If N lt IN or N lt 0 the word is not copied e The word is placed in the memory location specified by WD After the word is placed there the value contained by the index is incremented by one e If both Enable and Reset remain on one word is duplicated each scan e Ifthe Enable turns off while the Reset is on the index holds its current value and the word is not moved If the Reset turns off the index resets to 0 e The TTOW output remains on until the last word in the table is copied then turns off e The TTOW must be reset after the output turns off in order to be executed again 502 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions TTOW Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant WD Wotd Address TS Wotd Address Wotd Address Constant only Word to Table WTOT The Word to Table WTOT instruction places a copy of a word at a specified address within a table The operation of the WI OT is described as follows e The Reset must be on for the instruction to be executed e When the Enable turns on a copy of the source word WS is placed in the des tination table TD e The index IN indicates where the word is placed in the table The value con tained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 where N is the length of the table If 0 lt IN lt N the word is moved If N lt IN ot N lt 0
317. hange in input at a steady state as shown in the following equation Gain A output A input The constant must be greater than zero Valid descriptors are real addresses or values any real value or address containing a real value such as 33 642 V100 2 or v120 564 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Lead Lag LEAD LAG e Old Input the memory location of the input value from the previous sample period Valid descriptors are writeable integer addresses writeable addresses con taining an integer value such as V101 or WY11 and writeable real addresses writeable addresses containing a real value such as V120 Lead Lag Operation For sample time LEAD LAG algorithm uses the sample time of the loop analog alarm or cyclic SF program from which it is called The first time it executes LEAD LAG is initialized equals input The LEAD LAG algorithm uses the following equation Ti ad F T Tiag 1 Y T T Y 1 Gain T Lag Lead 1x Gain 22 Xa Gain Esc b OE Lag E Whete e Yn present output e Yn 1 previous output e Xn present input e Xn 1 previous input e Ts sample time in minutes 565 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Real Integer Math MATH Real Integer Math MATH The MATH statement executes arithmetic computations involving both integers and real numbers Equation Cancel Eq
318. hanged in the original RLL pro gram until the entire program is downloaded to the PLC 432 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums COUNTER 12 UP DOWN COUNTER PRESET 597 UP OUTPUT DOWN C3 STATUS UNPROT E R Constant Only Vaties with T C configured range Pest Constant Only Constant Only osx 32767 Do not use the same reference A Warning number more than once for timer counter up down counter and dis crete motor control alarm timer instructions Using the same ref etence numbet can cause unpredictable operations Discrete Control Alarm Timer DCAT The Discrete Control Alarm Timer DCAT instruction is used with a single input double feedback device The input to the DCAT instruction should be derived from the preceding logic that determines the state of the device The output of the instruction should control the device The DCAT timer times down from the preset value Delay which is stored in TCP mem ory The timer s current time is stored in TCC memory 433 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums When the Open OA Close CA input to the DCAT goes from OFF to ON the fol lowing operations occur e The time delay is set to the preset value defined by Delay both outputs OA and CA are turned off and the DCAT output turns on e While the Open Close in
319. hapter 7 Documentation Edit Title Page Print Only Edit Title Page Print Only This option allows you to display descriptive information at the beginning of your printouts To access the Edit Title Page option 1 Click Title Page Print Editor from the View menu The following dialog box is displayed Title Page Print Editor Header This is a 505 Program Cancel 2 In the Header box enter the text you want printed at the beginning of every pro gram print out and click OK 364 Chapter 8 Analog Alarms 366 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 8 Analog Alarms Analog Alarm Editor Analog Alarm Editor The Analog Alarm Editor gives you the ability to display access and or modify analog alarms To access the Analog Alarm Editor 1 Click Alarm from the View menu or press ALT V A 2 The Analog Alarm Directory dialog box appears The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Alarm number 1 512 depending on the processor type Alarm Title and En able Disable state Analog Alarm Directory Loop Mode Offline Analog Alarms Alarm Title En Dis Documentation S Memory Available 3926 3 Select the Alarm you want to edit and then click Edit You can also double click the Alarm The following dialog box appears 367 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 8 Analog Alarms Analog Alarm Editor Analog Alarm Edit Monitor Lo Lo Hi Hi No Alarm DB Monitor Lo Hi
320. he Add User button to add a new user to the list The dialog controls for a new user ate set as illustrated below Fas Trak Authentication Security Configuration Enable Security Audit User Security Settings Request user password User Name bet At each security control point C Once at startup v Retain ta passwor Require passwords change every days Security A 3 Administrator Inactive passwords time out after mins Online Privileges Offline Privileges User List Edit M Edit denny V Edit Logic Iz jeff Edit Data Values Iv Y Save lv Save M Force l O Iv Force 140 V Edit Documentation v Edit Documentation M Transfer to PLC MV PLC Operations General Privileges V PLC Configuration Program Setup Iv Exit WorkShop Add User Edit User Delete User TEE Save Setings _ 632 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security FasTrak Authentication Security User names can be up to twenty characters long Passwords can be up to fourteen char acters long Valid characters for both fields are alpha numerics and the other keyboard entered characters etc Enter the user name then enter and re enter the password All privileges ate initially checked for new users Check uncheck the privileges appropriate for the user Security administrators can create other security administrators Check the Security Ad ministrator box to grant the new
321. he Jump instruction JMP is used to freeze the values of the discrete image register points of the controlled outputs in the JMPs zone of control The instruction can be used when you need to duplicate the outputs when the outputs are controlled by different logic The JMP operates as an output update enable instruction The JMP must have power flow and cannot be nested within the zone of control ofaJMP not having power flow logic in the JMP zone of control changes the status of the outputs The JMP supports these features e Discrete outputs between a JMP and its corresponding JMPE do not change when the JMP loses power flow e JMPE marks the end of the zone of control for the JMP having the same reference number If you do not use the JMPE the remainder of the program is placed under the control of the JMP You can make the JMPE conditional by placing a contact on the same network as the JMPE e When a MCR loses power flow JMP instructions within the MCR s zone of con trol are overridden This means that all outputs in the MCR s zone of control are turned off when the MCR loses power flow even when the outputs are frozen in an ON state by aJMP This includes network outputs with the network 512 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions Jump End MPE JMPE marks the end of the zone of control for the JMP having the same reference number If you do not use the JMPE the remainder of the
322. he Register Full Status Bit C99 is off The Register Empty Status Bit C100 is off Shift register status after third word is moved out v100 a The output address V300 contains the value 7992 v107 a The Count V196 contains O because the shift Index points v108 register is empty to location 0 v100 O The Index V197 contains O because the next ni v200 available location for a word to be moved in is ae number O V200 me O The Register Full Status Bit C99 is off vane Y The Register Empty Status Bit C100 is on ees Emp seen ee Output word in V300 7992 A location in the shift register is not cleared when a word is moved out The Count determines how many words remain in the shift register Fall Through Shift Register Output Statement Operation Example 554 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions For Next FOR NEXT For Next FOR NEXT The FOR instruction is used in conjunction with a NEXT instruction The program iter ates loops between the two statements for a user specified number of steps Unlike the WHILE loop the FOR loop contains an explicit counter to allow the sequencing and number of iterations of the code between the FOR and NEXT instructions to be known The NEXT instruction is used to designate the end of a FOR loop block Each FOR in struction must be followed somewhere in the program by exactly one NEXT instruction and a NEXT instruction cannot be encounter
323. he Toolbar Notice that the new row at taches to the pointer Place the pointer in the position where you want the new row to appeat Click the left mouse button and the new row is inserted Repeat Step 3 to insert additional rows proe Een Gp Remove the new row from the pointer by clicking the arrow on the Instruction Bar To insert a new row using the keyboard 1 Press the INSERT key to enable Ins mode See the Status Line near the bottom of the screen 2 Use the atrow keys to position the parameter cursor red or highlighted box in the last row of the Special Function Program 3 Press ENTER and the new row appears as the last tow 4 Repeat Step 3 to enter additional rows Entering Special Function Program Instructions You can enter instructions into your Special Function Program using either the Instruction Bat or Menu Bat 263 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming SF Program and Subroutine Editor To enter instructions using the Instruction Bar 1 Move the pointer to the Instruction bar 2 Click with the left mouse button on the desired instruction on the lower half of the Instruction Bar If the desired instruction is not displayed click the appropriate in struction group on the top half of the instruction bar 3 Move the pointer over the Special Function Program Notice that the instruction is attached to the pointer 4 Position the pointer where you wish to place the instru
324. he address box V1 V10 2 F32 The output below will appear in the Data Window V1 0 F32 V3 0 F32 V5 0 F32 V7 0 F32 V9 0 F32 288 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Data Window Increment and data format entries are not required to perform the data fill The data format of each address can be changed independently of other addresses when desired Continuing the example above if you clicked in the address box for V9 and typed V9 U16 the Data Window would display the same address as an unsigned integer Customizing the Display The Data Window can be customized to display tags descriptions both tags and de scriptions or neither These columns can be displayed if selected in the Program Setup To modify the display click Program Setup from the Options menu or type ALT O P Click the Data Window and I O Simulator Window tab and make your selections in the Column Display area e Select the Include Tags check box to include tags e Select the Include Descriptions check box to include descriptions e Clear both check boxes if you do not want to include tags and descriptions For more Data Window display options See Program Setup in Chapter 4 Data Format While in the Data Window the type of data displayed for byte word and double word ad dresses can be changed to a variety of formats Click Format from the Data menu and then select the data format you want to use Click Sizefrom the
325. he device master file which is displayed at the top of the dialog If the configurator is inlimited editing mode orifadevice master file is not present no parameter information will be displayed Configurable device parameters are displayed in the list box Information is shown in the following columns Offset The memory offset of the parameter This is in the format of B b where B is the byte offset and b is the bit number Parameter The name of the parameter This information is Name retrieved from the device master file The value of the parameter string To change this value from the default click the item and select the new value from the drop down menu Diagnostics Tab While online the Profibus Configurator delivers a constant stream of comprehensive di agnostic information from each configured slave device The Diagnostics tab supports up to four types of diagnostics including General Diagnostics Device Diagnostics Iden tifier Diagnostics and Channel Diagnostics Not all of these options may be available for each configured slave device see your slave device manufacturer s documentation for more information about diagnostics availability 202 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Station Type Slave DP 1 0 State Stop Device File SIEMO014 GSD Status Disabled Slave Comm Fail 0 Lost Tokens 0 Slave Parameters Diagnostics Slave I
326. he logic and documentation always imported Synonyms for JMP GTS and SBY are not imported How ever their associated comments are imported as Headers 4 Result The name of the program appears in the Program File box of the Open Pro gram dialog box The selected program s file name is put into the Address Documentation Path If a dif ferent documentation program is desired it must be linked via Share Address Documentation When a file is configured you can specify a database file that holds and sorts all documentation Multiple users can simultaneously modify documentation for the same file thus regular updates can be scheduled to get the latest documentation within the database Documentation can be imported from FSS 505 WorkShop 32 bit files comma or tab separated Conversely you can export from the database file into a text file or a VP5 file TISOFT V5 0 files with Headers and Tags 5 To set up shared documentation click the Advanced button on the Open Program dialog box Result The Share Address Documentation dialog box appears Enter the share address documentation program name in the Shared File and Path line or select Browse to locate an existing file Click Next and enter the refresh rate time lag between updates from other users of the database Valid times are from 1 1440 minutes Click Next and Finish In the Program Type area select Offline or Connect to PLC If you select Con nect to PLC yo
327. he slave has not signaled more than one diagnostic since the last execution of an RSD instruction for the slave the destination buffer s status byte is set equal to 0 the length byte is set equal to the length of the last diagnostic signaled and the value possibly truncated of the latest signaled diagnostic is copied to the di agnostic area e Ifthe slave has signaled more than one diagnostic since the last execution of an RSD instruction for the slave the destination buffer s status byte is set equal to 1 the length byte is set equal to the length of the last diagnostic signaled and the value possibly truncated of the latest signaled diagnostic is copied to the di agnostic area If the input is off the instruction does not execute and the output is off 533 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Special Instructions NOTE Status words STW232 through STW238 indicate the PRO FIBUS DP slaves that have signaled a diagnostic that has not been read by an RSD instruction Use a bit of word con tact specifying the slave s status word bit as the input to the RSD instruction Do this in order to execute the instruction whenever there is a diagnostic for the slave corresponding to the bit NOTE The format of a slave s diagnostic buffer is dependent upon the PROFIBUS DP slave type See the user documentation for your slave s Force Role Swap FRS The Force Role Swap FRS instruction allows you to d
328. hest value is located in the highest memory location The Table Length depends upon the memory location that you choose and how much memory you allocated if the memory is user configurable a Both tables must have the same number of entries The input address V1 below contains the value 40 The value in the input table that is greater than or equal to 40 is 43 contained in K68 The correlated value in the output table is in K88 The value written to the output address V2 is 72 Input V1 Output Input table K64 Output table K84 Table length 7 Input table Output table K64 20 K84 48 K65 28 K85 23 K66 34 K86 62 K67 39 K87 98 Input value V1 40 K68 43 K88 72 Output value V2 72 K69 47 K89 65 K70 50 K90 41 Correlated Data Table Statement Operation Example 547 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Exit on Error EXIT Exit on Error EXIT The EXIT statement allows you to terminate a SF program or SF subroutine and have an error code logged The EXIT format is shown below Encode Cancel Help e Errcode contains the value of the error code and can range from 0 to 255 The valid field descriptor is an integer literal constant Optionally this field may be left blank Operation of EXIT When the SF program encounters the EXIT statement program execution terminates If an SF subroutine encountets the EXIT statement con
329. hickness of the ladder status line Set tings ate between 1 6 Logic Windows Tab Special Functions Options Instruction Width Column One Column Two Data and I O Simulator Window Tab Column Display Include Ad dresses Include Tags Include De scriptions Include Time Stamp Include Status Determines the width allocated for display of Special Func tion instructions on each line Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 80 Determines the width allocated for display of SF first column variables after the instruction Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 300 Determines the width allocated for display of SF second col umn variables after the instruction Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 300 If selected address columns ate included in the Data I O Simulator Window If selected tag columns are included in the Data I O Sim ulator Window If selected description columns are included in the Data I O Simulator Window If selected time stamp columns are included in the Data I O Simulator Window If selected status columns ate included in the Data I O Simulator Window 146 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Program Setup Tag Tip As you scroll through the tag description box in a data win Display dow the corresponding address and description if it exists of the selected t
330. hin the slave device and assign starting I O ad dresses to each module Save the configuration The Profibus configuration is saved with the file so there is no longer a need to save and store the configuration separately Device Master Files A device master file or GSD is required for every Profibus device so that it can be in tegrated in the Profibus Configurator A GSD file contains a device description in a uniform format stipulated by the IEC 61158 3 DP V0 PROFIBUS standard The Profibus Configurator uses the GSD to categorize the device in the Hardware Directory determine what I O modules are available to configure and what kinds of parameter and diagnostics information to display To enable field devices of other vendors to be connected device master files that can be in tegrated in the configurator are generally supplied with the hardware The configurator can 207 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration interpret these device master files provided the files are created in accordance with the IEC 61158 3 DP VO PROFIBUS standard No device master files are included with PLC WorkShop except for the master files as sociated with the supported PLC types All other device master files must be added to the configurator by the user Device master files are added from within the Hardware Di rectory which is accessible from the Master tab of the Profibus
331. holds the setpoint constant for a specified period of time You can guarantee a soak period by entering a deadband value This form of soaking en sures that the process vatiable is within a specified deadband around the setpoint for a specified period of time e The end step terminates a ramp soak profile When the program reaches an end step the loop remains in automatic mode and holds the setpoint constant You can program a status bit for each step of the ramp soak This bit is set to 1 when the loop is executing this step It is reset when the loop leaves the step This allows for easy tracking in the RLL program 397 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Ramp Soak Controlling the Ramp Soak Operation Ramp Soak operation can be controlled by two methods allowing the profile to be ex ecuted automatically or by writing values to the variables that control ramp soak e Automatic Whenever the loop changes from manual to automatic mode the loop begins to execute the ramp soak profile at the initial step Step 1 The loop continues to execute the profile until an end step is encountered in the profile At this point the loop remains in automatic mode and the setpoint is held at the last value in the profile e Using Ramp Soak Number Each loop ramp soak profile has a corresponding 16 bit variable LRSN that contains the current step You can monitor LRSN with a SF program and also write a step number to
332. ia 421 Normally Closed Conta a LE e 421 Normally Open Immediate Contact ueniet os esee 421 Normally Closed Immediate Contact conce eiie 422 Lost N t Contact X NOW Acie tren Eo cH pns abel tale 422 One Shot Contact OS au tt ene ad ia illa 423 E ITE 423 COLNOT tal ine tsk Masc CoD nase tU Ea LATE cath alee LM 424 Tmmediate Col MP 424 Immediate Closed C il sados 425 Seb oL SEE tiea A acte 425 Reset Col RS Dt ren eso tata o bec uentus 426 Set Immediate Col SET Dni ii lacio 426 Reset Immediate Col dl 426 Timers Counters and Drums 22 220 0220022002 ecc cece cee ceecceecceeceeeeseeeeees 428 dis Timer Rda ad 428 A ts S Me da 429 001 s Timer CEMBLI ei 429 Retentive Timer o AAA A hie wees iA EU 430 Counter Gi trices A Ue Leeks ode 430 19 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents Up Down Counter UD de es toads 432 Discrete Control Alarm Timer DG A D ueste ans 433 Motor Control Alarm Timern MG AT oe Joo sn ce cocto NEP RT ae bdioden ES 436 Time Driven Drum ORO Mc secado 439 Time Byent Driven Drum BDRM sastre poi 440 Mesa BRUM MIE DRY uci racista 442 Use a Pinning Chart to Enter Data for MEDRM 449 Maskable Event Drum Discrete MDRD uusuuueuuuueuuuueuus 457 Maskable Event Drum Word MDRMW oooocococococococcccocococononocnono 458 Ou IelavGolb 6 JN sce e ral idos 460 Om Delay Gall OPPIDI x ae it ts M 462 Comipate TOSEEUGHODS esc en mc dio
333. ication and NT Au thentication Both provide user and group level security which authentication type you choose will depend on your specific needs as well as the features of your network See the following sections for more information e FasTrak Authentication e NT Authentication Additional on line security can be achieved using PLC Password Aliases For more on this subject see PLC Password Aliases 621 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security Security Setup Security Setup Password security in WorkShop is disabled by default Without password security enabled any user may access any portion of the programming package Before the password security feature can be used establish a security administrator by se lecting the Options Security menu item 505 WorkShop EXAMPLE File Edit View Program Diagnostics PLC Utilities 58 Window Help x Program Setup LA P m n s u amp s eee NEED sal ly m1 BCBI BIBC CALL CDT ELSE E ered Decumentalon s K PEKA PC Relay T C Drum Compare NI C NIF JE PCKR IF IMAT LB LAG MATH PAC itch To Ne k Displa BitOps Activity Audit Setup Exa EE RES l Under Secutity select from two menu items User Options Allows users to change their own passwords or allow other users to enter their password without having to exit and restart WorkShop Administrator O
334. ications cable connects a serial port of the computer to the PLC This enables programs and data to be transferred between the computer and the PLC This cable has a 25 pin or 9 pin connector computer end and a 9 pin connector PLC end If your computer has a 9 pin COM port and you have a 25 pin cable you can use a 9 to 25 pin converter to connect the communications cable to the processor If your computer has a 25 pin COM port this converter is not necessary The pin outs for the communications cable are shown in the following figures a Cable Pin Outs for RS 232 C Ports a Cable Pin Outs for RS 422 Potts a Ethernet Connection Cable Pin Outs for RS 232 C Ports Connect your programming device to the controller with a double shielded null modem RS 232 C cable The following illustrations show pin outs for the RS 232 C cables Prg Device Controller FOIL FOIL SHietp BRAID BRAID SHIELD Transmit D Receive RD CTS DSR Signal Ground oco DTR C o0 4 Co Ch wr Lid Drainwire Drainwire Coppertoil Copperfoil Shield conte Shell aia Shell Shield 49 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 2 Installation Communications Cable 25 Pin to 25 Pin Cable 2 Receive RD 2 2 Transmit TD 3 Transmit TD 3 3 Receive RD 5 Signal Ground s 4 RTS 5 CTS E 6 DSR wi 7 Signal Ground M 8 DCD 13 20 DTR te 15 16 17 18 15 par 21 zz zi Ze 25 Drainwire Drainwire Co
335. icensor grants Licensee a nonexclusive right to use and display one 1 copy of the Software with respect to one microcomputer at a time for so longas Licensee complies with the terms hereof Licensor retains the right to terminate this Agreement and Licensee s rights at any time by written notice to Licensee in the event Licensee violates any of the provisions hereof Licensor reserves all rights in and to the Software and Documentation not expressly granted to Licensee herein Licensee agrees to pay Licensor the license fee specified by Licensor as of the date hereof payable in full upon deliver of a copy of the Software and Documentation to Licensee Licensee acknowledges that the license fee payable hereunder is consideration solely for the right to use the Software and payment thereof will not entitle Licensee to support assistance training maintenance or other services or the enhancements or modifications to the Software which may subsequently be developed by Licensor except as otherwise expressly provided in this Agreement 2 LICENSEE S AGREEMENTS Licensee agrees to comply with the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement specifically including but not limited to the following a Licensee will take all reasonable steps to protect the Software from theft or use contrary to the terms of this Agreement b Licensee agrees to pay Licensor additional license fees as specified by Licensor if and to the extent Licensee intends to
336. ick the item to jump to its first occurrence 294 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Complete Cross Reference NOTE The title line gives the status of the cross reference To bring it current click Build Table NOTE When the Update Cross Ref Table check box is selected in the Program Setup dialog box changes to ladder logic ap pear in the cross reference display as soon as they ate validated and entered Otherwise they appear when the cross reference table is rebuilt 295 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Ladder Network Cross Reference Ladder Network Cross Reference You can track addresses in a program by viewing the Cross Reference table NOTE Only validated and entered logic is considered part of the cur rent program Thus logic that is not entered and validated is not displayed in the Cross Reference Table See Validate and Enter Logic 1 Position the cursor over the instruction network to cross reference Click Network Cross Reference from the View menu The Network Cross Reference window ap pears If you have more than one program loaded the information displayed is for the program in the active window Cross Reference Current EXAMPLE Simulator ByAddress Start Address C1 Refresh C By Network c2 c3 C4 000001 000001 000003 000004 000003 000006 000005 000005 000003 TMR Build Table EXPAND
337. ied e Full Access The controller program is not protected Password Operational Modes Online Password Operational Modes There ate nine online operational modes for password The following paragraphs describe online password operational modes and online disk password operations The following numbered paragraphs detail the corresponding mode number information found in Online Password Operations Table NOTE If converting files from TISOFT to 505 WorkShop check to make sure that the selected program on disk has TISOFT 5 0 or greater format Mode 1 If the controller and the selected program on disk do not have a pass word you will not be prompted for a password Save and Open functions will be allowed No password will be written to the selected program on disk or to the controller Mode 2 If the selected program on disk has a password and you enter a password for the selected program on disk at the online prompt you will be able to use Save and Open functions Mode 3 If the selected program on disk has a password and you do not enter a password for the selected program on disk at the online prompt you will not be al lowed to use the Save function You will however be able to use the Open function but only if the controller supports password You will also have full ac cess to the controller and the selected program on disk Mode 4 If the controller has a password and you enter a password for the con troller at the
338. ied in Binary Result B BCDBIN BCD Input WX01 Binary result WY11 WX01 contains BCD value 4193 entered from a thumbwheel Lo Jo o o oof jojo sJo o ANN A A v v WY11 contains binary 4 1 9 3 representation of integer 4193 M A WX01 B WY11 BCD to Binary Statement Operation Example 541 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Convert Binary To BCD BINBCD Convert Binary To BCD BINBCD The Convert Binary to BCD statement converts the binary form of an integer to the equiv alent Binary Coded Decimal BCD value Values up to 9999 are converted to equivalent BCD values BINBCD Binary Input BCD Result Cancel Help e Binary Input the memory location of the binary word to be converted Valid field descriptors are integer addresses addresses containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 e BCD Result the memory location of the integer value after conversion Valid de sctiptors are writeable integer addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 BINBCD Operation Each time the BINBCD statement executes the integer located in the address specified in Binary Input A is converted to BCD An error occurs if the input value contained in Bi nary Input is less than zero or greater than 9999 The BCD value is stored in the address specified in BCD Result B BINBCD Binary input V77 BCD result WY 1
339. ified logic window 6 Skip on Error When the Skip on Error check box is selected on the Replace dialog box the program will skip illegal replacements and go on to the next item to be re placed automatically If the Skip on Error check box is not selected the program will flag illegal replacements and the following options are displayed e Click Skip to skip the address and go on to the next item to be replaced e ClickStop to Cancel the Replace operation and return to the specified logic window Search and Replace Table The Replace Table feature expands the capabilities of the original Replace feature il lustrated below Replace Find What S Replace With Cancel Where Ladder y Hep From Network 4 Confirm Skip on Error To Network 6 279 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Search and Replace Address The original Replace feature can search and replace only one address at a time The Re place Table allows up to 32 address ranges to be searched and replaced in one continuous process within an offline PLC program Replace Table Dialog Box Click Replace Tablefrom the Edit menu to display the Replace Table dialog box Replace Table Search for through Replace with through Search for through Replace with through ellelle je ejje es jo o le le 0 0 0 0 D D 0 0 o ce Si i o io a i2 im Additional selections Search amp
340. ight side of the History dialog box are used to manage a file s history e Close Closes the History dialog box and returns to the main window e Compare Selecting a version and clicking Compare will compare the selected ver sion with the copy in the user s working directory Selecting two versions and clicking Compare will compare the two versions to each other e View Launches the application associated with the selected version and opens the version of the file within the application as a read only document e Get Retrieves the selected version of the file to the user s local working directory e Report Generates a history report of the selected repository file e Rollback Reverts the most recent version of the repository file to the selected version Rollback is only available if the file has more than one version and can only be selected when a version other than the latest version is selected e Sign Electronically signs the selected version of the file and allows the option to change the version state e Properties View the properties of the selected version and allows the option to change the version comment Electronically Signing WorkShop Files Electronic signatures can be used as an approval method to verify that a certain user has seen a selected version of a repository file and can also be used to advance the version state of the repository file FTVersionTrak s electronic signatures are approved by portio
341. ile These audit records are written ta a database file which can be read with many popular viewers Select the file type and specify its properties below r6 Microsoft 4 File Name C Program Files sActivitu amp udit mdb New files created as s2000 v T Other Database C onnection String These audit records are written to the Windows NT 2000 lt P Application Log of the computer on which the FasTrak Security Server is installed This Application Log can be read with the Windows Event Viewer Select the Machine Name of the computer on which the Security Server is installed Machine Name Browse Help Cancel Audits written to Windows Activity Logs may be read with the Windows Event Viewer which is found in the Windows Control Panel under Administrative Tools 617 618 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authen tication and NT Security 620 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security Introduction Introduction The WorkShop Password Security features allows one or more security administrators to maintain a list of users and their access privileges Access privileges restrict which func tions of the application such as online and offline editing I O forcing loading saving changes to disk etc individual users can perform WorkShop supports two types of password security FasTrak Authent
342. imilarly like the normal coil but the immediate I O module update is done when the coil is executed The immediate coil is updated any time during the controller scan and is not limited to the normal I O update portion of the timeline Yl Ap 424 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Relay Instructions NOTE Both the image register and the I O module are updated when the immediate coil is executed So Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Immediate Closed Coil The Immediate coil is used similarly like the NOT coil but the immediate I O module up date is done when the coil is executed The immediate coil is updated any time during the controller scan and is not limited to the normal I O update portion of the timeline Y1 XA NOTE Both the image register and the I O module ate updated when the immediate coil is executed EE Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Immediate Bit address Y Closed Coil Set Coil SET The SET Coil is used to set a specified bit to ON 1 when the network passes power flow If the network does not have power the bit remains unchanged C1 CSET gt mm Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Bit Bit Address e FomC C 425 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Relay Instructions Reset Coil RST The RST Coil is used to set a specified bit to OFF 0 when the network passes power flow If the network d
343. imited editing only 7 The Profibus configuration information obtained from the COM Profibus binary file is merged into 505 WorkShop The current configuration is overwritten NOTE Merged slave devices are initially disabled after merging See Configuring and Addressing Profibus Modules for more information Assigning Slaves to the Profibus Configuration Slave devices can be added to the configuration either by merging from a COM Profibus bi naty file or by following the steps below Please note that merging a COM Profibus configuration will place the configurator inlimited editing mode unless all devices in the configuration are represented by a valid device master file within the Hardware Directory in WorkShop To assign slaves to the configuration 1 Add the associated device master file to the Hardware Directory if you have not already done so 2 Find and select the slave device within the Hardware Directory and click Add Slave to add the device 218 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Jardware Directory 38 SIMODRIVE sensor F Gateways General la 3563 PROFIBUS DP 8 CP5614 Sample 80b4 53 IM 180 DP Slave IMCO1 5 Network components SIMEAS Q v2 E SIPOS MC P SITRAS DPUS6 PU TdF HMI 140 Ident Systems NC RC PLC PROFIBUS PA Switching devices Valves m
344. in Application Setup will force the user to connect with the saved settings 163 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Fast PLC Setup Fast PLC Setup The Fast PLC Setup allows you to configure a single PLC Connection when using Fast PLC Connection To access the Fast PLC Setup 1 Click Fast PLC Setup from the File menu Result The Fast PLC Setup dialog box appears Fast PLC Connection Setup x 9s a COMI y Serial TIWAY EN C TCPAP ENS C FMS ES C Hi Online Selection Cancel 2 To configure and select your serial port or board for communication with a PLC e Select the appropriate communication port from Port box in the Fast PLC Con nection Setup dialog box If you need to configure a port click Serial Ports Refer to Communications Setup for more information 2 Click OK or press ENTER to accept the settings Click Cancel to disregard changes 164 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Fast PLC Setup NOTE The connection options for your Fast PLC Connection is stored in the 505 registry If you attempt to use Fast PLC Connection and the Fast PLC Setup has not been con figured the Fast PLC Connection Setup window automatically displays before continuing Connecting to a PLC using Fast PLC Connection does not load any doc umentation or tag information If you need to load documentation or tags use Open Program 165 PLC WorkSho
345. in a PLC When PLC password aliases are used a PLC password is requested as seen in the dialog above But instead of entering the password actually stored in the PLC the password alias is entered 505 WorkShop looks up this alias in its list of password aliases to find the as sociated PLC password This associated PLC password is then used to grant online access to the PLC NOTE PLC password aliases can be used only when either FasTrak Security or NT Authentication Security are in use Accessing the PLC Password Alias Feature PLC password aliases are maintained through the PLC Password dialog Select Password from the PLC Utilities menu below to display this dialog 505 WorkShop EXAMPLE File Edit View Program Diagnostics Mafe NiES Options Window Help PLC Configuration PLC Status feo 9 PLC Operations Profibus Operations System Part Number RBC Part Number Port Lockout PLC Type Setup EQU NEQ LESS LEQ GTR Task Codes Per Scan Diagnostics on Bases Hot Back Clear Memnrwv The PLC Password Dialog The following PLC Password dialog box retains its original functionality which allows entry and modification of the actual PLC password and setting of the access level full read only or no access within the PLC However the addition of the controls within the Password Aliases group box offers access to the PLC password alias feature 334
346. in in mem oty They can now be pasted to other networks using the Paste button TO COPY NETWORK HEADERS 1 Click Copy 2 Enter the range of network headers you want to copy The network headers are copied They can now be pasted to other networks using the Paste button 348 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Ladder Network and SF Header Editor TO PASTE NETWORK HEADERS Note At least one network header must be cut or copied ptior to pasting 1 Click Paste 2 Enter the range of netwotks Note Only the From network can be entered The To network is automatically cal culated 349 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documentation Window Documentation Window Using the Documentation Window In both online and offline programming you can view and edit tags descriptions and com ments in your program using the Documentation Window The Documentation Window allows you to view create edit and delete tags descriptions and comments for the active logic program The maximum number of characters for each item is listed below To open the Documentation Window click va on the toolbar or click Documentation Window from the View menu Documentation EXAMPLE Simulator SEE EXPANDER START EXPANDER LOCAL STOP EXPANDER SHUTDOWN RESET EXPANDER LAMP TEST EXPANDER LUBE OIL PUMP 1 Expander Guide Vane Actuat Expander I
347. in one ot mote of the following logic and data tags headers and descriptions and comments Several programs may be open at one time without losing memory contents 65 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs A Warning Editing or modifying a program online may produce unexpected or hazardous results To open an existing program 1 Click L on the Toolbar click Open Program from the File menu or press CTRL O Result The Open Program dialog box appears NOTE The last four files that were opened are saved and listed at the bottom of the File menu When you select one of these files the Open Program dialog box automatically opens with the file you selected Open Program Ex Program File Browse Address Documentation Path Program Type Offline C Connect to PLC Connection Method Setup r Options E E Cancel 2 Click Browse Result The Open dialog box appears 66 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs 3 Select the program you want to open or type the program name in the File name box and click Open Change drives and or directories if necessary to find the pro gram you wish to open You can open FSS 505 WorkShop 32 bit files FTK 505 WorkShop 16 bit files or VP5 TISOFT V5 0 files NOTE For TISOFT V5 0 vp5 loads a new offline program is created with t
348. indow NOTE Logic that has not been validated ad entered will not be in cluded in the cross reference 1 To access the Cross Reference window click Cross Reference from the View or click the toolbar button If you have more than one program loaded the in formation displayed is for the program in the active window The cross reference can be based on address or networks by selecting the appropriate button Cross Reference Current 505Demo Offline DEAR ByAddress Start Address C1 C By Network Build Table Ei To00001 T 000001 4 000002 D00002 000002 TMR 000003 EQU 000003 EQU SFP0001 10001 SFP0001 10001 SFP0001 10002 SFP0001 10002 000001 000002 000003 4 Desc THIS IS 4 DESCRIPTION FOR TIMER 1 START STOP e To view address documentation inline check the Display inline Address Doc umentation check box When the box is cleared address documentation is shown just above the box e Enter the starting address in the Start Address box or the starting network in the Network box Click Refresh The address is displayed on the left side with the network number next to the element The Tag and Description of the selected address are displayed on the bottom left of the screen e Select the logic item you want to view from the view window Click Goto to jump to the first occurrence of the address in the ladder logic editor Alternatively you can double cl
349. ing 390 Deriviative 405 Description 352 Description Rows 146 Deviation Orange Alarm 376 393 Deviation Yellow Alarm 375 393 Device Master File 203 207 218 223 Diagnostics 202 304 312 313 316 319 320 322 Base Diagnostics 322 664 Controller Diagnostics 316 Errors 304 Ladder Status 319 PLC Operations 313 Processor Faults 304 Processor Status 312 Profibus 202 Single Scan 320 Syntax Check 318 Diagnostics on Base 322 Digital SC 229 238 Disable Base 186 Discrete Control Alarm Timer 433 Discrete Maskable Event Drum 457 DIV 482 Divide 482 Docking Station 46 Documentation 77 79 97 147 275 345 346 350 351 354 356 360 382 Assigning an Address 359 Customizing 351 Deleting 356 Displaying 360 Documentation Window 350 Editing 354 358 359 Finding 275 356 Headers 346 Ladder Header 345 Network Header 345 Options 360 Pasting 355 PID Loops 382 Pop Up Menu 357 Printing 97 Setup 144 Special Function Header 346 Tags 358 Text File Format 77 79 Domains 639 Driver 45 DRUM 439 442 Drum Memory 182 DSET 525 Dual Media Base 322 E Edit 64 103 109 111 246 248 263 268 271 351 354 356 359 364 367 369 383 398 Analog Alarms 367 Clear 103 108 109 270 Comment 353 Copy 103 105 268 354 355 369 Cut 103 104 268 354 Delete 103 109 111 270 354 Delete Documentation 356 Description 352 Documentation 351 359 Headers 353 665 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Domains Equal To In
350. ing editing features to help you complete your pro gramming tasks These include Cut Copy Paste Paste With Rewire Undo Clear Delete Insert The most frequently used editing features are Cut Copy and Paste Use these commands to quickly copy logic and documentation to either another location in the same program or another program The list below describes Cut Copy and Paste differences Cut Removes the selection from the program and places it on the clipboard Copy Copies the selection and places it on the clip board Paste Inserts clipboard contents into the program at the cursor location Paste With Re Inserts clipboard contents into the program at wite the cursor location and allows the user to re ad dress any addressable items contained in the clipboatd Undo Resets the networks addresses in a segment to their original data 103 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Editing The clipboard referred to is the standard Windows clipboard Refer to your Windows User s Guide for more information To select the information you want to cut or copy click hold and drag the pointer over the desired area Selected items are highlighted with a different color than your normal workspace color If you want to select all logic in the current window click Select All from the Edit menu Each of these editing commands described in detail in the following paragraphs can be a
351. ing or Writing 575 Port Configuration To read or write the 575 port configuration click the Port Settings in the Application ID Table dialog box The Port Settings Dialog box appears 72 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Port Settings X Board Address MM Port fi EX m Settings Baud Rate 9600 Character Size 7 C8 Parity Odd X Stop Bits 3 A E Elow Control None y s To make changes to the pott settings Accept 1 Click on the item to be changed and either type in the change or click on the spin radio button or combo box 2 Click Accept to send changes to the controller or click Cancel to make no changes and return to the Applications ID Table dialog box NOTE If the port you are changing is the port 505 WorkShop is connected to but the settings are not what 505 WorkShop uses when you press Accept the following prompt appears to confirm your action 505 WORKSHOP IS ATTACHED TO THE PROC MS SOR TAROUCA TELS PORT TER MUAY BE A SHOR DELAT AS THE PORT I gt RE CONNECTED DO YOU WANT TO CHANGE THESE PORT SETTINGS E Select YES to change the port configuration and 505 Work Shop may or may not continue to communicate with the controller Select NO to abort the operation 73 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Importing Documentation Use the followi
352. ing your program files they must be added to the FTVersionTrak repository The repository is a secure compressed database that exists apart from you local file system This database keeps track of any changes made to the files added to it as well as securing them from accidental or unauthorized deletion or removal To add a WorkShop file to the FT VersionTrak repository 1 Open the program file in WorkShop 2 Click the button on the FTVersionTrak toolbar The Bind File to Repository dialog box appears Bind File to Repository File C Program Files FasTrak Softworks Inc 505 Simulat Repository Server Database Browse Location Path loi k Cancel 3 Click Browse The Browse for Repository dialog box appears Browse for Repository Server THOMAS 2800 FTVERSIONTRA Browse Login to Server Manually Available Repositories Find 0 Caca 117 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak 4 Ifan FTVersionTrak database exists on the local machine it appears in the Server box If this is the database you would like to use skip to Step 6 If no database ex ists or to select another database click the Browse button The Browse for Server dialog box appears Browse For Server Database Servers Server B THOMAS2800 FTVERSIONTRAK 5 Click the Find button to search for all available database servers Select the desired
353. instruction then click the instruction For example if you want to insert a short instruction you can click the short in struction if it is visible on the instruction bat If the short instruction is not visible first click the Relay button to display the Short instruction then click the Short in struction 3 Move the pointer over the logic program Notice that the instruction is attached to the pointer 4 Position the pointer where you wish to place the instruction 5 Click the left mouse button and the instruction is placed in that location If an in struction cannot be placed in that location an error message is displayed 6 Ifthe sticky cursor has been turned on in the Program Setup under General then the instruction will remain attached to the pointer Click the left mouse button once for each additional instruction you want to insert Click the arrow in the middle of the Instruction Bar or another instruction to remove the instruction from the pointer 7 Ifthe sticky cursor has not been turned on in the Program Setup then after the in struction has been dropped into place the pointer returns to an arrow Entering Mnemonic Instructions with the Keyboard 1 In the active logic program position the cursor using the arrow keys where the in struction is to be located 249 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Programming Ladder 2 Type in the instruction mnemonic at the cursor location a
354. instruction place ment parameters P1 P5 are visible Additional parameters up to P10 may be added to the instruction by placing the ladder cursor within the instruction box and selecting the Pro gram Add CFUNC SFSUB Parameter menu item These additional parameters may be deleted by placing the ladder cursor in the instruction box and selecting the Program Delete Parameter menu item Parameters must be specified in sequential order 509 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions A Warning Specifying more than 5 parameters is valid only with CTI 2500 Series controllers Attempting to run a program containing an SFSUB with more than 5 parameters on a Simatic 505 series con troller will result in the CPU ceasing operation and entering a fatal error state If this occurs Auxiliary Function AUX 29 PLC Operational Status will report error code 0114 L Memory Checksum Error Upon encountering this error condition it will be necessary to disconnect the battery and re cycle power to the CPU To prevent this error do not attempt to load a program containing an SFSUB with more than 5 parameters or other instructions designed to only be compatible with the CTI 2500 Series controller into a Simatic 505 series controller Each field P n can be one of the following types e Constant any integer or real number e Discrete or word element e Expression an expression is a logical
355. instructions Using the same reference number can cause unpredictable operations 431 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums Up Down Counter UDC The Up Down Counter UDC instruction counts the number of events up or down from 0 32767 When the counter counts up it counts to the preset value specified in Preset which is stored in TCP memory The current count is stored in TCC memory The UDC instruction has the following properties e The Enable Reset must be on for the counter to operate e When the Enable Reset is on the counter is incremented by one when the Up input transitions from off to on e When the Enable Reset is on the counter is decremented by one when the Down input transitions from off to on The UDC cannot be decremented to a number less than zero e TCC does not change if the Up and Down inputs both change from off to on dur ing the same scan e Ifthe Enable Reset turns off TCC is reset to zero e The output specified in Z is turned on whenever TCC equals zero This output is turned off when TCC does not equal zero e The box output is turned on whenever TCC equals zero or TCP e After having counted to the preset value TCP the box does not require resetting in order to resume counting in the opposite direction TCC does not ever exceed TCP NOTE If you use an operator interface to change the TCP values the new TCP values are not c
356. ion Previous SP Previous Output Previous Gain Previous Reset Previous Rate You can use these five parameters to record the prior SP Mn Kc Ti and Td of a loop be fore a SmarTune session starts See Previous Mode for a short discussion on why they would be configured Calculated Gain Calculated Reset Calculated Rate 408 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning You can use these three variables to record the tuning values calculated by SmarTune See Previous Mode for a short discussion on why they would be configured The following information lists the loop tuning errors written to the Status Variable word STATUS CODE BIT VALUES r reserved alvasys 0 c complete operation is carpete e amwr arr condition detected w waming aming condition detected fq meanings dependert an c ewbits x imdevart for this condition 0000 xxxx Smar Tune in progress or not active XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 Not active 0000 0000 0000 0000 Waiting in SmarTune queue 0000 1000 0000 0000 Waiting for Loop to enter manual mode 0001 0000 0000 0000 Wait 1 PV value stabilize 0001 1000 0000 0000 Wait 2 PV value stabilize 0010 0000 0000 0000 Wait 3 PV value stabilize 0010 1000 0000 0000 Calculating Tuning Parameters 0011 0000 0100 0000 SmarTune complete with no errors or warnings 0000 0000 0101 xxxx SmarTune complete with warning s XXXX XXXX 409 P
357. ion Any MATH expression or any IMATH expression for IIF The use of the assignment operator is optional IF THEN ELSE ENDIF Operation IF and IIF operate in conjunction with the ELSE and the ENDIF statements When an IF statement is used a THEN result is understood The IF format is shown below Free format based on the following structure IF valid MATH expression THEN understood SF statement SF statement SF statement SF statement SF statement SF statement 559 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions If Functions IF IIF THEN ELSE ENDIF IF THEN ELSE ENDIF Format In this format the SF statement may be any Special Function program statement Each time IF executes the condition defined within the statement is tested If the MATH ex pression is true non zero statements in the THEN section execute any statements in the ELSE section are skipped If the MATH expression is false zero statements in the THEN section are skipped any statements in the ELSE section execute The IF statement operates in conjunction with the ENDIF statement and an optional ELSE statement ENDIF indicates the end of an IF THEN ELSE structure If there is no ELSE statement the statements between the IF and the ENDIF are treated as THEN state ments If an ELSE statement is used any statements between IF and ELSE constitute a THEN section An ELSE statement indicates the end of
358. ion alarm bands are always centered around the target or setpoint that is the deviation alarm test is actually on the control error This value indicates the max imum allowable error SP PV that sets the yellow alarm deviation alarm The yellow deviation limit must be within the span of the process variable and it must be less than or equal to the orange deviation alarm 375 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 8 Analog Alarms Analog Parameters Deviation Orange Alarm In the Dev Orange Alarm box enter a value in engineering units for the setpoint de viation limit The deviation alarm bands are always centered around the target or setpoint that is the deviation alatm test is actually on the control error This value indicates the max imum allowable error SP PV that sets the orange alarm deviation alarm The orange deviation limit must be within the span of the process variable and it must be greater than or equal to the yellow deviation alarm Monitor Rate of Change In the Monitor Change box click Yes to have the controller monitor the rate of change Click No if the controller will not monitor the rate of change Rate of Change Alarm In the Rate of Change Alarm box enter a value in engineering units for the rate of change alatm Monitor Broken Transmitter Alarm In the Monitor Broken Xmit box click Yes to have the controller monitor the Broken Transmitter Alarm Click No if the controller will not monitor th
359. ion executes an Exclusive OR on each bit in a source word with the corresponding bit of a designated word in a table The re sults are placed in a destination table If the bits compared are the same the resultant bit is set to a 0 Otherwise the resultant bit is set to a 1 The WTTXO instruction is described below e The Reset must be on for the instruction to be executed e When the Enable turns on each bit of the source word WS and of the specified word in the table TS is compared The index IN indicates which word in the table is Exclusive Ored The value contained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 where N is the length of the table If 0 lt IN lt N the word is Ored If N lt IN or N lt 0 the word in not Ored e Each pair of bits is Exclusive Ored and the resultant bit is placed in the des tination table TD If the bits compared are the same the resultant bit is set to a 0 If the bits compared are different then the resultant bit is set to 1 After a word in the table is compared the value contained by the index is incremented by one e If both Enable and Reset remain on the source word and a word in the table are Exclusive Ored each scan e Ifthe Enable turns off while the Reset is on the index holds its current value and the Exclusive OR does not occur e Ifthe Reset turns off the index reset to 0 506 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions e The WI TXO o
360. ions dialog box select a program or subroutine number from the list that does not already contain a program and click Import The Open dialog box appeats Look in 3 505 WorkShop e 3 ex E3 HDGSDBMP S ro10910 wsf File name are Files of type 505 WorkShop Special Function wsf m Cancel 2 Browse to the location of the Special Function WSF file you would like to import Select the appropriate file and click Open The program is imported to the selected program number 267 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Editing Logic Editing Logic Cut To use the cut feature ig Select the information you want to cut You can cut parts of a network all of a net work or multiple networks Cut your selection to the clipboard with one of the following Click X on the toolbar Click Cut from the Edit menu Press CTRL X Copy To use the copy feature ll Select the information you want to cut You can cut parts of a network all of a net work or multiple networks Copy your selection onto the clipboard with one of the following B e Click on the toolbar e Click Copy from the Edit menu e Press CTRL C Paste To access the paste feature 1 Move the cursor to the desired location 2 Paste clipboard contents into the new location with one of the following 268 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Editing Logic
361. ions for box click Ladder 361 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documenting in Ladder Program Setup Documentation Window Update Times Colors Logic Windows Data and 1 0 Simulator Window Options for Ladder v Individual Program Settings ShowAddresses Column width f4 2 F Show Tags Tag Rows 2 Show Descriptions Description Rows 3 ET Assign Tags Assign Addresses Status Thickness 2 MV Use TISOFT Keys Cancel Save as Defs Restore Defs 5 Select the Show Tags and Show Descriptions check boxes to display tag and de scription information in the ladder logic program window 6 Click OK Toggling display with keyboard shortcuts Network headers and the tag and description components of address documentation can be displayed or hidden in the ladder logic program window using keyboatd shortcuts ADDRESS DESCRIPTIONS Press F5 to display address descriptions in the ladder logic program window Press F5 again to hide the desctiptions ADDRESS TAGS Press CTRL F5 to display address tags in the ladder logic program window Press CTRL F5 again to hide the tags 362 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documenting in Ladder PROGRAM AND NETWORK HEADERS Press SHIFT F5 to display program and network headers in the ladder logic program win dow Press SHIFT F5 again to hide the headers 363 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 C
362. ions that require a configurable on off pattern for the drum coils To do this specify all 1s for the fixed mask for every programmed step of the MDRMD and precede the MDRMD and MDRMDs coils The configurable mask table in memory must then contain the on off patterns that are to be written to the coils for each step E Varies with Drum configured ie DNE Constant Only e A Warning Do not use the same reference number more than once for any of the drum types It can cause un predictable machine operation Maskable Event Drum Word MDRMW The Maskable Event Drum Word MDRMW instruction operates similarly to the event drum but the MDRMW writes the date to a wotd instead of to individual coils The 458 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums MDRMY also is capable of specifying a configurable mask for each step The allows the se lection of the bits in the work to be changed by the fixed mask in each MDRMW step When the drum begins to run it starts at the step specified by the Drum Step Preset which is stored in DSP memory The current step is stored in DSC memory The counts per step set in the CNT field is stored in DCP memory The current count is stored in DCC memory The MDRMW has the following operations e The drum is enabled when the Enable Reset input is on e When the Enable Reset is on and the Start input turns of the drum begins to run The drum begins at
363. irst character in the description All leading characters including spaces must be entered in the Find What box in order for the search to find a phrase For ex ample if the description you want to find is Drum Wash 1 and Wash 1 is entered in the Find What box the description Drum Wash 1 will not be found by the search To find the description of Drum Wash 1 Drum or Drum Wash can be entered in the Find What box If the Exact Match check box is selected then the phrase Drum Wash 1 must entered in the Find what box Keyword In a keyword search the program s documentation is searched to find descriptions tags and comments containing the text entered in the Find what box Unlike the other searches where the text entered in the Find what box must match the beginning characters of the phrase you are searching for in a keyword search the text in the Find what box can be found anywhere within the Description Tag or Comment fields 276 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Finding Logic Example Suppose you enter the phrase Wash in the Find what box and specify a Search type of Keyword The search will return all instances where the phrase Wash is used including a tag of Wash a description of Drum Wash and a comment of Start Wash 1 here If the Match Case check box is selected the case of the text entered in the Find what box must match the case of the text you are searching for For ex ample if the Match
364. irst resolves the address and then it indexes it You can specify a destination address by using the TD field You can specify a direct ad dress any writeable word MOVE copies the source elements into the memory location starting at this address You can also specify an indirect address The long word at this in direct address must contain another address and MOVE copies the source elements into the memory locations start at this second address 491 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions You can specify an index into the destination address using the optional field DI This is an index into a table when you want to copy an element into a table DI designates the relative element in a table referenced by TD into which the source is copied The element at TDJ0 is the first element in the table DI can be either a constant 0 65535 blank or 0 for no indexing or you can enter a variable index A variable index specifies any readable word The content of this address is an unsigned integer 0 65535 that gives the element number of the first element in the table to which the source elements are copied If an in direct destination address is indexed the controller first resolves the address and then it indexes it You can specify the number of elements to be copied in the count field N Count is de fined as follows e A Constant count used to specify an unsigned integer in the range 1 32767
365. is denoted by TMR a fast timer by TMRF 429 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums The timer times down from the preset value specified by Preset The Preset value is stored in the TCP memory The timers current time is stored in the TCC memory area Timers have the following properties e The Enable Reset must be on for the timer to operate e When the Start Stop input is on and the Enable Reset is on the timer begins to time down e Timing begins at the preset value Preset and continues down to zero e Ifthe Start Stop input turns off and the Enable Reset input remains on the timer stops but it saves the current value TCC If the Start Stop input turns on again the timer resumes timing TCC is also saved if the Enable Reset input is on and a loss of power occurs provided the controller battery backup is enabled e Ifthe Enable Reset input is turned off the timer is reset to the preset time spec ified in Preset e The output is turned on when the timer reached zero and it stays on until the timer is reset the Enable Reset input is turned off Retentive Timer On Delay Timer number Constant Only Varies with configured T C ranges Constant Only 0000 0 32 767 Do not use the same reference number more than once for timer a Warning counter up down counter and dis crete motor conttol alarm timer instructions Using the same ref erence number can cause u
366. is identical to that of the PGTS If the input is turned off all discrete I O parameters are turned off and the subroutine is not called PGTSZ Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Program Number Constant 1 32 IN input Word Bit Form A Word Form C Bit 10 output External Subroutine Call XSUB The External Subroutine Call XSUB allows you to pass parameters to a subroutine that is developed offline in a non RLL programming language such as C or Pascal and then call the subroutine for execution The operation of the XSUB is described below e Parameters must be numbered consecutively e When the input is turned on the parameters are pushed on the user stack in order from the last parameter to the first parameter and then the subroutine is called When a discrete data element X Y C B is specified as an IN parameter the dis crete value is passed in the least significant bit of a long word All other bits of the long word ate unspecified When a discrete data element is specified as an I O pa rameter the address of the data element is passed The actual value of the data element is contained in the least significant bit of the byte at this address Other bits of this byte are unspecified When a word data element V K is specified as an IN parameter the value of the long word at this specified data element and the specified data element 1 is passed The addressed word is in the most significant half and the next
367. is key may be a parallel port or USB connector the FasTrak KEY that is provided when a new pur chase is made of the product For keyless site license users security is built in to the product For more information on site licenses please contact your WorkShop distributor or sales representative For users with a security key a license code is provided per each maintenance agreement by FasTrak SoftWorks Inc Upon renewal of a maintenance agreement a new license code may be obtained by contacting your distributor or sales representative To obtain the Key Update Code by email 1 Connect your hardware key to your computer parallel or USB port 2 Select the Help Update Key WorkShop menu item The Security Key Update dialog appears Security Key Update If you wish to add support for a FasTrak software package or upgrade the maintenance agreement for a product you already have contact FasTrak SoftWorks at 262 238 8088 to obtain your Update Code Product Name Expiration Date Distributor 12 2021 Key License Key Update Code mooo Cancel 35 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 1 Welcome Updating Software License Key Copy the contents of the Key License text box Paste it into an email message Note that the key license may be longer than the displayed part of the field Repeat for each key and write the key number s found on the label on your key s 4 digits and a letter near the key license numbe
368. is passed to the input the instruction is executed The instruction has the fol lowing features e Up to 16 bits N in word memory location A are copied beginning with the least significant bit of the word e Bits ate copied into the discrete image register or into the control relay memory lo cations starting at the address designated by IR The bits are copied during a single scan e The output is turned on when the instruction is executed Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant A Wotd Address IR Bit Address Constant Only 496 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions Search Table for Equal STFE The Search Table for Equal STFE instruction locates the next occurrence of a word in a table that is equal to a source wotd The position of the matching wotd 1s shown by an index The STFE has the following properties e The Reset must be turned off to initialize the index setting it to 1 e The Reset must then be turned on before the STFE can operate e When the Enable turns on the index is incremented by one and specifies the next word in the table to be compared with the source word The value contained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 while the STFE is being executed N is the length of the table e Thesource word WS and the word in the table TS specified by the index are compared e Ifthe two words are equal the STFE output turns on f
369. is the ability to compare the contents of two WorkShop files to each other Within WorkShop you may compare two different ver sions of the same WorkShop program to each other or compare a version in the FTVersionTrak repository to the working copy on your local hard drive 124 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak To compare the working copy of the active WorkShop program to the latest version in the repository 1 Clickthe icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar The Compare Files dialog box appeats Compare Files Compare h SA ce 2 f GAB05 WwORKSH OP 575 FSS h 3 CNA Ignore leading and trailing white space Ignore all white space I Ignore case cos Ignore line endings 2 Click OK to view the file compare results See the PTVersionTrak documentation for more information on file compare results To compare the difference between two version of the active WorkShop program 1 Click the O icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar The History dialog box appears History of 7505 WorkShop EXAMPLE FSS State Comment Version Username C FTVersionT rak THOMAS 28005 Thomas 12 12 Initial a 2 THOMAS 2800 T homas 12 12 Initial a 1 THOMAS2800Thomas 11 27 Initial Properties Show Labels Show Electronic Signatures 2 Select the first version of the file you would like to compare While pressing the CTRL key select the secon
370. is written to the table 574 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Data PACK TO FROM To from table Table address Number of points Data start addr Number of points Data start addr Number of points Data start addr Number of points Data start addr cc CC Figure 13 Example of PACKing Bits and Words To a Table PACK FROM Operation For a FROM Table data are read from a table This read operation begins with the table starting address and reads the specified number of points or words from the table PACK then writes this data starting with the address designated in the Data Start Address Bits are written sequentially as illustrated below Table address W100 Data start addr C5 oj1 ol1 ol1 TI tt ff L j LI LI LIII Figure 14 Example of PACKing Bits From a Table You can specify multiple blocks of data to be PACKed from the table You cannot skip sec tions of the table to PACK data located within the table If the data that you want to read are located in the least significant nine bits of V100 and the most significant five bits of V101 you must still PACK out the first seven bits of V100 and discard them 575 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Data PACK TO FROM To from table Table address Number of points Data start addr Number of poin
371. ister Tags Descriptions and Comments To change the Documentation properties click the Documentation button on the Print di alog box The Print Documentation dialog box appears Print Documentation Print ALL Documentation Selections Print All iw 1 0 Elements from to V Control Relays from to V SKP LBL GTS SBR from to F JMP MCR END Include Sort Order Tags Address Iv Description C Tag v Description Comment C Description Save as Default Restore Defaults Doc Font H OK c 97 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Select the All check box to print the entire range of items To print a selection clear the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box The Register Tags Descriptions and Comments can be individually turned on and off To include with the Documentation print out select the appropriate check box under Include The sort order for documentation print can be based on address Tag or Description To change the Documentation ptint sort orders select the appropriate check box under Sort Order 1 Click the Doc Font button to change the Tag Description and Comments printout font of the active program Result The Font dialog box appears Font Font style Courier New Regular A Courier10 BT i Cancel Bold Italic A Tr Decorated035 BT Effects Sample Strikeout M Underline AaBbYyZz C
372. it iv Edit denry IV Edit Logic IV ieff Edit Data Values I vil Save V Save Force 140 Iv Force 140 Edit Documentation V Edit Documentation Transfer to PLC PLC Operations General Privileges Iv PLC Configuration Program Setup IV Exit WorkShop Add User Edit User Delete User te Ete toto eder Seve Setings The security feature can be enabled and disabled and the places at which user passwords are requested can be specified through this dialog The list of usets and their rights to ac cess specific features within WorkShop are managed within this dialog USER PRIVILEGES The administrator can set a variety of individual user security settings or privileges in the Se curity Configuration dialog Setting access privileges allows the administrator to restrict critical functions users can access within WorkShop For example a user may have permission to edit information in both the Logic and Data Windows while online but may not have permission to edit data values while offline 629 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security FasTrak Authentication Security Online Privileges Offline Privileges lv Edit v Edit v jv Iv A V Save lv Save Iv Force 1 0 Iv Force 1 0 Iv Edit Documentation v Edit Documentation v Transfer to PLC Iv PLC Operations General Privileges Iv PLC Configuration Program Setup Iv Exit WorkShop Save Settings Enable Password Security
373. it with a SF program The ramp soak profile changes to the step that is currently contained in LRSN Note that the step number is zero based LRSN contains 0 when the profile is on step 1 1 when the profile is on step 2 and so on e Using the Ramp Soak Flags Each loop ramp soak profile has a corresponding 16 bit variable LRSF that contains operational and status information for the pro file When you program a ramp soak profile you may optionally specify a RAMP SOAK FLAG ADDRESS When you enter an address into this field the controller writes the ramp soak data from LRSF to this address You can design your program to write to the first three bits at the specified address The controller reads these bits and then writes their status over the corresponding bits in LRSF This enables you to change the ramp soak op eration by setting cleating the three bits as needed The controller ignores changes that you make in bits 4 16 You can also monitor LRSF with a SF program and write changes to bits 1 3 with a SF pro gram NOTE The step number is zero based LRSN contains 0 when the profile is on step 1 I when the profile is on step 2 etc Ramp Soak Editor The Ramp Soak Editor allows you to edit or delete an existing programmed step or insert a new one 398 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Ramp Soak To access the Ramp Soak Editor 1 Click PID Loop from the View menu or press ALT V P The PID Lo
374. ith your most sensitive programs by keeping them checked out to a privileged account or user Any necessary changes must be made by that account and can be written to the FTVersionTrak database without checking the file back in Other users can view the latest changes at any time but are unable to make changes themselves 140 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup 142 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Introduction Introduction Before you begin programming you will probably want to spend some time configuring and customizing the software and some of the hardware attached to your computer This section will help you with Program Setup Shows you how to customize 505 Work Shop to fit your preferences Communications Setup Walks you through how to tell your com puter which port is attached to your PLC Printer Setup Assists you in determining the correct set tings for your printer Page Setup Allows you to configure your pages for printouts Fast PLC Setup Sets up a PLC for a fast connection 143 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Program Setup Program Setup Program Setup consists of sets of tabs governing your project s layout and appearance These settings are saved with the program thus each time you open this program you do not have to reset your preferences To access the Program Setup options 1 ClickProgram Setup from the Options menu The Program
375. iting to the table e Number Of Points specifies how many words or points ate to be moved Valid descriptors are integer addresses or values any integer value or address containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 e Data Start Address if writing to the table specifies the starting address of the points or words that are to be written to the table If reading from the table it specifies the starting address in memory into which data is to be read from the table Valid descriptors are integer addresses or values any integer value or ad dress containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 or real addresses or values any real value or address containing a real value such as 33 642 V100 2 or V120 if writing to the table or writeable real integer ad dresses or values if reading from the table 572 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Data PACK TO FROM PACK Operation To add points to the PACK operation select TO or FROM from the To From Table list box select a line from the NO of Points Data Start Address field and click the Edit button The Add Points dialog appears Add Points Number Of Points m Data Start Addr NONE Cancel Help Up to 20 points may be specified in one PACK operation The sum of Data Start Addr and Number of Points 1 must be within configured memory range To from table Table address Number of points Data star
376. ity 2 644 a COBTIDUTAEOE s nosse A sab A A ciue 651 lav ud do T A E 655 26 Chapter 1 Welcome 28 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 1 Welcome Introduction Introduction 505 WorkShop is a powerful Windows based tool for programming programmable logic controllers PLCs Whether you are a novice or an experienced programmer this manual has been constructed to help you begin using 505 WorkShop quickly We at FasTrak Soft Works Inc have tried to assume little about you the user except that when you have a question regarding this software you will want it answered by using this manual and the on line help Using This Manual Chapter titles use names that point you quickly to the specific information you want to find Chapter titles are listed below along with a brief description Introduction Outlines manual contents Customer Support numbers and necessaty hardware and software to run 505 WorkShop 505 Work Short concise tips to get you started with PLC Shop Quick WorkShop quickly and easily Start Guide Installation Guides you through the installation procedures for the software Setup Provides specific guidelines in setting up and customizing the software Basics Describes 505 WorkShop features and helps you move through the Windows environment PLC Memory Provides directions for configuring your amp I O processor I O modules and Profibus slave Configuration devic
377. k Analog Alarm Data PACKAA Analog Alarm Variables Variable Name Variable Name AACK Acknowledge Process Variable AADB Deadband APVH Process Variable High Limit ACF C Flags 32 bits APVL Process Variable Low Limit ACFH Most Significant Word ARCA Rate of Change of C Flags Alarm Limit ACFL Least Significant Word ASP Set Point of C Flags AERR Error ASPH Set Point High Limit AHA High Alarm Limit ASPL Set Point Low Limit AHHA High High Alarm ATS Sample Rate Limit ALLA Low Low Alarm Limit AYDA Yellow Deviation Alarm Limit AODA Orange Deviation Alarm Limit Variables with an asterisk can be either a real number or an integer Variables fol lowed by a period are real numbers Variables not followed by a period ate integer Real addresses use twice the memory integers use PACKAA Operation When the PACKAA statement executes the following actions occur e Fora TO Table the value of the analog alarm variable specified in Parameters is written into the Table Address 579 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Analog Alarm Data PACKAA e Ifadditional variables are specified in Parameters the second variable is written to Table Address 1 the third to Table Address 2 and soon upto eight variables PACKAA To from table Table address Alarm number 10 Parameters AACK APV ASP AODA S Memory DTTTETTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTITTITTIT T
378. k Authentication Security Configuration Enable Security Audit User Security Settings Request user password User Name eet At each security control point C Once at startu V Retain existing password Require passwords change every days Security i f Administrator Inactive passwords time out after mins Online Privileges Offline Privileges User List Edit MV Edit denny V Edit Logic Iz jeff Edit Data Values Iv m lv Save lv Save Iv Force l O Iv Force l O V Edit Documentation V Edit Documentation Iv Transfer to PLC Iv PLC Operations General Privileges Iv PLC Configuration Program Setup Iv Exit WorkShop Add User Edit User Delete User i E Save Setings_ In addition to controlling user access this security mode also can record each attempt to ac cess protected portions of WorkShop made by users To enable this click the Enable Security Audit check box and the Audit Setup button NOTE If when exiting this dialog with the check box checked but having not setup the security log PLC WorkShop will warn the user that no log file had been configured and the check box selection will not be retained 626 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security FasTrak Authentication Security To learn more about setting up the FasTrak Authentication Log please refer to FasTrak Security Audit Setup on page 627 FasTrak Security Audit Setup The fo
379. kShop to a local or client machine In this case installing the Security Configurator is an option After this installation is complete the user must install to the machine which will act as the remote server Installation is identical to the above with the exception that the client need not be installed and therefore may be unchecked from InstallShield It is recommended that both the Security Server FTSecSrv and Configurator FTSecCfg be installed If a client software application is already installed to the machine which the user wishes to run as the remote security server installation of security is identical to installing to a local machine Installation Dialog The following dialog is an example of what a user should expect to see during installation Below is the dialog whereby the user selects to install the client application security or both 638 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server 505 WorkShop Setup Select Components Choose the components Setup will install Select the components you want to install and clear the components you do not want to install Description NT Security 505 WorkShop 32 Server Configurator Help Files Manual Space Required on C 40775 K Space Available on C 46809360 K lt Back Cancel To add or remove which component of security the user wishes click
380. kShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Analog Alarm Data PACKAA Pack Analog Alarm Data PACKAA The Pack Analog Alarm Data statement moves analog alarm data to or from a table PACKAA is primarily intended for use in consolidating analog alarm data to be accessed from an operator interface To From Table Table Address Alarm Number Parameters Cancel Help e To From Table specifies whether data is to be written to or read from the table e Table Address specifies the address of the table to or from which data are moved Valid descriptors are integer addresses addresses containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 if reading from the table or writeable in teger addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 if writing to the table e Alarm Number specifies the number of the alarm to be processed The Alarm Number range is from 1 to the maximum number of alarms Valid descriptors are integer addresses or values any integer value or address containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 e Parameters Specifies the alarm variables Up to 8 variables can be specified by their mnemonics Valid descriptors ate integer or real analog alarm variable ele ments writeable if reading from the table See the table below for the analog alarm variables 578 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pac
381. l Alarm Timer Move Byte Word Element Move Image Register From Table Move Image Register to Table Move Image Register to Word Move Word Move Word From Table Move Word to Image Register Move Wotd To Table Move Word with Index Multiply New Task No Operation Normal Contact Normally Closed Contact Normally Closed Immediate Contact Normally Open Immediate Contact Not Equal To Off Delay Coil On Delay Coil 467 469 528 530 530 422 458 513 513 436 491 489 489 490 492 493 496 494 495 482 522 525 421 421 422 421 465 462 460 669 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Integer Math Instructions One Shot Contact Output Parameterized Go to Subroutine Parameterized Go to Subroutine O PID Loop Read Slave Diagnostics Reset Coil Reset Immediate Coil Retentive Timer On Delay Return From Subroutine Scan Matrix Compare Scan Synchronization Inhibit Search Table for Equal Search Table for Not Equal Set Coil Set Immediate Coil Skip Special Function Program Call Special Function Subroutine Square Root Subtract Table Complement Table to Table And Table to Table Exclusive Or Table to Table Or Table to Word Text Box Description Time Compare Time Driven Drum 423 423 424 518 520 521 522 532 533 426 426 430 514 476 518 497 498 425 426 516 508 509
382. lapse between the sending or receiving of the last bit of a telegram and the sending or receiving of the first bit in the next telegram Tsdr_min must be greater than T_ qui Tsdr_max Maximum station delay time longest protocol processing time The longest time that may elapse between the sending or receiving of the last bit of a telegram and the sending or receiving of the first bit in the next telegram Gap Factor Gap update factor This factor is the number of token runs after which each active station checks for Profibus address gaps Profibus address gaps can result when masters ate removed HSA Highest station address Highest master Profibus address on the system Correction Factor Enter a safety margin for the response monitoring time for the cal culated target rotation time in the form of a conversion factor 1 00 9 99 For example if you select 1 25 as the conversion factor the response monitoring time is 1 25 times the target rotation time 197 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Calculated Parameters and Data Cycle Times T td Transmission delay time This is the time a frame requires on the bus during transmis sion T_rdy Ready time The time in which the master after sending a call must be ready to re ceive the corresponding acknowledgment or response T_rdy must be greater than T qui T id1 Idle time 1 The time which ela
383. lave does not support Smart Connect or the slave is associated with a master device file that does not support Smart Connect 3 Do one of the following e To manually enter offset values first click the Input Offset column of a Smart Connect module and then enter the appropriate Input Offset value Then click the Output Offset column and enter the appropriate Output Offset value Re peat for each Smart Connect module e To have the offset values automatically set click the AutoAddress button NOTE Input and Output Offset values are offset from the base I O address associated with the Digital SC or Analog SC representing the Smart Connect module listed on the Slave tab ET200L SC x SmartConnect module addresses are zero based offsets from the Analog SC and Digital SC addresses entered on the slave configuration tab Module Input Offset Output Offset Comment Module BES 121 1F400 04401DI AC 00 0 Delete BES 122 1BB 0 0440 2D0 DC24V 00 0 EES7 121 1FA00 Q4401DI AC 00 1 _ Paemees BES 122 1HAD0 DAAO 1D0 relay 00 2 Auto Address Secondary slot SEST T24FANDOABO TAD 10V Secondary slot 237 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration 4 To type a comment for a Smart Connect module click the Comment column of a Smart Connect module and enter the appropriate comment ADDRESSING SMART CONNECT MODULES When viewing Smart C
384. lding the status of discrete bits referenced as pa rameters in a PGTS RLL instruction Because up to 32 PGTS subroutines can be programmed the controller has 32 discrete parameter areas each capable of storing the status for 20 discrete parameters When you use a parameter in the subroutine refer to dis crete points as Bn where n the parameter number PGTS discrete parameter area Values are copied into the 1 discrete parameter area to z be used by the subroutine H 5 Discrete inputs 6 Discrete outputs Control relays When parameters are H y specified read write changed values are copied 15 back into appropriate 16 memory areas 17 i 18 19 a PGTS Word Parameter Area The PGTS word parameter area is an area of memory within the controller that is reserved for holding the contents of 16 bit words referenced as parameters in a PGTS RLL in struction Because up to 32 PGTS subroutines can be programmed the controller has 32 word parameter areas each capable of storing the status for 20 word parameters When you use a parameter in the subroutine refer to words as Wn where n the parameter number PGTS word Bit parameter area 12345678 9101121341516 Values are copied into the CEEEH HHHHHHHHHH word parameter areatoba used by the subroutine 3 gt t bear rar 4 Orc QUIBUS When parameters are Other word dala specified read write changed values are copied back mto appropriate 1e
385. le That is Currently Checked Out When you choose to save a program that is checked out to you WorkShop can also check in the file for you automatically Clicking Application Setup from the Options menu in WorkShop displays the FTVersionTrak Options If the Ask to Check In File After Save check box is selected the following message appears after each save 505 WorkShop File has been saved Checkin Suggested C Program Files 505 WorkShop EXAMPLE FSS Would you like to check in this file Clicking Yes displays the Check In dialog box After the file is checked in WorkShop keeps the file checked out to you so that you may continue editing the program Clicking No saves the working copy on your computer but does not write any changes to the FTVer i sion Trak repository The file can be checked in manually by clicking the Y button on the FTVersionTrak toolbar Closing WorkShop Files The procedure to close a WorkShop file is slightly different when the file is protected by FTVersionTrak Depending on the file s status FI VersionTrak offers a number of dif ferent options to the user to prevent the loss of data 134 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak Closing Programs that are Checked Out If the program file being closed is checked out to the current user FT VersionT rak displays a prompt suggesting the file be checked in 505 WorkShop 2 Checkin Sugges
386. le are displayed in the Smart Connect Module Parameters window SmartConnect Module Parameters i x Parameter Name Output mode range 27 Format representation SIMATIC S5 Information is shown in the following columns 235 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Description The memory offset of the parameter This is in the format of B b where B is the byte off set and b is the bit number The name of the parameter This information is tettieved from the device master file The value of the parameter string To change this value from the default click the item and select the new value from the drop down menu ENTER INPUT OFFSET OUTPUT OFFSET AND COMMENTS VALUES To enter the input offset the output offset and comments for Smart Connect modules 1 In the Profibus Configurator click the slave associated with the Smart Connect mod ule whose offset values you want to modify See Configuring and Addressing Profibus I O Modules for additional information about the Profibus Configurator Profibus 1 0 E mi 2500 0300 E E 2 ET 200M 1M153 1 DPv1 3 3 L SCIM SC DP i 4 L SC 15DO aDP 3 5 LOADER INDEX HYDRAU ii B LOADER HEAT EXCHANG l 7 SOUTH KETTLE FLUID CC 8 NORTH KETTLE FLUID Ct 3 NORTH VACUUM COOLIN 10 SOUTH VACUUM COOLII E la a la ul a a a 71 25 SPARE MELT HVAC BLOWER N
387. le password protection for the controller e Disable Password Allows you to disable password protection for the controller If you have not already entered a password for the controller 505 WorkShop prompts you for the current password If the password you provide is not correct 505 WorkShop does not disable the password protection This function does not work unless you provide a password Offline Password Selection and Access Level Password Mode Access Level 332 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays The buttons in the Password dialog are defined below e Close Allows you to return to the ladder display screen e Enter Password Allows you to enter or change the password for the selected pro gram on disk WorkShop prompts you for the new password twice If the new passwords are not the same the password is not changed To delete a password or to make the selected program on disk unprotected enter a null password or press clear and enter a new password e No Access Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for no access This option is written to the controller when you perform an Open function No Access does not work without a passwotd e Read Only Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for read only access This option is written to the controller when you perform an Open func tion Read Only does not work without a passwo
388. lected program on disk e Mode 8 If both the controller and the selected program on disk have passwords and you enter a password for the controller at the online prompt you will not be al lowed to use the Save function You will however be able to use the Open function Open will write the selected program on disk password to the controller and enable the password in the controller You will also have full access to the con troller Some reads and no writes will be allowed to the selected program on disk e Mode 9 If both the controller and the selected program on disk have passwords and you do not enter a password for either the controller or the selected program on disk at the online prompt you will not be able to use either the Save or the Open functions You will however have partial to full access to the controller depending on the controller access level Some reads and no writes will be allowed to the selected program on disk All online password operational modes are summarized in the following table 326 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays M C ll Ode Tonto Allowed to Allowed to Password Passwotd Password Comments User gives pass wotd for selected program on disk User does not give password for pro gram on disk 327 Yes No password Yes Se lected program on disk password is re tained No Se lected
389. letes a network or a range of net wotks addtesses To delete a range of networks addresses enter the number of the first network to de lete in the From box Then enter the number of last network to delete in the To box Row Line In Ladder selecting a row deletes all instructions and branches from the row where the cursor is positioned Logic below the deleted row s moves up When box instructions prevent a deletion an error message appears 110 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Editing Deletes instructions and branches from the column where the cursor is positioned Logic to the right of the deleted column s moves left When box instructions prevent a deletion an error message appears Logic Editor Online Using Delete in the Logic Editor while online works the same as in offline mode How ever a row or column cannot be deleted unless it is empty Data Window While working in the Data Window you can use Delete to clear all rows or one row at a time Delete is accessed through the Edit menu Insert Use Insert to insert a selected object network instruction row or column at the point of the current cursor position Access Insert from the Edit menu using the Logic Editor in either offline or online mode To insert an object 1 Select Insert from the Edit menu Result The Insert dialog box appears 2 Click on the object you want to insert 3 Click
390. lick Binary File to create and save the binary file 2BF which will be merged into WorkShop 4 Within PLC WorkShop open the program file FSS that will contain the merged Profibus configuration Please note that although you may have already merged your Profibus configuration in earlier versions of WorkShop you will need to perform 212 10 11 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration the merge again for full editing capabilities Read more about Limited Editing Mode below Click PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu and click Profibus I O to access the Profibus Configurator Add your GSD files to the configurator by clicking the Add Slave button This will take you to the Profibus Hardware Directory Clicking the Add Hardware but ton will display an Open dialog within which you will be able to select the GSD files to add to the Hardware Directory By default COM Profibus stores its GSD files in the CSIEMENSNCPBV51 gsd directory Using the Station List generated in step 2 identify the GSD files you will need to import into the Hardware Directory Please note that by default the Hardware Di rectory only identifies the standard GSD file extensions when browsing for files to import If your GSD file has a different extension GSE for example select the ap propriate extension from the Files of type drop down menu at the bottom of the Open dialog O
391. lick Merge to import COM Profibus configuration data The Open dialog box appears 215 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration 4 Type the name of the 2BF binary file or browse to search other drives or di rectories 5 During the Merge operation the configurator compares the slave device and I O module information in the binary file to the information in the GSDs loaded into the Hardware Directory In some situations the module information in the binary file may not exactly match the GSD In this case the configurator presents a dialog box allowing you to select the appropriate module for the configuration to Match Unable to match slot 1 of slave 3 to a module in the GSD file CTI2500R GSD Please choose the module below CTI 2581 16D Iso DC In CTI 2582 16D1 Iso 1254DC In CTI 2585 18DI TTL In bit mode CTI 2583 as 16Dl Universal In 505 2580 16 DI Iso 120 VAC 505 4016 4 16 DI 20 56 VAC 505 4116 16 DI 4 15 VDC 505 4216 4 16 DI 79 132 VAC 505 4316 4 16 DI 14 30842 55V 505 4317 16 DI 10 33VDC 505 4318 15 DI 48vDC 505 4319 16 DI 125vDC ad Skip Select Module Cancel Merge 6 When the merge is complete the Profibus Merge Results dialog box displays a re port that details the changes made to the Profibus configuration 216 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Profibus
392. llowing dialog is launched from the FasTrak Authentication Configuration dialog by clicking on Audit Setup FasTrak Authentication Security Audit Setup The FasTrak Authentication Security Audit contains records that document each time users access password protected portions of WorkShop This Security Audit is a database file whose records can be read with many popular viewers Select the file type and specify its properties below Microsoft Access File Name Browse New files created as Microsoft Access 2000 C Other Database eem Heb Cancel To write the local secutity log to a Microsoft Access database file click the Microsoft Ac cess radio button Type the name of the Access file in the File Name text box or click Browse to locate the file Select the proper file format from the New files created as group box To write the local secutity log to an SOL database file select the Other Database radio button Enter the file Connection String in the text box Data Link Properties Dialog If choosing a database other than Microsoft Access and the user does not provide a con nection string click the Select button The Data Link Properties dialog appears 627 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security FasTrak Authentication Security E Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Pro
393. llowing dialog launches 647 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server Component Services File Action view Window Help Console Root Console Root Component Services a Event Viewer Local i 8 component Services By Services Local 3 Event viewer Local y Services Local Using the tree structure in the left most pane expand Component Services to Computer and then to My Computer as shown in the dialog window below t Component Services o File Action view Window Help amp ug ct 9 SA 3 Console Root Component Services 1 objectis ETENIM a Computers Ea E a My Computer Computer COM Applications P DCOM Config Distributed Transaction C C3 Running Processes E E Event viewer Local Kg Services Local Right click My Computer and select Properties The My Computer Properties dialog appears In the Default Properties tab select the default authentication and im personation levels 648 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server My Computer Properties Default Protocols MSDTC COM Securit General Options Default Properties v Enable Distributed COM on this computer Enable COM Internet Services on this computer Default Distributed COM Communicati
394. lose Help Delete The display width of Tag and Description fields is limited by the Documentation Window Column Width variable in the Program Setup dialog box The number of lines of 352 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documentation Window description is also controlled in the Program Setup dialog box The font selected in your program setup will also be used for the tag and description fields This will show the doc umentation as it actually will be displayed in your ladder program NOTE If the font and size selected in the program setup is too large to be represented in the window a standard font will be used When this situation occurs the warning message is dis played The tag and description will NOT be shown in its actual size in this case e Address This box displays the address currently being documented In some sit uations the field can be edited e Prev Doc Click this button to go to the previous documented address e Prev Addr Click this button to go to the previous address whether documented of not e Next Addr Click this button to go to the next address whether documented or not e Next Doc Click this button to go to the next documented address e Tag This field contains the tag for the current address e Description This field contains the description for the current address e Description Comment This field contains the description comment for the cur rent
395. lowing list of the function key alternatives and the CTRL ALT functions are available 254 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Programming Ladder HoT KEYS S onvanpas O De cons vaiaifeunoris man prota v ons vitae nan onpa coim Lo cons vaiaifeunorisim an ompa couma w cons vaiaifeusoris inn pr cola ora vaid E cunoris ia mpoo v eONTACTS Vaiifeunoriinaniopecoumn c CONTACTS Valiifeunorisinaninpsecoumn Diary moreno era org O io io Cona O OO ESC Deletes current address and puts you into edit mode for ad dress Deletes current address and puts you into edit mode for ad dress Greater than or Equal to Relational Contact List mnemonics for current field HOME Moves to column 1 row 1 of current rung 255 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Programming Ladder Pr Nort Reto Comer O 256 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming SF Program and Subroutine Editor SF Program and Subroutine Editor Using the SF Program and Subroutine Editor The SF Program and Subroutine Editor gives you the ability to display access and or mod ify program using special functions To access the Special Function Program Editor 1 Click Special Functions from the View menu ALT V F Special Functions Programs Subroutines Prog Title Enabled Compiled Title Enabled Compiled Protected YES YES gt YES YES YES YES YES YES
396. lp owe ele FTSeccfg PLC Workshop 32 For Modicon Users and Groups 1 505 Workshop PLC WorkShop for SS Performance Series ER SYSTEM NT AUTHORITY er JEFFE DO LL2400 Bemove Help Audit Audit Permissions Category Allow Deny Success Failure Online Online Online Online Online Online Online Online Offline Offline Offline Offline Offline Edit Documentation Offline Memory Configuration General Program Setup General Exit Workshop General K K K al al al al al amp al a I amp KI K S K Security Location Local NUM Configuring Users Groups and Security Audit After having configured security and chosen a server location individual Users Groups of Users and permissions may be set from within the FTSecCfg utility The dialog below will be referenced in this manual with regatds to these features 653 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server or F1SecCfg File Edit View Help tay bel 3 e FTSeccfg PLC Workshop 32 for Modicon Users and Groups 505 Workshop Name Machine Add PLC WorkShop for 55 Performance Series a SYSTEM NT AUTHORITY em JEFFE DO LL2400 Bemow Help Audit Audit Permissions Category Allow Deny Success Failure Edit Online Edit Logic Online E
397. m The V Flags contains the operational data for an analog alarm The V Flags comprises the individual bits making up the 16 bit word The bits are defined as follows 370 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 8 Analog Alarms Analog Parameters 3 1 Process Variable is in high high alarm 4 1 Process Variable is in high alarm 5 1 Process Variable is in low alarm 6 1 Process Variable is in low low alarm 7 1 Process Variable is in yellow deviation alarm 1 Process Variable is in orange deviation alarm 9 1 Process Variable is in rate of change alarm 1 Broken transmitter alarm 1 Analog alarm is over running 1 1 Alatm is enabled 13 16 1 Unused If a word is selected for the analog alarm V Flags bit 12 is written If a C or Y is selected bit 12 is not used NOTE If you program an analog alarm and do not disable it the con troller begins to monitor the programmed variable as soon as you place the controller in Run mode Sample Rate Enter a time in seconds in the Sample Rate box 371 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 8 Analog Alarms Analog Parameters The sample rate determines how often deviation alarm bits and associated math are eval uated Sample rates are programmable in 0 1 second increments with alarms checked at least once every two seconds The sample rate can be any floating point number between 0 1 1 6772 x 106 seconds Process Variable Address E
398. m Low Low 373 388 Bipolar 372 387 Range 372 Processor Faults 304 Processor Status 312 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Profibus Replace Profibus 94 150 160 161 190 193 195 199 201 203 205 207 214 218 220 223 Addressing Bus Parameters COM Profibus Configurator Configuring Device Master Files Diagnostics Editing FMS FMS Network Access Hardware Directory Installing FMS Master Module Network Tree Operations Parameters Printing Slave Using Profibus Operations Program Setup Program Windows Programming Ladder Offline 224 199 220 194 194 214 191 190 207 202 214 223 150 161 203 161 193 214 223 220 192 224 201 94 198 218 221 205 224 144 358 58 245 247 383 247 245 676 Online 245 PID Loops 383 Proportional 404 Q Questions 34 R RAM 317 Ramp Soak 75 81 388 394 397 398 Controlling 398 Editor 398 Exporting 75 Programming 397 R S Programmed 394 Ramp Soak for SP 388 Text File Format 81 Rate Derivative Time 390 Rate of Change Alarm 376 Rate of Change Loop 394 RBC Part Number 321 Read All NOPs 68 Read Only 42 Read Slave Diagnostics 532 533 Real Integer Math 566 Register Values 80 Remote Setpoint 3774 389 Repeater 194 Replace 278 Required Applications 342 Requirements 37 Hardware 37 Reset Coil 426 Reset Immediate Coil 426 Reset Time 390 Restart 313 339 340 Restore 201 222 Retentive Timer On Delay 430 RETURN 593 Return fr
399. m dialog box appears Open Program Program File Address Documentation Path CA ASample 505 Program FSS Advanced EOM LX Sample 505 Program FSS Program Type C Offline Connect to PLC Connection Method TCP IP 505 Simulator Setup MV Use File Associated Connection Settings Options v Transfer Logic to PLC p Cancel 2 Select OK to Transfer 71 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Connecting Online to a 575 When connecting to a 575 controller either from Fast PLC Connect or the Open Program window configure the Application ID and Port Settings before the online connection 1s made Application ID Table x Board Address Type Application ID 01 575 B 10 1 0 32 s 11 140 T6Y s nce Port Settings Help Connect to Application ID Set Current Port ID To connect to a 575 online 1 Type the letter A to Z of the application you want to connect to in the Connect to Application ID box 2 Click Set Current Port ID and then click Connect to go online or double click on the selected Application ID in the list box to go online If a file is being loaded from disk to the controller and the disk file Application ID is dif ferent than the connecting PLC s ID a warning appears describing that the loading file ID is different Select OK to continue the load or Cancel to abort Read
400. m the COM Profibus software you must be running 505 WorkShop and the binary file with its 2BF extension that you created with COM Profibus must be in a known location All device master files GSDs associated with the binary file configuration must be loaded into the Hardware Directory for full editing ca pabilities Follow the steps below to execute 1 Click PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu The PLC Configuration dialog box appears 214 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration m Processor Information r Memory Configuration PLC Type CTI 2500 User System Total System Memory Kbytes 3072 Ladder Kb f 5 48 Configured Memory Kbytes 70 Variable Kb la 4 Remaining Memory Kbytes 3002 Constant Kb o 0 Special Kb a 4 Comp Spec Kb fo 0 1 0 Configuration User Sub Kb JO 0 Global K 5051 0 Find 0_ eR Drums 64 3 Shift Reg K f 1 Table K 2 4 One Shots K f 1 Controls K 32 1 0 K Accept Close Click Profibus I O The Profibus I O dialog box appears mi 2500 0400 Station Type Master DFP 1 0 State Offline Host Type 2500 C400 Master Bus Parameters PROFIBUS Address 1 Station Name Host Name Slaves Slave Name Enabled Assigned Onine Add Slave Dele e Help OK _ Cancel On the Master tab c
401. m the Smart Connect Configurator e Click Module to add a Smart Connect module See Add a Smart Connect Module for additional information about adding Smart Connect modules 226 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration e Click Delete to delete the selected module See Delete a Smart Connect Module for additional information about deleting Smart Connect modules e Click Parameters to specify the parameters of the selected module Not all mod ules have parameters that are modifiable See Smart Connect Module Parameters for additional information about mod ifying the parameters of a Smart Connect module e Enter the Input Offset Output Offset and comments for all of the Smart Con nect modules associated with a slave See Enter Input Offset Output Offset and Comments for more information ADD A SMART CONNECT MODULE To add a Smart Connect module to a slave that supports Smart Connect modules 1 In the Profibus Configurator click a slave that supports Smart Connect See Con figuring and Addressing Profibus I O Modules for additional information about the Profibus Configurator 2 Click Smart Connect to open the Smart Connect Configurator Profibus 1 0 m EE E EE EE EE EE EE EE E EE 8 EE E EE o EE E EE 6 EE E EE 8 EF 8 EEBBEBEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE E im 2500 C300 ag EE EEEEE
402. made between each bit of the each word in the first T1 and the second T2 tables e Each pair of bits is Ored and the resultant bit is placed in the third table TD If either bit is 1 then the resultant bit is set to 1 Otherwise the resultant bit is set to 0 e The bits in all the word of the two tables are Ored each scan e The output is turned on when the instruction is executed Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 T1 Word Address Form A T2 Word Address Form A Word Address Form B Constant Only 1 256 500 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions Table to Table Exclusive Or TXOR The Table to Table Exclusive OR TXOR instruction executes an Exclusive OR on the corresponding bits in two tables and places the results in a specified third table If the bits compared are the same the resultant bit is set to a 0 If the bits compared are different the resultant bit is set to 1 The TXOR instruction is described below e When the input turns on a comparison is made between each bit of each word in the first T1 and the second T2 tables e An Exclusive OR is executed on each pair of bits and the resultant bit is placed in the third table TD If the bits compared are either both 1 or both 0 the resultant bit is set to a 0 If the bits compared are unlike 1 and 0 the resultant bit is set to 1 e An Exclusive OR is executed on
403. may take 1 ms or more when executed by the interpreter Com piled execution of a GOTO statement takes less than 1 microseconds no matter where in the program the LABEL is located This represents a 1 000x im provement e A compiled SF program or subroutine can be executed in line to the user RLL pro gram This means that when the enable input to the SFPGM or SFSUB box instruction is on the program or subroutine is executed immediately and its result is available for use in the next rung of the current RLL scan 9 There are several reasons to choose interpreted mode for a SF program The primary reasons ate as follows e Ifthe program has one or more statements that are not allowed in a compiled pro gram or if it calls a subroutine that is not compiled then it may not be compiled e A compiled program requires both S Memory and Compiled Special CS Memory while an interpreted program requires only S Memory As a rule of thumb the compiled code for a SF program requires twice as much CS Memory as S Memory For example a SF program that uses 1 Kbyte of S Memory also uses 2 Kbytes of CS Memory e A second SF program or subroutine on the same execution queue cannot preempt a compiled SF program or subroutine This may present a scheduling problem for a cyclic loop or analog alarm queue For example if a compiled program is ex ecuting on a loop setpoint a higher priority loop will not execute until the compiled program completes This
404. mber or address For example to jump to network number 103 LAD Network 103 Address 605 ALWAYS ON LS TSFPGM e Network SF Line Number Select this option button and enter the network number if you ate editing ladder logic or the line number if you are editing a Special Function program or subroutine e Network Address Select this option button and enter the ladder memory ad dress where the network is located e Header Keyword Search Use this field to locate a network based on keywords in the header documentation For example to find a network that has to do with a watchdog timer 274 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Finding Logic LAD Network 87 Address 519 aw THIS FREE RUNNING TIMER RESETS C600 EVERY 4 SE IF THE WATCHDOG TIMER TWO NETWORKS DOWN 1 ALWAYS ON N pl SEC TIMER e Find What Select the option button and enter text that appears in the header After finding an item to find the next instance of the item click Find Next from the Edit menu ot click the toolbar icon amp Find Next Click amp on the toolbar ot click Find Next from the Edit menu to find the next oc currence of an addtess ot instruction Find Documentation Use the Find Documentation dialog box to locate documentation e fora particular address e including a particular tag e including a particular description e by keyword where a specific text string appears anywhere in the documentation
405. mbers the first entry before the comma is the channel number The second entry after the channel number and comma is the base number For example In the preceding figure the printout would start at channel 1 Base 0 and end at channel 1 Base 15 The tags and descriptions can be individually turned on or off To include with the PLC Configuration printout select the appropriate check box under Include 94 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs 1 Click the Doc Font button to change the Tag and Description printout font in the active program Result The Font dialog box appears Font Courier New T Courier1 BT Font style Regular s Cancel Ir CourierPS 3 Tr Croobie i E Ty Cushing Hv BT Ir Davida Bd BT Ir Decorated035 BT Effects Strikeout Underline NE Color HB Black Sample Script Westem Vi 2 Choose a new font font style or font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 3 Click OK to save your changes NOTE The print selection options are stored when saving a pro gram Print Registers Click the Register check box from the Print dialog box to print the following e V Memory e K Memory e Register Tags and Descriptions To change the Register properties click the Register button on the Print dialog box The Print Register dialog box appears 95 PLC WorkShop for Siemens
406. memory location for storing the status of forced elements If an element has been forced the element retains that forced status during a power cycle as long as the battery is good 1 1 2 2 3 3 5 5 control 6 6 Force attribute bit relay 7 7 ie ie E g C1 C X C1 C X R 2 11 11 Forcing Discrete Elements To force a discrete element from either the Data Window or Ladder logic editor complete the following steps FROM THE DATA WINDOW e Select the element you want to force and then click Force On or Force Off from the Diagnostics menu or right click and select Force On or Force Off from the shortcut menu The force appears next to the value of the element in the Data Window Value ON D1 Forced C FROM THE LADDER EDITOR e Select the element you want to force and click Force On or Force Off from the Diagnostics menu The force will appear below the element in the ladder diagram Expander Guide Vane Actuator c20 A F Un 291 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Data Window Forcing Word Elements WX and WY word addresses can also be forced to a specified value Click Force Memory from the Diagnostics menu or right click and select Force Memory from the shortcut menu The Force Memory dialog box appeats Force Memory Address Value Cancel Format S16 v Enter the word address to force in the Address box and the value you want to
407. mum PID gain values are determined You can choose to accept the newly calculated gain values or keep the present PID gain settings The SmarTune variable parameters are listed and described in this section Start Variable is the only variable that must be specified It names a discrete variable used to activate a Smar Tune session The others may be null Variable parameters provide the coupling between a PLC program and SmarTune If only Start Variable is specified no program coupling is needed a session begins when Start Var iable becomes true and ends with a loop changing back to its previous mode and SP Since coupling is done with variables any program type may be used to monitor and control Smar Tune relay ladder logic SFPGM or SFSUB The following table lists the variable parameters used by SmarTune The following par agraphs describe the parameters See Variable X Y C WX WY V Abos Vasble XYCWXWYV Ackevaable YCWYV 406 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning METE Ra Y o lt lt Peviows Oumar woa Y reviews Gan Ra Y METE Ra Y y Pevare Ra fv ICAIC Ra Y i ICC Ra Y ores Ra V Start Variable Abort Variable Ack Variable lt lt lt lt lt lt These three discrete variables allow easy activation deactivation via an RLL program as shown below Sta riable AcKV
408. n PY Addr PY Alarm High Lock Cascade Low PY Range PY Alarm Hi Hi Error Operation High PY Range Remote SP Reverse Acting PV Bipolar 20 Offset on PY Sq Root of PV Loop Output Addr KHM z o 4 o Clamp SP Low Monitor Dev Clamp SP High Dev Yellow Alarm Loop Gain Dev Orange Alarm o ls 4 5 LAA Reset Time Monitor Change o 4 Dutput is Bipolar Rate Deriv Time Rate of Change Alarm 20 Offset on Output RS for SP No Deriv Gain Limiting No v Im iv Enable Modify Doc Cancel Freeze Bias No Monitor Broken Xmit 4 NOTE To view ot edit the documentation of a selected PID click Modify Doc Loop Title In the Loop Title box an eight character title can be entered for each specific PID Loop The title is optional and can be left blank PID Algorithm In the PID Algorithm box select the algorithm you want to use e Select Position for the position algorithm For the position algorithm the position of the device being controlled is computed based on the error e Select Velocity for the velocity algorithm The velocity algorithm computes the change in the device position based on the error 384 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Programming PID Loops V Flag Address In the VFlag Addr box enter a C Y V or WY address If you click NONE no data is written from the V Flags in the PID Loop You can still control the loop mod
409. n pg 2 COMI v Serial TIWAY EN c TCP IP EM C FMS EM C H1 OK Cancel 2 Select the appropriate PLC communications that you wish to set up Serial Ports TCP IP TIWAY or Profibus FMS Serial or Modem Communication To configure your serial port or modem connection with a PLC 1 From the Communications Setup dialog box click the Serial Ports button Result TheSerial Port Setup dialog box appeats 150 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Communication Serial Port Setup Serial Port Response T 0 sec Retries Force NITP Dial Modem Cancel Default 2 Select the appropriate setting for each option in the dialog box e Serial Port Location where the serial communication port COM1 COM2 COM3 or COMA is configured for communications You do not select which port to communicate out of at this stage e Response T O sec Specifies the amount of time in seconds that the soft ware waits for a response from the PLC before returning a time out error Any whole number between 5 and 25 can be used e Retries Specifies the number of times the software will try to re establish com munications with the PLC after a time out error Any whole number between 0 and 10 can be used Use 0 for no retties e Dial Modem Selected when the selected form of serial communications is through a modem The modem parameters must be set to exactly the same com munication parame
410. n where n is the number of the parameter in the PGTS e MCRs JMPs and SKPs are effected with subroutines All MCRs and JMPs in a sub routine remain active after a RTN if the instruction within the SBR do not turn them off before the RTN MCRs and JMPs that are active at the time that the sub routine is called remain active while the SBR is executing A SKP LBL pair must be defined within the same SBR or a compile error occuts Subroutine Constant 1 255 GTS Number 1 32 PGTS or PGTSZ Do not use the same subroutine number more than once Assign the same subroutine number mote than once can cause un predictable machine operation 515 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions Skip SKP The SKP and LBL instructions provide a means of enabling or disabling program segments during a scan These instructions are often used when duplication of outputs is required and those outputs are controlled by different logic These instructions can be used to de crease scan time since the interactions between any active SKP and LBL instructions are not executed The SKP and LBL support the following features e The SKP and LBL instruction must be used together The LBL must appear be fore the instruction that terminates the current program segment TASK END RTN A SKP without a LBL generates a compile error e Ifyou use RLL subroutines you can use up to 255 SKP LBL instruction
411. n address used in a particular type of instruction set both the Register Ad dress and the Instruction Type e Register Address Enter the register or bit address or valid tag to search for Tim ers and counters are stored in TCC registers e Instruction Type or Instruction and Number Enter the instruction type to seatch for If the instruction type includes a reference number a number may be ap pended to the instruction For example to search for any SFPGM block set this field to SFPGM To seatch for the SFPGM 20 block set this field to SFPGM20 e Global Ladder SFP SFS Select this check box to search the entire program the ladder and all Special Function Programs and Subroutines e Search Wrap If this box is selected and the item being searched for is not found before the end of the current program area the ladder logic if you are editing ladder logic or the current SFP or SFS if you are editing SF the search continues from the start of the current program atea e Search from Beginning Search from Current Position If the Search from Current Po sition option button is selected the search begins at the cursor location Otherwise the search begins at the start of the program atea e Go to Use these fields to jump directly to a known location in the current program area the ladder logic if you are editing ladder logic or the current SFP or SFS if you ate editing SF Select the option button and enter the network line nu
412. n the clipboard Paste Inserts clipboard contents into the doc umentation window at the start and end address Delete Removes selected contents from the doc umentation window The clipboard referred to in the preceding list is the standard Windows clipboard Refer to your Windows User s Guide for more information Cut To use the cut feature 354 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documentation Window 1 Click on the toolbar or click Cut from the Edit menu The Cut Range dialog box appears Enter the start and ending address to cut in the from and to boxes If tags ate to be cut with the address the Include Tags check box must be selected Cut Addresses icu ez Cancel to C4 iv Include Tags 2 Click OK and the selected range of addresses ate cut out of the Documentation Win dow and placed into the clipboatd Copy To use the copy features E 1 Click on the toolbar or click Copy from the Edit menu The Copy Range di alog box appears Enter the starting and ending addresses to copy in the from and to boxes If tags are to be copied with the address the Include Tags check box must be selected Copy Range Copy Addresses mem far Cancel to C4 Include Tags 2 Click OK and the selected range of address are copied from the Documentation Window and placed into the clipboard Paste To access the paste feature 355 PLC WorkShop for Siemens
413. n the Soak Time box You can guarantee a soak period by en tering a deadband value you can enter a deadband in the Deadband box This form of soaking ensures that the PV is within a specified deadband around the set point for a specified period of time e An End step terminates a ramp soak profile When the program reaches an end step the loop remains in automatic mode and holds the set point constant 401 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning Overview of SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning SmarTune is an automatic PID loop tuning process that is built into the new SIMATIC 555 CPUs with Release 5 0 or greater firmware SmarTune temporarily puts a loop into manual mode It makes a selectable change to a loop s output Mn to cause a process variable PV movement towatd the center of the PV span Resultant PV changes are sampled After sampling criteria is met sampled values are used to calculate theoretical optimum gain Kc reset Ti and rate Td Theoretical op timums are converted to pragmatic optimums by a heuristic and assigned The loop is switched to its previous mode and its previous set point SP is re assigned Only one SmarTune session is in progress at a time Other requests are automatically queued A SmarTune queue can hold all possible entries Each entry is processed in the order requested A session may be aborted at any time whether
414. n the input is on the DIV instruction is executed IF B is non zero the division is done and the output is turned on Otherwise the output is turned off and the contents of R and R 1 do not change 482 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Math and Logic Instructions Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Constant 0 32767 Number A Word Address or Form A or Constant Constant 32768 32767 Wotd Address ot Form A ot Constant Constant 32768 32767 rR Word Address FomB B Absolute Value ABS The absolute value instruction calculates the absolute value of a signed integer When the input is turned ON 1 the absolute value instruction is executed If the input is OFF 0 the instruction is not executed and there is not power at the output The absolute value function is executed with the parameter A as follows e If A gt 0 A is not changed e If 32768 lt A lt 0 A is replaced with the value 0 A e If A 32768 A does not change Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Parameter A Word Address Square Root SQRT The Square Root instruction SQRT finds the integer square root of a 32 bit Ing word positive integer stored in memory locations AA and AA 1 The result is stored in mem ory location B The SQRT instruction has the following properties e Ifthe result of the square root is not an integer the SQRT reports only the integer portion of the r
415. n to completion in a sin gle scan Other functions perform communication sequences or complex mathematical operations that require extended period multiple PLC scans to complete The CFUNC in struction does not support automatic cyclic operation based on a user specified time interval If operation on a specific time interval is desired the user must use a timer and manually trigger the instruction from RLL The CFUNC instruction number CFUNC specifies the function to be called It is pos sible for the user to place multiple instances of the same CFUNC instruction in the RLL program and run them concurrently Therefore each instance of the instruction must have a unique instance ID and executes independently The number of instances for a given CFUNC will depend upon the requirements of the given CFUNC 536 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Address Constant Forms Table Address Constant Forms Table The following are valid address types based on address form and PLC type Constant 520 Form 530 520C 525 530C 535 560 565 560T 565T 545 555 575 Form CX 0 0 32737 255 Address Form Form B 560 565 560T 565T WY V TCP TCC DSP DCP DSC DCC W Y C V WY B W DCC TCP TCC 537 WY V TCP TCC DSP DCP DSC DCC W Y C V WY B W DCC TCP TCC WX WY V TCP TCC STW DSP DCP DSC DCC K W G VMM VMS WY V TCP
416. n your process and take any nec essary safeguards if you choose to update your bus configuration or add and modify slave devices while your Profibus communications are in Operate mode 225 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Working with Smart Connect Modules SMART CONNECT CONFIGURATOR Click Smart Connect on the Slave tab of the Profibus Configurator to open the Smart Connect Configurator For more information on accessing the Slave tab see S ave Tab The following information is displayed in the Smart Connect Configurator ET200L SC xj SmartConnect module addresses are zero based offsets from the Analog SC and Digital SC addresses entered on the slave configuration tab Module Dutput Offset Module BES 121 1FA00 04401DI AC Delete BES 122 1BB 0 0440 2DO DC24V 00 0 BES 121 1FA00 04401DI AC Parameters BES 122 1HA00 0440 1D0 relay Ium Secondary slot BES 124 1FA00 0AB0 140 10V Secondary slot Identifies the slot on the terminal block where the Smart Connect module is located The name of the SmartConnect module Input Off The amount of the input offset based on the address for set the slave displayed on the Slave tab Output The amount of the output offset based on the address for Offset the slave displayed on the Slave tab An optional user defined comment You can perform the following actions fro
417. nabled indicates which step the drum is currently execut ing When Ladder Status is enabled indicates the count of the step the drum is currently executing 447 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums EVENT USE STEP Relationship Table When the And the USE EVENT is STEP is 1 The step is not executed the drum remains on the The Result is The step is executed and the drum proceeds to the next step e The MegaEDRUM uses the same Start Jog and Enable Reset inputs as the EDRUM instruction e Like the EDRUM instruction the MegaEDRUM enables its output when the last programmed step has executed e Although WorkShop does store C registers in the offline program WorkShop does not load C registers when loading a program online For this reason if C registers are used for any drum parameters these values must be initialized using one of the following methods Write ladder logic to programatically initialize the discrete data tables Configure an HMI to load the instruction initialization into the con troller once a program has been loaded Manually configure the data once a program has been loaded using the Data Window or a pinning chart for example An example pinning chart is provided See Use a Pinning Chart to Enter Data for MEDRM on page 449 for additional information Warning Do not use the same reference number more than
418. nce you have added all your GSD files click the Close button in the Hardware Directory to return to the Profibus Configurator With the Master module the PLC selected click the Merge button and navigate to the location of the binary file 2BF created in step 3 above By default COM Profibus saves the file in the C SIEMENS CPBV51 data directory Select the bi nary file and click the Open button to begin the merge process If during the merge process the configurator finds a module that does not quite match the information in the GSD a dialog will appear that allows you to select the module that best represents your hardware Select the appropriate module from the list to continue WorkShop then displays the results of the merge Configure the I O addresses of your slave modules by following the directions in Configuring and Addressing Profibus I O Modules Complete the configuration by clicking OK in the Profibus Configurator display and saving the program file The Profibus configuration is also saved with the program file Following these steps will ensure that your Profibus configuration can be completely edited and updated on demand when necessary If you cannot complete a certain step in this process for example you no longer have access to the exact GSD file s that were used to create your configuration in COM Profibus and therefore cannot add them to the Hardware Directory you may still be able to merge your configu
419. nd logs the event to a text file If any unsupported information 1s found a warning message appeats al lowing you to view the event log for more details about the problem In most cases the device is still added to the Hardware Directory with any unsupported features ignored Contact your device manufacturer for more information 7 Once the file is added you can select the device from the Hardware Directory and click the Add Slave button to add the device to the configuration or click Remove Hardware to delete the device Migrating from COM Profibus to the Profibus Configurator With the Profibus Configurator you no longer have create and manage your Profibus con figurations using the COM Profibus configuration utility However if you ate used to using COM Profibus there are a few things to keep in mind while migrating from COM Profibus to the WorkShop Profibus Configurator The following guide will help you understand the differences between the two utilities and ease your transition to the new process Please note that an alternative to this process is to reconfigure your Profibus network di rectly within the WorkShop Profibus Configurator See Using the Profibus Configurator 211 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration What You ll Need A licensed copy of PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Version 4 30 or higher ThePLC WorkShop program file FSS that will co
420. nd press ENTER If you forget an instruction mnemonic type a question mark and press ENTER The following mnemonic pick list will be displayed Pick the mnemonic you desire by double clicking on the mnemonic or arrow to the mnemonic and press ENTER The mnemonic pick list will also display if an illegal mnemonic is entered Mnemonics BITC BITP BITS CBD CDB DCMP DIV DRUM DSET EDRM GEQ GTR GTS IMC IDR LDA LDC LEQ LESS LOCK MDRD MDRW MIRFT MIRTT MIRW MWFT Mw MWIR MWTT NC NOI NOP NOT 05 OTI PGTS PGTZ PID RSD RST SET SETI SFPGM SFSUB SHRB SQRT SSI STFE STFN SUB TCPL TEXT TMR TMRF TOR UDC UNLCK WAND WOR WROT WTTxd WOR SUB OK Cancel Help 3 The following is a list of all 505 ladder instruction mnemonics Mnemonic Instruction 250 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Programming Ladder Mnemonic Instruction indexed by timer event or timer and event IMC Compares status of discrete points with a specified bit pattern in a set of patterns IORW Does immediate read ot write to discrete ot word I O Freezes outputs in zone of control JMPE Freezes outputs in zone of control iM Selectively enable disable program segments during scan Copies the logical address of a memory location into a memory location pee Copies the logical address of a memory location into a memory location Less than or equal to Used together with UNLOCK and provide a mech anism whereby multiple ap
421. nd the scan continues e When an application program attempts to acquire control of the lock the value in AA and AA 1 is examined If this value indicates that the lock is free control of the lock passes to the inquiring application program the output is turned on and RLL execution continues at the next network e When an application program obtains control of the lock the LOCK instruction in crements the value of a lock unlock counter The UNLCK instruction decrements the lock unlock count when an application program relinquished con trol of a lock If the counter is not equal to zero at the end of the RLL scan Bit 6 in STWO1 is set to 1 and a value of 3 is written to STW200 Reference Constant 0 32767 Number Constant time in ms 0 3276 7 Only i Word Address V G W V G W doesn t work Must be 2 words t V G W doesn t work Must be 2 words Must be 2 words Unlock Memory UNLCK The UNLCK instruction works with the LOCK instruction to provide a means in which multiple application in the TI575 coordinate access to shared resources generally G mem oty data blocks UNLCK Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Constant 0 32767 Number Word Address V G W doesn t work Must be 2 words AA 531 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Special Instructions Read Slave Diagnostic RSD Description The Read Slave Diagnostic instruction transfers a PROFIBUS
422. ne toss 310 12 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents SW6 Program Port Selection 050 Ln es 310 SW 7 OW UL Reserved src ss E PEA ceed 311 SW12 Firmware Upc rU 311 Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays uan acid SE diee ete ti 312 Displaying Processor Status 2 0 0 0 0 02 cece ec ec ec ee tees ec ec ee eeeeeeeeeees 312 PEG Operations cts lle dl EG lial 313 Changing Ladder Mode a i822 Cos e ON 314 Changing Loop Mode ose teen etel piRnn 315 Run Controllet DIAeBosties iis doors dica tai 316 Programming ERPROMS e Bees eset er ee sok UA aes 317 Programming Port Lockout 0 020202cececcecec ec ec ee eceeeeecenees 317 System Part NBIBBGE AMA AAA 318 Performing Syntax A A Ae NN LL Md 318 Ladder Status Online rencoroso eoe OOo erac ede bo eodd 319 Initiating a Single AA eR D SEE 320 RBG Patt NG bei x esas sess ns ere lA IIa E tA e ALLE CEA A AR ESSN 321 Task Codes Pet Statt siu eae oed erobert ia 321 Drionostics AAA A asar t eaa E 322 lali Te AAA AAO A A RAINE E E 323 Password A END EN 324 Password Operational Modess ci sic oh ux ee a 325 PEC P ssword Ali s ensenen eon i O R S 333 Powering Up Restarting the Controller 339 ns aU ean moe On DER DER IU Rt Mp See Re Ree ES 339 213 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents Partal Restar cash ne ai tea Sc c ICI UD col eh 339 Complete Re tasa is ten dea Uo Mussa deat te fet 340 AA A A Ee EER NT 341 Selecting 575 Application A A
423. ned integer in memory location A and stores the result in memory location C When the input has power the instruction is executed The operation executed is C A B If the result is less than or equal to 32767 or greater than or equal to 32767 the out put is turned on Otherwise the output is turned off and the truncated 16 bit result is stored in R Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Constant 0 32767 Number Word Constant Form A or Constant 32768 32767 481 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Math and Logic Instructions Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Word Constant Form A ot Constant 32768 32767 Word Address Address FomB B Multiply MUL The Multiply MUL instruction multiplies a signed integer in location A by a signed in teger in location B The product is stored in on long word R and R When power is passed to the input of the MUL the instruction is executed The MUL op erates as follows e The values in A and B are not affected by the operation e When the multiplication is executed the output is turned on MULT Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number 0 32767 Word Constant Form A or Constant 32768 32767 Divide DIV The Divide Instruction DIV divides a 32 bit signed word integer stored in A and A 1 by a 16 bit signed integer in B The quotient is stored in R and the remainder is stored in R 1 Whe
424. ned on e Ifthe input is off the GT and LT coils are turned off Parameter Type Valid Settings Reference Number Number Constant 0 32767 32767 474 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Compare Instructions Parameter Type Valid Settings Indexed Matrix Compare IMC The Indexed Matrix Compare IMC instruction compares a predefined 15 bit mask pattern to the status of up to 15 discrete points The mask to be compared is selected from a field of up to 16 masks by the step number currently located in Cur Ptr If a match is found the output is turned on The IMC instruction is described as follows e The Enable input must be on for the instruction to be executed e When Enable is ON and the Start input is turned on the instruction is executed e The current status of up to 15 X Y and C points is checked against the predefined bit pattern identified by the step number loaded into Cur Ptr e Ifa match is found the box output is turned on e If no match is found and the Start input remains on the IMC checks the step se lected by the Cur Ptr on every scan e Ifthe Cur Ptr value is out of range the controller automatically writes 16 to the Cur Ptr address This means that mask 16 is used anytime the Cur Ptr is out of range Parameter Type Valid Settings Reference Number 0 32767 CUR PTR Word Address 475 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructi
425. new page The intent is to keep the entire netwotk on one page whenever possible The Ladder Display Size determines the Column width Description rows and Tag row size Column Width adjusts the size of the ladder grid Click the up or down atrow 89 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs ot enter a value between 7 24 Description Rows determines the number of character rows displayed for each description Click the up or down atrow or type in a value between 1 12 Tag Rows determines the number of character rows displayed for each tag Click the up or down atrow or type in a value between 1 4 The SF Display Size determines the Instruction width Column One width and Col umn Two width Instruction Width determines the width allocated for display of Special Function instructions on each line Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 80 Column One Width determines the width allocated for display of SF first column variables after the instruction Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 300 Column Two determines the width allocated for display of SF second column var iables after the instruction Click the up or down arrow or type in a value between 1 300 The ladder grid addresses tags descriptions and headers can all individually be turned on ot off to be included with ladder printout To include with the ladder print out select the approp
426. ng procedure to import documentation RAMP SOAK steps or V and K register values 1 Click Import from the File menu Import Components Selection 505 WorkShop documentation fss File name Include Browse Iw Tags Iv Descriptions Delimiter C C Cancel iv Desc Comments Headers 2 Select the type of import from the Selection list The options are e 505 WorkShop documentation fss Import the documentation information di rectly from another 505 WorkShop logic program file e Documentation to delimited text file txt csv Import documentation from a text file See Addtess Documentation Text File Format for details e RAMP SOAK Steps to delimited text file txt csv Import RAMP SOAK information from a text file See Ramp Soak Text File Format for details Information can only be exported for one loop at a time but information for many loops can be imported in one step e V amp K Register values from delimited text file txt csv Import V and K register values from a text file See Register Value Text File Format for details 3 Type the name of the file to import in the File Name box or click Browse to browse for the file to import 4 Under Include select the components to import 5 Under Delimiter select the type of delimiter used in the file 74 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Items that can be imported
427. ng the number of columns rep resenting output coils It can also be made smaller by decreasing the number of rows representing steps The pinning chart uses column headings to indicate the number of columns used to rep resent output coils The pinning chart uses row headings to indicate the number of rows used to represent steps To match how the MegaEDRUM instruction works the pinning chart can only be modified in increments of 16 For this reason you must add or remove column headings in every 16h column You must add ot remove row headings in every 16 row MAKE THE PINNING CHART LARGER To modify the pinning chart so it represents a MegaEDRUM instruction greater than 16 x 16 type the next 16 based threshold values in the appropriate column and row headings These columns and rows ate shaded so they are easily identified Continue entering values in every 16 column and row heading until the pinning chart matches the size of the Meg aEDRUM instruction you are using For example to represent a 32 x 32 MegaEDRUM instruction type 32 in the next shaded column and in the next shaded row To represent a 48 x 48 MegaEDRUM instruction type 32 in the first empty shaded column and row then type 48 in the next empty shaded col umn and row This process can be repeated all the way up to the maximum size of the MegaEDRUM instruction 128 x 128 Enter the next 16 based threshold in the shaded These numbers are optional columns to specify
428. nique interrupt address 3 4 5 6 Select dual port ram address Install TF 1413 or TF 1613 software drivers using Simatic Net Software CD Configure the CP 1413 or 1613 hardware and software using COML TF and Set ting the PG PC Interface from Siemen s Simatic Net Software CD Access H1 Devices Using 505 WorkShop To access the H1 network with 505 WorkShop 1 2 3 4 From the File menu chose Fast PLC Setup Select H1 from the Fast PLC Connection Setup dialog box Click OK on the Setup dialog box From the File menu chose Fast PLC Connection H1 communications can also be established via open program Result The H1 Network Names screen appears Select a node name These are the node names you configured using the COML TF software prior to rebooting Using the arrow keys or mouse select an H1 network node name and click OK Result 505 WorkShop is online 152 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Communication H1 Network Access Path Description Main Building Building 2 Cancel NOTE The CP1413 and CP1613 drivers do not run in protected mode When using either of these drivers only one ap plication may be used at a time TIWAY Using TIWAY There ate two versions of the host adapter hardware for TIWAY TIWAY I Host Adapter and UNILINK M NOTE Since the Network Interface Module NIM does not sup port some task codes when the controller i
429. nitor Change box click Yes to have the controller monitor the rate of change Rate of Change Loop In the Rate of Change Alarm box enter a value in engineering units for the rate of change alarm Monitor Broken Transmitter Alarm In the Monitor Broken Xmit box click Yes to have the controller monitor the Broken Transmitter Alarm Click No if the controller will not monitor the Broken Transmitter Alarm If you program the controller to monitor for the broken transmitter condition an alarm oc curs if the raw process variable is outside the valid range designated for the process variable Valid ranges are e Bipolar 32000 32000 e 0 offset 0 32000 e 20 offset 6400 32000 R S Programmed The R S Programmed check box is a read only value that indicates if a ramp soak pro gram exists for the loop e Ifthe R S Programmed check box is selected a ramp soak program exists for the loop e Ifthe R S Programmed check box is cleared a ramp soak does not exist for the loop 394 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Programming PID Loops To create a ramp soak profile for a loop exit the PID Loop Edit window and click the Ramp Soak on the PID Loop Directory dialog box 395 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Deleting a PID Loop Deleting a PID Loop 1 To delete a PID Loop click PID Loop from the View menu or press ALT V P The PID Loop Directory dialog box appear
430. nlet Valve Open D Ethernet Card Configure Del Shutdown Reset Delay Timer Expander Inlet Valve Open D The window shows documented addresses in the current program The window can be con figured to show tags and or descriptions as well using the Program Setup dialog box The information displayed in the documentation window can be sorted according to the ad dress tag or description The default sort order is specified in the Program Setup dialog box It can also be sorted by the clicking the column headet NOTE Only one 1 documentation window can be displayed per program 350 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Documentation Window The window also can be sized and moved to another location within the viewing area using the standard window features Customizing the Display The Documentation Window can be customized to display tags descriptions or both tags and descriptions The default sorting method can also be customized Documentation can be sorted by address by tag or by description To change the display 1 Click Program Setup from the Options menu or press ALT O P 2 Click the Documentation Window tab 3 Under Column Display e Select the Include Tabs check box to include tags in the documentation win dow e Select the Include Descriptions check box to include descriptions in the doc umentation window 4 Under Sort Order e Select the A
431. npredictable operations Counter CTR The Counter instruction CTR an up counter counts recurring events The counter out put is turned on after the counter has counted up to a preset value 430 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums The counter counts up to the preset value specified in Preset which is stored in the TCP memory The current count is stored in TCC memory The counter has these properties The Enable Reset must be on for the counter to operate e When the Enable Reset is ON the counter is incremented by one each time the Counter input transitions from off to on Counting begins at zero 0 and continues to the preset value specified by Preset If the Enable Reset is turned off the count is reset to zero e TCC is saved if the Enable Reset input is on and loss of power occurs provided the controller battery backup is enabled e The output is turned on when the current count equals the preset count specified by Preset If the Enable Reset does not receive poser flow the instruction is not executed and the output does not turn on COUNTER UP COUNTER PRESET 567 OUTPUT STATUS UNPROT Counter Constant Depends on configured quantities Number Max 128 Counts to this value 0 32767 Do not use the same reference number more than once for timer counter up down amp Warning counter and discrete motor control alarm timer
432. ns of the 21 CFR Part 11 Standard To electronically sign the active WorkShop program 1 Clickthe button on the FTVersionTraktoolbar The Sign Document dialog box appeats 128 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak Sign Document File g 575 FSS Username THOMAS 2800 Thomas Password State Initial Comment Cancel 2 The File and Username boxes contain the selected file and current user respectively Type the current user s password in the Password text box 3 Select the current version state of the file from the State box and type any comments in the Comment box Comments ate optional 4 Click OK when finished to return to the main window Launching FTVersionTrak Some version control tasks cannot be performed using the FTVersionTrak toolbar These tasks may include Getting repository files for the first time Renaming repository files Deleting repository files Moving and sharing repository files Setting up server and repository security 129 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak a Setting up and viewing audit logs Scheduling automated tasks You must perform these types of functions in the stand alone FTVersionTrak application To launch FTVersionTrak from within WorkShop 1 Click the B button on the FTVersionTrak toolbar The FTVersionTrak ap plication a
433. ns are available for reading only The LOCK instruction does not specify the G memory locations that are protected nor does the LOCK actually prevent an application from reading or writing to these memory lo cations You should write your programs so that the G memory locations are protected when you gain control of a LOCK When you program an exclusive lock no other ap plication program can acquire control of the lock When you program a shared lock more than one application program can acquire control of the lock Use these capabilities in pro grams that update the shared resource protected by the lock In order to use a lock properly follow these steps e AA and AA 1 must be initialized to 0 prior to the first time e When the input is on the application attempts to acquire the lock If the lock is not available the application continues to attempt acquisition of the lock until the lock is acquired or the specified time out has expired A value of 0 for T results in 530 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Special Instructions a single attempt to obtain the lock A value of 3276 7 indicates that the ap plication should try until it obtains the lock or the scan watchdog fatal error occuts e If an application obtains the lock before the time out expires the output is turned on and the scan continues e If the time out expires before the application obtains the lock the output is turned off a
434. ntain the Profibus configuration Thelatest device description files GSD for each Profibus slave device on your net work referto the device manufacturer forthe latest GSD file s for your devices The latest version v5 1 of the COM Profibus configuration utility included with your WorkShop installation The COM Profibus configuration file PB5 that contains the configuration to be merged into WorkShop If available the COM Profibus binary file 2BF generated from the latest COM Profibus configuration this file can be created within COM Profibus at any time see below for details NOTE Before you begin please note that saving your PLC Work Shop program file FSS in WorkShop Version 4 30 or higher will permanently alter the file in a manner that will make it no longer accessible in WorkShop versions prior to 4 30 It is suggested that you create a backup copy of your program file in case you need to access it with an older ver sion of the software 1 Within the COM Profibus utility open the configuration file PB5 that will be merged into WorkShop 2 Click Station List from the Documentation menu This will provide you with a list of all the devices on your Profibus network along with the GSD files associated with each device Printing this list may be helpful during and after the configuration merge 3 In the graphical bus display select the master device the PLC and click File click Export and then c
435. ntation that is exported is saved in the following format When importing address documentation the software expects the same format Fields are separated by either tab characters or commas at user option T PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Address Tag The first The sec field con ond tains the field PLC address contains being doc umented the tag If there is no tag the field is empty For example the text file line C6 TAG Description Line 1 Description Line 2 DescCom Description Comment Description The third field con tains the first line of the description If there is no de scription the field is empty If the description contains multiple lines each line is stored in a fol lowing field The second line of the description would be in the fourth field and so on This applies only when there are hard line breaks if the text is wrapped automatically be cause it is too long to display in one line it is stored in one wide field Line 1 Description Comment Line 2 describes the following documentation 78 Description Com ment If there is a de scription comment the field after the last description field contains a marker DescCom Each line of the de seription comment occupies a following field PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Edit Documen
436. nted to specify 1000000000000001 as an output mask you would need to specify a starting C V or K bit address You would then need to make sure these addresses contained the correct values For example if you specified V1 1 as the starting MASK address in the MegaEDRUM instruction V1 1 and V1 16 would need to be 1 V1 2 V1 15 would need to be left blank to represent 0 The pinning chart provides an easy way to enter the correct values into the specified ad dresses required by the MegaEDRUM instruction For example you can specify an output mask of 1000000000000001 in the pinning chart by modifying the cells that represent the corresponding addresses If your MegaEDRUM instruction consists of 16 output coils and you designated V1 1 as the starting MASK address the cells representing V1 1 and V1 16 must contain 1 the cells representing V1 2 V1 15 must be blank to represent 0 Mask a Figure 1 An output mask of 1000000000000001 represented in the pinning chart 449 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums In its default state the pinning chart represents a MegaEDRUM instruction consisting of a 16 x 16 matrix of coils and steps The pinning chart can be used to represent any supported size of the MegaEDRUM instruction however from 16 x 16 up to the maximum of 128 x 128 In the pinning chart output coils addresses ate represented by columns and steps ate
437. ntegers two unsigned in tegers ot two floating point values and energizes the output if and only if the first value A is less than the second value B Data Type not INT integer Identifies the type of labelled located in UINT unsigned integer data being compared top tight corner of in the instruction instruction block FLOAT floating point values block Note Floating point values are only compatible with the CTI 2500 family of proc essors and a CPU firmware of V6 18 or later 467 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Compare Instructions for all data types INT Memory location of UINT and FLOAT the the value being following word address types compared WX WY K V STW W TCP TCC DCC DSP DSC DCP and constants for FLOAT data type only the following Real address types are also available WX WY K V and Real constants Constants and Real Constants available only for the B parameter Notes e Integers that are compared with floating point values are converted to floating point values before the comparison is executed e The values of the A and B parameters are displayed when Ladder Status is enabled See Ladder Status Online on page 379 for more information on Ladder Status Input When the input is enabled the LESS instruction is executed When the input is disabled the LESS instruction is not executed Output The output is enabled
438. nter Preset TCP data and Timer Counter Current TCC data When you designate a preset value for one of the instructions in this group this value is stored as a 16 bit word in TCP Memotry When the instruction is actually op erating the current time or count is stored as a 16 bit word in TCC Memory 179 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Controller Memory Types Table Move Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for the operation of the table move in structions including the following e Move Word To Table MWTT e Move Word From Table MWFT When you assign a number to a table move instruction be sure that you do not use that number for any other table move instruction For example if you configure a Move Word To Table 1 MWTT1 do not configure a Move Word From Table 1 MWFT1 Assigning the same reference number to mote than one table move instruction could cause unpredictable operation by the con troller which could result in death ot serious injury to personnel and or damage to equip ment Do not use the same reference number more than once for a table move instruction This memory type consists of one word per table move instruction configured This word is used to maintain the current count of moves done since the MWTT or MWFT in struction was last reset One Shot Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for the o
439. nter a V WX or WY address in the PV Addr box A process variable must be specified for each analog alarm The process variable can be taken from the following e Aword input or output module The programming table uses a WX or WY address e Alocation in V Memory The programming table uses an address in V Memory Ifyouselect NONE the analog alarm does not read an address to obtain the Process Variable Low Process Variable Range Enter the low value of the process variable in the Low PV Range box You must specify the engineering values that correspond to the lower range of the input span High Process Variable Range Enter the high value of the process vatiable in the High PV Range box You must specify the engineering values that correspond to the upper range of the input span Process Variable Bipolar Click YES or NO in the PV Bipolar box to specify if the analog inputs are bipolar Bipolar inputs have spans of 5 5 volts or 10 10 volts 372 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 8 Analog Alarms Analog Parameters 20 Offset Click Yes or No in the 20 Offset on PV box to indicate if a 20 offset should be used A span of 0 5 0 volts 0 20 milliamps is referred to as a span of 0 100 A span of 1 5 0 volts 4 20 milliamps is referred to as a span of 20 100 20 off set on the process vatiable Square Root of Process Variable Click Yes in the Sq Root of PV box if th
440. nues program execution at a specified LABEL statement The GOTO and the LABEL statements are always used together The format of the two state ments is shown below Label Cancel Help Label Cancel Help Label the label can range from 0 to 65535 The valid field descriptor is an in teger literal constant Goto Label Operation When the Special Function program encounters the GOTO program execution continues at the specified label Label 37415 below exists on line 11 and is referenced by the GOTO statement on line 7 If V100 is less than 1000 program execution continues at line 11 Otherwise program ex ecution continues wherever the program encounters label 38000 V100 V500 V100 lt 1000 LABEL 37415 LABEL 38000 LABEL 37415 V100 V465 K99 Goto Label Statement Operation Example 557 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Go To Label GOTO LABEL NOTE Do not repeat label definitions or leave a label undefined To do so may cause the controller to enter FATAL ERROR mode freeze analog outputs and turn off discrete outputs Ensure all labels have unique definitions 558 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions If Functions IF IIF THEN ELSE ENDIF If Functions IF IIF THEN ELSE ENDIF The IF or IIF Integer IF statement is used for the conditional execution of statements Condition TCC2 20 Cancel Condit
441. number NOTE The individual I O module can be displayed with its as sociated Slot number Tag and Description by clicking Expanded Definition on the Edit I O base dialog box 3 Select the slot you want to configure then click Edit Slot or press ENTER Result The Edit I O Slot dialog box appears 188 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration I O Configuration Edit 1 0 Slot Edit Slot Slot 140 Address Num of Bits Num of Y Bits Num of Ws words 0 Num of WY Words 0 Special Fn C Yes No OK Cancel a 4 Enter the beginning I O address 5 Enter the number of I O points X Y WX or WY required for the type of module being configured 6 Ifa special function module is to be configured select the Yes button under Spe cial Fn 7 Click OK The Edit I O Base dialog box becomes the active dialog box 8 To accept the changes click Accept on Edit I O Base dialog box NOTE If you are online and have not yet accepted the changes to the base you can click Read I O Base on the Edit I O Base dialog box to reset the base display to the readings in the controller All prior changes will be lost Clearing a Base I O Configuration 1 Start from Edit I O Base dialog box 2 Click on the Clear Base button on the Edit I O Base dialog box You have finished setting up the software and the hardwate The next step is programming The Programming chapter discusses 505 Wo
442. o Binary Instruction CDB converts a BCD element into its integer equivalent When the input is O the CDB instruction is executed The CDB operation is described below e The number of digits N of the BCD value located in BCD is converted to its equivalent binary integer value stored in BIN e N may range from 1 4 and the BCD digit count is from right to left For example if N 2 and the BCD number is A 1234 then 34 is converted and the value stored in B is 00100010 e The output is turned on after the instruction is executed if the digits of the input words ate valid Each digit of the BCD value in BCD must be less than or equal to 9 The binary values 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 and 1111 are invalid Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Parameter BCD Word Address Parameter BIN BIN Word Address Address FomB B E Number of m con vetted 1 4 Word And WAND The Word AND WAND instruction logically ANDs a word in memory location A with a wotd in memory location B bit for bit The result is stored in memory location C When the input is on the instruction is executed If the input remains on the instruction is executed on every scan The WAND has the following properties e The word stored in the memory location specified by A is AND with the word stoted in the memory location B The operation is done bit by bit The words in A and B are not affected by the WAND instruction and will retains their original valu
443. o change the Header font in the active program Result The Font dialog box appears Font Font style Courier New T Courier10 BT Y CourierPS T Croobie Ip Cushing Hv BT Davida Bd BT Tr Decorated035 BT Effects Strikeout Underline AaBbYyZz Color Black Script Westem E 2 Choose a font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 3 Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to cancel changes Result The All Alarms dialog box appears NOTE The print selection options are stored when saving a pro gram 93 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Print PLC Configuration Click the PLC Configuration check box from the Print dialog to print the following e 505 Channel Base e Profibus DP Slave I O e PLC Memory Configuration e I O Tags and Descriptions To change the PLC Configuration properties click the PLC Configuration button on the Print dialog box The Print PLC Configuration dialog box appeats Print PLC Configuration Configuration Print All Include iv lw 505 Channel Base J to Tags M Y ProfibusDP Slave 7 t M Descriptions lv Memory Save as Defaults Restore Defaults Doc Font te ca c Select the All check box to print the entire range of items To print a selection clear the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box When entering a range for channel and base nu
444. o the table e Loop Number specifies the number of the loop to be accessed The Loop Number range is from 1 to the maximum number of loops Valid desctiptors are in teger addresses or values any integer value or address containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 e Parameters specifies the loop variables Up to eight variables can be designated Valid descriptors are integer or real loop variable elements writeable if reading from the table See the table below for the loop variables Loop Variables LACK Alatm Acknowledge 581 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Loop Data PACKLOOP Variables with an asterisk can be either a real number or an integer Var iables followed by a period are real numbers Variables not followed by a period are integers When you execute PACKLOOP using real numbers two memory locations are allocated for each real number 582 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Loop Data PACKLOOP PACKLOOP Operation When the PACKLOOP statement executes the following actions occur e Fora TO Table the value of the loop variable specified in Parameters is written into the table at the Table Address e If additional variables are specified the second variable is written to Table Ad dress 1 the third to Table Address 2 and so on up to eight variables e Fora FROM Table PACKLOOP writes the word in th
445. oard port for communication with a PLC 1 From the Communications Setup dialog box click the TCP IP button Result The Settings for the TCP IP Setup dialog box appear 158 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Communication TCP IP Setup Communication Settings TCP Port 1505 Response Time Out sec 6 Retries 3 Use CAMP Yes E Use Packed Opcodes Yes v Path Description IP Address 2 Enter the communication settings Then click the Accept button COMMUNICATION SETTINGS e Camp Protocol The Use Camp option is for optimizing upload and download of PLC programs specifically to CTI 2572 cards This is defaulted to Yes and should only be turned off if the CTI card does not support the CAMP protocol e Packed Opcode The Use Packed option is for optimizing the Ladder Status and Data Window updates This is defaulted to Yes and should only be turned off if the Packed opcode is not supported e These settings are held in the computer Registery e Path Descriptions When attaching to a PLC using TCP IP the user is given a path description This description represents a specific TCP IP address if a PLC The description and associated path is entered at the bottom of this dialog e IP Port Any number is acceptable as long as it does not interfere with other pro tocol numbers This number must match the IP port configured in the 2572 Ethernet TCP IP module e Response T O sec
446. ocio a a aa ly lacada 64 Working With Logic Programs td es ated 64 Creating a New Logic Program lt lt 0 22502 oci ecco o eva oec 64 Past PLC Connection Connecting to a PLE oct ii 65 Open an Existing Logic Program Offline or Online 2 2 222 65 Loading Parts of an Existing Logic Program Online 2 2 68 Transfer Offline Program to CINE inden aided oes ais oeee octo oat 2823 71 Connecunp Online toa 975 tect he e aces ea uM b e 72 Reading or Writing 575 Port Configuration 02 ee cece eee ee cece es 72 Importing Documentados iras sia 74 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents Exporting Docutne ntatiobes seated e ca coins SII LL 75 Address Documentation Text File Fotmat eres 77 Header Documentation Text File Format i 2o ce rr 79 Register Value Text Pile Format sa isis 80 Ramp Soak Text File Porat bsos nnn te eet 81 Retrieving Version Information genes tensteanl least liada 82 a A DU a cepa ater ona orc sa Cun duun d 83 Printing Logic Prostas ceo e ei tec Iph Seres tad d Uu su ote tein 87 A noctman an aed E Saas death ves E ESE 103 Editino O e ee AA E e TN ae 103 A A A SERS AE OO OE SEARS TOA eR 104 LO A A SA Re M LM uM LM ALO 105 DE STR UR A RT ORCA A SAE TCA EAI ARR RE 105 Paste With Re Waites A Eccles i teed ee es itat 106 AAA ou atid to ae ele conce A LES A EA eo a 107 O hacerte A SAU Ane tee RETR ROSS Natt BUSOU RASA SERIA SSIS ANA SSE ote 108 A A EET
447. ode When the complete pro gram has been loaded the program can be converted over to network mode To accomplish this select Switch to Network Display from the Options Menu The rungs ate now displayed in Network and Address Mode Once rungs have been converted to Network Address mode they cannot be converted back to Address Mode only Loading Parts of an Existing Logic Program Online 505 WorkShop allows you to load parts of an existing logic file to an online 505 controller One or more of the following parts can be loaded 68 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs e Ladder e Special Function Programs e Special Function Subroutines e PID Loops e Analog Alarms e Force States e Documentation Tags Descriptions Comments and Headers e I O Configuration e Profibus e V Variables e K Constants e Word I O e U Memoty e TCP values Warning Editing or modifying a program online may produce unexpected or hazardous results To Load patts of an existing program 1 Establish an online connection with the PLC see Fast PLC Connection Con necting to a PLC or Open an existing logic program online 2 Click Load By Parts from the File menu or press CTRL B 69 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Load Program by Parts Program File ogra i Address Documentation Advanced Load Complete Program Load Ladder Load 1 0
448. oes not have power the bit remains unchanged C1 XRST2 iae Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Bit Bit Address FomC C Set Immediate Coil SETI The SETI Immediate Coil is used to set a specified bit to ON 1 when the network passes power flow and the bit is updated immediately If the network does not have power the bit remains unchanged Yi cSETI2 EE Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reset Immediate Coil RSTI The RSTI Immediate Coil is used to set a specified bit to OFF 0 when the network passes power flow and the bit is updated immediately If the network does not have powet the bit remains unchanged Y1 XRSTI 426 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Relay Instructions Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums Timers Counters and Drums s Timer TMR The Timer instruction TMR is used to time events The timer output is turned on after the timer has timed down making this an on delay timer A slow timer is denoted by TMR a fast timer by TMRE The timer times down from the preset value specified by Preset The Preset value is stored in the TCP memory The timers current time is stored in the TCC memory area Timers have the following properties e The Enable Reset must be on for the timer to operate e When the Start Stop
449. of the MIRFT in struction is defined as follows e The values of up to 256 N words 16 4096 bits are copied starting at the mem ory location specified by TS e The copy is placed in the control relays or the discrete image register The LSB of the first word is copied into the point specified by IR e The beginning point in the control relays or the discrete image register must be on a eight point boundary 1 9 17 25 and so on e All words are copied into the control relays or the image register during each scan e The output is turned on when the instruction is executed MIRFT Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant Word Address Bit Address Move Image Register to Table MIRTT The Move Image Register to Table MIRTT instruction allows you to copy information from the control relays or the discrete image register toa table of consecutive word locations 489 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions When the input has power the MIRTT instruction is executed The operation of the MIRTT is defined as follows e The On Off state of up to 4096 bits 256 words X 16 bits is copied from the con trol relays or the discrete image register starting at the bit address specified by IR e The starting point must be on a eight point boundary 1 9 17 etc bits are cop ied in groups of 16 bits e The copy begins with the lowest numbered bit addre
450. of the name and address of the proposed transferee such transferee is suitable in Licensor s sole judgement and such transferee agrees in writing to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement If the transfer is approved Licensee must deliver all copies of the Software including the original copy to the transferee 6 ENHANCEMENTS AND UPDATES Licensor may from time to time release updates of the Software incorporating changes intended to improve the operation and or reliability of the Software Such updates will be provided to Licensee at no charge except shipping charges and media costs for a period of twelve 12 months from the date hereof and Licensee agrees to install all updates designated by Licensor as mandatory Licensor may also offer enhanced versions of the Software from time to time incorporating changes intended to provide new or enhanced features and or capabilities at such license fees as Licensor may from time to time establish 7 LIMITED WARRANTY AND DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY LICENSOR HAS NO CONTROL OVER THE CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH LICENSEE USES THE SOFTWARE THEREFORE LICENSOR CANNOT AND DOES NOT WARRANT THE PERFORMANCE OR RESULTS THAT MAY BE OBTAINED BY ITS USE HOWEVER LICENSOR PROVIDES THE FOLLOWING LIMITED WARRANTY Licensor warrants for a period of twelve 12 months only that the Software shall be free from significant programming errors Licensor further warrants thatit has full power and authority to grant
451. oft Office Excel Help for information on Trust Center Enter Parameters from the MegaEDRUM Instruction The MASK EVENT COUNT and USE STEP parameters from the MegaEDRUM in struction in ladder logic must be entered into the pinning chart This information is entered in the Parameter Address table which begins in row 2 of the pinning chart By default there are sample values entered in these cells These sample values must be replaced with the actual MASK EVENT COUNT and USE STEP parameters that are entered in the MegaEDRUM instruction within ladder logic These parameters must match the parameters entered in the MegaEDRUM instruction Figure 2 Parameter Address Table in MegaEDRUM xls Modify the Size of the Pinning Chart The pinning chart must match the size of the MegaEDRUM instruction contained in the ladder logic 451 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums e The number of columns that represent output coils addresses in the pinning chart must equal the COIL COUNT parameter specified in the MegaEDRUM instruction e The number of rows that represent steps in the pinning chart must equal the STEPS parameter in MegaEDRUM instruction The pinning chart can be made larger by increasing the number of columns representing output coils It can also be made larger by increasing the number of rows representing steps The pinning chart can be made smaller by decreasi
452. ollers you are also prompted withCoordinate Reset With Other Applications andCoordinate Reset With Entire SYS TEM Foreach ofthese prompts press NO or YES as required for your process 339 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Powering Up Restarting the Controller Complete Restart Use Complete Restart to clear all discrete elements and word elements including retentive C elements Complete Restart also clears controller fatal errors Forced discrete elements and forced word elements ate not reset To execute Complete Restart 1 Click Complete Restart from the PLC Operations dialog box 2 When you receive the message Execute a Complete restart select either YES or NO For 575 controllers you are also prompted with Coordinate Reset With Other Applications andCoordinate Reset With Entire Sys tem For each of these prompts press NO or YES as required for your process 340 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Clearing Memory Clearing Memory This option allows you to clear all or parts of logic memory data tags and documentation in the current program You can use clear memory in either online or offline mode When programming offline you clear the entire active program or parts When programming online you clear the PLC memory However you cannot clear memory online while the processor is in Run mode You must first stop the processor before clearing
453. ollow the in structions on the screen to complete installation 41 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 2 Installation Access Level Access Level 505 WorkShop Access Level Select the access level for this installation of 505 WorkShop Full Function C Read Only C Load Only lt Back Cancel A Full Function installation allows full access to all features of WorkShop A Read Only installation will not allow the user to access the following e File Menu operations New Open Online Save Save As Import Export and Merge e Edit Menu Undo Cut Copy Paste Clear Delete Insert Append and Select All e View Menu Ladder Editor Special Function Editor PID Loops Alarms Doc umentation Window Symbol Library and Data Window are all view only e Program Menu New Network Select Instruction and Validate and Enter e Configuration Editing Memory configuration editing set PLC Scan Time 505 I O Edit Profibus I O Edit Watchdog Timer Edit and Time of Day edit e Utilities Menu PLC Operations modes PG RUN etc Profibus Operations Diagnostics on base Task Codes per scan Port Lockout Password Clear Mem ory and Clear Memory 42 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 2 Installation Access Level A Load Only installation will not allow the user to access the following e File Menu operations New Save Save As Import Export and Merge e Edit Menu Undo Cut
454. olor BH Black Script Westem 2 Choose a new font font style or font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 3 Click OK in the Font dialog box to save your changes or Cancel to cancel your changes Result The Print Documentation dialog box appears NOTE The print selection options are stored when saving a pro gram 98 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Print Cross Reference Select the Cross reference check box from the Print dialog box to print the following All logic ladder SFS and SFP Selected logic ladder SFS or SFP Selected ladder in address or network mode Selected Special Function lines Alarms Loops I O Elements X Y WX and WY Control Relays C V Memoty K Memoty I O Elements X Y WX and WY Control Relays C Tags Descriptions and Comments To change the Cross reference properties click the Cross reference button on the Print dialog box The Print Cross Reference dialog box appears 99 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Print Cross Reference Include Ladder from 6 Iv C Address Mode Network Mode Loops from s Status Words Alene from NT Timer Variables ania ys Drum Variables SF Programs from 1023 cee SF Subroutines from fi 1023 Shift Registers Tags Descriptions Xl Xl I m Include Variable Ranges Table M
455. om SF Program Subroutine 593 Return From Subroutine 514 Reverse Acting 393 RS 232 C 49 RS 422 49 50 RSD 532 533 RST 426 RSTI 426 RIN 514 S S Memoty 177 S Records 112 Sample Rate 371 386 Save 83 84 86 By Parts 84 Offline 83 Online 84 Save As Offline 86 677 SBR PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Required Applications Security SCALE Scaling Values Scan Matrix Compate Scan Synchronization Inhibit SDT Seatc Searc Searc Searc Searc h h and Replace Address h and Replace Table h Table for Equal h Table for Not Equal Secondary Addresses 515 594 594 476 518 596 278 356 278 279 497 498 154 Security 35 60 324 325 331 333 613 614 622 624 626 628 630 637 639 640 642 Activity Audit Adding Users Administrator Options Audit Policy Authentication Server Configuration Control Point DCOM Deleting Users Domains Editing Users Enable Password Security Event Viewer FasTrak Authentication 644 651 653 655 614 632 640 623 642 636 651 631 644 633 639 633 630 655 624 626 628 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Sequential Data Table Smart Connect modules Groups 640 653 Fast PLC 164 Inactive Password Timeout 630 Installation 41 Key 35 Page 143 NT Authentication 625 636 637 644 PLC Type 72 Password 324 325 331 332 623 631 632 Printer 143 634 Printing 166 Password Security 621 Program 43
456. on Properties The Authentication Level specifies security at the packet level Default Authentication Level Connect Y The impersonation level specifies whether applications can determine who is calling them and whether the application can do operations using the client s identity Default Impersonation Level Identify y Security for reference tracking can be provided if authentication is used and that the default impersonation level is not anonymous Provide additional security for reference tracking To set the security and identity properties for FTSecSvr select DCOM Config under My Computer in the Component Services dialog The available registered COM applications will be displayed Scroll and select FTSecSvr 649 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server t Component Services File Action View Window Help ama x i 3 o E z 43 DCOM Config A DCOM Config 106 objects 5 5Server AccStore Class ASF Stream Description 1 QPF TLogger 1ED7B6434 2328 11D3 8 Authorable Button 2 E FTSecSvr 14BBCE09 274B 4782 B Automatic Updates Background Intelligent uc FC7D9E01 3F9E 11D3 9 Blocked Drivers amp HTML Application 3050f4d8 98B5 11CF BE BugHunter InstallShield Insta E4451076 BCD3 11D4 a COM Event System InstallShield Insta 99BDE2B6 D79E 11D4 A ComEvents ComServic
457. once for any of the drum types It can cause un predictable machine operation 448 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums Use a Pinning Chart to Enter Data for MEDRM Introduction to the Pinning Chart A pinning chart can be used to aid in the data entry that is required for the Mega Time Event Driven Drum MegaEDRUM see MegaEDRUM MEDRM on page 442 for more information A sample pinning chart named MegaEDRUM x s can be found in the 505 WorkShop folder In a typical 505 WorkShop installation this location is C P rogram Files FasTrak SoftWorks Inc 505 WorkShop The MegaEDRUM x s pinning chart can also be accessed from the Start menu It is a read only file In order to make changes to the file it must be saved with a different name Unlike the EDRUM instruction where the values of EDRUM parameters are entered di rectly in the instruction the values for MegaEDRUM parameters are stored in addresses For most MegaEDRUM parameters the MegaEDRUM instruction only specifies the first address from a range of consecutive addresses where the values are stored Consider the following example e If an EDRUM instruction consisted of 16 output coils and you wanted to specify 1000000000000001 as an output mask you would type 1000000000000001 in the output Mask area of the EDRUM instruction e If a MegaEDRUM instruction consisted of 16 output coils and you wa
458. onfiguration sss 169 Memory and I O Configuration Overview 0 0c cc ccc cece cece cece eee eeeeenees 171 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents PEC Type Setup AAA a co Meat chee Coe titt 172 PLC Type Setup Offline siii uececeiio ele LA cece saad bebido 172 Chanso PLE TP as dto oe 174 PLC Memory Connie 174 175 Controller Memory Types see s a e o v s nce a uu ides 177 Ladder MGImotyiui uoc eorE eta Sod areal eo P EPN Se ERO UU DUC ee eae 177 Image Register Memory A A 177 Control Relay Meno eiea eoa E eth at 177 Special Me MOR oriee e E a a M IPM IUS e E 177 Tempotaty Memon es aar o e ae DO 177 Va able Memon AA E O 178 Constant Menos nd 178 Status o AAA A ee vomesonde aoa Ead 178 Timer Counter Memo ic 178 Table Move Menor E aa 180 OneShot Memor A IN 180 Shift ResisteE o A ae RC DLL Re estes A Renee TCS 181 Dran MEMO sacos AMARA ROR Ne 8 ee LF AMAT NR FAP E In ELE CE ee me 182 PGTS Discrete Parameter Area correos 184 PGTS Word Parameter redo oii il e 184 User External Subroutine Memory as lca tas 185 Global Memory 575 Only cdi lor dscida edad 185 VME Memory 575 AAA A i cO aste eer 185 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents UOC OM A II 186 Controller Functionality in Configuration 0 020202eeeeeee ee 186 I O Configuration Guldeligessu dedos 186 Accessing I O Contipimratloi 0 scc ces e LLL ce tete once Led 186 I O Configuring Procedure e aee idc iep anna 187
459. onitoring capabilities pro vides the ability to track program changes Activity Audit Trail and offers powetful NT security management Windows Authentication with password protection PLC Work Shop is a full 32 bit product and the only 505 softwate product available that fully supports all Windows operating systems from Windows 95 through Windows 7 Features and Benefits PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 is Functional and Comprehensive e Has the ability to open several online and or offline programs simultaneously track addresses through cross referencing and track program changes Activity Audit Trail e Offers built in data acquisition amp monitoring capabilities Cut Copy and Paste commands and complete support of RLL Special Function Programs and Sub routines Alarms and Loops including Power Math functions in 555 and 575 TI PLCs e Provides comprehensive Profibus DP master and slave configuration tools e Provides online Help and an instruction toolbar and mnemonics Flexible e Offers flexible program setup and full support of all Windows operating systems from Windows 95 through Windows 7 3 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 1 Welcome What is PLC WorkShop e Provides the option to use familiar TISOFT hotkeys e Provides multiple documentation and print options and choice of com Secure munications including Serial TCP IP H1 FMS TIWAY Modem AutoBaud and NITP Offers NT Securit
460. online prompt you will be able to use the Save and the Load functions Save writes the controller password to the selected program on disk 325 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays Open retains the controller password You will also have full access to the con troller and the selected program on disk e Mode 5 If the controller has a password and you do not enter a password for the controller at the online prompt you will not be able to use the Save and the Open functions Depending on the controller password access level you will be allowed partial to full access to the controller You will also have full access to the selected program on disk e Mode 6 If both the controller and the selected program on disk have passwords and you enter a password for both at the online prompt you will be able to use the Save and the Open functions The passwords for both the selected program on disk and for the controller are retained You will also have full access to the se lected program on disk and to the controller e Mode 7 If both the controller and the selected program on disk have passwords and you enter a password only for the selected program on disk at the online prompt you will not be able to use the Save and Open functions You will have partial to full access to the controller depending on the controller access level You will also have full access to the se
461. onnect modules on the Slave tab two pseudo modules or dummy modules are displayed Digital SC and Analog SC These modules serve to define the base 505 addresses from which the Smart Connect modules are offset The Digital SC de fines the base addresses for X Y addresses The Analog SC defines the base addresses for WX WY addresses Both digital inputs and digital outputs are offset from the same Digital SC base address Both analog inputs and analog outputs are offset from the same Analog SC base address The inputs come first then the outputs Consider the following example The following image shows the configuration of Smart Connect modules on the Smart Con nect Configurator Smart Connect module addresses are zero based offsets from the Analog SC and Digital SC addresses entered on the slave configuration tab Slot Module Input Offset Output Offset Comment ASC 6ES7122 1FA00 04401D0 AC 00 0 B SC 6ES7121 1BB00 0440 2D DC24V 00 0 CSC 6ES7124 1FA00 04B0 140 10v 00 D SC Secondary slot Auto Address E SC 6ES7 123 1JB00 0AB0 24 therm F SC G SC HSPN SN NN arr 238 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration The following image shows the configuration of the Smart Connect modules on the Slave tab Station Type Slave DP 1 0 State Stop Device File SIE 8027 GSE Status Disabled Slave Comm Fail 0 Lost Tokens 0 Slave Parameters
462. onnected to a TCP IP network a TCP IP stack needs to be installed on your Windows machine Windows 95 and Windows NT ship with a TCP IP stack WINSOCK DLL 155 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Communication If TCP IP is not listed under the protocol section of your network settings it needs to be added You may be asked to insert a Windows disk or CD ROM After it has been added click on properties and enter an IP address subnet mask and possibly a default gateway See your network administrator for more information on these fields if you are not sure what to enter Every machine on your network must have a unique IP address At this point the 505 TCP IP Ethernet board needs to be configured see the following section Make sure the IP address does not conflict with other devices on the network A sample configuration appears below IP Address Subnet Mask PC 1 201 98 1 1 255 255 255 0 PC 2 201 98 1 2 255 255 255 0 505 TCP IP 1 201 98 1 8 255 255 255 0 505 TCP IP 2 201 98 1 9 255 255 255 0 To use 505 WorkShop over an Ethernet network with the TCP IP protocol you need to purchase and install the PPX 505 CP2572 module in a Series 505 base Refer to the SI MATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP2572 User Manual order number PPX 505 8132 1 or the CTI 2572 Ethernet TCP IP Adapter Installation and Operation Guide order number 062 00146 for instructions Assign an IP A
463. ons Compare Instructions Scan Matrix Compare SMC The Scan Matrix Compare Instruction SMC compares up to 16 pre defined bit patterns to the current states of up to 15 discrete points If a match is found the step number that con tains the matching bit pattern is entered into the memory location specified by the pointer and the output is turned on The SMC has the following properties e The instruction is executed when the Start input is on e Ifthe Start input remains on the SMC instruction checks all programmed steps on evety scan e Thestatus ofup to 15 discrete points is checked against the predefined bit patterns e Ifa match is found the step number of the matching mask is entered into the memory location specified by CUR PTR and the output is turned on e If no match is found CUR PTR is cleared to 0 and the output is turned off Parameter Type Valid Parameters Reference Number 0 32767 AO CUR PTR Word Address V W G VMS VMM 1 O Points up to 15 X YC Bick blank 476 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Bit Operations Bit Operations Bit Clear BITC The Bit Clear instruction clears a specified bit to zero When the input is on the BITC in struction is executed The output is turned on during each scan in which the instruction is executed The operation is as follows Bit N of element A is cleared to 0 is power is passed BITC Parameter Type Valid Parameter Typ
464. oot e The operations is valid if 0 lt AA lt 32767 32767 483 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Math and Logic Instructions e Ifthe result is valid the outputs turned on when the operation is executed Other wise the instructions turned off and the contents of B does not change SQRT Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Number Constant 1 1232767 Binary to BCD CBD The Convert Binary to BCD instruction converts a binary representation of an integer BIN to an equivalent Binary Coded Decimal BCD value It converts a 16 bit integer into a 32 bit BCD word A BCD word is made up of 4 digits 0 9 with each digit rep resented by groups of 4 bits Values up to 32767 can be converted into BCD CBD is described as follows e IF BIN contains an integer 0 32767 the value is converted to BCD stored in BCD and BCD 1 as shown below and the instruction output is turned on BB 1 se orm pose o se Ten Thousands Hundreds Tens Ones Thousands oy e If BIN is not within the range 0 32767 BCD and BCD 1 are not changed and no power is passed Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Instruction Instruction reference _ Constant 0 327600 32767 E BIN E Addtess Parameter BCD Word Address 484 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Math and Logic Instructions BCD to Binary CDB The Convert BCD t
465. op Di rectory dialog box appears The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Loop number 1 64 Loop Title and Enable Disable state 2 Select a loop whose ramp soak program you want to create or modify and then click Ramp Soak The following dialog box appears Ramp Soak Steps PID Loop 1 S Memory Available 3606 R S Flag Address Maa Loop Mode Offline Steps Step R S StatBit SetPoint RampRate Soak Time DeadBand XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXNXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXxX End of List XXXXXXXXXXXXNXXXXXXXNXXNXXNXXXXNXXXXXXXNX Cancel Insert The R S Flag Address box contains the ramp soak flag address An entry in this field causes ramp soak data to be written from the ramp soak variable LRSF to another ad dress The address can be a bit Y or C that allocates 5 contiguous bits or a word WY or V that allocates one word for ramp soak data The format of the bits in a ramp soak flag address correspond to the individual bits making up the 16 bit word LRSF Bits are de fined in the following table 1 Restart at the first step To restart toggle bit off on then off again The restart occurs on the trailing edge of a square wave 1 Hold at current step To hold set bit on 3 1 Jog to next step To jog set bit on Jog occurs on the rising edge of a square wave 399 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Ramp Soak 1 Finish Indicates ramp soak is completed 1 Wait This bit is set
466. op for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak disadvantages of each strategy are given Use some or all of these strategies together along with your own to achieve your team s goals Create and manage user accounts access rights and repository security A system administrator or team manager can implement this strategy to prevent ac cess conflicts and overwritten changes This strategy takes advantage of the multiple levels of security FTVersionTrak has to offer Create repositories for specific users This strategy assures consistent usage and access among team members The advantage of this strategy is that it is clear which files each team member is responsible for Team managers can oversee the changes made by each user by accessing that user s repository Develop a task checklist Create a daily weekly or monthly task list that out lines specific version control tasks to be accomplished such as checking in files getting the latest version and electronically signing documents as well as stand ardizing steps for audits and reviews of changes made The advantage of this strategy is that all team members will have a good idea of what kinds of changes are being made so it is less likely that undesired changes will occur Keep critical programs checked out Keeping a file checked out prevents all other users from being able to make changes to the file Use this feature to your ad vantage w
467. operate the software Passwords can be requested each time users attempt to enter a password protected portion of the application Alternately passwords may be requested only once when WorkShop is first started At Each Control Point Password control points are designated as privileges within the User Security Settings group box illustrated in the following pages Specifying that passwords are requested at these control points requires users to enter their name and password every time they at tempt to use these features The advantage of this selection is that multiple users can operate WorkShop without hav ing to exit and restart the application under another user name and password Once a user has completed a password protected operation and exits that function other users can ac cess password protected operations by entering their own user names and passwords The disadvantage of this selection is that it requires users even the same user to re enter user names and passwords each time they attempt to access one of the password con trolled features For example saving a program to disk is one of these control points Assume a user edits a ladder program The user then selects the File Save menu item to write the changes to disk The Password Required dialog appears requesting the user name and password to access the save feature Password Required Please enter your user name and password to continue this operation
468. ops Use the Search amp replace in combo box to select the desired section of the PLC program in which to perform the search and replace operation From and To Edit Boxes A search range within the program area selected in the Search amp replace in combo box can be entered in the From and To edit boxes As the Search amp replace in selection changes the default values displayed in the From and To boxes include the entire range available in that PLC program section For example when Ladder is selected the default range displayed starts at network 1 and ends at the last network in the ladder Special Instructions Group Box Additional actions can be performed as the search and replace operation executes These ac tions can be selected within the Special Instructions group box These actions are available only when Ladder SFS or SFP are selected in the Search amp replace in combo box The Copy Network Headers Check Box A network can be documented with a network header This network header is actually as sociated with the address of the network s output coil When the search and replace process changes the address of a network s coil the original network header is no longer tied to that network There ate two options in this situation Either the network header if any associated with the coil s new address replaces the network s previous header Or the network header as sociated with the coil s original address
469. or the margin you want to adjust in the Top Bottom Left or Right boxes 166 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Printer 5 If you would like to start your printout with a page number other than 1 change the Starting Page number 6 Normally a title page does not print The title page contains the information you en tered in the Title Page Print Editor If you would like to include this page as the first page in your printouts click on Include Title Page 7 Click OK in the Page Setup dialog box to save your page settings and return to the active logic window 167 168 Chapter 5 PLC Memory I O Configuration 170 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Memory and I O Configuration Overview Memoty and I O Configuration Overview This chapter shows you how to set up and configure your Siemens family PLC You must configure your PLC before you can create a ladder logic program Configuration is part of the program it performs the important function of relating the hardware components to the logic components The recommended setup and configuration process is completed in four steps 1 PLC Type Setup 2 PLC Memory Configuration PLC Type Memory Size Ladder Variable Constant Special User Sub Timer Counter Drums Shift Register Table Move One Shots 3 I O Configuration 4 Profibus DP Configuration PLC Type Setup
470. or Siemens 505 Chapter 1 Welcome Customer Support Customer Support It s our goal that customers become proficient users of our software as quickly and easily as possible With that in mind FasTrak makes available a number of support options Com monly asked questions can usually be answered with this manual online help or by visiting our website at www fast soft com Our website features easy to access FAQs technical re sources and system documentation For real time how to help and advanced troubleshooting contact FasTrak s customer sup port center and speak directly with a technical support representative Our trained experts offer convenient accurate and prompt assistance Customer Support 262 238 8088 Customer Support Fax 262 238 8080 Website www fast soft com Email support fast soft com You can also send questions comments and suggestions to FasTrak SoftWorks Inc PO Box 240065 Milwaukee WI 53224 9003 For detailed information on Siemens 505 CPUs and Instructions set refer to the following manuals 505 System Manual PPX 505 8201 X 505 Programming Reference Manual PPX 505 8204 X ET200 Distributed I O Manual PPX 505 8206 X 34 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 1 Welcome Updating Software License Key Updating Software License Key This FasTrak product is protected by a security key or site license Security of keyed WorkShop products are protected by use of a security key Th
471. or one scan and then turns off The index contains the position of them attaching word in the table for the du ration of the scan The contents of the index must be used or saved during this scan since the STFE looks for the next match on the next scan as long as the En able and Reset remains on e If the two words ate not equal the index is incremented by one and the next word in the table is compared to the source word e If no matches ate found in the table the output remains off The index contains the position of the last word in the table e The entire table is searched ruing one scan until one match or no match is found e If the Enable turns off while the Reset is on the index holds its current value If the Reset turns off the index resets to 1 e After the entire table has been searched the STFE must be reset in order to be ex ecuted again 497 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions STFE Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant WS TS Word Address Wotd Address Word Address Constant Only Search Table for Not Equal STFN The Search Table for Not Equal Instruction STFN locates the next occurrence of a word in a table that is not equal to a source word The position of the non matching word is shown by an index and the value of the non matching word is copied into a specified mem ory location The STEN has the follo
472. ork 1 Confirm l Skip on Error To Network 6 2 Specify the address number to be replaced in the Find What field and the address replacing it in the Replace With field For example to replace C1 with C2 type these two address numbers in the Find What box and the Replace With box With field respectively With this setting all occurrences of address C1 are Changed to ad dress C2 for the selected logic type range 3 Specify the logic type by clicking on the drop down box in the Where field and se lecting one of the 5 logic types 278 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Search and Replace Address 4 In the From Network and To Network boxes type the search range for the re placement address If no range is selected the software defaults to the total number of networks lines in the target logic type 5 Confirm When the Confirm check box is not selected on the Replace dialog box the program automatically changes all Find What addresses to Replace With ad dresses When the Confirm check box is selected the program displays each address where the Replace is to occur The address to be replaced is surrounded by a ted outlined rectangle and the following options ate displayed in the Replace di alog box e Click Replace to perform the specified replacement e Click Skip to skip the address and go on to the next item to be replaced e ClickStop to cancel the replace operation and return to the spec
473. oves 1 0 Elements from 2048 SF Error Codes Control Relays from 32768 ere arm Variables V Memory from 204 G Mem YMM VMS K Memory from o to r V Addresses Used Table Save as Defaults Restore Defaults Doc Font we ecos cm Select the All check box to print the entire range of items To print a selection clear the All check box and enter a range in the associated edit box I lt I I I The following can be individually turned on and off to be included with Cross reference printout e Tags e Descriptions Status Words e Timer Variable e Drum Variables e One Shots Shift Registers e Tables Moves e SF Error Codes e Loop Variables e Alarm Variables e G Mem VMM VMS 100 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs To include Addresses Used Table with the Cross reference print out select the appropriate check box under Include 1 Click on the Doc Font button to change the Tag Description and Comments print out font of the active program Result The Font dialog box appears Font Font style Courier New Regular Courier New A T Courier1 BT Ir CourierPS Croobie Y Cushing Hv BT Davida Bd BT F Decorated035 BT Effects Sample Strikeout Underline AaBbYyZz Color HB Black Script Westem 2 Choose a new font font style or font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box
474. p for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs To save the active logic program 1 To save to the current file name click a on the Toolbar click Save from the Filemenu or press CTRL S To save to a new file name click Save As from the File menu Program File V EXAMPLE F E Save Complete Program Save Ladder Save SF Programs Save SF Subroutines Save PID Loops Save Analog Alarms Save Documentation Save Program Setup Save 1 0 Config Save Profibus Save Y Variables Save K Consta Save Word 1 0 r Save TCP Cancel Help 2 Select the boxes of the parts of the program to save or select the Save Complete Program check box to save all parts If this is a new file the Save Complete Pro gram check box is automatically selected and it cannot be cleared 3 If the program has not been previously saved or to change the file name click the browse button and select the location and name for the program 4 Click OK to save the program 5 If the file name already exists in that directory a dialog box appears with these op tions 505 WorkShop 85 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs e YES saves the updated program with the current name overwriting the previous version e NO cancels the save procedure NOTE You must validate logic before saving If you have not done SO a message appears s
475. p for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Printer Printer Printer Setup Use Print Setup to select a printer and determine where and how your printouts appear To access the Print Setup d Start or open a logic program Click Print Setup from the File menu Result The Print Setup dialog box appears Select the printer you want to use in the Name box Additional setup options may be available depending on the printer you selected If an Options button is available click it and another dialog box appears Make your se lections and select the OK button to return to the Print Setup dialog box Other options in the Print Setup dialog box include Orientation and Paper Source Click the desired settings Click OK in the Print Setup dialog box to save your settings and return to the active logic window NOTE The print setup options can also be accessed from the Print box that appears after clicking Print from the File menu Page Setup Use Page Setup to select page margins starting page number and whether to include a Title page in your printout Page Setup is accessible from the Print dialog box To access Page Setup 1 2 Start ot open a logic program Click Print from the File menu Click Page Setup Result The Page Setup dialog box appears Depending on which features you need to customize choose left right top and bot tom margin To change the size of the margins type the measurement in inches f
476. pe in your header Click OK when you are finished To see network headers in the active logic program click Program Setup from the Op tions menu click the Logic Windows tab and select the Show All Headerscheck box Header Input C2 Header Paging None v Cancel SF Header 505 WorkShop provides a simple way to document SF while you are creating or editing your SF program The maximum number of characters you can enter for each header is 16K To add or modify a SF header 1 Double click the SF Header Input icon in the active logic program window The Network Header Input dialog box is displayed 2 Enter the header you want to use 3 Click OK when you ate finished 346 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 7 Documentation Ladder Network and SF Header Editor Special Function Header Header This is the header for Special Function 1 You can have up to 16 000 characters per header You can also have a header for each Special Function Program or Subroutine Cancel To see SF headers in the active logic program click Program Setup from the Options menu click the Logic Windows tab and select the Show All Headers check box Network Header Editor Use the Network Header Editor to edit network headers and to quickly go to specific net works Information is shown in the following columns The number of the network The network s address Header The network header Selecting
477. pecified in Table Length has been moved When the last word has been moved the Table Pointer is reset to zero The Restart Bit is set to ON except for the following conditions a When the SDT execution resets the Table Pointer the Restart Bit turns OFF Prior to the first execution of the SDT the bit could be either off or on depending upon prior usage NOTE Logic can be used to reset the Table Pointer to zero but the Restart Bit will not turn OFF unless the pointer is reset by the SDT execution The value of the Table Pointer does not change during SDT execution All values in the table remain the same and the Output contains the value of the last word moved from the table SDT Statement Example Before the SDT executes Table Pointer V500 contains 0 zero When the statement ex ecutes the pointer increments by 1 and the value in V200 is moved to V100 This process repeats each time the statement executes After the last word is moved the pointer resets to 0 and Status Bit C77 is turned OFF 597 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Sequential Data Table SDT Input table Table PTR Restart bit Destination Address B V100 Word moved from table Table Starting Address A V200 30th word moved from table SDT Statement Operation Example 598 Table length 30 Pointer C Value of pointer after word moved from table Restart Bit E is C77 Value of
478. peration of the various in structions of the One Shot group including the following e One Shot e Time Set e Date Set 180 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Controller Memory Types When you assign a number to a One Shot in struction be sure that you do not use that number for any other One Shot instruction type For example do not configure more than one OS11 Assigning the same number for more than one One Shot instruction type can cause un predictable operation by the controller which could result in death or serious injury to personnel and or damage to equipment Do not use the same number mote than once for the same instruction type for example use it only once in One Shot in Timer Set and so on This memory type consists of one byte per configured One Shot instruction This byte is used to save the previous state of the instruction input Because the instructions in the One Shot group use different bits of one byte these in structions can be assigned identical reference numbers That is if you configure a One Shot 11 OS11 you can configure a Date Set 11 Shift Register Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for the operation of the shift registers which include the following e Bit Shift Register SHRB e Word Shift Register SHRW 181 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration
479. plays Password Mode None Enable Password Access Level None m Password Aliases Online Password Selection and Access Level Password Mode Enabled Enter Password m Access Level Password Aliases Use Aliases Aliases Close Help The buttons in the Password dialog box 331 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays e Close Allows you to return to the ladder display screen e Enter Password Allows you to enter or change the password for the selected pro gram in the controller WorkShop prompts you for the new password twice If the new passwords are not the same the password is not changed To delete a pass word or to make the selected program on disk unprotected enter a null password or press clear and enter a new password e NoAccess Allows you to set the protection level ofthe controller forno access This optionis written to the controller No Access does not work without a password e Read Only Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for read only access This option is written to the controller Read Only does not work without a password e Full Access Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for full read write access This option is written to the controller Full Access does not work without a password e Enable Password Allows you to enab
480. plications in the 575 system can coordinate access to shared resoutces 251 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Programming Ladder Mnemonic Instruction MIRF Copies a table into the control relay memory or dis crete image register MIRT Copies status of control relays or discrete image reg ister bits to table MIRW Copies bit status from control relays or discrete image registet to a wotd MOVE Copies bytes words or long words from a source lo cation to a destination location MOVW O Copies wotds from one location to another Malipliation MWFT Move wotd from table MWI Copies wotds from one location to another using in dexed addresses Copies bits of a word to the discrete image register or the control relay memory Copies a word to a table 252 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Programming Ladder Mnemonic Instruction PGTS Calls an RLL subroutine and passes parameters to it Calls an RLL subroutine and passes parameters to it Discrete parameters indicated as outputs are cleared when the subroutine is not executed RE RSD Transfers a PROFIBUS DP slave s current diagnostic to user memoty Reset coil bit RSTI Immediate reset of a coil bit Designates the beginning of an RLL subroutine RIN Returns control from an RLL subroutine to the main RLL program SETI Immediate set of a coil bit SFPGM Calls a special function program from R
481. ppears 79 FTVersionTrak BAR 2 Connect to an FTVersionTrak repository by clicking Connect to Repository from the File menu or by clicking the I toolbar button 3 See the FTVersionTrak documentation for mote information about FTVer sionTrak s advanced features Opening WorkShop Files Once a WorkShop file has been added to the FT VersionTrak repository and the latest ver sion placed in your working directory FTVersionTrak s seamless integration automates the 130 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak version control process Follow this procedure when opening WorkShop files protected by FTVersionTrak for best results 1 After launching WorkShop open the program by clicking Open from the File menu or by clicking the toolbar button The Open Program dialog box appears Open Program Program File Address Documentation Path O Program Type Offline Connect to PLC Setup Connect Options rc r OK Cancel 2 Click Browse to browse for the file 3 Select the file and then click Open 4 Click OK in the Open Program dialog box A repository login dialog box appears 131 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak 505 WorkShop Login Server Authentication M T Username HOMSS2900 Thome Password 5 Enter your login information the administrato
482. pperfoil Copperfoil Shield Shield Connector Shell Connector Shell P1 P2 9 Pin to 25 Pin Cable 9 Pin D Type 9 Pin D Type Female Connector Female Connector 9 Pin to 9 Pin Cable Cable Pin Outs for RS 422 Ports If your controller has an RS 422 port you can connect through the RS 422 port on your programming device Use the pin out values shown below for the RS 422 cable 50 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 2 Installation Communications Cable Signal Pin Signal ss 1 00 00 _ 5 Dh GND 6 GND D 9 7 DO D0 5 8 DI 9 Pin D Type htale Connector Ethernet Connection For Ethernet connection you need a compatible Network Interface Card NIC in your computet a Siemens PPX 505 cp2572 TCP IP Ethernet catd installed in your 505 sys tem and the approptiate cabling For more information on setting up your Ethernet connection refer to the Simatic Eth ernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP2572 User Manual order number PPX 505 8132 1 or the CTI 2572 Ethernet TCP IP Adapter Installation and Op eration Guide order number 062 00146 51 52 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics 54 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Software Features Software Features This chapter will get you started using PLC WorkShop Although you should progress at a rate comfo
483. pression enclosed in parentheses is evaluated before surrounding operators are ap plied For example in X Y Z the sum of X and Y is multipled by Z The MATH computations are executed using the rules of precedence for arithmetic op erations listed in the table below Functions within a group are equivalent in precedence Execution takes place from left to right for all operators except exponentiation 568 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Real Integer Math MATH MATH Operator Order of Precedence Highest Prec edence Lowest Prec edence Intrinsic functions NOT Negation NOT Exponentiation Multiplication Division MOD MOD Addition Subtraction Shift left Shift right lt lt gt gt Relational Operators lt lt gt lt gt amp Logical AND Logical OR Assignment Execution of exponentiation takes place from right to left For ex ample in the operation X Y Z Y is raised to the power of Z and then X is raised to the power determined by the result When you read a discrete point in a Special Function program expression a zero is returned if the discrete bit is off a one is returned if the discrete bit is on When you write to a dis crete point in an expression the discrete bit turns off if the value is zero the discrete bit turns on if the value is non zero The MATH statement accepts both integers and real num
484. pressions such as C200 or T15 1 Operation of the FTSR IN FTSR IN is used in conjunction with an FTSR OUT you must use the same cor responding values for register start register length and status bit in the two FTSR statements Input is the input address from which the words are moved into the shift reg ister The starting address Register Start determines the memory atea in which the shift register is located The first word of your data shifts into address Register Start 4 The four words Register Start through Register Start 3 are automatically reserved for the op eration of the shift register e Register Start contains the Count which equals the current number of entries in the shift register e Register Start 1 contains the Index which acts like a pointer to indicate the next available location of the shift register into which a word can be shifted When Index equals one the next available location is Register Start 5 and so on e Register Start 2 contains the Length which equals the maximum size of the shift register in words e Register Start 3 contains the Checkword The checkwotd is used internally to in dicate whether the FTSR is initialized The Register Length determines the size of the shift register The register length depends upon the memoty location that you choose and how much memory you have allocated if the memory is user configurable The Status Bit is turned on to indicate that the register is
485. pses for a sender when the last bit of a telegram is received and the bus idles before the first bit of the next telegram is sent on the bus T id2 Idle time 2 The time which elapses for a sender after sending a call telegram for which acknowledgment is not received SDN and the bus idles before the first bit of a new telegram is sent on the bus T_slot_eff Effective slot time wait to receive time This is the maximum time the sender of a frame must wait until the station addressed responds regardless of whether it is a message frame or a token frame Long lines and signal amplifiers on the bus RS 485 re peaters or optical link modules OLMs make it necessary to increase the preset slot time T_slot_init Ttr Target rotation time The maximum time allowed for a token run The time available to the master to send data telegrams to the slaves depends on the difference between this target time and the actual token runtime Typical Data Cycle Time The average reaction time on the bus when all parameterized slaves exchange data with the master no slave reports diagnostics and there is no additional traffic on the bus Maximum Data Cycle Time The maximum reaction time on the bus when all pa rameterized slaves exchange data with the master This time allows for missing slaves slaves reporting diagnostics and slaves being configured parametetized Minimum Response Monitoring This is the lowest response monitoring time that can
486. ptions Allows the security administrator to add edit and de lete users and their access privileges to specific features in WorkShop 622 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security Administrator Options Administrator Options By default there is no security administrator and the password security feature is not en abled Therefore the User Options menu item is disabled until a security administrator is established Select Administrator Options to establish a security administrator The Pass word Required dialog appears Administrator Password Required Please enter your security administrator name and password Name Password IEEE Cancel The security administrator is required to enter a name and password The administrator name can be up to twenty characters long The password can be up to fourteen characters long Valid characters for both fields are alpha numerics and the other keyboard entered characters etc The first time a security administrator is established the password must be entered twice This original secutity administrator can add other security administrators through the Se curity Administration dialog discussed below If a security administrator has already been established the password does not need to be entered a second time for verification When a security administrator exists Verify pass word is disabled as illustrated below
487. ptions V Ask to Check In File After Save V List Files Checked Out on This Computer at Startup Select the Ask to Check In File After Save check box to prompt the user to check in a program whenever the file is saved See Saving WorkShop Files for more information 115 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak 505 WorkShop File has been saved Checkin Suggested C Program Files 505 WorkShop EXAMPLE FSS Would you like to check in this file Select the List Files Checked Out on This Computer at Startup check box to display a list of files checked out whenever you launch WorkShop FTVersionTrak Toolbar The FTVersionTrak toolbar displays a row of icons that represent version control options available in WorkShop View the FTVersionTrak toolbar by clicking Toolbars from the View menu g aH aloa pl Gl Connect to FTVersionTrak repository and add active program EN Get a version of active program file and place it into your working directory Check out active program Check in active program Undo checkout of active program A Compare working copy of active program to version in repository View version history of active program Electronically sign active program Launch FTVersionTrak 116 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak Adding Files to the FTVersionTrak Repository Before FTVersionTrak can begin secur
488. put address V100 contains the value 7992 O The shift register location V202 contains the value 7992 O The Register Full Status Bit C99 is on The Register Empty Status Bit C100 is off 33931 7992 a The Count V196 contains 3 because three locations are filled v100 a The Index V197 contains 0 because the next available location Index 0 vto7 is number 0 V200 after the word currently in V200 is v108 removed Index points vise to location 3 v200 v201 v202 Fall Through Shift Register Input Statement Operation Example 551 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Fall Through Shift Register Output FTSR OUT Fall Through Shift Register Output FTSR OUT The Fall Through Shift Register Output statement operates an asynchronous shift register The shift register is essentially a table of 16 bit words The FTSR OUT moves data out of the shift register each time the statement executes The FTSR OUT is used in conjunction with the Fall Through Shift Register Input statement FTSR IN that moves words into the shift register FTSR OUT Register Start Dutput Register Length Status Bit Cancel Help e Register Start the starting address for the shift register The four words Reg ister Start through Register Start 3 are automatically reserved for the operation of the statement and make up the header of the shift register Valid descriptors are writ
489. put to the DCAT remains ON the timer begins timing until the OF input turns ON or the timer times out e Ifthe OF input turns on before the timer times out the time delay is set to zero and the OA remains off e If OF does not turn on before the timer times down OA is turned on e IF OF turns on before the timer times down but then goes off again while the Open Close input is ON OA is turned on The OA is turned off if OF then turns on again When the Open OA Close CA input to the DCAT goes from ON to OFF the fol lowing operations occur e The DCAT output turns off the time delay is set to the preset value defined by Delay and both alarm outputs OA and CA are turned off e While the Open Close input to the DCAT remains off the timer begins timing until the CF input turns on or the timer times out e IF the CF input turns on before the timer times down the time delay is set to zero and the CA remains off e If CF does not turn on before the timer times down CA is turned on e IF CF turns on before the timer times down but then goes off again while the DCAT input is off CA is turned on The CA is turned off if CF turns ON again 434 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums DCAT DIS CTRLALARM TIMER DELAY OUTPUT STATUS NOTE If both OF and CF are simultaneously ON the OA and CA turn on Alarm Constant Varies with T C configure
490. py on your local system after the check in 6 Click Compare to compare the difference between the version being checked in and another version in the repository 7 Click OK when finished to check in the items 123 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak Undoing a Check Out Undo the check out if you decide not to save any changes to the repository or create a new version of the WorkShop program Undoing a checkout leaves the file in the state it was in before you checked it out No new version is created and no record of the checkout will be left To undo a check out of the active WorkShop program a 1 Clickthe Ali in the FTVersionTraktoolbar The Undo Check Out dialog box appears Undo Check Out 575 FSS Local Copy Replace ai Cancel C Delete 2 Select a Local Copy option e Select Replace to replace the local copy of the checked out file with the latest version within the repository e SelectLeave to leave the existing copy of the checked out file on yourlocal system e Select Delete to delete the local copy from the location of the check out If the file was checked out to a location other than the working directory the lo cation indicated at check out will be deleted and any other copies will be retained 3 Click OK when finished to return to the main window Comparing WorkShop Files One of the most useful features of FTVersionTrak
491. r WX77 e Register Start the starting address for the shift register Four words Register Start through Register Start 3 are automatically reserved for the operation of the statement and make up the header of the shift register The first word of data shifts into address Register Start 4 Valid descriptors are writeable integer ad dresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 NOTE Do not write data to the header fields The shift register does not operate correctly if any of these fields is modified by an external action These fields may be redefined in fu ture software releases e Register Length the length of the table If a constant is used in must be greater than zero The total length of the shift register is Register Length header Valid descriptors are integer addresses or values any integer value or address containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 Status Bit the status bit This can be either a C or Y The bit specified by Status Bit turns on when the register is full The bit Status Bit 1 is automatically re served as a second status bit The bit specified by Status Bit 1 turns on when the register is empty Valid descriptors are writeable bit elements writeable bit ad 549 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Fall Through Shift Register Input FTSR IN dresses or temporary bit of word addresses that are not part of ex
492. r combo box The items in the drop list are based upon the address type chosen in the Search for combo box If a bit address type was selected in the Search for combo box the Replace with drop list contains only bit address types Similarly if a WORD address type was selected in the Search for combo box the Replace with drop list contains only WORD address types When box instructions are selected in the Search for combo box only an instruction of the same type is allowed in the Replace with combo box So if an EDRUM instruction is entered in the Search for combo box only an EDRUM instruction can be entered in the Replace with combo box Continuing the example above entering X4 in the Replace with combo box indicates the Search for addresses starting with C1 will be replaced with a range of addresses starting with X4 Through Boxes associated with Replace through The numbers displayed in the through boxes located to the right of the Replace with boxes are automatically calculated based upon the ranges entered in the Search for and its through boxes Continuing the example above the Search for range starts at C12 and ends at C47 This is a range of 47 12 35 or 35 addresses of the C type Since the starting address entered in the Replace with combo box is X4 the last address in the replace range is 4 35 39 or X39 The number 39 is displayed in this through box When the search and replace process begins any occurrence
493. r more than one task you can select which tasks to execute during the single scan Single Scan Setup EJ Task 1 Task 9 Task 2 Task 10 Task 3 Task 11 Task 4 Task 12 Task 5 Task 13 Task 6 Task 14 Task 7 Task 15 Task 8 Task 16 Cancel lt I lt I Iv lv aa I I 320 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays 3 Select the tasks you want to include in the scan then click OK 4 Click Single Scan on the Diagnostics menu or press CTRL Q to execute a single scan according to the single scan task configuration RBC Part Number You can display the RBC Software part number and release number while online 1 Click PLC RBC Part Number from the PLC Utilities menu or press ALT U R 2 The RBC software number s and release numbers ate displayed in the following for mat 3 Click Close to exit the RBC Part Number box and return to the active logic program RBC Software Part Numbers Active Standby Base Part Number Release Part Number Release 4 0 1 Beta 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Task Codes Per Scan Task Codes Per Scan is used to set the number of task codes processed per scan for SF modules on each channel To invoke the function 321 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays Click Task Codes Per Scan from the PLC Utilities menu or press ALT U A The Task Codes Per
494. r of the line that will hold the start address 287 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Data Window End Address To specify the range by address select the End Address option button and enter the last address in the series Count To specify the range by number of lines addtesses select the Count op tion button and enter the number of lines to be filled 1 Increment Set the increment between addresses For example with an in crement of 1 each address in the range 1s added to the log sheet With an increment of 2 starting with an even numbered address the even numbered ad dresses will be added to the log sheet Format Selectthe display format forthe data See Data Format for more information OK Fill the range and close the dialog box Cancel Close the dialog without filling the range Apply Click Apply to fill the range without closing the dialog box The Start Ad dress and Start Row fields will be updated to just past the end of the range specified previously For example if the start address was X1 the start row 10 and the Count 10 after the Apply button is clicked the new start row will be 20 Data fills can also be entered mote efficiently in the address box directly using the fol lowing format Start Address End Address increment data format For example to display addresses between V1 and V10 in increments of two with a value format of F32 enter in t
495. r s Send the message to support fast soft com FasTrak SoftWorks will reply with a new license code Enter the new license code in the Key Update Code text box Click OK when fin ished The security key is now updated To obtain the Key Update Code by telephone 1 Connect your hardware key to your computer parallel or USB port Call FasTrak SoftWorks at 262 238 8088 Ask for a key update Select the Help Update Key WorkShop menu item The Security Key Update dialog appears Read the contents of the Key License text box to the representative Note that the key license may be longer than the displayed part of the field Enter the new license code in the Key Update Code text box Click OK when fin ished The security key is now updated 236 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 1 Welcome System Requirements System Requirements Hardware Requirements To install PLC WorkShop on your computer you need the following hardware e A personal computer with an Intel Pentium 100 processor or higher e 32 Mb or more of RAM e An 800 X 600 VGA monitor with at least 256 colors e 100 Mb free disk space on your hard drive e A mouse is recommended but not required WorkShop may not function properly on systems that are not 100 Intel compatible Cer tain other hardware components and peripherals can create incompatibility problems 37 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 1 Welcome System Requi
496. r the One Shot instruction You can use the same ref erence number in a One Shot in another instruction in the One Shot group because they use different bits of one byte to store the previous state Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types OS Constant A valid reference numbet 1 1025 Varies with OS con figured range Coil The Coil is an output instruction used to represent a field device or internal memory lo cation that needs to be controlled Use a normal coil when your application requires the referenced address to equal ON 1 when the coil has power flow 423 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Relay Instructions When the network logic passed power to the coil the coil turns on and the address equals 1 When the network does not pass power to the coil the coil remains OFF 0 and the ad dress equals 0 Parameter Valid Parameter Type Types Bit Address FomC oo o G Coil Not The NOT coil is used similarly like the normal coil but if the referenced address equals OFF 0 the coil has power flow When the network logic does not pass power to the NOT coil the coil remains energized and the reference address equals ON 1 When the network logic passes power flow to the NOT coil the coil is de energized and the referenced address equals OFF 0 C1 X Parameter Valid Parameter Type Types Coil Bit Address Form C Not Immediate Coil The Immediate coil is used s
497. r will provide you with this in formation if needed and click OK 6 FTVersionTrak compares your version of the program with the version stored in the repository If a newer version of the program is available a message appears al lowing you to get the latest version 505 WorkShop 3 There is a new version of this file available Would you like to get the latest version from the repository 7 ClickYes togetthelatest version Click No toopenthe olderversion ofthe program 8 FTVersionTrak then verifies the check out status of the file If the file is checked out to you it opens normally If not a message appears allowing you to check out the file 505 WorkShop 2 Checkout Suggested CiFTVersionTraki505 WorkShop test FSS Edits cannot be saved until the file is checked out Would you like to check out this file Yes No 132 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak 9 Click Yes to check out the file Click No to open the file without checking it out The program opens in WorkShop NOTE If the program is already checked out by another user FTVersionTrak will prevent you from checking out and edit ing the program The program will open in a read only state and changes will not be saved 10 After the program opens the FTVersionTrak toolbar becomes active The actions available using the FTVersionTrak toolbar pertain to the active program Saving
498. ransitions from off to on and the close and Stop inputs are both off the OO turns on and the timer starts Once triggered OO remains on independent of the open input until one of the following event occur e The timer times to 0 The OA is turned on and the OO is turned off e The OF turns on while the CF remains off The OO is turned off and the timer re sets to 0 If OF turns on and then turns off the OA comes on immediately no time delay the next timer the box is executed e The Stop input turns on The OO CO OA and CA are turned off and the timer stays where is was when STOP was received If the Stop inputs turns off while the Open was when Stop was received If the Stop input turns off while the Open input is on then the timer starts at the preset value again not at the value when the Stop input turned on e The Close input turns on after the Open turns off The CO is turned on and the timer starts counting at the preset The OO is turned off When the Close input transitions from off to on while the Open command and Stop com mand inputs are both off the CO turns on and the timer starts CO should turn on the motor that closes the valve Once triggered the CO remains on independent of the Close input until one of the following events occuts e The timer times to 0 The CA is turned on and the CO is turned off e The CF turns on while the OF remains off The CO is turned off and the timer is reset If CF turns on and th
499. ranted to the Ac tivity Audit Setup dialog There ate two ways audit information can be stored e Database File Microsoft Access or SQL e NT Activity Log To configure activity auditing 1 Select the Options Activity Audit Setup menu item The Activity Audit Setup dialog appears Activity Audit Setup Enable Activity Audit e E EL Help Cancel 614 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 12 Auditing Activity Audit Setup Dialog 2 Select the Enable Activity Audit check box 3 Select the Write to a database file option button to record the activity audit in formation to a database file either Microsoft Access or Structured Query Language SQL 4 Select the Microsoft Access option button to write audit records to a Microsoft Ac cess file Enter the file name or click the Browse button to specify the Access file name to which activity records will be written Use the New files created as drop down list to select the format of Microsoft Access files desired 5 Select the Other Database option button to record the activity audit information to a SQL file Activity Audit Setup MV Enable Activity Audit Write to a database file These audit records are written to a database file which can be read with many popular viewers Select the file type and specify its properties below C Microsoft Access pitan Other Database Len Connection String C write activity throu
500. ration successfully but with limited editing capabilities 213 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration This is known as Limited Editing Mode In Limited Editing Mode your configuration will still be valid and can be downloaded to the PLC However you will not be able to edit cer tain aspects of the configuration such as adding or removing slave devices and I O modules or editing bus or module parameters You ate able to modify I O addresses and enable or disable slaves while in Limited Editing Mode Merging Configuration Data From COM PROFIBUS Into 505 WorkShop The Merge button located on the Master tab of theProfibus Configurator allows you to import configuration data from a binary file created with COM Profibus The steps you take are the same regardless of whether you are importing data from an entirely new con figuration or merely importing selected items that have been modified from a previous configuration session in COM Profibus The Merge function performs a comparison be tween the current configuration information and the contents of the selected binary file exported from COM Profibus NOTE Merging configuration data from COM Profibus will over write the current configuration s slave and module data I O addresses for modules that exist in both the current con figuration and the merged file will not be overwritten To import and or configure data fro
501. re key was not found Verify the key is attached to your parallel port and click Retry pa PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 2 Installation FasTrak KEY Solution Check to see that e The FasTrak KEY is connected to a valid port e The FasTrak KEY is the first device attached to the computer Message 505 WorkShop 2 J This product is not supported by the attached key However this software may be run in Demo mode ca Possible Cause The attached key is not authorized for use with 505 WorkShop Solutions e Check to see that the correct FasTrak KEY has been attached to the parallel or USB port e Call FasTrak Technical Support 262 238 8088 Current software version is not supported by key Call to update warranty ca Possible Causes The key date does not support the current software version 47 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 2 Installation FasTrak KEY Solution Call FasTrak Technical Support 262 238 8088 Message 505 WorkShop 2 Hardware key is corrupt Demo mode may be entered b Possible Cause You purchased a partial software package and the partial package information cannot be read from the FasTrak K EY Solution Call FasTrak Technical Support 262 238 8088 48 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 2 Installation Communications Cable Communications Cable Connect the Communications Cable The commun
502. rements Compatible PLCs This version of PLC WorkShop supports the following PLC types and revisions 500 Series 560 505 Series CTI 2500 Series 2500 C100 C400 38 Chapter 2 Installation PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 2 Installation Installing the Software Installing the Software Before you begin installation you should review WorkShop s System Requirements To install PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 turn on the computer and start Windows A user name and password may be required to log in to a computer network If unsure con tact your company s System Administrator or IT representative Follow these steps to install the software 1 Insert the PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 installation CD in your computer s CD ROM drive 2 The CD should start automatically If not click the Windows Start button Then click Run and type x Setup exe where x is the letter for the CD ROM drive The PLC WorkShop CD Browser dialog box appears Copyrigh 505 Simulator Tradema 04 Copyright 3 Click Install 505 WorkShop to begin installation Follow the instructions that ap pear on the screen 4 After clicking Next the Access Level dialog appears Select Full function Read only or Load only install See Access Level for further details 5 After making your selection click Next Installation begins and a message appears telling you that the 505 WorkShop Installation Utility is loading F
503. represented by rows Mask addresses are automatically calculated based on the size of the pinning chart The pinning chart requires that the FasTrak 505 communications server is installed on the system that is executing the pinning chart The FasTrak 505 communications server is au tomatically installed with 505 WorkShop or with ControlShop By default the pinning chart is set up to communicate with the 505 Simulator using TCP IP In order to use the pinning chart with an actual processor some communication settings need to be modified This is accomplished by changing the values of certain cells in the pinning chart These cells are located in the Communication Type Comm Type table which begins in row 12 of the pinning chart Overview of Using the Pinning Chart In order to use the pinning chart you must perform the following actions Detailed de scriptions of each action are provided later 1 Enabling Active Content in Microsoft Excel Microsoft Excel may need to be configured to allow active content If the pinning chart is opened in Microsoft Excel and active content is blocked the pinning chart will not function properly 2 Enter Parameters from the MegaEDRUM Instruction The MASK EVENT COUNT and USE STEP parameters from the MegaEDRUM in struction are entered into specific cells in the pinning chart 3 Modify the Size of the Pinning Chart If needed the size of the pinning chart can be modified to reflect the num
504. restart bit after word moved from table C77 2 ON C77 ON C77 ON PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Switch Functions Switch Functions SWITCH CASE BREAK DEFAULT ENDSWITCH SWITCH statements ate used to compare the result of a single expression against a field of possible condition states These statements are ideally used in place of large nested IF ELSE statement sequences which ate inefficient in terms of execution time and mem ory usage SWITCH Condition Cancel e Condition this statement is evaluated against the constant variable s declared in the corresponding CASE statements Valid descriptors for this field are IMATH expressions e Value a constant that is matched by the result of the corresponding SWITCH Condition statement Valid descriptors are any long constant value SWITCH Operation SWITCH operates in conjunction with CASE BREAK DEFAULT and ENDSWITCH At least one CASE and one ENDSWITCH statement is required for each SWITCH state ment The SWITCH format is illustrated below 599 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Switch Functions SWITCH valid IMATH expression gt CASE lt SWITCH x gt lt SF STATEMENT gt lt SF STATEMENT gt lt SF STATEMENT gt BREAK CASE lt SWITCH y gt lt SF S TATEMENT gt lt SF STATEMENT gt lt SF STATEMENT gt BREAK DEFAULT lt SWITCH is neither x nor y gt
505. riate check box under Include Ladder Font changes the font displayed in the active program Any active Window s font can be selected To change the font 1 Click the Ladder Font button Result The Font dialog box is displayed Font Font style Courier Ne Courier New 3 Cancel Bold Italic Ir Decorated035 BT Effects Sample Strikeout Underline AaBbYyZz Color Black Script Westem z 2 Choose a font font style and font size Notice that you can see a sample of the font in the Sample box 90 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs 3 Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to cancel your changes Result The Print Logic and SFs dialog box appears NOTE The print selection options are stored when saving a program Print Loops Select the Loops check box from the Print dialog box to print the following e All PID Loops e PID Loops and Headers To change the PID Loops properties click the Loops button on the Print dialog box The Print Loops dialog box appears Print Loops iw All Loops Loop Range from to v Headers Save as Defaults Restore Defaults Doc Font ss toma Select the All Loops check box to print the entire range loops To print a selection clear the All Loops check box and enter a range in the associated edit box To include loop head ers with the printout click the Headers check box 1 Cli
506. rights need to be configured Access this computer from the network Enter all users groups that will need to access this computer from the network These users will represent the server s clients that need to request security clearance e Deny access to this computer from the network Make sure that any user groups that are listed in the above right are not listed here e Generate security audits A user with administrative rights should be added here This should be the same user that the server is launched under See DCOM in the Centralized Security Server Server Configuration of this manual This right should 642 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server be configured even if security audits are not used This Administrator will be ref erenced later in this manual in the section dealing with DCOM e Manage auditing and security log A user with administrative rights should be added here This should be the same user that the server is launched under See DCOM in the Centralized Security Server Server Configuration portion of this manual This right should be configured even if the logs are not used NOTE This is the same Administrator described earlier Configuration location differs depending on the operating system your on In Windows NT enter the User Manager and choose User Rights from the Policies menu If interested in generating security
507. rk 002 The previous Net work 002 becomes Network 003 Undo Use Undo to reset networks addtesses in a segment to their original data Any modified or inserted rung can be reset Deleted rungs cannot be reset To access the Undo feature 1 Click Undo from the Edit menu or press CTRL Z Result The Undo Logic window appears 2 Select the segments to reset and click OK or click Undo All to reset all net wotks addtesses displayed 3 Click Cancel to close the window Undo Logic Network Number s to Undo OK Cancel Undo All tio 107 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Editing Clear Clear Use Clear to clear an item without removing the space it occupies Clear can be accessed from the Logic Editor in either offline or online mode To clear items 1 Select the item or items you want to clear 2 Click Clear from the Edit menu or press the DELETE key Result The Clear dialog box appears 3 Click the items you want to clear 4 Click OK or press ENTER Result The selected items ate cleared Clear C Ladder Network C C C C The following table describes the clearing items Ladder Removes all networks addresses from the block displayed Network Removes all logic from the network at the cursor position 108 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Editing Logic Editor Online This option is availabl
508. rkShop s many different features for de veloping ladder logic You can program in online or offline mode 189 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Profibus DP Configuration Using the Profibus DP Configurator The PLC WorkShop Profibus Configurator makes it easy to plan configure and diagnose Profibus DP networks without the need of additional Profibus configuration tools Com pletely integrated into PLC WorkShop the Profibus configurator allows you to configure Profibus masters slaves and slave I O modules from directly within the WorkShop ap plication Other time saving features include Merge legacy COM Profibus 2BF configuration files Store device description files GSD with the WorkShop application Save the entire configuration within the WorkShop program file Assign and modify starting I O addresses for slave modules Troubleshoot modules with comprehensive online diagnostics You no longer need to use multiple utilities to configure your Profibus I O With the built in Profibus Configurator you can do everything you used to do in COM Profibus while staying within the familiar easy to use WorkShop environment With the Profibus Configurator you can e Configure the I O slaves including any 2500 Series or 505 PROFIBUS DP RBCs that you wish to use on the PROFIBUS DP I O channel e Add or delete slaves or modules or modify bus par
509. rmed the activity Some of the activities recorded in the Activity Audit file include Going online with a PLC Loading and saving PLC programs PLC operations Changes to ladder logic and special functions Edits to alarms PID loops etc Changing values via the data window Forcing and clearing forces Changes to documentation Activity Audits can be written to Microsoft Access files Structured Query Language SQL files or the Windows Activity Log when the FT Security Server is running on an accessible computer Activity audit information may be written to Microsoft Access and SQL files may be read with many popular viewers Audits written to the Windows Activity Logs may be read with the Windows Event Viewer which is found in the Windows NT 2000 XP Ad ministrative Tools menu The Activity Audit feature may be used in conjunction with Password Security but can used independently from security See Activity Audit Setup Dialog for details on configuring activity auditing 613 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 12 Auditing Activity Audit Setup Dialog Activity Audit Setup Dialog If the computer is running Windows NT 2000 XP or Vista PLC WorkShop determines whether the user logged into the operating system is an administrator If the user is an ad ministrator the Activity Audit Setup dialog appears If security is enabled but the user logged into the operating system is not an administrator access is not g
510. roller will result in the CPU ceasing operation and entering a fatal error state If this occurs Auxiliary Function AUX 29 PLC Operational Status will re port error code 020C Invalid Control Block Upon encountering this error condition it will be necessary to disconnect the battery and re cycle power to the CPU To prevent this error do not at tempt to load a program containing this or other instructions designed to only be compatible with the CTI 2500 Series controller into a Simatic 505 series controller 601 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Synchronous Shift Register SSR Synchronous Shift Register SSR The Synchronous Shift Register statement builds a table that functions as a synchronous shift register The SSR format is shown below Register Start Status Bit Register Length Cancel Help e Register Start the starting address for the shift register Valid descriptors are writeable integer addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 and writeable real addresses writeable addresses containing a real value such as V120 This field also accepts bit of word addresses in this case shifting starts from the specified bit within the word variable e Status Bit the status bit C or Y This is turned on when the register is empty Valid descriptors are writeable bit elements writeable bit addresses and temporary bit of word address
511. rrors must be fixed before the new PLC s logic can be validated To change the PLC type 1 Click PLC Type Setup from the PLC Utilities menu Result The PLC Type Setup dialog box appears 2 Select the appropriate PLC Type Revision and for some PLCs PLC Memory Size PLC Memory Configuration Controller memory is composed of several functional types You can configure the amount of memory that is allotted to some of these areas This is dependent upon your application and PLC type The configurable memory sizes are given in the SIMATIC 545 555 575 System Reference Manual Ladder User Program Memory e Ladder Memory stores RLL program e Special Memory stores loops analog alarms and SF Programs e User Memory stores user defined subroutines 174 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration PLC Type Setup Offline User Data Data Area Memory e Variable Memory stores variable data e Constant Memory stores constant data e Global and VME Memory ate used for VME data transfer applies to 575 only System Operation System Memory RLL instruction tables drum timer counter shift register etc Image registers and control and relays Subroutine parameter atea SF program temporary memory Status Word memoty Not Configurable The configuration process begins with PLC Configuration Accessing PLC Configuration 1 Click PLC Configuration from the PLC
512. rs are integer addresses or values any integer value or address containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 e Starting Step specifies the starting step in the ramp soak profile at which the pack operation will begin Valid descriptors are integer addresses or values any in teger value or address containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 PACKRS Operation The number of steps in a ramp soak profile is established when it is programmed using the Ramp Soak Editor The PACKRS instruction cannot expand or shorten the ramp soak pro file for a given loop This instruction can only read or modify existing steps in a preexisting profile PACKRS instructions that specify operations on non existent profile steps are in valid and the execution of this instruction terminates 584 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Ramp Soak Data PACKRS If TO Table is specified this instruction copies the specified number of steps from the ramp soak profile of a given loop starting at the specified step number to a table in mem ory whose starting address is indicated in the instruction If FROM Table is specified this instruction copies the specified number of profile steps from a memory table into the ramp soak profile for the indicated loop starting at the specified step number The new step values overwrite the affected step values in the profile NOTE Cate should be taken when usin
513. rtable for you we recommend following the manual outline in your approach to programming Advancing through the remaining sections in this order will help ensure a more efficient use of the software These sections in order include e PLC WorkShop Basics e Setup e PLC Memory amp I O Configuration e Programming e Documentation e Analog Alarms e PID Loops e RLL Instructions e Special Function Instructions e Auditing e FasTrak Authentication and NT Security e 505 Simulator e FTLogger e FTTrender e FTVersionTrak Approaching the software in this order will also help you discover 505 WorkShop s powerful features that include e Multiple windows view and edit e Flexible program setup e Access to ladder logic through cross reference e Write read and force addresses from the Data Window e Multiple documentation options e Keyboard support for every function and command 55 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Starting PLC WorkShop Starting PLC WorkShop After installing PLC WorkShop start WorkShop by doing one of the following actions e Double click the WorkShop icon e Click Start point to All Programs click FasTrak SoftWorksand then click 505 WorkShop While 505 WorkShop loads the 505 WorkShop copyright screen appears If your license re quires the FasTrak KEY for WorkShop to function and 505 WorkShop does not detect a key an error message appears 505 WorkShop
514. run in Demo mode without a key Demo Exit Possible Causes e WorkShop was started without the FasTrak K EY attached to a valid parallel or USB port e The FT Key port driver may be missing or corrupt e If running Windows NT the NT driver may not be loaded 45 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 2 Installation FasTrak KEY Solution Check to see that e The FasTrak KEY is connected to a valid parallel or USB port e The FasTrak KEY is the first device attached to the computer e Any parallel printers attached to parallel ports are turned on Reinstall the port driver 1 Download the latest FT Key driver from FasTrak at www fast soft com 2 Uninstall the existing driver by running the driver file and selecting the Removeradio button from the Program Maintenance dialog and following the prompts in the install program 3 Remove any attached FasTrak KEYs from the computer 4 Reinstall the driver by running the driver file again and following the prompts in the install program NOTE If WorkShop is being installed on a laptop that uses a dock ing station do not attach the key to the docking station If the laptop is removed from the docking station the key will not be found Instead remove the port driver using the steps above and reinstall the key driver with the laptop un docked WorkShop will then recognize the key whether or not the laptop is docked Message 505 WorkShop 2 J Ahardwa
515. ry A block of memory within the controller is reserved for the RLL program This memory type is called Ladder Memory L Memory Each RLL instruction used in the program re quires one or more 16 bit words of L Memoty Image Register Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for maintaining the status of discrete inputs outputs This memory type is called the discrete image register A word image reg ister holds the values of word inputs outputs Control Relay Memory A block of memory within the controller is reserved for control relays Control relays are single bit internal memory locations and do not represent actual hardwired devices Special Memory A block of memory within the controller may be allocated for loops analog alarms and Spe cial Function programs This memory type is called Special Memory S Memory All loop and analog alarm parameters ate stored in S Memory when you program the loop or analog alarm Likewise when you create a Special Function program or subroutine the program is stored in S Memory Temporary Memory A block of memory within the controller is temporarily reserved during run time whenever a Special Function program is run One block is allocated for each SF program that is being run This memory type is 16 words in length and is called Temporary Memory T Memory since it is not saved when the program has completed running 177 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC
516. s Lead Lag LEAD LAG Lead Lag LEAD LAG Use the LEAD LAG statement to filter an analog variable This procedure calculates an output based on an input and the specified gain lead and lag values The LEAD LAG statement can only be used with cyclic processes such as loops analog alarms and cyclic Special Function programs LEAD LAG Input Output Lead Time Min Lag Time Min Gain 2 2 Old Input Cancel Help e Input the location of the input value of the current sample period that is to be processed Valid field descriptors are integer addresses addresses containing an in teger value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 or real addresses addresses containing a teal value such as 33 642 V120 V100 2 or WY55 e Output the location of the output variable the result of the LEAD LAG op eration Valid descriptors are writeable integer addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 and writeable real addresses writeable addresses containing a real value such as V120 e Lead Time the lead time in minutes Valid descriptors are real addresses or values any real value or address containing a real value such as 33 642 V100 2 or V120 e Lag Time the lag time in minutes Valid descriptors are real addresses or values any real value or address containing a real value such as 33 642 V100 2 or V120 e Gain the ratio of the change in output to the c
517. s The dialog box shows the Loop Mode Loop number 1 64 Loop Title and Enable Disable state 2 Select the loop you want to delete and then click Delete The following dialog box appears 505 WorkShop y The selected PID Loop s will be deleted Do you wish to continue Yes No 3 Select Yes to delete the PID Loop 396 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Ramp Soak Ramp Soak Overview of Ramp Soak The ramp soak feature allows you to define a variation for the process variable by spec ifying the time characteristics of the loop setpoint The capability of varying the loop setpoint can be useful in a number of processes such as heat treating and batch cooking c o a a e Time Example Ramp Soak Cycle You can use simple ramp operations to improve some process startup procedures For ex ample the controllers do a bumpless transfer from manual to automatic mode This transfer holds the process at the initial state when the mode change occurs A two step ramp soak profile can then move the setpoint to a predefined value following the mode change with minimal disturbance to the process Defining Ramp Soak Steps Ramp Soak is programmed as a set of time petiods or steps A step can be one of three types a ramp a soak or an end e The ramp step changes the loop setpoint linearly from its current value to a new value at a specified rate of change e The soak step
518. s ALT U N The System Part Number dialog box appears The part number and release for each card along with the slot number and name of the card is shown System Software Part Numbers PLC Slot PLC Card Name Part Number Release 545 CPU 2803571 0402 Performing Syntax Check Use the Syntax Check to check your RLL program for errors that will prevent the con troller from entering RUN mode such as UNKNOWN INSTRUCTION LADDER 318 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays ELEMENT OUT OF RANGE NO CORRESPONDING PAIR or OUT OF MEMORY Syntax Check is currently available only on 545 555 and 575 controllers To execute the Syntax Checker 1 Click Syntax Checker on the Diagnostics menu or press ALT D Y The Syntax Checker dialog box is displayed Syntax Checker Total Errors Success Syntax Errors Found Errors Network Label XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXx No errors detected Up to 16 errors can be displayed on the Syntax Check screen if more than 16 errors are de tected ADDITIONAL ERRORS DETECTED is displayed To display the additional errors use the scroll bar on the dialog box If no errors are detected No errors detected is displayed on the bottom line If errors are detected they will be listed within the dialog box The logic errors can be viewed by selecting the error and then clicking Go To on the Syntax Checker dialog box Ladder Status Online
519. s bit is selected for the step The short address form is shown below 585 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Ramp Soak Data PACKRS MSB 5 0 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 Word 1 word2 oJoJoJojofojofojoJjofofofojofojo S Step type 0 ramp step 1 soak step Point Type 000 control relay C 110 output Y Offset same as point number Figure 20 PACKRS Address Format Short Form For example the encoded address for Y23 using the short formis shown in the following illus tration Ramp step with status bit Y23 MSB 1 16 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 wort soToToTe o oTo oTo o o e o o s S 0 Ramp step Point Type 110 Y output Offset 017 Hex 23 Figure 21 PACKRS Short Form Address Example The long address form is shown below MSB LSB 1 7 13 15 16 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 14 wort S1 1 io 0 9 0 Page number word2 o PontType OR S Step type 0 ramp step 1 soak step Point Type 000 control relay C 110 output Y Page Number Point number 1 Page size Offset offset within current page Offset Point number 1 modulo Page size 1 NOTE Page size 512 for control relays C 1024 for output points Y Figure 22 PACKRS Address Format Long Form For example the encoded address for C514 using the long form is shown below 586 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Fun
520. s in run mode you cannot perform the following functions communicating through a NIM Force Unforce and Find except Find Ad dress Setting Up the UNILINK HOST Adapter To communicate with 505 WorkShop the UNILINK Host Adapter must conform to the following parameters 153 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Communication e NITP protocol e Full duplex e Asynchronous e Maximum Host Baud Rate 19 200 See your UNILINK Host Adapter User Manual for details on setting dip switches for the UNILINK Host Adapter TIWAY Setup Configuration From the Communications Setup dialog box click the TIWAY button Result The TIWAY Setup dialog box appeats TIWAY Setup Address Path Description 1 Annex Add Modify Delete Close Secondary Addresses 1 From the TIWAY Setup screen dialog box click the ADD button to enter a new controller secondaty address or the Modify button to change the controller sec ondaty address information Result The TIWAY Path dialog box appears 154 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Communication TIWAY Path Secondary Address aM Path Description A 2 Enter the controller secondary address for the associated controller A controller sec ondary address is a unique number from 1 254 that is used to identify a controller on the TIWAY link Each PLC on TIWAY has a controller secondary address 3 Enter th
521. s of EEPROM to RAM 3 Erase the contents of EEPROM To execute the above EEPROMS tasks 1 Click one of the preceding EEPROM tasks from the PLC Operations dialog box The message Do you want to copy EEPROM to RAM ora similar message appears 2 Click YES or NO Programming Port Lockout Use Port Lockout to prevent program changes from being made at different ports si multaneously If the controller is unlocked the Port Lockout button will display Locked If the controller is locked the Port Lockout button will display Unlock To execute Pott Lockout 1 Click Port Lockout from the PLC Utilities menu ALT U O The Port Lockout dialog box appears PLC is Unlocked Current Local Ethernet Port cue 2 If the PLC is unlocked click Lock to lock the communication port The message Lock communication ports appears 317 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays 3 If the PLC is locked click Unlock to unlock the communication port The message Unlock communication ports appears NOTE Programming devices connected through the same Dual Communication Port DCP cannot lock each other out 4 Click YES or NO System Part Number Use System Part Number to read the software part number and the release number of the cards installed in your controller To execute System Part Number 1 Click System Part Number from the PLC Utilities menu pr pres
522. s ran locally or remotely 2 WorkGroups and Domains Details to how both relate to NT Security 3 Configuring Users and Groups Procedures for adding and setting up groups for the variety of supported Operating Systems 4 Configuring User s Rights and Audit Policy Instructions for configuring spe cific user rights and audit policy on the machine to which the server will be running from 636 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server 5 DCOM Distributed Component Object Module Configuration Instructions for configuring DCOM on the available variety of Operating Systems and how to setup the Security Administrator 6 Security Configuration Specific instructions for how to setup configure and launch the Security Configurator Also instructions for configuring the users groups and auditing features as well as the Event Viewer used to view generated logs Installing the Security Server If the FasTrak client applications are installed on a machine other than the one FTSecSvr is running on remote security users may want to install PTSecCfg on the client machine s as well as the server machine so that the server can be configured locally or from the client machine FasTrak security must be installed on a machine running Windows NT 3 1 or later 2000 XP or Vista Two applications get installed to a user selected directory on the local ma chine
523. s within each subroutine and up to 255 SKP LBL instructions for each TASK segment in the program e The reference numbers for the SKP LBL instruction range from 1 to 255 and numbers cannot be duplicated within a given subroutine or TASK segment e The subroutine set distance from the main RLL program and reference numbers used in the subroutine can also be used in the main program That is SKP23 is the main program does not interfere with a SKP23 in the subroutine e When the SKP receiver power flow all ladder logic between the SKP and its as sociated LBL is ignored by the controller Output between the SKP and the LBL are frozen in their current states e All ladder logic within the SJP zone of control is executed normally when the SKP does not have power flow e ForaSKP to LBL function located within the zone of control of an MCR or JMP the SKP or LBL function overrides the MCR or JMP when the SKP has power flow e The zone of control for a SKP is limited to the task segment or subroutine in which the SJP is used the matching LBL must be defined after the SJP and be lo cated in the same task segment or subroutine as the SKP e For aJMPE or MCRE contained within a SKP s zone of control the program func tions as if the JMPE or MCRE is located at the end of the program whenever the SKP is active 516 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions NOTE When a SKP is active timers bet
524. self Selecting this option will prompt for both a username and password See your system administrator for more information 9 Click OK to continue 10 Click the Browse button in the Location group box The Select Repository Folder dialog box appeats EFC 4 505 WorkShop 4 Documentation Cancel 11 Select the repository folder you would like to add the program file to and click OK to return to the Add File to Repository dialog box 12 Click OKinthe Add File to Repository dialog The file is added to FTVersionTrak Getting Versions of a File The Get action retrieves a version of the active program from the repository and places it in your working directory as a read only copy to review or check out 119 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak To get a version of the active WorkShop program 1 Click the icon on the FTVersionTrak toolbar The Get dialog box appears Item 575 FSS Version Latest Version C Verion 1 C Latest Version of State Cixeuvekn x To Ic Program Files505 WorkShop Browse Overwrite working copies Make Writable tas ok Came 2 Select the options of the version you would like to get in the Version group box e Selecting Latest Version places the latest version of the file into your working directory e Selecting Version allows you to choose the version you would like to get
525. sert 103 111 271 Insert Network 247 Insert Row 247 248 263 Ladder 246 247 Logic 64 Paste 103 105 268 354 369 Paste With Rewire 103 106 269 Pasting Documentation 355 PID Loops 383 Ramp Soak 398 Special Function Programs 263 Tag 352 Title Page 364 Undo 103 107 Editing and Creating New Documentation 351 EDRUM 440 EEPROM 313 317 ELSE 559 Enable Base 186 Enable Password Security 630 Enable Slave 198 218 END 511 End Conditional 512 ENDC 512 ENDIF 559 Endswitch 599 Endwhile 607 EQU 464 Equal To 464 PLC WorkShop for Modicon Index Error Operation FTVersionTrak Error Operation 392 Errors 45 304 305 318 CTI 2500 305 Error Codes 305 Key Errors 45 Processor Faults 304 Syntax Check 318 Ethernet 49 51 158 EXIT 548 Exit on Error 548 Expand Definition 201 222 Export 266 Exporting Documentation 75 External Subroutine Call 520 F Fall Through Shift Register Input 549 Fall Through Shift Register Output 552 Fast PLC 65 164 FasTrak KEY 35 44 45 56 FasTrak Authentication 624 626 628 632 FasTrak Authentication Security Dialog 626 FasTrak Support 34 35 45 Faults 304 305 Fax 34 Features 31 55 File Associated Communications 148 163 Find 241 273 275 278 356 Address 278 666 Documentation 275 356 I O Address 241 Logic 273 Next 275 Find Configured I O 241 Finding Logic 273 floating point compare 464 465 467 469 470 472 FMS 160 For 555 Force 291 292
526. sole RootiComputer Management Local System ToolsM ocal Users and Groups BAR ll System Tools a al Event Viewer vmware u vmware user VMware User E Shared Folders _ Bj administrator Built in account For administering T Local Users and 113 chris Shaefer Chris Schaefer 3 Guest Built in account for quest access t 3 Groups 3 A P Bj HelpAssistant Remote Desktop Help Assi Account For Providing Remote As Y i gt lt Computer Management Local System Tools Local Users and Groups Groups E Computer Management Local fl System Tools B administrators Administrators have complete and u fp Event Viewer E Backup Operators Backup Operators can override secu x E Shared Folders SS Guests Guests have the same access as me Local Users and Groups 3 Network Configuration Members in this group can have som E acil S Power Users Power Users possess most administr l amp S Remote Desktop Users Members in this group are granted t Adding Users and Groups on a Domain Controller If on a domain controller select Active Directory Users and Computers from the Ad ministrative Tools menu From the tree control right click the Users folder to add users and or groups Configuring User Rights and Audit Policy Correctly configuring specific user rights and audit policy on the server machine is essential for proper security and for the server to operate correctly The following user
527. ss and is placed into work lo cations beginning with the LSB of the word specified by TD e All bits are copied into the work locations during each scan There must be a suf ficient number of discrete points to copy all bits into the table of N words e The output is turned on when the instruction is executed MIRTT Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 IR Bit Address X Y C B TD Wotd Address Form A N Constant Only 1 256 Move Image Register to Word MIRW The Move Image Register to Word MIRW instruction copies a specified number of bits from the discrete image register or the control relay memory locations to a designated word memory location Up to 16 bits can be copied in a single scan When power is passed to the input of a MIRW the instruction is executed The operation of the MIRW is defined as follows e Up to 16 bits N are copied beginning with the lowers numbered address which is specified by IR e The bits are moved into the work memory location specified by A beginning with the LSB of the word If fewer than 16 bits are moved the remaining bits are set to 0 All bits ate copied during a single scan e The output is turned on when the instruction is executed 490 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions MIRW Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 IR Bit Address X Y C B Word A
528. ss parameters to a subroutine These parameters allow you to write a generic subroutine using parameter identified IN1 IN20 instead of specific memoty locations Several PGTS instruction using different memory locations as parameters can then call the same general subroutine number To Program the Instruction To program the instruction first insert the instruction into the ladder network Using the Program menu new parameters may be added or deleted by clicking the appropriate menu option Once a parameter has been added it can be selected and edited by clicking once on said parameter from within the box instruction To delete a parameter use the menu se lection found in the Program menu 518 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions The PGTS instruction works as follows e When the input is turned on the contents of each parameter are set equal to the contents of the memory location specified in the parameter field Then the sub routine indicated by the PGTS number is called e When the subroutine returns control to the main RLL program the contents of the memory location specified in each read write IO parameter field is set equal to the contents of the parameter The contents of memory locations designated IN are not changed e Contents of parameters are stored in PGTS discrete and word parameter areas When you use a parameter in the subroutine refer to discrete points as B
529. ssion provides a mathematical means for limiting the rate of change of the process variable As the rate of change becomes larger the derivative term reduces the output resulting in the reduction of the rate of change of the process vat iable The Derivative gain defines the magnitude of the output reduction as a function of the rate of change of the process variable Excessive Derivative gain would result in an un desirable output oscillation as the controller continues to eliminate the error When the PID gains are set appropriately the resulting process variable curve would take on the ideal curve appearance as shown below 405 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning Ideal Process Variable Curve Many factors affect the process variable curve These factors may take the process beyond where the controller can create the ideal curve It is the function of the PID SmarTune util ity to determine the optimum PID gain values to achieve a response as close to the ideal curve as possible Essentially the SmarTune utility creates a disturbance by initiating a step increase of the PID output Process variable samples are collected as this increase in output precipitates a change in the process variable When the sample period is complete the data collection is analyzed for time lag gradient overshoot steady state error and oscillation Using a frequency analysis method the opti
530. st be entered to en able editing Double clicking the protected subroutine or selecting the Goto SF button requires the user to enter the password assigned to the subroutine Enter Current Password Password Cancel Importing and Exporting Special Function Programs and Subroutines Use the following procedure to import or export Special Function programs or subroutines Exporting Programs and Subroutines 1 Open the Special Functions dialog box by clicking Special Functions from the View menu or clicking the toolbar button Special Functions Programs Subroutines Prog Title Enabled Compiled Title Enabled Compiled Protected YES YES Header Display Used S Memory Available 4054 Copy Paste Delete Password Esport 2 Select the program or subroutine number from the list that contains the program you would like to export and click Export The Save As dialog box appears 266 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming SF Program and Subroutine Editor Save in CQ 505 WorkShop e ex EB 5 HDGSDBMP ES FD10910 wsf File name FD10910 wsf Save as type 505 WorkShop Special Function wwsf y Cancel 2 Browse to the location in which you would like to save the program Enter a file name for the program and click Save The file will be saved as a WSF 505 Work Shop Special Function file Importing Programs and Subroutines 1 From the Special Funct
531. stant A Warning Do not use the same reference number more than once for the MWTT and MWFT instruction Assigning the same reference number can cause un predictable machine operation Move Word with Index MWI The Move Word with Index MWJ instruction allows you to copy up to 256 words from one area of V memory to another area of V memoty during a single scan When power is passed to the input the instruction is executed The MWI has the fol lowing features e Atable ofup to 256 memory locations havinga starting index specified in Ais copied e The copied words are placed in a destination table in memory beginning at the start index specified in B e All words are copied into the destination table each scan e The output is turned on when the instruction is executed 495 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions e If either the source or the destination pointer plus table size exceeds memory size instruction is not executed The output is turned off and bit 11 in Status Word 1 is set Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant Word Address Word Address Word Address Move Word to Image Register MWIR The Move Word to Image Register instruction MWIR copies a specified number of bits from a word memory location to the discrete image register or into the control relay mem ory locations All bits are copied in a single scan When power
532. struction on a Simatic 505 series controller will result in the CPU ceasing operation and entering a fatal error state If this occurs Auxiliary Function AUX 29 PLC Op erational Status will report error code 020C Invalid Control Block Upon encountering this error condition it will be necessary to disconnect the battery and re cycle power to the CPU To prevent this error do not attempt to load a program containing this or other instructions designed to only be compatible with the CTI 2500 Series controller into a Simatic 505 series controller 608 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Comment Comment Comment THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF A COMMENT STATEMENT A COMMENT CAN BE UP TO 1021 CHARACTERS Cancel Help The comment statement inserts a comment in a program for documentation purposes The comment statement is ignored during program execution A comment statement can con tain a maximum of 1021 characters 609 610 Chapter 12 Auditing 612 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 12 Auditing Introduction Introduction The Activity Audit contains records which list programming and setting changes made by users while running WorkShop These records contain The date and time the activity occurred A general description of the activity The machine name of the computer on which the activity occurred If available the name of the user who perfo
533. structions Timers Counters and Drums You can also add descriptive information about the address For instance if C101 controls Tank 3 you can replace the default text of C1 description here with Tank 3 Similar descriptions can be added to the other coil addtesses The address and description information is for reference only this means these values can be changed with no impact on the operation of the pinning chart C1 description here C2 description here C3 description here C4 description here C5 description here C6 description here C7 description here C8 description here C9 description here C10 description here C11 description here C12 description here C13 description here C14 description here C15 description here C16 description here fot ololololrlol oral ssa sa salss ie Figure 5 Default column identifiers in the MegaEDRUM xls Entering additional addresses and descriptions ate optional it is not required If you do decide to add additional addresses and descriptions however you can use the fill handle feature of Excel to automate the process To use the fill handle select the cells that you want to use as a basis for filling additional cells and then drag the fill handle across the cells you want to fill Additional information about the fill handle can be found in the help for Microsoft Excel Fill Handle Figure 6 Use the Fill Handle to Copy Cells Mask Address Column The addresses displaye
534. t When the input is turned on the WROT instructionis executed IF the input remains on the in struction is executed on every scan The WROT instruction has the following operation e Each 4 bit segment of the word specified in memory location A is shifted to the right e A segment may be shifted up to 3 positions as specified by N e If A is not zero the output is turned on when the instruction is executed If A is zero the output is turned off WROT Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number 0 32767 480 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Math and Logic Instructions Math and Logic Instructions Add ADD The Add instruction adds a signed integer A to a signed integer B and stores the result in R When the input is ON 1 the ADD box is executed If the input remains ON 1 the instruction is executed on every scan The ADD operation is executed as follows R A B If the sum is between 32768 and 32767 the output is turned ON 1 Otherwise the output is turned OFF 0 indicating an addition overflow and the R result contains the truncated sum 16 bits ADD Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Constant 0 32767 Number Word Address FomA Parameter B Word Form Sa or Constant Address Constant 32768 32767 Word Address FomB Subtract SUB The Subtract instruction SUB subtracts a signed integer in memory location B from a sig
535. t Files To make changes to your WorkShop program using FTVersionTrak it must first be checked out Checking out a file places a writeable copy of the file within the user s work ing directory If the file is already present in the working directory following a Get action for example then FTVersionTrak removes the read only status on the file while it is checked out 1 Clickthe y icon onthe FTVersionTrak toolbar The Check Out dialog box appears 121 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak Check Out 575 FSS Comment Cancel To Ic Program Files505 WorkShop Browse Do not get local copy 2 Inthe To box enter the directory in which to place the working copy or click Browse to locate the directory NOTE If a working directory has been set it appears in the text box If a working directory has not been set the text box ap peats as blank 2 Select the Do not get local copy check box if you do not wish to get the version of the repository file while checking the file out NOTE Using the Do not get local copy option only checks out the file This is helpful if your working copy is different than the latest version within FT VersionT tak 4 If desired enter a comment about the check out within the Comment text box This comment may be edited when the file or folder is checked in Click OK when finished After checking out a file or folder the
536. t addr Number of points Data start addr x CCCCCCC CCCCC CC CC 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 i 17 18 19 20 2122 23 2425 2627 Figure 10 PACK Statement Operation Example PACK TO Operation For a TO table data are written into a table This write operation begins with the data start ing at the first Data Start Address and writes the specified number of points or words into the table beginning with the first word of the table Bits are written sequentially as il lustrated below 573 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Data PACK TO FROM Figure 11 Example of PACKing Bits To a Table You can specify multiple blocks of data to be written into the table When the first word of the table is full PACK begins to fill the second word Words are written sequentially into the table as illustrated below You can also PACK multiple blocks of words To from table Table address Number of points Data start addr Number of points Data start addr Word image register Figure 12 Example of PACKing Words To a Table You can PACK blocks of words and blocks of bits into a table with one PACK statement The data are PACKed according to these rules Discrete points are PACKed into the next available bit in the table Words are PACKed into the next available word in the table Un used bits in the previous word fill with zeros when a word
537. t be used to control the coils which write to the Ys The IORW operation is not directly affected by MCRs and JMPs IORW Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant 0 32767 ST Bit Address Starting address X Y WX WY Points Constant Number of points to move 1 64 524 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Special Instructions NOTE The number of points to move must be a multiple of 8 All points must reside in the same I O module No Operation NOP NOTE NOP requires no parameters Date Compare DCMP The Date Comparte instruction DCMP compares the current date of the real time clock with the values contains in the designated memory locations When power is passed to the DCMP instruction the current date in the real time clock is compared to the date stored in the memory location in the instruction If the dates match the output of the instruction is turned on DCMP Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant Date Word Address The Data parameter uses 4 words to represent the actual date These are defined as follows e Date Year CDB 0000 0099 e Date 1 Month BCD 0001 0012 e Date 2 Day of Month BCD 0001 0031 e Date 3 Day of Week BCD 0001 0007 Date Set DSET The Date Set DSET instruction sets the date portion of the real time clock to the values contained in the designated address 525 PLC Work
538. tating changes to logic have not been validated or entered Changes cannot be saved until logic has been validated and entered Click the Validate Logic tool bat icon v or click Validate and Enter from the Program menu Complete necessary changes to logic and try to save the program again A Warning Editing or modifying a program online may produce unexpected or hazardous results Save Program As Offline Use Save Program As to save the active logic program with a different program name This is useful when maintaining the original without changes For example open file ABC FTK make changes select Save Program As and save the program as DEF FTK Now you have two files ABC FTK retained its same condition before you opened it and DEF FIK that contains changes made to ABC FTK NOTE You must validate logic before saving If you have not done so a message appears stating changes to logic have not been validated or entered Changes cannot be saved until logic has been validated and entered Click the Validate Logic toolbar icon Y or click Val idate and Enter Logic from the Program menu Complete necessary changes to logic and try to save the pro gram again To save a logic program with a new file name 1 Click Save As from the File menu Result The Save As dialog box appears 86 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Save in 505 WorkShop er E3 File
539. tation Address Description Prev Doc Prev Addr Next Addr Next Doc Description Line 1 Description Line 2 Description Comment Description Comment Line 1 Description Comment Line 2 Header Find New Close Help Header Documentation Text File Format Headers are exported and imported independently from tags descriptions and comments Header documentation is comprised of headers from alarms loops special function pro grams SFP special function subroutines SFS ladder networks and print title page The table below lists the file format for each header section Header text may occupy mul tiple lines Any text between two header types Alarm Loop SFS and so on will be associated with the header type above the text Alarm Alarm Alarm alarm number lt delimiter gt lt alarm header text gt lt delimiter gt Loop PID Loop Loop loop number lt delimiter gt lt loop header text gt lt delimiter gt SFS Special Function SFS SFS number lt delimiter gt lt SFS header Subroutine text gt lt delimiter gt SFP Special Function SFP SFP number lt delimiter gt lt SFP header Program text gt lt delimiter gt 79 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs Lad Ladder OB1 Lad lt delimiter gt lt ladder header text gt lt delimiter gt Net Rung Comment Net network number lt delimiter gt Paging None Before Odd lt delimiter gt lt network
540. td e Full Access Allows you to set the protection level of the controller for full read write access This option is written to the controller when you perform an Open function Full Access does not work without a password PLC Password Alias Online access to many PLC s can be restricted with its onboard password feature This PLC password is a case insensitive alphanumeric string of up to 8 characters When at taching online to a PLC containing a password the Enter Password dialog box requests the correct PLC password before allowing access to the PLC Enter Password Enter PLC Password Cancel This PLC password is actually stored in the PLC Therefore programming packages other than 505 WorkShop also request the same PLC password when attaching to the PLC Some administrators prefer using 505 WorkShop but are aware their PLCs can be accessed through other programming packages when users know the actual passwords stored in the PLCs These administrators may place an additional layer of security over the onboard PLC password feature by using PLC Password Aliases Administrators maintain a list of PLC 333 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Auxiliary PLC Functions and Displays password aliases in 505 WorkShop These aliases are case insensitive alphanumeric strings up to 8 characters long and are stored on the PC on which 505 WorkShop runs Each alias is associated with a PLC password stored
541. tects the preset values from changes made with an operator in UNPROT terface UNPROT Allows the preset values to be changed using an operator in terface Y C B Vx x Address of the coil to be turned off WYx x Wx x when the timet reaches zero DCCx x TCPx x and TCCx x bit address types entered in the form of a discrete address or a bit of wotd Input When the input on the Off Delay Coil 1s disabled e The COIL address in OFF When the input to the Off Delay Coil is enabled e The CTR value TCC addtess is set to the PRESET value TCP address e The COIL address is ON When the input to the Off Delay Coil transitions from enabled to disabled and the in struction is timing the CTR value TCC address is greater than zero e The time counts down from the PRESET value TCP address to zero e The COIL addtess is ON 463 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Compare Instructions Compare Instructions Equal To EQU A B INT When the input is energized the EQU instruction compares two integers two unsigned in tegers or two floating point values and energizes the output if and only if the first value A is equal to the second value B Data Type not INT integer Identifies the type of labelled located in UINT unsigned integer data being compared top right corner of in the instruction instruction block FLOAT floating point values block Note
542. ted CAFT ersionTrak 505 WorkShopMest FSS Would you like to check in this file Yes No e Click Yes to display the Check In dialog box After the file is checked in the file closes normally e Click No to close the file leaving it checked out NOTE If the file contains edits that have not been saved Work Shop will prompt the user to save file before continuing Closing Programs that are Checked In If a program file being closed has been checked in and no edits remain pending the file closes normally Howevet if the file being closed is checked in or has not yet been checked out and edits have been made to the program that have not yet been saved Work Shop will not immediately close the program WorkShop first prompts the user to save the file 505WS32 A Save changes to C Program Files S05 WorkShop EXA4MPLE FSS Yes No Cancel 135 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak e Click No to lose any unsaved changes and close the program e Click Cancel to cancel the save and keep the program open e Click Yes to save the file WorkShop then prompts the user to check out the file 505 WorkShop 3 Checkout Required C Program Files 505 WorkShop EXAMPLE FSS This file must be checked out before it can be saved You will not lose any changes you have made Would you like to check out this file e Click No to display the Save As dialog bo
543. ted between programs without re quiring users to know the logic contained within 264 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming SF Program and Subroutine Editor Because end users do not have access to the logic of password protected subroutines cre ators of such subroutines should not reference PLC addresses within the subroutine Instead programmers should use T memory and parameters passed in a SFSUB or CALL in struction so that they remain device independent To password protect a Special Function subroutine 1 Open the Special Functions dialog box by clicking Special Functions from the View menu or clicking the toolbar button Special Functions Programs Subroutines 1 Prog Title Enabled Compiled Title Enabled Compiled Protected YES i YES E Header zi Display Used S Memory Available 4054 Copy Paste Delete Password Export 2 Select a subroutine and click Password to create modify or delete a password for the selected subroutine SFS Password Protection 3 Subroutines that are password protected display a YES in the Protected column of the Subroutines list Subroutines Sub Title Enabled Compiled Protected newsfs 0002 YES NO 0003 YES NO 0004 YES NO 0005 YES NO 0006 n YES NO 265 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming SF Program and Subroutine Editor 4 Once a password is created for a subroutine the password mu
544. tep by a memory location in the mask field of the instruction The configurable mask is located in 16 consecutive memory locations The first location corresponds to step 1 of the drum the second to step 2 etc The mask is de fined as being configurable because you can change the mask by writing data to the memory locations 459 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums P t MDRMW cis Valid Parameter Types Type Drum Constant Only Varies with Drum configured Number ranges Constant Only 00 001 32 676 A Warning Do not use the same reference number more than once for any of the drum types It can cause un predictable machine operation On Delay Coil ONDC Delay Coil INPUT The On Delay Coil instruction is only compatible with the CTI 2500 family of processors It requires a CPU firmware of V6 18 or later 460 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums Varies with Instruction reference number Refer to configured the controller s user manual for the memory number supported The assigned instruc tion number must conform to the requirements of TIMER COUNTER memoty PRESET 0 0 3276 7 Preset value from which the timer times down STATUS PROT PROT Protects the preset values from changes made using an operator in UNPROT terface UNPROT Allows the preset values to be changed using an operator in terf
545. ters You can accept the default settings unless you wish to modify one such as baud rate Assign slave s Choose slave s such as the 2500 PRO FIBUS DP RBC up to 112 Configure slave s Add I O modules present within the slave de vice and assign starting I O addresses to each module Save the configuration The Profibus configuration is saved with the file 206 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration MERGING AN EXISTING NETWORK FROM COM PROFIBUS Migrating from COM If you are a COM Profibus user read this Profibus to the Pro topic first to ensure a smooth migration to the fibus Configurator WorkShop Profibus Configurator Open or create a pro The PLC Type selected for the program file gram file in WorkShop will act as the Profibus master Add device files Optional This step is not required if you do not plan on editing your network after the merge Import merge con If you have already configured your Profibus figuration network in COM Profibus WorkShop will ac cept the merged configuration Modify bus parameters Optional You can accept the default set tings unless you wish to modify one such as baud rate Assign slave s Optional If all device files are present for the merged configuration you can assign and configure additional slave devices See Lim ited Editing Mode Configure slave s Optional Add I O modules present wit
546. ters that you will use Use the following modem parameters eight bits no parity one stop bit and the highest baud rate that your equipment will support e Baud Rate The rate of communications between the computer and modem e Telephone Dialing Specifies which type of dialing to use Specify pulse dialing only if this is the only type your phone line supports e Force NITP Specifies ASCII communications for the 545 555 and 575 e Initialization Command The initialization commands sent to the modem Con sult your modem manual for a list of appropriate commands 151 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Communication 3 e Number to Dial Specifies the phone number to be dialed The number format can be dash 262 238 8088 space 262 238 8088 period 262 238 8088 or none 2622388088 Commas may be used if a pause is needed to gain access to an outside line before the number is dialed For example if 9 is used to gain ac cess to an outside line and there is a pause between the time 9 is pressed and a dial tone then the number enteted should be 9 262 238 8088 Click OK or press ENTER to accept the settings Click Cancel to disregard changes and return to the Communications Setup dialog box H1 Communications Before H1 Communications can be established with 505 WorkShop the following pro cedures must be completed im Install CP 1413 or 1613 card Select I O range Select u
547. the 10 to 20 range This causes disturbances that lead to erratic behavior of the process To solve this problem the controller allows you the option of selecting a derivative gain limiting coefficient Using this coefficient enables the process variable to be filtered with a time constant that is proportional to the derivative time The PID equations with the de rivative gain limiting coefficient follow Special Calculation On In the Spec Calc On box enter when a SF program is executed e Click PV to designate a process variable e Click SP to designate a setpoint e Click Output to designate output e Click None if no SF program is to be called Special Function In the Special Fn box enter a SF program number Click None if no SF program is to be called for execution Lock Setpoint In the Lock SP box click YES to lock the setpoint Click NO to not lock the setpoint 391 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Programming PID Loops Lock Auto Manual In the Lock Auto Man box click YES to lock the auto manual setting Click No to not lock the auto manual setting Lock Cascade In the Lock Cascade box click Yes to lock the cascade Click No to not lock the cas cade Error Operation In the Error Operation box click Squared Deadband or None The Error Squared and the Deadband options are mutually exclusive Click NONE if there is be no cal culation on the error value In calculating
548. the Autostart and PLC Start procedures in detail follow the instructions in the manual to configure the IP ad dress for your module New or modified IP address configurations do not take effect until you power cycle the base containing the PPX 505 CP2572 module Tips for Using the PLC Start Option The SIMATIC 505 Ethernet TCP IP Communication Processor 505 CP2572 User Manual order number PPX 505 8132 1 and the CTI 2572 Ethernet TCP IP Adapter Installation and Operation Guide order number 062 00146 describes how to build a Startup Network Command Block table used with the PLC Start option in the chapter on Installation Chapter 2 An easy way to construct this table is to open a Data window see Using The Data Win dow and enter the desired V memory address For instance the Ladder Logic Example in the SIMATIC manual assumes that the command block is located in V memory starting at location V500 From the desired location you can simply key in the values from the Startup Network Command Block example table in the manual supplying the correct IP ad dress IP route address and subnet mask for your network For even more permanency you can put the table into K memoty instead of V memory If you use the example ladder program from the SIMATIC manual you can just add a MOVW box to move the values in K to V 157 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Communication Connect the Module to the Ethernet
549. the bits in all of the words of the two tables each scan e The output is turned on when the instruction is executed TXOR Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant TI Word Address T2 Word Address Word Address Constant Only Table Complement TCPL The Table Complement TCPL instruction inverts the status of each bit in a table and places the results in another specified table The TCPL instruction has the following operations e When the input turns on each bit in the source table specified by TS is inverted and stored in the destination table specified by TD A 0 is inverted to 9 A 1 is 501 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions inverted to 0 e The bits in ALL words of the table are inverted each scan e The output is turned on when the instruction is executed TCPL Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant TS Word Address TD Word Address N Constant Only Table to Word TTOW The Table to Word TTOW instruction copies aword in atable and places it in another locat ion The operation of the TTOW instruction is described below e The Reset must be on for the instruction to be executed e When the Enable turns on a copy is made of the specified word in the table TS The index IN indicates which word in the table is copied The value contained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 when N is the len
550. the bus and must be unique for each slave device The master de vice is always at address 1 Station Name Any name up to 40 characters This field replaces the default device name supplied by the GSD file and will display in the Network Tree and the Master tab as the name of the slave device Slave Status Enable or disable the slave device by selecting the appropriate radio button Modules Displays the I O modules and I O address configuration of each module In formation is shown in the following columns 199 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration Profibus DP Configuration The slot number of the selected module The slot number is incremented by 1 for each added mod ule starting from the Module Offset which is specified by the device master file Also specified by the device master file this is the name of the I O module that has been in setted into the slave device The starting address point for the module This is the only user editable column in the Modules list box X Displays the number of discrete input address points available for the module Y Displays the number of discrete output address points available for the module WX Displays the number of word input address points available for the module WY Displays the number of word output address points available for the module Comment An editable text field for optional comments max imum of 20 characters
551. the control equation the controller uses an error value equal to or less than 1 0 Yo of PROCESS VARIABLE span over 100 Therefore selecting error squared gives a lower gain for a higher error The control equation with error squared is based on signed error squared instead of the error alone To implement a high gain for large errors and no gain for small errors incorporate an error deadband When error deadband is selected the controller does not take any action on the output if the process variable is within the yellow deviation limits Squared error calculation en SP PVn x abs SP PVn Deadband error calculation en 0 if abs SP PVn lt YDEV en SP PVn YDEV if SP PVn gt YDEV en SP PVn YDEV if SP PVn lt YDEV No error calculation en SP PVn 392 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops Programming PID Loops Reverse Acting In the Reverse Acting box click YES for a reverse acting loop Click No for a direct act ing loop A reverse acting loop is defined to have a negative gain that is a positive change in error SP PROCESS VARIABLE results in a negative change in the output from the con troller The value of the output signal decreases as the value of the error increases A direct acting loop is defined to have a positive gain that is a positive change in error SP PROCESS VARIABLE results in a positive change in the output
552. the locations in order of rung number The GOTO button closes the Address Trace window and places the cursor in ladder logic window at the network number selected in the Address Trace list box 299 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Unique Address Unique Address Unique determines if an element already exists in your ladder program and if so gives you the location For example if a TIMER is needed for a new feature you can use the Unique function to see if TMRnnnn is already used Since a TMR is a global memory box 505 WorkShop also checks to see if any TMR TMRF CTR UDC MCAT or DCAT has the same nnnn designator NOTE Unique checks only for occurrences of the designated ele ment in L Memory It does not search for an element in Loops Analog Alarms SFPGMs SFSUBs Intelligent I O or Operator Interface devices To access the Unique function 1 Select an item in the logic window to search on 2 Click Unique Address from the View menu The Unique Address window ap peats The two results of the search are e Address exists only at current network e Address exist at network number XXXX If you have more than one program loaded the information displayed is for the program in the active window only 300 Compare PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Compare File Program Compare compares the following data of the selected program on disk to the data in th
553. the memory online The following is a list of parts of memory that can be cleared Ladder V Data K Data Word I O Data TCC TCP Data DSP DSC Data PID Loops Analog Alarms Special Functions Programs Special Functions Subroutines U Memoty To access the Clear Memory option 1 If you want to save the changes you have made to your logic and documentation save them before going to Step 2 Click Save Program or Save Program As from the File menu 2 Click Clear Memory from the PLC Utilities menu ALT U L A A warning message appears stating all program logic data values tags and documentation will be deleted 3 Click Yes to clear all memory If changes to the program were not saved another warning message appears stating that changes to your program were not saved do you wish to continue with the clear memory procedure Click Yes to clear the mem ory 341 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming Selecting 575 Application Selecting 575 Application When you configure a 575 controller offline you must first select the application 1 Select PLC Configuration from the PLC Utilities menu The PLC Configuration dialog box appears 2 Click ReqApp under the Processor Information window on the PLC Configuration dialog box The Required Application dialog box appears You can change the Application ID only during offline configuration Configuring the con troller online displays the
554. the plus sign next to NT Security The NT Security installation components appear Select which components to install by checking ot un checking the check box next to each component Workgroups and Domains Workgroups NT security works slightly different in workgroups than in domains This difference is only a factor when using the security server remotely When a computer is part of a Workgroup and a user enters their user name and password to log onto the operating system the user name they logged in as the rights they have and groups they belong to are known only to the local computer When a local computer running a client application such as WorkShop connects to a re mote computer running the security server it tries to log on to the remote computer with the same user name and password If the exact user name and password cannot be found on the remote computer the client local computer gets logged onto the remote computer as 639 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server Guest For this reason a guest user normally has minimal rights This account is disabled by default If a guest account is enabled anyone can log on to the computer because a pass wotd is not required for this account In general when using workgroups all users that need to get security clearance from FasTrak s security server must exist on the server ma chine The rights a
555. the value 6655 e Shift register location V101 contains the value 7988 e The Status Bit C17 is off SSR executes one time The word 7988 shifts to V102 The word 6655 shifts to V101 Register start address V100 is reset to 0 V100 0 The Status Bit C17 is off SSR Statement Operation Example 604 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Unscaling Values UNSCALE Unscaling Values UNSCALE The UNSCALE statement takes an input value in engineering units scaled between high and low limits and converts it to an integer UNSCALE Scaled Input Binary Result Low Limit High Limit 20 Offset v Bipolar v Cancel Help e Scaled Input the memory location of the input Valid descriptors are integer ad dresses addresses containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 or teal addresses addresses containing a real value such as 33 642 V120 V100 2 or WY55 e Binary Result the memory location of the result after conversion Valid de sctiptors are writeable integer addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 e Low Limit the lower limit of the Scaled Input The valid descriptor is a real lit eral constant that is less than or equal to the High Limit value e High Limit the upper limit of the Scaled Input The valid descriptor is a real lit eral constant that is greater than or equal to the Low Limit value e
556. ting them from FTVersionTrak FTVersionTrak recognizes whether or not a file is being edited and by whom so team members can work on a program concurrently without overwriting each others work As long as each programmer is using the same FTVersionTrak database all team members can see each other s changes in a program Programmers in a single user environment can also benefit from using FTVersionTrak Using FTVersionTrak is beneficial for single users who want to centralize their programs onto a secure server FT VersionTrak also provides revision tracking and file state tran sitioning throughout the life of the program which is beneficial to both single user and team programming environments If you are not currently using FT VersionTrak to safeguard your PLC programs visit www fast soft com to download a demo or contact Sales at sales fast soft com for more information Getting Started with FTVersionTrak If you are using FTVersionTrak to protect and manage your WorkShop files for the first time follow these steps to begin To get started using FT VersionTrak with WorkShop 1 Check with your network or systems administrator to address issues such as access rights user accounts and so on If you are the network or systems administrator 114 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak review the Administrator Guide in the FIV ersionTrak manual 2 One user adds an existing
557. tion RLL instruction initiates custom functionality pro grammed into the CTI 2500 firmware This instruction provides a means to implement customer requested enhancements or complex functions such as Ethernet client com munication operations that are difficult to implement in ladder logic Input CFUNC Output ERR Status A CFUNC INSTANCE ID B P1 P2 P3 H 1 32767 Designates a unique custom function to be called fot execution A V Error Status Starting Address Starting location in V memory to write error code s Three consecutive 16 bit V memory locations must be reserved A specific CFUNC may or may not make use of these three error status words 535 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Special Instructions Any valid 505 Designates memory type address data memory type or format or 32 bit signed integer value siened long con for parameters to be read and or stant written by the Custom Function A 2147483647 maximum of 20 parameters are used to 2147483646 If a parameter is unused for a given CFUNC then a value of O will be used Run time error as the default checking val idates that Add a parameter by selecting the Pro parameters en gram Add CFUNC Parameter tered match menu item function re quirements The CFUNC instruction is used to execute a wide variety of functions during the RLL scan time Some functions can be executed very quickly and will be ru
558. tion Processor 305 CP5434 FMS User Manual The FMS CP module must be configured with the COM5434 Configuration software in cluded with the module The COM5434 Configuration software operates in Windows 95 161 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Communication or Windows NT only To install the software follow the installation instructions in the SI MATIC 505 PROFIBUS FMS Communication Processor 505 CP5434 FMS User Manual Each FMS CP module ina505 base must be configured to communicate over the PROFIBUS network The module local configuration foreach FMS CP module identifies its station ad dress and the network communication parameters it uses to operate on the network NOTE You must define the module local configuration for each FMS CP module using the RS 232 port with the standard 505 WorkShop programming cable before you can com municate with it using the PROFIBUS FMS port Refer to the SIMATIC 505 PROFIBUS FMS Communication Processor 505 CP5434 FMS User Manual for complete information on configuring the FMS CP module with the COM5434 Configuration softwate NOTE Make sure to select the bus parameters the baud rate and the highest station address HSA that match those of all the other modules on the network Also be sute to select a unique station address for each FMS CP module on the net work Once each FMS CP module has been configured to operate on the network connect each EMS
559. tional support After tuning values are calculated three actions are taken e Calculated Kc Ti and Td are written to a loop e The loop is changed to its prior mode e The loop s SP is assigned its prior value Calculate Derivative If Calculate Derivative is false only Ke and Ti are calculated and Td is set to zero If Cal culate Derivative is true Kc Ti and Td ate calculated Safe Output Safe Output is a Mn value that will not cause any harm to a process The default is to use the loop Mn value just prior to a tuning session start High Stop If a PV goes above High Stop Mn is set to Safe Output and an error is declared Low Stop If a PV goes below Low Stop Mn is set to Safe Output and an error is declared Largest Gain Largest Reset Largest Rate If a calculated value is larger than a configured value then it is reduced to a configured value and a warning is declared 415 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning Smallest Gain Smallest Reset Smallest Rate If a calculated value is smaller than a configured value then it is increased to a configured value and a warning is declated Activation Time Slice Calculation Time Slice These two values set how much impact SmarTune will have on PLC scan time If zero in all configurations a default will be used 2 milliseconds Otherwise in each categoty the largest value specified will be used Activation Time
560. to 5 parameters P1 P5 CALL Operation Each time the CALL statement executes control is transferred to the subroutine specified in SFSub Parameters entered in P1 P10 are read by the specified subroutine The state ments within SFSub are executed and the parameters entered in P1 P10 that are modified by SFSub are updated Control is then transferred back to the SF program that called the subroutine 543 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Call Subroutine CALL e P1 P10 are optional fields and can be left blank Up to five parameters may be en tered in these fields If less than five parameters are entered they must be entered in order that is do not skip P fields when entering parameters e To enter a real value instead of an integer place a period after the variable V100 To specify a long 32 bit signed integer place an L after the variable PowerMath CPUs only To specify an unsigned 16 bit integer place a U after the variable PowerMath CPUs only NOTE Specifying a real data type for a parameter in the CALL state ment will instruct the controller to ignore the parametet s data type as specified in the SF subroutine and use the pa rameter as a real number Conversely specifying a real data type for a parameter in the subroutine will instruct the con troller to ignore the parameter s data type specified as specified in the CALL statement and use the parameter as a real number
561. to open the FTVersionTrak application outside of WorkShop Yes if you are using FT VersionTrak for the first time and need to Get the latest version of a WorkShop file from the FTVersionTrak repository Also to set up security rights and audit logs you or your administrator need to do so from within the FTVersionTrak ap plication see the FT VersionTrak manual for more information You can launch FTVersionTrak from within WorkShop by clicking the ol icon in the FTVersionTrak tool bar Do I need to check out the program file to open the program There is no need to check out the file to simply view the programin WorkShop However the program file must be checked out to youifyou plan on making any changes to the program How do I make sure I m working on the latest version of a program Once the file has been checked in you can get the latest version of a program when you open the program in WorkShop You can also get the latest version of any specific program manually by clicking the By icon in the FTVersionTrak toolbar Tips and Strategies for Team Programming When working in a team environment creating a strategy that every team member is com fortable with is necessary to produce the most effective results For successful team programming use these example strategies along with the steps outlined in Getting Started with FTVersionTrakto develop your own team s version control strategies Advantages and 139 PLC WorkSh
562. trol returns to the statement in the SF program following the SF subroutine call If you use the EXIT statement in conjunction with an IF statement you can terminate the program under specific conditions e Leaving the Errcode blank writes the current error code to the ERROR STATUS ADDRESS that you specify in the SF program header If this address is a discrete point it turns on e You can define an error condition and assign it an error code 200 255 codes 0 199 are reserved When the EXIT statement executes the program terminates and this error code is written to the ERROR STATUS ADDRESS If this address is a discrete point it turns on 548 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Fall Through Shift Register Input FTSR IN Fall Through Shift Register Input FTSR IN The Fall Through Shift Register Input statement operates an asynchronous shift register The shift register is essentially a table of 16 bit words The FTSR IN moves a word into the shift register each time the statement executes The FTSR IN is used in conjunction with the Fall Through Shift Register Output statement FTSR OUT that moves words out of the shift register FTSR IN Input Register Start Register Length Status Bit Cancel Help e Input the input address from which the words are moved Valid field descriptors are integer addresses addresses containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 o
563. truction to be executed e When the Enable turns on each bit of the source word WS and of the specified word in the table TS is compared The index IN indicates which word in the table is Ored The value contained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 where N is the length of the table If 0 lt IN lt N the word is Ored IF N lt IN or N lt 0 the wotd in not Ored e Each pair of bits is Ored and the resultant bit is placed in the destination table TD If either bit is 1 then the resultant bit is set to 1 Otherwise the resultant bit is set to 0 After a word in the table is compared the value contained by the index is incremented by one e If both Enable and Reset remain on the source word and a word in the table are Ored each scan e Ifthe Enable turns off while the Reset is on the index holds its cutrent value and the OR does not occur e Ifthe Reset turns off the index reset to 0 505 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions e The WITO output remains on until the last word in the table has been Ored with the source word It then turns off e The WITO must be reset after the output turns off in order to be executed again WTTO Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant WS Word Address TS Word Address TD Word Address IN Word Address N Constant Only Word to Table Exclusive Or WTTXO The Word to Table Exclusive OR WTTXO instruct
564. ts Data start addr Figure 15 Example of PACKing Multiple Blocks of Bits From a Table Words are read sequentially from the table as illustrated below You can also PACK mul tiple blocks of words To from table Table address V100 Number of point Data start addr WX77 Number of points Data start addr V992 Word image register cd bs 3H ror 7 0 0 0 Hd 0 0 H 1 0 toote 0 0 n V103 HE HH i i V Memory v104 Lil 111 1 1 1 1 TTL TTA TA TITO V993 L j 1 1 1111111 Figure 16 Example of PACKing Words From a Table You can PACK blocks of words and blocks of bits from a table with one PACK statement All discrete points designated in the Number of Points field are packed from the table Words ate packed from the first available word in the table Unused bits in the previous word of the table are not included as part of a word that is PACKed from the table 576 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Pack Data PACK TO FROM To from table Number of points Number of points Number of points Number of points Bit CCCCCCC 5 6 7 8 91011 Image Register Word image register NU J TN E Table addr Data start addr Data start addr Data start addr E Data start addr Figure 17 Example of PACKing Bits and Words From a Table 577 PLC Wor
565. tting or the original factory setting if Save as Defs has not been used 9 Click OK when you are finished making your selections or click Save as Defs to save the new settings as defaults These new settings will be used for every new pro gram created Or click Cancel to disregard changes to the settings and return to the active window 147 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 4 WorkShop Setup Application Setup Application Setup Application Setup contains options that are saved throughout the PLC WorkShop ap plication regardless of the loaded program To access Application Setup 1 Click Application Setup from the Options menu The Application Setup dialog box appeats Application Setup xa Number of Backup Files Saved Always Show Logic Toolbars Automatically insert empty rung after validate Force File Associated Communications Settings FT ersionT rak Options Ask to Check In File After Save List Files Checked Out on This Computer at Startup Cancel 2 Select the options that will be consistent throughout the WorkShop application Number of Backup Files Saved This option designates the maximum number of backup files maintained for each WorkShop program file The value may be any number between 0 and 999 The default value is 5 When this option contains a number greater than zero a backup file is created each time a WorkShop program file is saved The backup file is nam
566. u can use the previously saved communication method or select a new communication method by clicking the Setup button If you select Connect to PLC you can check other options such as e Use File Associated Connection Settings If connection settings have been saved with the program file selecting this check box will automatically set up com munication settings associated with the file 67 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics Logic Programs e Transfer Logic to PLC Transfers all blocks and data areas to the PLC and loads documentation NOTE To avoid overwriting the online ladder with the version stored on file and associating documentation with the online lad der do not select Transfer Logic to PLC e Read All NOPs Reads 30 consecutive NOP instructions and assumes the end of program logic This can substantially increase the time to connect online to a 520 525 530 535 560 or 565 controller when selected NOTE If you select Read All NOPS and have more than 30 NOP instructions separating user logic all logic past the 30 NOPS will not be read 10 Click OK or press ENTER to open your program NOTE If your controller is a 575 refer to Connecting Online to a 575 for information on selecting Application ID and con figuring ports Address Network Mode 11 Ifthere is no file transferred online when the program first opens then the ladder rungs are referenced in the old TISOFT Address M
567. uation Entered as an A B format using the operators below The As signment Operator is required Valid descriptors for A are writeable integer addresses writeable addresses containing an integer value such as V101 or WY11 writeable real addresses writeable addresses containing a real value such as V120 and writeable bit of word addresses Valid descriptors for B are integer addresses or values any integer value or address containing an integer value such as V100 V100 2 or WX77 or real addresses or values any real value or address containing a real value such as 33 642 V100 2 or V120 and bit of word addresses or values MATH Operation The MATH format is based on the following operatots Exponentiation Multiplication Subtraction Unary Minus negation 566 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Real Integer Math MATH a USS Shift right arithmetic The sign bit is shifted into the va cated bits Shift left arithmetic Zeros ate shifted into the vacated bits Equal The expression X Y returns 1 if X equals Y and zeto if not Not equal The expression X lt gt Y returns 1 if X is not equal to Y and zero if so Less than The expression X lt Y returns 1 if X is less than Y and zero otherwise Less Than or Equal The expression X lt Y returns 1 1f X is less than or equal to Y and zero otherwise Greater Than The expression X gt
568. ue non zero the Condition state ment is evaluated If this value is true program execution advances to the first instruction after the FOR statement If this value is false program execution advances to the first in struction after the NEXT statement The NEXT statement adds the value of the Increment to the Counter Address and stores the value back to the Counter Address It then unconditionally jumps back to the cor responding FOR NOTE If a GOTO instruction is used to jump outside the loop the Counter Address will reinitialize upon reentry FOR loops may be nested four levels deep for a maximum of five lev els This instruction is compatible with CTI 2500 Series controllers only Attempting to run a program with this instruction on a Simatic 505 series controller will result in the CPU ceasing operation and entering a fatal error state If this occurs Auxiliary Function AUX 29 PLC Operational Status will report error code 020C Invalid Control Block Upon encountering this error condition it will be necessary to disconnect the battery and re cycle power to the CPU To prevent this error do not attempt to load a program containing this or other instructions designed to only be compatible with the CTI 2500 Series controller into a Simatic 505 series controller 556 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 11 Special Functions Go To Label GOTO LABEL Go To Label GOTO LABEL The GOTO statement conti
569. ue in the image register table is not updated D Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Normally Closed Immediate Contact When the discrete point of an I O module of a Normally Closed Immediate contact is ON the contact is open and does not pass power When the referenced address is OFF the Nor mally Closed Immediate contact is closed and passes power Al HH NOTE Only the power flow for an immediate X contact is updated The value in the image register table is not updated EE Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Logical Not Contact NOT The NOT instruction inverts the power flow to the state opposite its current state The NOT instruction does not have any parameters NOT 422 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Relay Instructions a Warning Do not program a NOT in parallel with any network that does not connect to the power rail One Shot Contact OS The One Shot instruction turns on an output for a single scan The single parameter in the instruction contains the instruction reference number When the input transitions from OFF to ON the output is turned on for exactly one scan After the One Shot is executed its input must be off for at least one scan before the in struction can be executed again If the input is OFF the instruction is not executed and there is no power flow at the output NOTE Do not assign the same reference number more than once fo
570. ur processor while online To display the processor faults 1 Click Faults from the Diagnostics menu 2 The online Faults are displayed Faults Ladder Errors Non Fatal Error No Errors User Error Cause No user error cause SF Processor Errors Fatal Error No Errors X Nor fatal Error y ALL Subroutine Stack Overflow Cyclic ALL Task Overrun Subroutine Number 0 Task 1 Status good Task 2 Status good Ladder Mode Program Close 304 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 6 Programming CTI 2500 Error Codes CTI 2500 Error Codes Startup Errors These errors may be encountered during a power on start and will be displayed on the Multi Segment Display MSD Error Description Corrective Action Number E01 Indicates a Cycle power If the problem persists E20 problem in contact CTI Product Support itializing hardware ot softwate E81 Missing or These errors will occur if you remove E99 corrupted ap power from the controller during a plication firmware update before the new firm firmware ware has been completely written to flash To correct this problem reload the application firmware See the CIT 2500 Installation and Operation Guide fot instructions Fatal Error Codes When a fatal error occurs FE will be displayed on the MSD WorkShop displays these codes when you select the Diagnostics Faults menu item 305 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 5
571. us Configurator proceed as follows 1 Fully configure both master systems This results in a target rotation time Ttr for each master system Ttr1 Calculated by the Profibus Configurator Ttr2 Calculated by another software tool The sum of the two target rotation times is the final target rotation time 2 Go to the Bus Parameters tab 3 Note the target rotation time Ttr calculated by the Profibus Configurator 4 Enter the sum of Ttr1 and Ttr2 in the Delta Ttr parameter field 5 When you click the Calculate the configurator calculates the new target rotation time Ttr in bit time t_bit units 6 In the non 505 master system add the target rotation time Ttr1 noted under step 3 to the target rotation time Ttr2 of the non 505 master system Limited Editing Mode A situation may occur in which the Profibus configuration exists with the WorkShop pto gram but the associated device master files GSD are either not present in the localHardware Directoryor not an exact match with the GSD parameter data within the Hardware Directory The most likely scenarios in which this situation is present include the following The configuration data was merged from COM Profibus and the associated GSD s were not added to or ate different than those in the Hardware Directory An online attach to the controller was executed without loading a program file 223 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp
572. use or does use the Software in any way beyond the scope of this Agreement c Licensee agrees not to modify the Software and not to disassemble decompile or otherwise reverse engineer of the Software d Licensee agrees to either destroy or return the original and all existing copies of the Software to Licensor within five 5 days after receiving notice of Licensor s termination of this Agreement e Licensee agrees not to disclose the Software or Documentation or any part thereof or any information relating thereto to any other party it being understood that the same contains and or represents confidential information which is proprietary to Licensor 3 OWNERSHIP OF SOFTWARE Licensee shall be deemed to own only the magnetic or other physical media on which the copy of the Software provided to Licensee is originally or subsequently recorded or fixed as well as any boards key locks or cables provided for use with the Software butan express condition of this Agreement is that Licensor shall at all times retain ownership of the Software recorded on the original diskette copy and all subsequent copies of the Software regardless of the form or media in or on which the original or other copies may initially or subsequently exist This Agreement does not constitute a sale of any copy of the Software to Licensee 4 POSSESSION AND COPYING Licensee agrees that the Software will only be displayed or read into or used on one 1 computer at a time
573. usive Or WXOR The Word Exclusive OR WXOR instruction Exclusive ORs a word in memory location A with a word in memory location B bit for bit The result is stored in memory location C When the input is on the instruction is executed If the input remains on the instruction is executed on evety scan The WXOR has the following properties e The word stored in the memory location specified by A is XORed with the word stored in the memory location B The operation is done bit by bit The words in A and B are not affected by the WXOR instruction and will retain their original values 487 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Math and Logic Instructions e The result is stored in the memory location C e If C is not zero the output is turned on when the instruction is executed If C is zero the output is turned off Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Constant 0 32767 B Word Address Address FomA A e Constant D Constant 32767 32767 Wod 00000 FomB B 488 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions Move Instructions Move Image Register From Table MIRFT The Move Image Register From Table MIRFT instruction allows you to copy in formation into the control relays or the discrete image register from a table of consecutive wotd locations When the input is on the MIRFT instruction is executed The operation
574. ut the MegaEDRUM supports more steps and coils The MegaEDRUM supports up to 128 coils horizontally and 128 steps vertically The EDRUM instruction is limited to 15 coils horizontally and 16 steps vertically While the EDRUM instruction is displayed in the ladder as a large box instruction with a 15 x 16 matrix of coils and steps space limitations of ladder logic networks prevent de picting the MegaEDRUM instruction as a 128 x 128 matrix Therefore the MegaEDRUM box instruction displays only the first address of several ranges of consecutive addresses 442 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Timers Counters and Drums Varies with Instruction reference number Refer to configured the controller s user manual for the memory number supported The assigned instruction number must conform to the requirements of drum memory This number provides access to the DCC Drum Count Current DSC Drum Step Current and DSP Drum Step Preset va tiables PRESET 1 128 ener to which the drum returns when ener SEC CNT 0 32 767 Time base Amount of time in seconds for one count For example if SEC CNT 1 5 and the COUNT for a step 4 the MegaEDRUM dwells on that step for 6 seconds 1 5 x 4 6 COIL Y WYx x The first of several consecutive addresses C and Vx x that are used as output coils The total bitaddress number of required consecutive ad types dresses is specified by the COIL COUN
575. utput from the instruction is examined to determine sub sequent actions If the instruction is not currently executing the instruction is placed in one of the SFSUB queues for execution There ate two SFSUB execution queues one to handle SFSUB 0 in structions see below and the other to handle all other SFSUB instructions If the subroutine number is 0 only the instruction parameters P n are evaluated this is known as an SFSUB 0 You can use an SFSUB 0 to execute expressions defined in the in struction parameters without calling an actual Special Function subroutine or program When an SFSUB 0 instruction is pulled off from its execution queue the instruction pa rameters are evaluated and the instruction output is turned on When SFSUB instructions are pulled off from the other execution queue the instruction parameters are evaluated statements in the corresponding Special Function subroutine are executed and the in struction output is turned on The programming device may limit the length of the expression that can be placed into the P n fields Multiple SFSUB instructions with the same value of Program Number can be used in your program since your application may require multiple accesses to the same Spe cial Function subroutine but with different parameters for each access With Simatic 505 controllers up to five parameters may be specified per SFSUB For CTI 2500 Series controllers 10 parameters may be specified Upon initial
576. utput remains on until the last word in the table has been Ored with the soutce word It then turns off e The WITXO must be reset after the output turns off in order to be executed again WTTXO Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Constant WS Word Address TS Word Address TD Word Address Word Address Constant Only 507 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Control Instructions Control Instructions Special Function Program Call SFPGM The Special Function Program Call SFPGM instruction is used to call a SF program for ex ecution The SFPGM instruction can be used anywhere within the RLL program that a box in struction can be used When a priority non priority or cycle SF program is called by the SFPGM instruction the SF program is placed in a queue for execution Up to 32 SF pro grams of each type total 96 in 3 queues can be queued at a given time If a queue is full the request for placement in the queue is made again on the next scan This continues as long as the input to the RLL SFPGM instruction remains on Priority Non Priority SF Programs When power flow to the RLL SFPGM instruction tran sitions from off to on the output from the instruction is examined If the output is off and the SF program is not currently being executed the SF program is placed in the queue for execution The SFPGM instruction has the following features e After the SF progr
577. vative Safe Output use Previous Previous Output 0 32000 Output High Stop 0 8 of PV PV range engineering units range Low Stop 0 2 of PV PV range engineering units range Largest Gain 8000000 0 real Smallest Gain 0 0000008 real Largest Reset 8000000 0 real minutes Smallest Reset 0 0000008 real minutes Largest Rate 8000000 0 real minutes Smallest Rate 0 0000008 real minutes 413 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 9 PID Loops SmarTune Automatic Loop Tuning Slice Calculation 0 not configured here 1 255 ms Time Slice Max Time Max Time is a time in minutes When a SmarTune session is started a timer is set to this value If that timer expires before the session has completed the session is aborted with an error Noise Band When electrical signals are converted to values they vary randomly by insignificant amounts An insignificant amount is application dependent Noise Band gives a value in en gineering units denoting the boundary between a significant and an insignificant change If a PV value differs from a prior value by a Noise Band or greater amount then a PV change has occurred Otherwise the PV is considered unchanged An incorrect Noise Band setting could cause some errors and warnings A correct setting may be calculated from hardware specifications or determined by experiment and observation or both Step Change SmarTune works best with a PV change of about 7 Changing
578. vider s Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Indexing Service Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Internet Publishing Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAP Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SOL Server Microsoft OLE DB Simple Provider Microsoft Project 9 0 OLE DB Provider MSDataShape OLE DB Provider for Microsoft Directory Services SQL Native Client OK Cancel Help OK cm He This dialog is the first in a series of tabbed dialogs which help the users create the nec essary string of the local security log file Follow the prompts to create the connection string to the database Security Administration Introduction to FasTrak Authentication Security Configuration Security administrators control the password security feature of WorkShop using the FasT rak Authentication Security Configuration dialog 628 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security FasTrak Authentication Security FasTrak Authentication Security Configuration Enable Security Audit etu User Security Settings Request user password User Name Jet At each security control point C Once at startu Enter pe V Retain existing E password Require passwords change every days Security Administrator Inactive passwords time out after o mins Online Privileges Offline Privileges User List Ed
579. vr Properties MULTI OS Administrator Po The System ccount services only ok mem o om 6 Browse and select the Administrator Click OK to return to the main dialog 7 Finally click the Default Properties tab and choose Connect for Default Au thentication and Impersonate for Default Impersonation 646 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 13 FasTrak Authentication and NT Security NT Authentication Security Server Distributed COM Configuration Properties Applications Default Properties Default Security Default Protocols v Enable Distributed COM on this computer Enable COM Internet Services on this computer Default Distributed COM communication properties The Authentication Level specifies security at the packet level Default Authentication Level Connect Me The Impersonation Level specifies whether applications can determine who is calling them and whether the application can do operations using the client s identity Default Impersonation Level Impersonate Provide additional security for reference tracking Cancel Apply 8 Ifthe server is on a remote machine then for the client step 7 from above needs only be repeated Configuring DCOM for Windows XP Configuring DCOM under Windows XP begins with launching the application dcomenfg exe from a DOS prompt or the Run dialog just as in the previous instructions The fo
580. ween the SKP and its LBL do not run Be careful when using timer and drum in structions if you want them to operate while a SKP is active os Parameter Type Valid Parameter Types Reference Number Number Constant 1 ae el Label LBL The SKP and LBL instructions provide a means of enabling or disabling program segments during a scan These instructions are often used when duplication of outputs is required and those outputs are controlled by different logic These instructions can be used to de crease scan time since the interactions between any active SKP and LBL instructions are not executed The SKP and LBL support the following features e The SKP and LBL instruction must be used together The LBL must appear be fore the instruction that terminates the current program segment TASK END RTN A SKP without a LBL generates a compile error e Ifyou use RLL subroutines you can use up to 255 SKP LBL instructions within each subroutine and up to 255 SKP LBL instructions for each TASK segment in the program e The reference numbers for the SKP LBL instruction range from 1 to 255 and numbers cannot be duplicated within a given subroutine or TASK segment e The subroutine set distance from the main RLL program and reference numbers used in the subroutine can also be used in the main program That is SKP23 is the main program and does not interfere with a SKP23 in the subroutine e When the SKP receiver power flow all l
581. wing properties The Reset must be turned off to initialize the index setting it to 1 The Reset must then be turned on before the STFN can operate When the Enable turns on the index is incremented by one and specifies the next wotd in the table to be compared with the source word The value contained by the index ranges from 0 to N 1 while the STEN is being executed N is the length of the table Thesource words WS and the wordin the table TS specified by the index are com pared If the two words are not equal the STFN output turns on for one scan then turns off The value of the non matching word is copied into another memory location specified by WO The index contains the position of the non matching word in the table for the duration of the scan The contents of the index must be used or saved during the scan since the SREN looks for the next match on the next scan as long as the Enable and Reset remains on If the two wotds are equal the index is incremented by one and the next word in the table is compared to the source word If no mismatches are found in the table the output remains off The index con tains the position of the last wotd in the table 498 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 10 RLL Instructions Move Instructions e The entire table is searched during one scan until mismatch or no mismatch is found e Ifthe Enable turns off while the Reset is on the index holds its current value If the Res
582. ws NT 3 1 or later Windows 2000 Windows XP or Windows Vista The following hardware requirements are recommended e A personal computer with an Intel Pentium 100 processor or higher e 32 MB or mote of RAM e An 800 X 600 VGA monitor with at least 256 colors e 100 MB free disk space on your hard drive Both the FasTrak Security Server FTSecSvr exe and the FasTrak Security Con figurator FTSecCfg exe must be installed and configured prior to activating and utilizing these features The Security Server application FTSecSvr EXE handles all client requests to access se cured FasTrak features The server grants or denies access to a feature request depending on the configuration provided by FTSecCfg When security is enabled for FasTrak ap plications all secure features are unaccessible unless security is configured via FTSecCfg and the security server is running All NT auditing including security and application audits are handled by the server Security audits are configured in FTSecCfg and application au dits are configured in the FasTrak applications that support security The following breakdown of steps will aid the user as they go through the installation con figuration and use of these parts as found in this help manual They are 1 Installation The procedure for installing both the Security Server and Configurator on local and remote machines the Sever must be installed regardless of operating system and whether it i
583. x H in the 505 Programming Reference manual the controller enters the Fatal Error mode freezes analog out puts and clears discrete outputs Use the XSUB or MOVE instruction to access the VME address 185 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 5 PLC Memory amp I O Configuration I O Configuration I O Configuration Controller Functionality in Configuration Keep in mind that while you can configure I O either online with the controller or off line programming device only functional differences exist between the two modes When online you can perform those functions that require interfacing with the controller For instance you must be online to write your I O configuration to the controller or to read the configuration of a base from the base itself Configurations saved offline go to the selected program on disk I O Configuration Guidelines Before entering your I O configuration be sure that the I O points you select conform to the following guidelines e The number for the I O address must begin on an 8 point boundary An 8 point boundary is n 8 1 e g 1 9 17 etc Addresses not starting on an 8 point boundary are changed to do so when you write the values e Refer to the I O module manual for the number of bit and or word I O points re quired for each module Valid entries for modules with more than 8 points are even numbers from 2 through 28 32 and 64 e Locations assigned to an I O module c
584. x and save the file to another file name e Click Yes to display the Check Out dialog box Once the file has been checked out Workshop prompts the user to check the file back in to the repository 505 WorkShop File has been saved Checkin Suggested CAFT ersionTrak 505 wWorkShopMest FSS Would you like to check in this file e Click No to close the program without writing any changes to the repository The file is still checked out to the user e Click Yes to write changes to the repository and close the program Operation Modes in FTVersionTrak There ate three distinct modes in which WorkShop can operate in regards to the FTVer sionTrak functionality 136 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics WorkShop and FTVersionTrak Not Tracked The file is not tracked by an FTVersionTrak repository Connected The file is tracked by an FT VersionTrak repository and a con nection to the repository is maintained by WorkShop Disconnected The file is tracked by an FTVersionTrak repository but the con nection is unavailable Following is a table that lists the available functions in the FTVersionTrak toolbar based on the operation mode of an active WorkShop file Deme e D eem EC wmm E E E E T p ewm pe 1 Electronically Electronically Sign Launch sion Trak Disconnected files can still be checked out to a user and edit
585. y incorporating one time server based security configuration complete administrator control of all editing save and load functions doc umentation program setup and auditing of all user operations Technical Specifications PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 supports PLC Compatibility Supports the entire line of Siemens Simatic TI PLCs including 500 SERIES 520 1101 520C 1101 1102 525 1102 1104 530 1102 1004 1008 530C T 1104 1108 1112 535 1104 1108 1112 560 2120 565 2120 239 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Chapter 1 Welcome What is PLC WorkShop e 560T 2820 e 565 T 2820 505 SERIES e 545 1101 1106 e 555 1101 1106 e 575 2102 2106 SUPPORTS THE ENTIRE LINE OF CTI 2500 PLCs e CTI 2500 Series 2500 C100 C200 C300 C400 WINDOWS COMPATIBILITY e Designed and tested under Windows 95 98 Millennium NT 2000 XP Vista and Windows 7 COMMUNICATIONS SUPPORT e Supports all methods of communications including Serial with modem support COM1 COM4 TCP IP H1 FMS and Serial TIWAY TISOFT CONVERSION e To ease your transition from TISOFT TISOFT files can be loaded and familiar TI SOFT hot keys and mnemonics can be used SOFTSHOP CONVERSION e To ease your transition from SoftShop SoftShop files can be loaded and used COM PROFIBUS CONVERSION e To ease your transition from COM Profibus COM Profibus configuration files can be merged into your I O configuration 33 PLC WorkShop f
586. ys oco i e ho otro eR d lo a estes 35 To obtain the Key Update Code by emailioooooococoocococcoccccococcccoccnconos 35 To obtain the Key Update Code by telephone 2 2 2 2 22 36 System Reguirem nts AA o tr a ate UE ca net ERE 37 Hardware Reqnitementss uiuos cea eec ss rt ee aA Rp a ci Laden eh 37 Ars NS A e nace E 38 Chapter 2 Inistalladion 222325220 oes sess AI AE 39 1stalliho the Software A bc te ek E ese SELL uM UE 41 Access o MES 42 Ig Irak E ee eee nd AR eRe ox Heu Ricco nai Uc ater eua CER cee aera ek EIS ALL Eid 44 Attaching the Fas Trak K EY uinea RAAIedecRRR 44 Tioubleshootitigthe Pas Lal NY esegue et een ee lee adele 45 Communications Cables eccesso het hoic Ante dere Lose ICD IAE Ci EE tnr eun 49 Connect the Communications Cables cos oer iet 49 Cable Pin Outs for RS 232 C Ports 00 00 0 000000 c cece cece ccceccccccseeeees 49 PLC WorkShop for Siemens 505 Table of Contents Cable Pin Outs Tor RS 422 Port tot eco eat co not es 50 Pinet C onne eu ti is io 51 Chapter 3 PLC WorkShop Basics 53 a AAA a EL ELI LIS MM AER INO BERRA EE 55 cad o AAA A a E e a 56 Main Window TCR 97 EA O ee Me ot 51 Window e a o AAA ALL CLA M eA E E LL EE 57 Instruction Bates cic scio Ledetees te Ute a tec es Le LAO Uto ote sge0 58 Ret Ae etch TERR RE ed E An e Bane tes EADEM 59 Multiple Program Window si ttc e e mena tere ees 59 Status A O a 60 dl A A A EA ENT 60 Mai TOO Da da LEE 61 Logie Propri

505 PLC WorkShop User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents